2 in / 2 Out Entry into IDLH atmospheres during Emergency Operations Updated April 30, 2009

Table of Contents

1.0….……………………………………………………………….………………OSHA Respiratory Policy 2.0………………………………………………………………………… …..…….…2 in /2 out procedures 3.0……………………………………………………………………………….…Duties of the Safety Team

The following outline shall be adhered to as it relates to the OSHA respiratory safety act

Introduction

1.0 The United States Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s (OSHA) revised standard regarding respiratory protection states: Where an employer cannot identify or reasonably estimate the employee exposure to respiratory hazards in the work environment, the employer shall consider the atmosphere to be Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH).

1.1 When a fire progresses past the incipient stage, the fire area must be considered an IDLH atmosphere. Every member entering the IDLH must be equipped with personal protective equipment and a self-contained breathing apparatus. No member shall enter an IDLH atmosphere unless the member teams-up with at least one other member and remains within visual or voice contact with that team member. Portable radios or other electronic communication devices are not acceptable to replace visual or voice contact. At least one of the members of the team within the IDLH must have a radio and must be able to contact a radio equipped member of the safety team, in the absence of the Incident Commander, outside the IDLH atmosphere. The members of the Safety Team shall be available to assist the interior team(s) if the need arises.

1.2 If a known life hazard is found and immediate action could prevent the loss of life, appropriate action, (rescue activity) may be taken by an individual member, or members. This applies only for a known life hazard, not standard search activities. If such action is taken, the Incident Commander must be immediately notified and appropriate adjustments made. In all incidences of such individual action, the Incident Commander shall forward a report detailing the full particulars to the Chief of Operations. A thorough review of each of these incidents will be conducted.

Procedures

2.0 Absent the provisions identified above in 1.2, a Safety Team must be available at all times. The RIT engine will eventually serve as the safety team. Prior to the arrival of the RIT engine the following format in section 2.3 should be followed to establish the Safety Team.

2.1 The arrival of the second engine company at an incident, and the communication that takes place between this Company and the first engine Officer, shall serve as the event signifying that the safety team is in place. Preferably this communication will take place on the prescribed tactical radio channel, for fireground awareness.

2.2 Several possibilities exist immediately on arrival. They are dependant on unit staffing circumstances. Company Officers are expected to know the options and convey them to the personnel they are supervising, en-route to the alarm

2.3 There may be times when entry into an IDLH atmosphere is necessary prior to the arrival of the first two Engine Companies. The following protocols shall be shall be adhered to in these instances

2.3.1 One Engine Company or one Truck Company staffed with an Officer and 2 firefighters. Based on the Officer’s size up, the following options may be considered:

2.3.1.1 The Officer and one firefighter enter the IDLH for search with/without advancement of the hoseline or

2.3.1.2 Take a defensive position based on the conditions encountered.

2.3.2 One Engine Company staffed with an Officer and 3 Firefighters:

The driver of the Engine and the back-up firefighter function as the safety team.

2.3.3 An Engine and a Truck/Rescue Company on scene staffed with 1 Officer and 2 Firefighters:

The safety team consists of the outside member of the Truck, and the Engine Driver

2.3.5 Two Engines on the scene with minimum staffing:

The second arriving Engine Officer and Driver.

2.3.6 Two Engines and a Support Company:

The Officer of the second arriving engine company and the 2nd engine’s driver function as the safety team until ordered into operation by the Incident Commander, or relieved by the arrival of the RIT Company.

2.4 Designated members of the safety team can engage in their primary duties, while assuming the duties of the safety team.

3. Duties of the Safety Team

3.1 The safety team shall be positioned outside the the IDLH atmosphere and:

3.1.1 Monitor radio traffic for calls for assistance from members operating into an IDLH atmosphere, mayday, or urgent transmissions and transmissions from interior that are not being acknowledged

3.1.2 Be prepared to enter the IDLH atmosphere to render assistance if required

3.1.3 Be prepared to transmit information relevant to circumstances that arise if the interior team needs assistance.

ATMOSPHERIC METER BUMP TESTING AND CALIBRATION Standard Operating Procedures

June 16, 2010

Table of Contents 1.0…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…Purpose 2.0………………………………………………………. …………………………………………..…Responsibility 3.0…………..………………………………………………………………………………….…………Background 4.0………………………...…………………………………………………………….………………..…Procedure

1.0 PURPOSE

1.1 The purpose of this policy is to ensure the accuracy of our atmospheric metering equipment. It will enable the employees to identify hazardous atmospheres and ensure that unknown or suspicious atmospheres are safe.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITY

2.1 It shall be the responsibility of the company officer to see that the atmospheric meter assigned to their company are bump tested and/or calibrated every Saturday at a minimum.

2.2 All personnel shall be familiar with the equipment and testing procedures.

2.3 All personnel shall know and understand the principles and techniques for proper air monitoring.

3.0 BACKGROUND

3.1 Air monitors are an important line of defense for identifying IDLH atmospheres. The health and safety of our employees and the public we protect is dependant on accurate monitor readings and employees that can interpret those readings.

3.2 OSHA states that atmospheric monitors should be bump tested “prior to each use”. This test is used to verify the alarms work and the meter responds with a reading + or – 10% margin of error compared to the calibration gas tank specifications.

3.2.1 For example: If the calibration tank contains the following gas concentrations,

3.2.2 The margin of error of the readings should be within these ranges.

Oxygen 19%: between 17% - 21% Methane 50%: between 45% -55% Carbon Monoxide 100ppm: 90ppm – 110ppm

3.2.3 If the readings are within the above margin of error, then the meter passes the Bump Test.

3.3 American Scientific recommends that our monitors receive a full calibration at a maximum of every 30 days and every time it fails a bump test. We will “calibrate” our monitors the first Saturday of each month.

3.4 The results of the calibrations and bump tests will be recorded in the daily log. The log will provide information to indicate when sensors may be beginning to fail or if we need more frequent bump tests.

3.5 Supervisors at that station will review the log for compliance.

Note: Videos showing the operation and calibration are available on the “W: drive” in the Atmospheric Monitor folder.

4.0 PROCEDURE

4.1 Industrial Scientific CO 262 Gas Monitor:

4.1.1 Bump Test Sequence

4.1.1.1 Turn on the meter; wait approximately 60 seconds for the display to stabilize or until the display shows “000 ppm.”

4.1.1.2 Check that the calibration gas cylinder expiration date has not passed. Before attaching the regulator to the cylinder, open the on/off knob, and then after it is attached, turn it off until ready to use.

4.1.1.3 Slide the calibration cup over the unit, connect the calibration gas cylinder, and open the cylinder valve fully.

4.1.1.4 Flow the gas for a period of 2 minutes; record the readings for the CO sensor on the log. The alarm should sound at >35 ppm and continue until the reading is less than 35 ppm.

4.1.1.5 A successful Bump Test shall be within the following limit or margin of error as stamped on the cal gas cylinder, such as:

4.1.1.6 Carbon Monoxide 100 ppm: between 90 ppm—110 ppm

4.1.1.7 If the Bump Test fails, any internal parts, or the CO sensor is replaced, then refer to the calibration instructions and perform a full calibration.

4.1.2 Calibration Sequence

4.1.2.1 Prior to performing a calibration, for best accuracy, allow the monitor to stabilize to room temperature for 1 hour.

4.1.2.2 Turn the monitor on and allow it to run for several minutes; it must be properly set to “Zero.” 4.1.2.3 Zeroing must be done in clean ambient air (zero toxic or combustible gases with 21% oxygen.)

4.1.2.4 First, turn the Zero (Z) potentiometer counter clockwise until a “- 000” appears on the screen.

4.1.2.5 Next, turn the Zero (Z) potentiometer clockwise until the negative (-) indicator just goes off, leaving “000” on the display. Now the Zero is properly set.

4.1.2.6 Check the calibration gas cylinder to ensure that the cylinder contains the correct concentrations of gases: (19% 02, 50% Methane, and 100 ppm CO) and that the expiration date of the cylinder has not passed. Before attaching the regulator to the cylinder, open the on/off knob, and then after it is attached, turn it off until ready to use.

4.1.2.7 Slide the calibration cup over the unit, connect the calibration gas cylinder, and fully open the cylinder valve.

4.1.2.8 Allow the calibration gas to flow for 2 minutes with the gas still flowing; adjust the Span (S) potentiometer to match the display reading with the ppm of CO printed on the calibration gas cylinder being used.

4.1.2.9 If it is not possible to adjust the monitor with the Span (S) potentiometer turned fully clockwise, the reason may be due to a clogged screen item #26 or the sensor may need replacement.

4.2 LTX312 Gas Monitor:

4.2.1 Bump Test Sequence

4.2.1.1 Turn on the meter, zero the meter by pressing the “mode” key twice or until the display shows “Zero.”

4.2.1.2 Press the “E” key to begin zeroing. The screen will display “Zeroing.”

4.2.1.3 The screen will display a 3-digit number identified as “02 Span.” This is the span reading of the oxygen sensor. This number gives you the relative life of the oxygen sensor left. For example: a reading of 14.9 or greater would be acceptable, between 10.7 and 14.8 would be marginal, and under 10.7 would fail and require oxygen sensor replacement.

4.2.1.4 Check the calibration gas cylinder to ensure that he cylinder contains the correct concentrations of gases: (19% 02, 50% Methane, and 100 ppm CO) and that the expiration date of the cylinder has not passed. Before attaching the regulator to the cylinder, open the on/off valve, and then after it is attached, turn it off until ready to use. 4.2.1.5 After the meter displays the oxygen span reading, the instrument will display “Go Cal”. Press the “Mode” key to return to the “Reading” mode.

4.2.1.6 Slide the calibration cup over the unit, connect the calibration gas cylinder, and open the cylinder valve fully.

4.2.1.7 Flow the gas for a period of 1 minute; record the readings on the log for the Oxygen, LEL & CO sensors.

4.2.1.8 A successful Bump Test shall be within the following limits or margin of error as stamped on the calibration gas cylinder, such as:

Oxygen 19%: between 17%--21% Methane 50% LEL: between 45%--55% Carbon Monoxide 100 ppm: between 90 ppm—110 ppm

4.2.1.9 If the Bump Test fails, refer to the calibration instructions and perform a full calibration.

4.2.2 Calibration Sequence

4.2.2.1 Prior to starting the calibration process, the monitor must be “zeroed.”

4.2.2.2 Zeroing must be done in clean ambient air (zero toxic or combustible gases with 21% oxygen.)

4.2.2.3 From the “Reading” mode, press the “Mode” key twice or until the display shows the “Zero” mode.

4.2.2.4 Press the “E” key to begin zeroing. The display will show “Zeroing.”

4.2.2.5 The screen will display a 3-digit number identified as “02 Span.” This is the span reading of the oxygen sensor. This number gives you the relative life of the oxygen sensor left. For example: a reading of 14.9 or greater would be acceptable, between 10.7 and 14.8 would be marginal, and under 10.7 would fail and require oxygen sensor replacement.

4.2.2.6 After displaying the oxygen span reading the instrument will display “Go Cal.” If you are going to calibrate, press the “E” key. If not, press the “Mode” key to return to “Reading” mode.

4.2.2.7 The monitor will display the first sensor to be calibrated along with the span gas value of the calibration gas to be applied. The message “Apply Cal Gas” will scroll across the bottom of the display. Only the LEL and CO sensors will be calibrated.

4.2.2.8 Slide the calibration cup over the unit, connect the calibration gas cylinder, and open the cylinder valve fully. 4.2.2.9 When the instrument senses a concentration of gas, a message “Cal in Progress” will scroll across the bottom of the display.

4.2.2.10 When the calibration of the sensor has been successfully completed, the instrument will automatically advance to the next sensor to be calibrated.

4.2.2.11 When all sensors have been successfully calibrated, turn off the calibration gas and remove the calibration cup. The sensor configuration will be shown on the display. Sensor identifiers will flash to warn of any sensors with marginal set span values, indicating near end of life span.

4.2.2.12 After displaying the sensor configuration, the instrument will automatically return to the “Reading” mode.

4.2.2.13 Calibration is now complete. Disconnect the regulator from the calibration gas cylinder.

4.2.2.14 After displaying the oxygen span reading the instrument will display “Go Cal.” If you are going to calibrate, press the “E” key. If not, press the “Mode” key to return to “Reading” mode.

Fire Department Uniforms

Administrative Policy Updated August 1, 2009

Table of Contents

1…………………….………………………………………………………………………….……..Introduction 2.……………………...…………………………………………………………………Uniform Classifications 3…………………………………………………………………………………………...…….Class A Uniform 4.…………………….……………………………………………………...... Class B – Duty Uniform 5……………………..……………………………………………………….....Class C – Daily Work Uniform 6……………………..…………………………………………………………..…Class D – Exercise Uniform 7……………………..………………………………………………………………Seasonal Uniform Options 8……………………………………………………………………….Uniform Requirements at Employment 9……………………...………………………………………………………………Uniforms Provided at Hire 10…………………….………………………………………..…Uniform Changes for Promoted Employees

Introduction

1.0 It is the intent of the Fire Administration that the members of the department wear a uniform while on duty and wear it in such a fashion as to bring credit to the community. The uniform allows people to know what organization you represent. It gives them insight as to what your status is in that organization. White shirt versus blue, silver badge versus gold, arm patches, or perhaps, different color helmets. All are indicative of whom/what you represent. Individuals that achieve the privilege of donning a Clinton Township Firefighter's uniform and pin on the breast badge, should keep in mind the service and the community they are representing.

1.1 The uniform shall be worn with a sense of pride and professionalism. Every member is responsible to see that they adhere to this policy. Because individuals wearing Fire Department uniforms are considered members of the department and/or represent the department to the public in an official capacity, the uniforms (or parts thereof) referred to in this policy are not to be worn by anyone for any purpose other than official Clinton Township Department of Fire- Rescue-EMS business without the expressed consent of the Fire Administration.

Uniform Classifications

2.0 Uniforms ...worn shall be of Class A, Class B, Class C or Class D. The type worn at any given time shall be dependent upon requirements set forth by the fire department administration and existing labor agreements. Uniforms shall be kept clean and properly maintained. Shirts, pants, jackets shall be replaced on a timely basis. If a piece of attire starts to show wear, for instance; discoloration, worn elbows, fading, stains, etc., that part of the uniform shall be replaced. Poor fit will also be cause for replacing the uniform.

Class A Uniform

3.0 CLASS A- DRESS UNIFORM - Dress Uniform Components of the Class A uniform follow. The uniform shall be worn at events and in the workplace as ordered by the fire department.

3.1 Dress Coat

3.1.1 Dress coat...14 oz. weight, 55% dacron 45% wool serge (Raeford material). Police and Fire blue (navy blue), double breasted.

3.1.2 Coat buttons - eight on front in two rows, four to button; silver or gold, as appropriate to rank. The buttons are marked “FD” for the rank of firefighter. The proper bugle display will be present to correspond to present rank.

3.1.21 Firefighter “FD” 3.1.22 Lieutenant 1 bugle 3.1.23 Captain 2 parallel bugles 3.1.24 Battalion and Training Chiefs, Fire Marshal 2 crossed bugles 3.1.25 Deputy Chief 4 crossed bugles 3.1.26 Chief of Department 5 crossed bugles

3.1.3 Sleeve buttons - three buttons each sleeve. The first button on sleeve is to be centered 1 inch up from sleeve edge; each button thereafter to be 3/4 inch center to center of the preceding button. Buttons are to be gold for Chief, Deputy Chief, Battalion Chief, Training Chief and Fire Marshal; silver for Firefighter, Lieutenant, Captain, Training Officer, EMS Officer and Inspectors.

3.1.4 Badge tab - metal type or fabric type with metal grommets over left breast.

3.1.5 Arm Patches...the Clinton Township Department of Fire/Rescue arm patches shall be worn on both arms of the Class “A” jacket. The patches shall be sewn on, one inch (1”) below the shoulder seam, center line of sleeve.

3.1.6 Stripes (Sleeve)… The Class A dress coat shall have sleeve markings indicative of the number of bugles worn for the rank. Each stripe shall be located on both sleeves, three-quarters (3/4) of an inch from the center of the top sleeve button to the bottom of the stripe and shall be half-round on each sleeve. Each additional stripe is to be one-half (1/2) inch apart.

Rank (stripes)...stripe designates rank as follows:

3.1.61 Chief…………………………………………………………..5 gold stripes 3.1.62 Deputy Chief……………………………...... 4 gold stripes 3.1.63 Battalion & Training Chief, Fire Marshal...... 2 gold stripes 3.1.64 Captain, Training & EMS Officer, Inspector……….....2 silver stripes 3.1.65 Lieutenant………….……………………..………………….1 silver stripe 3.1.66 Firefighter………………...... ….none

3.2 Service Stars...shall be worn on Class A uniform dress coats.

3.2.1 Each star shall represent five (5) years of fire service.

3.2.2 Star is to be centered on outside of left sleeve. The bottom of the first star is to be ¾ inches above the center of the top sleeve button, and horizontally ½ inch apart.

3.2.3 Officers…stars are to be spaced ½ inch above the top of the last strip to the bottom point of the star.

3.2.4 Color…Any Chief Officer rank and the rank of Fire Marshal shall have gold; silver shall be used for all other positions requiring stars.

3.3 Lapel Insignias…(Class “A” Coat) shall be silver or gold, appropriate to rank. Silver is to be of rhodium material, not nickel. To be worn on upper notch of lapel on dress uniform coat only. All lapel badges are 1 ¼” in diameter.

3.3.1 The Chief's gold lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with a cluster of five bugles on a plain background. (A2860)

3.3.2 The Deputy Chief's gold lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with a cluster of four bugles on a plain background. (A4279)

3.3.3 The Battalion Chief's gold lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with two crossed bugles on a plain background. (A2862)

3.3.4 The Training Chief's gold lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with two crossed bugles on a plain background. (A2862)

3.3.5 The Fire Marshal's gold lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with two crossed bugles on a plain background. (A2862)

3.3.6 The Captain's silver lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with two parallel bugles on a plain background. (A2866 Silver)

3.3.7 The Training and EMS Officer's silver lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with two parallel bugles on a plain background. (A2866 Silver)

3.3.8 The Fire Inspector's silver lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with two parallel bugles on a plain background. (A2866 Silver)

3.3.9 The Lieutenant's silver lapel badges shall be a round Blackinton style with one upright bugle on a plain background. (A2867 Silver)

3.4 Breast Badge...breast badges shall be silver or gold, appropriate to rank. Silver is to be of rhodium material, not nickel. It shall be worn over left breast of shirt or dress uniform coat. After September 1, 2008, any badges purchased by members will be the Blackinton B-38 model.

3.4.1 The inset of the gold breast badge for Chief shall consist of a cluster of five bugles on a white enamel background. (Blackinton A6965 center – white)

3.4.2 The inset of the gold breast badge for Deputy Chief shall consist of a cluster of four bugles on a red enamel background. (Blackinton A6969 – red)

3.4.3 Battalion Chief and Fire Marshal shall consist of two crossed bugles on a red enamel background. (Blackinton A6977 – red)

3.4.4 The inset of the gold breast badge for Training Chief shall consist of two crossed bugles on a blue enamel background. (Blackinton A6977 – blue)

3.4.5 The inset of the silver breast badge for Captain shall consist of two parallel bugles on a sunburst ray silver background. (Blackinton A3614 – Plain)

3.4.6 The inset of the silver breast badge for Training and EMS Officer shall consist of two parallel bugles on a blue enamel background. (Blackinton A6981 – blue)

3.4.7 The inset of the silver breast badge for Fire Inspector shall consist of two parallel bugles on a red enamel background. (Blackinton A6981 – red)

3.4.8 The inset of the silver breast badge for Lieutenant shall consist of a single bugle on a sunburst ray silver background. (Blackinton A3613 – Plain)

3.4.9 The inset of the breast and cap badge for Firefighter shall consist of a scrambled center, Blackinton catalog # A-2886.

3.5 Trousers...same material as dress coat (14 oz., 55% Dacron, 45% wool) Raeford blend. 3.5.1 Pockets - two rear; left pocket to have button closure. Two front, straight side style. Watch pocket on front right side

3.5.2 Zipper - fly zipper shall be metal.

3.5.3 Belt loops - shall be 3/4 inch in width with a 2 inch opening and sewn between the waistband and the lining at the top and bottom.

3.5.4 Pant legs - no cuffs. Pant legs shall be straight type. Pants shall not have visible top stitching on seams; top stitching is allowed at stress points, pocket corners, etc.

3.6 Shirts

3.6.1 Chief, Deputy Chief, Battalion Chief, Training Chief, Fire Marshal, Training Officer, EMS Officer and Inspector shirts shall consist of the white Flying Cross “Duro” style poplin with 50% polyester.

3.6.2 Company Officer and Firefighter shirts shall consist of the light blue Flying Cross “High Test” style poplin with 50% polyester. Epaulets and flap pockets are required. Short sleeve or long sleeve shirts, as desired, for appropriate season.

3.6.3 Two department patches will be worn that conform to 3.1.5.

3.7 Collar Insignias…shall be silver or gold, appropriate to rank; to be worn on the shirt collar. Note: Blackinton part numbers can be ordered in silver or gold finish.

3.7.1 Chief...shall wear a gold, ¾ inch circular “cut out” cluster of five crossed bugles. (Blackinton A2905)

3.7.2 Deputy Chief...shall wear a gold, ¾ inch circular “cut out” cluster of four crossed bugles. (Blackinton A2906)

3.7.3 Battalion Chief, Training Chief, Fire Marshal…shall wear two, gold, ¾ inch “cut out” with two crossed bugles. (Blackinton A2908)

3.7.4 Captain, Training & EMS Officer, Fire Inspector…shall wear two silver parallel bugles on a 15/16” round sunburst ray background. (Blackinton A3614 Silver)

3.7.5 Lieutenant…shall wear a one silver bugle on a 15/16” round sunburst ray background. (Blackinton A3613 Silver)

3.7.6 Firefighter…shall wear none

3.8 Caps…shall be appropriate to rank.

3.8.1 A Detroit style, white semi-pershing cap with a patent leather visor and black velvet sides shall be worn by Chief, Deputy Chiefs, Battalion Chiefs, Fire Marshal and the Training Chief.

3.8.2 A Detroit style, dark blue semi-pershing cap with a patent leather visor shall be worn by Captains, Lieutenants, Inspectors, Training and EMS Officer and Firefighters.

3.8.3 The hatbands shall be plain black for Firefighters, silver stretch-style for Lieutenant, Inspector, Training Officer, EMS Officer and Captain. The Fire Marshal and all Chief Officer ranks shall be gold.

3.9 Dress Cap Badge… Cap badges shall be silver or gold, appropriate to rank. Silver is to be of rhodium material, not nickel. All cap badges will be of the screw post type fasteners.

3.9.1 The Chief's gold cap badge shall be a round Blackinton style with a cluster of five crossed bugles on a white background.

3.9.2 The Deputy Chief's gold cap badge shall be a round Blackinton style with a cluster of four crossed bugles on a red background.

3.9.3 The Battalion Chief's gold cap badge shall be a round Blackinton style with two crossed bugles on a red background.

3.9.4 The Training Chief's gold cap badge shall be a round Blackinton style with two crossed bugles on a blue background.

3.9.5 The Fire Marshal's gold cap badge shall be a round Blackinton style with two crossed bugles on a red background.

3.9.6 The Captain's silver cap badge shall be a Maltese Cross Blackinton style with two parallel bugles on a silver sunburst background.

3.9.7 The Training and EMS Officer's silver cap badge shall be a Maltese Cross Blackinton style with two parallel bugles on a blue background.

3.9.8 The Fire Inspector's silver cap badge shall be a Maltese Cross Blackinton style with two parallel bugles on a red background.

3.9.9 The Lieutenant's silver cap badge shall be a Maltese Cross Blackinton style with one upright bugle on a silver sunburst background.

3.9.10 The Firefighter’s silver cap badge shall be a Maltese Cross Blackinton style scrambled center.

3.10 Hosiery...shall be solid black, solid navy blue or solid white.

3.11 Belts...shall be black, with basket weave design, 1-1/4 inch wide and a D-ring type silver buckle. (Buckle sometimes referred to as Garrison type). The belt is known as a standard firefighter's style belt.

3.12 Black tie…50% dacron and 50% cotton. The tie shall be 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inch in width, belt line length, always worn with Class “A” uniform. Worn with the Class “B” uniform, out of the office, from 1NOV - 31MAR.

3.12.1 Tie clasps are optional - but when worn, they are to be clasps that are fire department orientated, not too large or gaudy and conducive to the image of the uniform

3.12.2 Wearing ties may be required at the direction of any supervisor

3.13 Name Tags...shall be gold or silver, appropriate to rank.

Name tags shall be optional for firefighters.

3.13.1 The tag shall bear wearer's rank, first initial and full last name. (A full first and last name is acceptable, if there is space).

3.13.2 The name tag shall be worn above the right breast pocket on the uniform shirt, directly above and parallel to pocket flap seam; or, worn above the right breast area of the dress uniform blouse.

3.13.3 The name tag shall be Reeves style #500 (approximately 2-1/4" long by 1/2" wide), plain face, slightly rounded corners or Blackinton #A-2388.

3.13.4 The tag may bear the Staff of Life insignia for those with medical licensure.

3.14 Optional Badges...shall be only the following:

3.14.1 Small Red Cross pin (designating instructor or one gallon blood donor).

3.14.2 Union pins - the small Maltese Cross gold pin to designate membership.

3.14.3 E.M.T. - A.E.M.T. pins - if licensed and/or certified to wear same, however, only one pin is allowed. It is to be no larger than 3/4 inch in diameter, and shall be worn above right breast pocket (over name tag). Also see “I. Name Tags, 2”.

3.14.4 Department award medals - shall be worn over right breast on Class A uniform dress coat only.

3.15 Shoes...shall be black, plain toe oxfords or Wellington/Trooper style boots. They shall be laced over the arch (3-6 eyelets) or Wellington/Trooper style may be laced up or zipped. The shoes shall be kept polished. Vinyl or tennis shoes are unacceptable, except during the designated physical training period. Only leather or patent leather footwear is approved.

3.16 Under Garments...may be of any style, type or color desired by the employee providing it is not visible through, or outside, of the normally appropriate uniform clothing or turn-out gear, with the collar button open. When a tee shirt is desired the only option is white or navy blue.

CLASS B - DUTY UNIFORM

4.0 The Class B duty uniform is required to be worn as required therefore it should be available to wear each and every work day. Class B duty uniform shall consist of, items 3.4, 3.6, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13, 3.14, 3.15 and the following.

4.1 Trousers

4.1.1 Shall consist of navy blue Fechhiemer, Hercules, Perfection or Lions brand, wash and wear style trousers with no cuffs.

4.1.2 Personnel may opt to wear a “BDU” style trouser, Perfection brand BDU #1775 DN.

4.2 Sweaters

4.2.1 Class B only uniform style Pullover (V-Neck or crew neck) dark blue or black with epaulets and badge tab over left breast. 55% to 100% wool.

CLASS C – DAILY WORK UNIFORM

5.0 Class C work uniform, shall consist of items 3.9, 3.13, 4.1, optional baseball style cap, and the following shirt options.

5.1 Shirts

5.1.1 Shall consist of a navy blue (ash gray for Battalion Chief, Fire Marshal, Chief of Training and Fire Inspectors), embroidered # J760 or #J4500 National King Louie polo style shirt or a navy blue embroidered “Game/Work Wear,” Item #FMS, job shirt.

5.1.2 The shirts shall have an embroidered Maltese Cross over the left breast. The employee’s rank shall be located over the right breast in block or script lettering. Optionally, the Firefighter’s rank (abbreviated) along with an abbreviated medical rank may appear.

5.1.3 After normal business hours (16:30), weekends and holidays, the department’s approved Class D T-shirt may be worn.

5.2 Baseball Style Cap

The baseball cap shall consist only of a cap style and design mutually agreed upon by both the Fire Chief and the Union.

CLASS D – EXERCISE UNIFORM

6.0 Class D- Exercise Uniform shall consist of a navy blue T-shirt or sweatshirt, navy blue sweat shorts or pants, athletic shoes and appropriate hosiery. Exercise clothing will be navy blue with the approved CTFD logo and will be worn during designated exercise period only.

SEASONAL UNIFORM OPTIONS

7.0 Winter jackets...there are only four acceptable styles. A member may choose the type, however all winter jackets purchased after September 1, 2008, will be of the Blauer type listed as 7.0.4 under this heading.

7.0.1 Ultra (Fechhiemer style reference) - is waist length; has two breast pockets; and shall include rank appropriate items listed in 3.1.2, 3.1.3, 3.1.5, 3.1.6, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4.

7.0.3 Protector (Fechhiemer style reference) - is hip length; two slash pockets and two breast pockets with flaps; and shall include 3.1.2, 3.1.3, 3.1.5, 3.1.6, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, as listed above.

7.0.4 J.A. Rubin Brothers All Weather – include 3.1.5.

7.0.5 Blauer – navy blue, model 9910Z; waist length. Has two front pockets and detachable liner. Jacket shall include 3.1.5, 3.1.6, 3.4.

7.0.6 Jumpsuits...one piece coverall or jumpsuits, blue in color, are an option of the employee. They may be worn after 16:30 hours, Monday through Friday, or on weekends or holidays.

UNIFORM REQUIRED AT EMPLOYMENT

8.0 Before reporting for duty as a Clinton Township Fire Fighter, new personnel will are required to provide one Class “B” uniform, 3 sets of Class “C” uniforms, and a semi-pershing hat.

8.1 Uniform patches are available for purchase through the department. Prior to being sewn on they should be soaked overnight to prevent leaching.

UNIFORMS PROVIDED AFTER PROBATION

9.0 Upon successful completion of the probationary period (1 year), it is required that a new class A uniform be purchased by each department member. This uniform shall be purchased within 30 days upon completion of the probationary period.

9.1 The Fire Department will provide one breast badge and one class “D” uniform including a sweatshirt and sweatpants described in 6.0. The first six (6) arm patches for a probationary person shall be furnished by the Fire Department.

UNIFORM CHANGES FOR PROMOTED EMPLOYEES

10.0 Employees that are promoted will receive the following rank appropriate items 3.3, 3.4, 3.7, 3.8.3, 3.9, 3.13.

10.1 Promoted employees are responsible for the following changes to the classes of uniform upon promotion, 5.1.2, 3.1.2, 3.1.3.

Duty Injury Administrative Policy March 1st 2010

Table of Contents 1.0…………………………..………………………………………………………………….Introduction 2.0……..………………………..………………………………………...…Injury Reporting Documents 3.0…...……... ……………………………………………………………………..Authorizing Treatment 4.0………………………………………………………...... ……………. Duty status and follow-up care 5.0...……..……………………………………………………………….... Example of Completed Forms Introduction

1.0 Medical treatment for employees who suffer duty related illnesses or injuries are important to the Clinton Township Fire Department. With the interests of the employee in mind we hope to provide the best services available. The labor contract allows employees a choice of providers for initial assessment and treatment.

1.1 In the event an on duty employee suffers a life threatening emergency, the Macomb County Emergency Medical Protocols shall be followed and will supersede the requirements for authorization contained within.

1.2 Fire Department personnel may choose to access care at any of 4 facilities: 1.2.1 Henry Ford Health Center - 15717 15 Mile Rd, Clinton Township, MI. 48035 1.2.2 Concentra - 33089 Groesbeck Hwy., Fraser, MI. 48026 1.2.3 Henry Ford Hospital (Macomb) -15855 19 Mile Rd, Clinton Twp., MI 48038 1.2.4 Mount Clemens Regional Medical Center - 1000 Harrington Blvd., Mount Clemens, MI. 48043

1.3 Workplace injury classifications fall into 5 categories.

1.3.1 Category 1 injuries - are reported only and no treatment is sought.

• Complete fire department Employee Injury Report and NFIRS report.

1.3.2 Category 2 injuries - have been reported at an earlier date and treatment is now being sought at a later date.

• Complete secondary Employee Injury Report (see 3.1) authorizing treatment, and complete Supervisor’s Accident Report

1.3.3 Category 3 injuries: requires first aid that is provided in the workplace.

• Complete fire department Employee Injury Report, NFIRS report, and immediate supervisor will complete the Supervisor’s Report of Accident.

1.3.4 Category 4 injuries: requires treatment from a Township care provider.

• Complete Employee Injury Report, NFIRS report, appropriate Medical Authorization (see 5.0.2, 5.0.3, 5.0.4) for particular health care provider signed by the Battalion Commander, and the immediate supervisor will complete Supervisor’s Report of Accident.

1.3.5 Category 5 injuries: bio hazard exposures.

• Complete Employee Injury Report, NFIRS report, Medical Authorization for particular health care provider, Complete page 1 of Form DCH-1179(E) of 8/06, (see ex. 5.0.6) and immediate supervisor will complete Supervisor’s Report of Accident. For instructions on meeting the reporting requirements of Category 5 injuries refer to the Fire Department Exposure Control Plan, Appendage F-1, dated 23OCT09.

1.4 When an employee has been injured while at work and asks or needs to seek medical attention at a Township care provider, the Battalion Commander shall be notified. The Battalion will determine the most appropriate manner to move the member to the facility based on initial assessments and feedback from the Company Commander. They should exercise judgment in replacing the injured employee. A key factor in this judgment is the time an apparatus could be expected to be out of service while the member seeks treatment. When treatment is sought through a Township care provider the Battalion Commander will be present upon discharge, for the doctor to consult with, when the fit for duty status is prescribed. The Battalion will ensure the directions contained within this policy are complied with.

Completing Duty Injury Documents

2.1 The Company Log: A Fire Department employee has the responsibility to immediately report any and all personal injuries suffered in the workplace. Firefighters and officers should realize that the practice of producing a written record for even the most minor injury is in the best interest of an employee, and is a responsibility of supervisors. All reports of injury will be recorded in the company log and will include the time of the event, whether or not the injury was witnessed, referencing details of the activity the injured employee was engaged in, to include the specific circumstances and classification of injury. Supervisors should seek any witnessed accounts from other employees and provide a written accounting of the facts. If help is needed in classifying the type of injury, refer to tables in the NFIRS reporting system. Log entries pertaining to an injury suffered by a company officer will be made by the supervising Battalion Chief.

2.2 Employee Injury Report: For all five injury categories, whether treatment is sought or not, the Department’s Employee Injury Report, (see example 5.0.1), will be completed and submitted up the chain of command. Supervisors will ensure an Employee Injury Report, found in the forms folder on the W:Drive, is completed. The injured employee will provide the details of the injury in the space provided. This statement is to be penned in their hand. When the seriousness of the injury would prevent an employee from completing the details, the immediate supervisor will provide the specifics of the injury. The injury and accident report will be completed and delivered to the administrative secretary by end of duty day on which the injury occurred. All injury reports will be placed in a file in the Operations Chief’s office.

2.3 NFIRS Reports: Every employee injury must be reported in the NFIRS.

2.31 When the injury has resulted from work conducted during a fire department response, that particular incident report will be used, and the injury is to be reported in the Fire Service Casualty module.

2.32 Injuries that occur during any other part of the duty day will also be reported in- part, in NFIRS. This requires the supervisor to seek an incident number from the fire department dispatcher. The dispatch center will create an incident. For NFIRS report writing purposes the incident type will be categorized as 321R. Seeking an incident number applies whether or not medical treatment is sought. The incident report will be completed in the standard fashion and will include the completion of the Fire Service Casualty module.

2.4 MIOSHA Reporting: The Fire department administration is responsible to comply with the following; In accordance with MIOSHA Part 11, R 408.22129 “each recordable injury or illness must be entered on MIOSHA’s form 300 or the equivalent, currently Citizen’s Form 99, within seven calendar days of occurrence.” Citizen’s form 99 acts as notification for our present workers compensation administrator. A reportable incident is one that required care from a Township occupational care provider.

2.5 Supervisor’s Accident Report: A Supervisor’s Accident Report, (5.0.5) is required to be completed and submitted within 7 calendar days following the injury. When supervisors knowingly will be off duty, and cannot meet the 7 day standard, the time requirement should be shortened, rather than extended. The Supervisor’s Accident Report will be reviewed by the Battalion Commander and forwarded to the Operation Chief for quarterly review by the safety committee.

2.6 Form DCH-1179(E) of 8/06: Bio hazard exposures are considered work place injuries and the procedures in section 1.3.5 shall be followed. Reference materials and supporting instructions can be found in the Fire Departments exposure control plan. (see example 5.0.6.)

Authorizing Medical Treatment

3.0 The Battalion Commander’s signature will authorize treatment for an injured employee at any of the Township’s occupational health care providers. Each health care provider has their own treatment authorization form, which will be completed and accompany the employee to the facility. The individual forms can be located in the Forms folder on the W:Drive. The Battalion Commander’s signature will be required for all visits and must accompany the employee in all cases except where emergency duties of a Battalion Commander prohibit compliance, or conditions exist that are set forth in 1.1. When the immediate duties of the Battalion Commander prevent signing, the Battalion will get to the treatment facility as quickly as possible. For convenience, Henry Ford facilities can also access their treatment authorization forms through their sites.

3.1 There will be times when an Employee Injury Report and NFIRS report are completed, and an employee hasn’t sought treatment at a Township occupational health care provider. For circumstances where an injury has persisted, and an employee is now requesting access to an occupational health care provider, an additional Employee Injury Report will be filled out. In the Events leading to section enter: (example) “employee seeking treatment for earlier reported injury that occurred on January 1, 2009, where no treatment was sought.” Supervisors will record the event in logs as described in section 2.0. The appropriate authorization forms will be completed and accompany the employee as described in 4.1.

Duty Status and Follow-up Care

4.0 Any fire department member who seeks treatment for an injury cannot return to duty without the proper paperwork. An Employee Injury Report, will initially accompany employees to the medical facility. When returning to duty the completed form will indicate the employee’s duty status. The Employee Injury Report, will indicate one of the four following conditions, Injury report no treatment sought, full duty, restricted duty, or released from duty.

4.0.1 Injury report, no treatment sought- self explanatory

4.0.2 The full duty order will signify that the medical provider has given clearance for the injured employee to return to duty in an unrestricted capacity.

4.0.3 Restricted duty signifies that the employee cannot return to full duty and may be used in a capacity consistent with the Collective Bargaining Agreement.

4.0.31 Dispatch position - Current provisions, determined at a step III grievance settlement dated May 2005, stipulate that light duty assignments to dispatch are 24 hour assignments.

4.0.32 A 40 hour assignment is available as option at the request of the injured employee.

4.0.4 Released from duty signifies the employee may leave duty and will report to the Township occupational health care provider as directed.

4.1 A Doctor’s order, to seek follow-up care, may be given for any of the above categories. In cases where the employee chose to access care through the emergency room of a local hospital, doctor’s discharge orders must first direct follow-up treatment at a Township occupational health facility. This standard shall be adhered to during the first ten (10) days of medical care. If a back to work order has not been given, by the end of the 10 day period, employees can elect to continue medical care in accordance with the workers compensation laws of the State of Michigan. These laws allow employees to choose their own treating physician after this prescribed time period.

4.2 Fire department members placed on Worker’s Compensation leave are responsible for notifying the fire department of their duty status, any extensions, or interruptions, changes in treatment or care that may affect duty assignments. They are required to inform the on-duty Battalion Commander through the chain of command, immediately, and the Battalion Commander should act on the information as necessary to ensure affected staffing needs are met.

4.3 The responsibility of notifying the department of scheduled vacations periods, that are in conflict with any workers compensation status lies squarely with the injured employee. Specific consideration will be made to any issue that affects time off. An employee that is injured, and there-after placed in a non-duty status, will be allowed to cancel any scheduled vacation in conflict with non-duty status. Under such circumstances the re- allocation of vacation benefit may be approved, ignoring the time frame standards set forth in the collective bargaining agreement.

5.0 COMPLETED FORMS (See following example)

5.0.1 Completed CTFD Employee Injury Report

5.0.2 Completed Henry Ford Medical Center Authorization

5.0.3 Completed Concentra Authorization for Treatment

5.0.4 Completed authorization form MCRMC

5.0.5 Completed Supervisors Accident Report

5.0.6 Completed First Responder Request for HIV Hepatitis B Testing of Patient

5.0.1

EMPLOYEE INJURY REPORT

Employee Name: John Doe NFIRS Report #: 9999-09

Time of Incident: 1200 hrs

Events Leading to and Type of Injury (add separate page if necessary): I was assigned to check the apparatus as part of my regular duties. While lifting the engine cover to access the dip stick my left hand came in contact with the sharp edge of the engine housing cover, severing my left index finger.

Joe Smith June 6, 2009 Employee Signature & No. Date Signed

BC John Williams June 6, 2009 Battalion Commander Signature & No. Date Signed

/ Injury report no treatment sought ------Following to be completed by healthcare provider------Work Status: ____/ Full Duty (Return to work with no restrictions) X / Restricted Duty (Return to work with restrictions) X / Follow-up Care Required ____/ Released from Duty

Return for Follow-up Care:

X / Dr. Metropoulos, Henry Ford Fraser, 15717 15 Mile Rd, Clinton Twp. 48035 (586) 285-3970

____/ Dr. Kaufman, Concentra, 33089 Groesbeck, Fraser 48026 (586) 296-2800

□ Bruce Twp. □ Chesterfield □ Fraser Business Health (Occupational Medicine) □ Warren 5.0.2 AUTHORIZATION FOR TREATMENT AND BILLING

Company: Charter Township of Clinton Telephone#: (586) 263-8437 Fax#: (586) 263-8004

Address:_40700 Romeo Plank Road, Clinton Township, Michigan 48038 Street City State Work Comp Carrier: Citizen’s Management, Inc. Telephone#: (800) 533-9366 Fax#: (517) 548-9246 Address: _P.O. Box 620, Howell, Michigan 48844-0620 Street City State Designated Employer Rep: Erin K. Thomas Telephone #: (586) 263-8437 Fax#: (586) 263-8004 Employee: John X. Doe SS#: 000-00-0000 DOB: 02/02/22 Authorization for: Physicals: Drug Screens: BASIC ONSITE BUS DRIVER BREATHALYZER DOT NIDAS (D.0.T.) FIREFIGHTER SAP 10 RETURN TO WORK AMLEO 6

AUDIOGRAM HEP B INJ PFT : WORK COMP INJURY (brief description) Firefighter Smith turned her right ankle and has swelling

OTHER ______

Authorized by: John Y. Doe Position or Title: Battalion Chief Date: 01/01/33

CONSENT TO TREAT AND AUTHORIZATION TO RELEASE INFORMATION I hereby give consent to Henry Ford Macomb Hospital and Health Services and the attending physician for examination and treatment and authorize release of information pertaining to this specific or physical examination to my employer or employer’s insurer.

EMPLOYEE/CLIENT SIGNATURE DATE Jane Smith 01/01/33

CONSENT FOR DRUG AND ALCOHOL TESTING AND AUTHORIZATION TO RELEASE INFORMATION

I, ______, do hereby give my consent to HENRY FORD MACOMB HOSPITAL AND HEALTH SERVICES to take samples of my breath urine and further give consent to the same facility to forward the sample to ______laboratory to perform urine drug screening test on such samples. I further give my permission to release the results of such test(s) to HENRY FORD MACOMB HOSPITAL and to authorize company management.

EMPLOYEE/CLIENT SIGNATURE DATE

WITNESS SIGNATURE DATE

5.0.3 Concentra (Patient Must Present Photo ID at Time of Service)

Authorization for Examination or Treatment Patient Name:John X. Doe Social Security Number: 000-00-000

Employer: Charter Township of Clinton Date of Birth: 02/02/22

Street Address: 42601 Romeo Plank Road Location Number: ______

Temporary Staffing Agency: ______Work Related Physical Examination ; Injury Illness Preplacement Baseline Annual Exit Date of Injury 01/01/33 DOT Physical Examination Substance Abuse Testing* (check all that apply) Preplacement Recertification Regulated drug screen Breath alcohol Special Examination Collection only Hair collect Asbestos Respirator Audiogram Non-regulated drug screen Rapid drug screen Human Performance Evaluation* Other ______HAZMAT Medical Surveillance Type of Substance Abuse Testing Other ______Pre-placement Reasonable cause Billing (check if applicable) Post-accident Random Employee to pay charges Follow-up Special instructions/comments: ______ Due to the nature of these specific services, only the ______patient and staff are allowed in the testing/treatment ______area. Please alert your employee so that they can make ______arrangements for children or others that might otherwise ______be accompanying them to the medical center.

Authorized by: John Y. Doe Title: Battalion Chief Please print Phone: (______) ______Date Concentra now offers urgent care services for non-work related illness and injury. We accept many insurance plans. (Copies of this form are available at www.concentra.com) © 2008 Concentra Inc. All Rights Reserved. 06/08

5.0.4 Charter Township of Clinton Department of

MACOMB COUNTY REGIONAL MEDICAL CENTER

AUTHORIZATION FOR TREATMENT AND BILLING

Company: Charter Township of Clinton Telephone#: (586) 263-8437 Fax#: (586) 263-8004

Address:_40700 Romeo Plank Road, Clinton Township, Michigan 48038

Work Comp Carrier: Citizen’s Management, Inc. Telephone#: (800) 533-9366 Fax#: (517) 548-9246 Address: _P.O. Box 620, Howell, Michigan 48844-0620

Designated Employer Rep: Erin K. Thomas Telephone #: (586) 263-8437 Fax#: (586) 263-8004

Employee: John X. Doe SS#: 000‐00‐0000 DOB: 02/02/22

June 6, 2009 BC John Williams 01 DATE BATTALION COMMANDER SIGNATURE SEN. #

Return to Work Status: ____/ Full Duty (Return to work with no restrictions) ____/ Restricted Duty (Return to work with restrictions) Specify restrictions: ______Follow-up care needed? (Specify below) ___/YES ___/NO ____/ Released from Duty (Specify follow-up instructions below)

Return for Follow-up Care: ____/ Dr. Metropoulos, Henry Ford Fraser, 15717 15 Mile Rd, Clinton Twp. 48035 (586) 285-3970

____/ Dr. Kaufman, Concentra, 33089 Groesbeck, Fraser 48026 (586) 296-2800

______Signature of Attending Physician Date Signed

5.0.5

Supervisor’s Report of Accident

Employee involved Bill Wilson

Length of time on job where accident occurred 7 hours

Date of accident March 4, 2008 Time of accident 1500 hrs

If an injury occurred, was it treated: On site ; at hospital Near miss – no injury

Complete describe accident (who, what, when, where, why): Firefighter Bill Wilson fell from a ladder while fixing the front garage door. He was attempting to reconnect the chain drive. He used a 14’ straight ladder to access the rail, and the ladder slipped after he had ascended 9’ in height. When he fell his legs became entangled in the rungs of the ladder, injuring his ankles

Body part(s) injured ankles & tibia

Nature of injury severe sprain; break Accident type fall

Analyze and then describe the underlying causes of the accident, in your opinion, considering Policies, Procedures, Equipment, Training, and Supervision Practices. (Note employee carelessness is not a cause): This accident was the result of an employee working alone. It may also have been prevented if, after having been notified of his intent to fix the door, I had proceeded to the bay to get involved and supervise the job.

Analyze and describe the corrective measures you took to address the underlying causes of the accident, considering Department Policies, Procedures, Equipment, Training, and Supervision Practices. (Note – just telling the injured employee to be more careful, after the accident, is an incomplete supervision practice): FF Wilson and I reviewed the procedures for safely using ladders on unsuitable surfaces. We discussed the need for having a member heel it. We looked at the tasks involved with the work undertaken and identified the factors requiring two individuals

Lt. Leon Jones 06mar08 Bill Wilson 03/06/08 Supervisor’s signature Date Employee signature Date

5.0.6 RESPONDER PROVIDER REQUEST FOR HIV and/or HEPATITIS B TESTING OF EMERGENCY PATIENT In Accordance with Michigan Public Act 419 of 1994 (MCL 333.20191) Michigan Department of Community Health

NOTICE TO EXPOSED INDIVIDUAL: • Test results will not be provided over the telephone • This request should be made before the emergency patient is released from the health care facility • Please contact the health care facility if the interpretation of test results on th emergency patient is not received by you within (10) days • Information contained on this form is confidential. • See page 2 for PA 431 and non-discrimination information. Section 1 – To be completed by EXPOSED INDIVIDUAL: (Please Print) 1.Name of Exposed Individual 3. Job Classification Joseph Smith Firefighter/Paramedic 2. Home address (Number & Street) 12345 Mockingbird Lane Good Samaritan City State Zip Code 4. Home phone number Clinton Township MI 48038 (586) 263‐8437 5. Name of Employer 6. Employer Phone Number Clinton Township Fire Department (586) 263‐8437 6.Employer Address (Number & Street) City State Zip Code 42601 Romeo Plank Road Clinton Township MI 48038 8. Emergency Source Patient ID 9. Date of Exposure 10. Approximate Time of Exposure No. 23NOV09 9:35 X AM PM 09-0007 11. Route of Exposure: Open Wound X Mucous Membrane Percutaneous Other 12. Provide a detailed description of the exposure: (Attach an additioal sheet as needed) While attending to a patient on this incident, the patient began vomitting profusely, it splatteredagainst the side of the ambulance and came in contact with my open eyes 13. Personal protective equipment in use when exposed: (check all that apply) X Glove Gown Turnout Gear Eye Protection Face Mask None Other (explain) 14. Based on my exposure described above, I am requesting that this source individual be tested for the following: (Check all that apply) X HIV X Hepatitis B Other (explain): example: Tuberculosis 15. Where do you want the test results sent to: (Check all that apply) X Me at My Home X Me at my place of work My Physician Other Health Care professional (see 17) 16. Name of your physician Physician phone number Dr. Summersoff (586) 263-8004 Physician Adress (Number & Street, ect.) City State Zip Code 15895 Hall Road Sterling Heights MI 48317 17. Name of Other Health Care Proffessional Other Health Care Professional Phone Number

Other Health Care Professional Address (Number & Street, ect.) Ciity State Zip Code

• I understand that the NAME of the source individual to be tested, and that person’s test results are conficential according to Section 5131 of Michigan Compiled Laws (MCL). I understand that a person who discloses information in violation of the Section is guilty of a misdemeanor.

• I also understand that I am ultimately responsible for the payment of the charges associated with the testing of this individual to whom I have been exposed, unless an agreement has been worked out between me and my employer, or is otherwise covered by my health care or benefits plan. 18. Signature of Exposed Individual Date

Joseph 17DEC09 • “First Responder Provider” is defined a a police officer, fire fighter, or an individual licensed under MCL 333.20952 as one of the following: medical first responder, emergency medical technician, emergency medical technician specialist, paramedic, or an emergency medical services instructor or coordinator. A lay citizen, a Good Samaritan, if they assist an emergency patient, may also be included as a pre- hospital provider (for the purposes of this law).

• “Emergency source patient” means an individual who is transported to an organized emergency department located in and operated by licensed hospital or a facility other than a hospital that is routinely available for the general care of medical patients

DCH-1179(E) (8-06) (W) Replaces and Obsoletes form J-427 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 2 - EVALUATION OF EXPOSURE: To be completed by the HEALTH CARE FACILITY.

• NOTE TO HEALTH CARE FACILITY: If appropriate, testing for Hepatitis C virus should also be considered, although this testing is excluded from this law.

1. Name of Exposed Individual 2. Emergency Source Patient ID Number

3. Based upon the information provided: Exposure DID Occur (See item 4 below). Exposure DID NOT Occur (See item 5 below) 4. Exposure DID Occur: The type of exposure was determined to be: Open Wound Mucous Membrane Percutaneous Other Was the emergency patient informed at the time of admission about the possibility of being tested if a first responder exposure occurred? (In accordance with MCL 333.51 33)? YES NO NOTE: The Exposed Individual SHOULD BE counseled and tested for HIV and Hepatitis B. Testing for hepatitis C is also recommended although it is not mentioned in the law. Prophylaxis should also be considered for the exposed individual. If appropriate, please refer the exposed individual for follow- up medical evaluation. 5. Exposure did NOT Occur: Please Explain:

Print Person's Name Authorized Signature at Health Facility Date

Job Title .

SECTION 3 - Test Results: To be completed by the HEALTH FACILITY 1 . Emergency Patient was Tested for: (Check all that apply) HIV Hepatitis B Other (Explain): 2. TEST RESULTS on Source Individual:: HIV: Rapid Test: Reactive* Non-reactive EIA: Reactive Non-reactive Western Blot: Reactive Non-reactive Indeterminate

Hepatitis B: HBsAg: Found Not Found Other (Explain):

3. Emergency Patient was NOT Tested: (Testing Agency: Please Check ALL Reasons Below that Apply) Emergency source patient refused testing / to have blood drawn. Emergency source patient expired before test(s) could be performed. Emergency source patient was released from the health care facility before testing could be performed. Emergency source patient did not present to this facility for care Date Test Results were Completed Date Test Results were Reported Out Test Results were Mailed to (Name)

Print Name and Title of Person Providing Test Results Address Results were mailed to (Number and Street)

Signature of Person Providing Test Results City State ZIP Code

*HIV Rapid Tests are for screening purposes only. A reactive Rapid Test requires follow-up testing to confirm patient status. ______AUTHORITY: PA 419 of 1994 (M.C.L. 333.20191) COMPLETION: Is voluntary, but is required if testing of the source patient is desired. The Department of Community Health is an equal opportunity employer, services and programs provider.

DCH-1179(E) (8-06) (W) Replaces and Obsoletes form J-427 Page 2 of 2

Engine Company Fire Scene Operations Standard operating procedures Non-standpipe May 1, 2009

Table of Contents 1…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….Introduction 1.1……...…………………………………………………………………………………………………Engine Company 1.2…………………………………………………………………………………Responsibility of company commander 1.3…………………………………………………………………………………………………………Staffing concept 1.4……….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….Apparatus familiarity 1.5…………………………………………………………………………………………………….Tools and equipment 1.6…………………………………………………………………………………………..……Later arriving companies 1.7………………………………………………………………………………………………... 2 in / 2 out compliance 2…………………………………………………………………………………………………..Firefighting Objectives 2.1………………………………………………………………………………………………………...Protection of life 2.2...... ……………………………………………………………………………………………Locating the fire 2.3 .………………………………………………………………………………………………………Confining the fire 2.4……………………………………………………………………………………………………Extinguishing the fire 2.5…………………………………………………………………………………………………...... Stages of growth 3…………………………………………………………………………………………………...Fire scene operations 3.1………………………………………………………………………………………………………..Initial operations 3.2………………………………………………………………………………………………………...... Objectives 3.3…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….Water source 3.4…………………………………………………………………………………………………………Riding positions 3.5...... Nozzle firefighter 3.6………...…………………………………………………………………………………………….Back-up firefighter 3.7…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….Engine driver 4…………………………………………………………………………………………………..Second arriving engine 4.1……… …………………………………………………………………………………………Teaming of companies 4.2…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Engine Officer 4.3…………………………………………………………………………………………………...... Nozzle firefighter 4.4………………………………………………………………………………………………………...... Engine driver 4.5………...……………………………………………………………………………Alternatives to hydrant positioning

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 The purpose of this manual is to provide both general and specific information concerning Engine Company fire scene operations. The Engine Company is the basic unit of service for fire suppression in this Department and its tactics and operations should be familiar to all members. Refer to other Department policy for specific fire building procedures and guidelines.

1.2 The Clinton Township engine apparatus incorporates several different brand names. At times Quints may also be placed in service due to apparatus shortages. Response areas vary, as can the apparatus, but the basic function of an initial arriving Engine Company remains the same. The proper stretching and operating of hose lines is paramount to a successful fire ground operation and the tactics contained in this manual should be considered standard operating procedure for all units in the Township. It is the responsibility of any member, working in the

1 capacity of a company commander, to ensure that those members working in their unit, at any time, can competently perform the tasks spelled out in these sections.

1.3 This manual is based upon Engine Company staffing of an officer and two (2) firefighters. In units staffed with three (3) firefighters the back-up position is performed by the additional firefighter, if assigned to the stretching engine, and relieves the Engine Officer of this function, nothing else changes. Engine company personnel should be familiar with both 2 and 3 firefighter operations since Department staffing varies on a Township wide basis, each tour of duty.

1.4 Engine Company firefighters must be familiar with the apparatus currently in service within the Department. Various makes and models exist and the differences between the apparatus include hose bed height and layout, location and number of discharge outlets, location and number of compartments, position of equipment such as ladders, large caliber streams, and hydrant connections.

1.5 Tool and equipment assignments for those Engine Company members, assigned to these initial operations, include our standard PPE, boots, helmet, gloves, hoods, bunker coat and pants. Also incorporated in the operation is SCBA and masks, worn in compliance with other department policy and procedures. The Engine Officer will have a radio and a hand light, and is also responsible to account for a haligan and an axe, when it can be reasonably expected a Truck will be delayed.

1.6 Engine Companies arriving later in a fire operation, after second due, should be prepared to be utilized as an engine or in a support capacity based on operational needs determined by the Incident Commander.

1.7 All members shall comply with the provisions of MIOSHA General Industry Safety Standard Part 74 Firefighting 1910.134(G), (4)). When giving assignments, the Company Commander on duty shall ensure members are reminded of their designations as the safety team members. These members must be aware that this designation is based on their unit’s order of arrival at a fire incident, and the designation will change as additional units arrive. While operating at a fire, members will pay particular attention to the following provisions which state: “When a fire progresses past the incipient stage, the area must be considered an IDLH atmosphere. Every member entering the IDLH must be equipped with personal protective equipment and a self- contained breathing apparatus. No member shall enter an IDLH atmosphere unless the member teams-up with at least one other member and remains within voice or visual contact with that member.” If a known life hazard is found and immediate action could prevent the loss of life, appropriate action (rescue activity) may be taken by an individual. This applies only for a known life hazard, not for standard search activity. If such action is taken, the Incident Commander must be immediately notified and adjustments made. If this action results during the period when an Engine Officer is making a size up, then this information shall be shared with any remaining members of their unit.

2 2.0 FIRE FIGHTING OBJECTIVES

2.0.1 The objectives of firefighting are to protect life and property by performing rescues, and by locating, confining and extinguishing fires.

2.0.2 Strategy and tactics defined:

STRATEGY - The general plan or course of action decided upon by the IC in order to achieve firefighting objectives.

TACTICS - The operations or actions required to carry out the strategy selected by the IC.

Most fire operations employ an offensive strategy. This emphasizes the rapid stretching of hoselines for an aggressive interior attack on the seat of the fire. Engine company tactics at most structure fires are to stretch a hoseline via the primary means of egress (main entrance to the building), connect to a hydrant and attack the fire.

A defensive strategy may be employed, initially, at large or expanding fire operations where protection of exposures or containment of the fire is critical. Emphasis is placed on developing large water flows. Tactics compatible with these conditions might include positioning the apparatus for use of a LCS, such as the deluge gun, stretching a 2 1/2 inch hoseline for exposure protection or dropping large diameter hose to supply a Ladder.

2.0.3 Selection and implementation of any strategic plan and its supporting tactics is dependent upon an accurate and ongoing size-up of the fire situation. Size-up starts with the receipt of the alarm and continues until the fire is under control. The size-up process may be carried out many times and by many different individuals during the course of a fire. The responsibility for size-up initially lies with the first officer on the scene, however all engine company members must make a personal size-up of the fire situation. As higher ranking officers arrive, the responsibility for size-up is passed up the chain of command.

2.1 PROTECTION OF LIFE

2.1.1 The protection of life is the primary consideration at any fireground operation. Engine companies may be confronted with life saving operations upon arrival. A life saving operation is placed ahead of firefighting when sufficient firefighters are not available to do both, as is the case when no ladder company is on the scene. Judgment is a key factor when confronted with this situation. The best life saving measure may be a prompt attack on the fire which, if allowed to spread, would trap or

3 overcome occupants. A life hazard, visible upon arrival, must be addressed. However, immediate rescue attempts by the first arriving engine company without simultaneously stretching and positioning a hoseline should be attempted only in extreme situations.

2.1.2 Factors impacting on the decision to attempt an immediate rescue include:

ƒ Occupants endangered by being in the immediate vicinity of the fire. ƒ Number of persons trapped. ƒ Occupants threatening to jump. ƒ Means of egress cutoff by fire. ƒ Ability to reach occupants with portable ladders. ƒ Anticipated arrival time of the first due Ladder Company. ƒ Staffing level of the Engine Company--two or three firefighters.

Actions that the Officer of the first arriving Engine Company can implement to protect endangered occupants include:

ƒ Position a hoseline between the fire and the endangered occupants. ƒ Ventilate to draw fire, heat, and smoke away from the endangered occupants. ƒ Give verbal instructions and assurances to the occupants. ƒ Close doors to limit the spread of smoke. ƒ Ensure units are informed of the location of endangered occupants.

2.2 LOCATING THE FIRE

2.2.1 Before any fire attack can be initiated, the exact location of the fire must be determined. This is the first stage of the fire suppression effort.

ƒ Refer to department radio for reported information ƒ Upon arrival, an exterior survey of the building should be conducted for visible flames, smoke, smoke blackened windows or occupants in distress. ƒ Solicit information from occupants exiting or nearby ƒ Listen to portable radio traffic from Ladder Company personnel.

2.2.2 If a particular apartment is suspected to be the fire location, but the door is locked and there are no visible indications of a fire, try jostling the door. Smoke might puff out around the door jamb.

2.2.3 When the exact location of the fire has been determined it must be conveyed to the other units operating on the scene. The most direct route to the fire area must be relayed to the members stretching the initial hoseline.

4

2.3 CONFINING/CONTROLLING THE FIRE

2.3.1 Confining and controlling a fire is the second stage of the fire suppression effort and includes those actions taken to prevent the fire from extending beyond the area already involved. This is generally the immediate concern, and fulfills the role of placing a hoseline between the fire and the majority of the building occupants.

2.3.2 Confinement of the fire must take into consideration the intensity of the fire as well as the known or anticipated direction of fire spread. Be aware that the fire may be extending via pipe recess, voids, concealed spaces, etc.

2.3.3 Depending on the type of building and the fire location, the first line stretched and operated may be committed to confining any fire extension while a subsequent hoseline is utilized to extinguish the main body of fire.

2.3.4 In some situations the closing of a door or window may play a vital role in confining the fire while hoselines are being stretched to the location.

2.4 EXTINGUISHING THE FIRE

2.4.1 Extinguishment is the third stage in the fire suppression effort.

2.4.2 Initial extinguishment includes “knock down” of visible flames and readily apparent burning and smoldering material debris. Final extinguishment means that any fire uncovered by “opening up” and overhauling procedures has been extinguished.

2.5 STAGES OF FIRE GROWTH

2.5.1 In order to safely extinguish a fire, firefighters should be familiar with the basic concepts of fire, how fire develops and significant events which can occur during a fire. Fire growth in a room can be divided into three distinct stages: the growth stage (incipient), the fully developed stage (free-burning), and the decay stage (smoldering).

2.5.2 Growth Stage (incipient) During the growth stage a fire increases in size from small flames to full fire that involves the entire room. It may take several seconds to several hours for this to occur. Fire Growth is dependent on:

• Combustible content (fuel load). • Oxygen supply (ventilation openings). • Size of room.

5 • Insulation of room.

During the growth stage, flammable gases released by the burning material collect at the ceiling level and mix with oxygen. The heated gases are pushed under pressure from the fire area into uninvolved areas. When this mixture ignites flashes of flame can be seen in this layer of smoke. This condition is known as rollover. Rollover should serve as a warning that the fire area may flashover. As the fire progresses through the growth stage and into the fully developed stage the potential for flashover exists. Flashover is defined as the sudden involvement of a room or area in flames from floor to ceiling caused by thermal radiation feedback. Radiation feedback from the ceiling and walls heats the smoke and gases given off by the burning materials and the combustible contents of the room. When the contents have been heated to their ignition temperature, sudden and simultaneous ignition of the area can occur.

2.5.3 Fully Developed Stage (free-burning) In the fully developed stage the entire room and contents are involved in fire. If no efforts were made to extinguish the fire, the fire would continue to burn until the available fuel and/or oxygen in the room or area was consumed. Because of limited ventilation, most structure fires are air regulated, not fuel regulated. This means that fires will move into the decay stage due to insufficient oxygen. Outside fires are fuel regulated. How long and to what extent an outside fire burns is controlled by the amount of fuel available, not oxygen.

2.5.4 Decay Stage (smoldering) As available oxygen is consumed, the fire moves into the decay stage. Although some oxygen remains in the fire area, visible flames have started to diminish, and the fire continues to smolder. High heat and smoke conditions remain and the potential for a backdraft is present. A backdraft is a smoke explosion which can occur when additional oxygen is introduced into a smoldering fire and the heated gases enter their flammable range and ignite with explosive force. Firefighters must realize that a backdraft produces violent shock waves which can shatter windows, blow down firefighters and collapse walls. Warning signs of a possible backdraft include:

• Heavy dense smoke with no visible flame in a tightly closed occupancy. • Black smoke pushing out around closed doors or window frames. • Glass stained with smoke condensation and pulsating from the pressure of the fire. • Reversal of air movement pulling smoke back into a building through a doorway.

6

3. FIRE SCENE OPERATIONS

The initial Engine Operation

3.1 The following pages spell out the initial duties and responsibilities of Engine Company personnel that arrive at a fire operation and detail the expected events. It is based on the presumption that a line has been ordered stretched, and an offensive operation is to be conducted. The operations detailed here-in apply to all buildings that do not require standpipe operations. Unless the presence of a confirmed life hazard requires the immediate stretching of a second line to protect it, all hands from the second arriving Engine shall augment and assist the first arriving Engine up to the point that the line is stretched, positioned, and operating.

3.2 The objective of the initial arriving Engine Company is:

1. Water Supply

2. Hoseline placement and operation

3. Suppress the fire

Engine Company Officers shall conduct their operation based on those previous objectives, on all alarms reported in such a manner that an Engine Company fireground operation may be required, until confirmed otherwise through the process of investigation. The model for this operation should follow this:

• Determine the need for a hose line and order it stretched • Direct engine to position at hydrant • Expect all efforts of the first two Engine Companies will be combined to ensure the first line is stretched, and is in position discharging water on the fire before another line is stretched

3.3 It shall be the Standard Operating Procedure of this fire department to make every attempt to position the initial Engine Company at a hydrant. Positioning at a hydrant is defined as being able to connect the pumper to the hydrant using the pre-attached hose found on each Engine Company. The process of how the apparatus ends up at the hydrant is the result of a compilation of decisions made by the Engine Company Officer. Many times these decisions precede the actual issuing of an order to stretch a line, and may be made based on the anticipation of having to execute.

7 The diagram that immediately follows, and several others contained within, illustrates broad concepts. A residential street is depicted because the vast majority of Department fire duty is conducted in this setting. These sample illustrations should by no means be interpreted to be all encompassing. The individual circumstances Engine Officers will be confronted with, while conducting a field operation, will vary. Stretching a hose straight down a residential street will not be the answer, in every situation. Rather, the concept of removing hose from the apparatus enabling the Engine Company to position at the water source should be viewed as the larger idea.

Fire building

Attack

Engine Supply Engine

Exceptions may include:

1. When the distance to the hydrant exceeds hose bed capability 2. If atmospheric conditions will pose a hazard to positioning 3. If the engine will physically block a key tactical position 4. Hydrant set backs

In all of these exceptions the concept of having the vehicle do the work of laying the hose, rather than the members, should be a prime consideration in decision making.

3.4 RIDING POSITIONS

3.4.1 The Engine Officer

The Engine Company Officer will have more influence on the outcome of a fire operation than any other member on the scene. The attitude that this Officer displays will become a model for the unit's firefighters to follow. The manner in which orders are given and assignments made sets the tone for the entire engine company operation at a fire or emergency. Officers who are serious about training and expect a high level of professionalism from the members of their company will see it reflected in their unit's performance at training, fires, and emergencies.

3.4.2 The gathering of information by the Engine Company Officer takes little time. The advantages gained, will result in proper line placement and rapid line advance to the seat of the fire. After the Engine Company Officer has determined that a

8 hoseline is needed, the location, route, and number of lengths required in the stretch should be relayed to the unit's members waiting at the apparatus. Properly trained firefighters should be able to perform the following tactics without the Oficer's personal supervision:

ƒ Hose estimate and removal from the apparatus. ƒ Positioning the apparatus at a serviceable hydrant. ƒ Connection of the apparatus to a hydrant. ƒ Stretching a hose line. ƒ Supplying booster water if ordered. ƒ Operation of apparatus mounted large caliber stream (LCS) device. ƒ Supplying standpipe and sprinkler systems.

The previous inference to an Engine Officer investigating is based on the operational concept that Engines will initially conduct Engine Operations and Trucks will conduct Truck Operations. The standard operating procedure for a Truck Company is to deploy the Officer and one member to identify and determine the nature of why we were called to the address. The intent of this written format is to make Engine Company Officers aware that deploying a firefighter is an action that is redundant to the action that the Truck will automatically conduct. It is understood that satellite companies are faced with the problem of being understaffed, are subject to arrival ahead of a Truck, and additionally face the burden of beginning an operation to gather reconnaissance. The preferred operation is that an Engine Officer begin an investigation, while holding their personnel. In situations where the Engine Officer doesn’t feel secure and utilizes their personnel, the intentions set forth in this procedure are intended to identify the second engine as a manpower supplement to an initial engine operation.

3.4.3. The first arriving Engine Company Officer should consider the removal and placement of a second 2.5” hose line in the street, in reverse stretch scenarios, if fire conditions indicate it is warranted. Hand stretching back from the apparatus is also an option and should be considered by the Incident Commander, it is simple to achieve by utilizing the two drivers, once their primary objective is accomplished.

3.4.4 If the entrance door to the fire area (for example: this may be the apartment door in a multiple dwelling or a bedroom door in a private dwelling) is found open by the Engine Officer and entry is not possible, it should be closed immediately to prevent the products of combustion from entering the hallway and contaminating the upper floors and preventing the escape or removal of civilians from above the fire. Door control is critical to the safety of any firefighters operating on the floors above the fire.

3.4.5 Upon arrival of the nozzle team at the entrance to the fire area, the Officer should assure that each fire fighter is properly equipped with bunker gear, helmet, gloves, mask and hood. After ascertaining that sufficient hose has been stretched and flaked out, the Officer should call for water via portable radio and see that the line is properly bled of trapped air.

3.4.6 The nozzle team must begin every interior fire attack through the door to the fire area crouched low, near the floor, regardless of conditions. Rapid self-venting

9 fire, or a fire driven by wind, could create a blow torch effect at the entrance door and seriously injure any firefighter in its path. After entry is made into the fire area, the Engine Officer can evaluate conditions and adjust or modify the method of advance used.

3.4.7 Prior to opening the door to the fire area for advancement of the line, the Engine Officer must assure that no firefighters will be exposed in the hallway or on the stairs above as the fire attack is initiated. This can be done via portable radio or in person. When the door to a fire area or fire apartment is opened, particularly in buildings equipped with thermal pane windows that have not self vented, there exists the possibility that fire will flash outward and upward and seriously expose or burn any firefighters operating in unprotected positions above the fire.

3.4.8 The Engine Company Officer's position, when staffing allows for supervising the nozzle team, must remain fluid. Due to conditions such as tight quarters, stock or furniture impediments, forays to vent or search, and the nozzle team making turns and bends, the officer may have to drop back on the line, switch sides or even move ahead of the nozzle momentarily to allow for optimum nozzle positioning.

3.4.9 Engine Company Officers should develop a communication system with the nozzle firefighter for use when voice communications are impaired due to stream impact noise, power saw operations, opening up and ventilation noise. The following system of touch signals can be used in conjunction with verbal commands to relay orders:

ƒ Open or closing the nozzle--One or two slaps on the back or shoulder. ƒ Direction of stream--Tug or pull on the arm or nozzle, either left or right. ƒ Advancement of hoseline--Steady push on back or mask cylinder. ƒ Halt or stop advance--Pull back on shoulder, bunker coat or mask assembly.

3.5 The Nozzle Firefigher

The nozzle team is composed of the first arriving nozzle firefighter and a back-up firefighter, when staffing permits, under the leadership of the Officer. The sad reality within our department is most often the Engine Officer initially must act to support the nozzle operation. While some decision making authority is delegated to the Nozzle Firefighter, it must be understood that any actions taken are under the strict supervision of the Officer in command of the line. The Officer must exercise the power of command under fire attack conditions and expect prompt, implicit and unqualified response.

3.5.1 It should be recognized that when an Officer finds himself in the back-up position some of the following issues become very difficult to achieve. It is with this in

10 mind that the Engine Officer is encouraged to manage those under their command and get the necessary help up behind the nozzle as soon as possible, as the individual circumstance of each fire allows. This will put them in a better position to lead.

3.5.2 The following listed tactics are of such importance to fire control efforts that the decision to implement them is reserved for the Engine Officer alone.

ƒ Calling for water (charging the line). ƒ Opening the nozzle. ƒ Initial stream direction (at ceiling, seat of fire etc.). ƒ Direction of team advance. ƒ Initiating line advance. ƒ Stopping line advance. ƒ Stream shut down. ƒ When adequate “knock down” has been achieved. ƒ Use of stream for cooling. ƒ Use of fog for attack. ƒ Use of fog or broken stream for venting. ƒ Amount of water used. ƒ Assignment of engine firefighter for venting or search. ƒ Relief of nozzle team. ƒ Need for relief of the unit. ƒ Necessity to back the hoseline out.

3.5.3 Decisions that may be delegated by the Engine Officer to the Nozzle Firefighter include:

ƒ Direction of stream. ƒ Rate of advancement. ƒ Opening nozzle in an emergency. ƒ Partial shut down of nozzle to reduce nozzle reaction and regain control. ƒ Calling for more line. ƒ Sweeping floors with stream

3.5.4 The high level of physical activity required for firefighting is well documented and the debilitating effects on firefighters must be recognized by company officers. It is a significant reminder as to the importance of the exercise program that the fire department supports. The Engine Company Officer should evaluate the members of their unit during and after the fire attack and promptly relieve individual members, or request through the IC relief for the entire unit.

3.6 The Back-up Firefighter

11 The Back-up Firefighter is the fourth riding position assigned to the Engine Company. Due to the irregularity in which this position is staffed, the Back-up firefighter’s duties cannot be relied upon. The Officer is expected to be able to direct adjustments in the operation based on additional member involvement. Supplementing the efforts to get the initial line stretched, and then to provide support, on the line behind the nozzle person shall be the main objective of the Back-up Firefighter, when available.

3.7 The Engine Company Driver

3.7.1 The primary responsibility of the Engine Company Driver is the safe delivery of the personnel, apparatus and equipment to a reported fire or emergency and, for those units that are committed to pumping, the delivery of water to the operating firefighting force.

3.7.2 The Driver must be thoroughly familiar with the engine apparatus, all the tools and equipment carried on board and the layout of the hose beds. Knowledge of the amount and size of hose carried and stretched at operations will assist the Driver in determining the proper pressures required. The Driver must control how many and what type streams and hoselines are supplied and should confer with and advise the Officer when necessary.

3.7.3 The Driver has an integral role in the stretching of a hoseline when they are part of an understaffed unit. All the Engine Companies, whether staffed with 2 or 3 firefighters, will require the Driver’s involvement. When an Engine Company is executing a reverse stretch, the Driver of the apparatus will dismount and report to the rear.

3.7.4 The engine apparatus should be positioned as close as possible to the fire building, when a reverse stretch is being ordered, to reduce the time, effort and number of lengths needed for the stretch, before proceeding to the hydrant. This tactic requires a coordinated effort between the Driver and the Engine Company Officer and the first arriving Ladder.

3.7.5 When a Company is faced with an operation, and it cannot accomplish all actions simultaneously, then a priority order must be established. Facing a difficult stretch, the Driver must participate in the tasks needed to accomplish it. This shall take priority over sitting and waiting to proceed to the hydrant. Therefore, until relieved by later arriving personnel, when a stretch from the rear is ordered the driver shall function to assist with, and control the stretch off the back of the engine and ensure that the hose has reached its objective before taking any necessary actions that may be required to eventually position the apparatus at a hydrant.

3.7.6 Unless specifically directed by the Officer to ensure that there is a working hydrant, the first arriving Driver will presume that the hydrant works and prepare

12 to send tank water when ordered by the Officer. If it is discovered that a hydrant is out of service this information shall be immediately broadcast on the fireground, and shall also be communicated to the third due Engine.

3.7.7 The Driver must remain aware and monitor the necessary radios for instructions and information that may require action. Later arriving Drivers should be ready to assist members in distress if ordered by the IC.

4.0 THE SECOND TO ARRIVE ENGINE COMPANY

In keeping with the Department’s goal of teaming Engine Companies to the greatest degree possible, the general duties of the second arriving Engine Company Officer follow. The priority order will be dictated by the event but simultaneous action to achieve the following goals should be the standard practice. Due to the minimum staffing constraints placed upon the department, Company Officers are working leaders in initial fire operations, and at times the first Engine Officer to arrive at a working incident may be duty bound to participate in the actual tasks involved with stretching a hose line. In recognition of this fact, and also to assure that department philosophy will be supported, the first two arriving Engine Companies will combine their services to achieve the efficient and timely stretching of the first attack line.

4.2 Second Arriving Engine Officer

4.2.1 The second arriving Engine Officer assures assistance with the stretching of the initial handline, assures that a continuous water supply is established, initially acts to meet the MIOSHA 2 in 2 out requirement, and functions as the central point, a command position, for progress reports from both the Engine and Truck prior to the arrival of a Chief Officer. This is a prime consideration, in certain areas of the Township, when the second engine gets in ahead of the Chief.

4.2.2 The combining of Engine Company efforts to get the first hoseline stretched safeguards against a duplication of effort by later arriving units. The second arriving Engine will re-assign 1 member, the Nozzle Firefighter, to the command of the stretching Engine Company. This assigning Officer, the 2nd arriving Engine Officer, will ensure that the first arriving Engine Officer is aware of who it is. This will be done by conducting this transfer in person, or by receiving a radio message confirmation.

4.2.3 At times simple eye contact and visual gestures across the work area where the line is being readied allows both officers to acknowledge that the re-assignment is occurring. IF THERE IS ANY DOUBT, VERIFY BY RADIO ACKNOWLEDGEMENT! Awareness is critical to firefighter safety. This action should be expected by the Battalion Chief.

13 A face to face exchange of this information should occur between the Incident Commander and the second arriving Engine Officer, upon the Chief’s arrival. Until another formal re-assignment has been ordered, this re-assigned firefighter is now considered part of the stretching engine. That member is under the command, and must be accounted for by the 1st arriving Engine Officer.

4.2.4 The second Engine Officer assures that a continuous, adequate water source is established. When the second Engine arrives at the scene of a fire operation, the Officer will need to evaluate what action has been started by the attacking Engine Company. They will give orders based on how the situation presents itself.

4.2.5 The second Engine Officer should function in the command role until the arrival of the Battalion level or higher. With the first Engine Officer leading the hoseline and the Ladder Officer leading their members, the second arriving Engine Officer is in the best position to establish a central authority on the fire ground.

4.2.6 They will ensure that the initial attack plan is being adhered to. They will receive and acknowledge benchmark reports from both the Engine and Truck Officer. They can also evaluate and anticipate the needs of the operation in particular additional resource needs prior to the arrival of the Battalion.

4.2.7 The second arriving Engine Officer also has initial role of meeting the responsibility published in the MIOSHA General Industry Safety Standard Part 74. Firefighting 1910.134 (g) (4), known as 2 in 2 out.

4.2.8 Assesses need for back up line to be placed and orders readied if warranted.

If the second arriving Engine Officer and Apparatus Driver must discontinue their primary duties, and operate as the safety team, (as per MIOSHA General Industry Safety Standard Part 74, Firefighting 1910.134(g)(4), known as 2 in 2 out, they shall inform the Battalion Commander of the extent of their duties completed and that they are proceeding to the IDLH area to render assistance.

4.3 2nd Arriving Nozzle Firefighter

4.3.1 This 2nd arriving Nozzle Firefighter, (synonymous with door firefighter), is responsible for flaking out any hose between the apparatus and the building entrance door, paying close attention to sharp bends or folds, which may become kinks once the hoseline is charged.

4.3.2 Chasing kinks

14 ƒ In the first 50’ of 2.5” hose from the wye back to the apparatus ƒ In the hand line from the wye to the nozzle ƒ In a pre-connect from the Engine to the nozzle Kink chasing should not be considered exclusive of the second arriving nozzle firefighter. Every firefighter involved in a fireground operation should recognize the importance of hoselines that are stretched free from kinks.

4.3.3 Checking any doors that the dry hoseline is stretched through to assure that they are chocked or secured open. If a door were to close over a dry hoseline that was subsequently charged, it would be extremely difficult to free the hose and may result in a drastic reduction in flow.

4.3.4 Eliminate kinks in the charged hoseline while moving toward the fire area as ordered. This may require repositioning of hose in halls and stairways and straightening any bends that are restricting the water flow. It must be o remembered that a single 90 kink in a 1 ¾” hoseline can result in a loss of 20 gpm or more. Successive kinks in a hoseline produce an accumulative affect on reducing flow, and a hoseline with 3 kinks, for example, could lose 90 gpm or more, resulting in an ineffective and unsafe fire stream.

4.3.5 This door firefighter should conserve mask air, if conditions allow. If either member of the nozzle team requires relief or is injured, the 2nd Nozzle Firefighter can quickly move into position and the attack on the fire can continue.

4.3.6 Feeding slack toward nozzle team ahead on the line. This includes pulling hose around parked cars, trees and building entrances where hose often gets pinched or couplings snagged.

4.3.7 This member must not push the hoseline to the nozzle team, but instead provide enough slack in the line so that they can advance easily.

4.3.8 The door firefighter should maintain a bow or rise in the section of hoseline between the door and the nozzle team (see figure). This tactic will allow the door firefighter to monitor the advance of the nozzle team by observing the straightening of the hoseline. As the hose straightens the member restores the bow in the line.

15

4.3.9 An important task of the door position is to monitor and observe heat, smoke and fire conditions at the entrance doorway. Undetected or extending fire could suddenly erupt or appear between the entrance and the nozzle team. The door firefighter is in a prime location to detect this situation and warn the nozzle team.

4.3.6 Maintaining contact with the hose and advances as ordered by the Engine Officer.

4.4 2nd Arriving Engine Driver

1. Assists the first engine with establishing the hydrant hook up, by any means necessary. Chases kinks from the apparatus back to the fire.

2. Reports to Company Officer and performs as ordered.

4.5 When an Engine Company Cannot Position at a Hydrant

There will be times when the first arriving Engine Officer will not be able to position their unit at a hydrant. Each and every Engine Company Officer should strive to make this the exception to the rule. Hydrant positioning simply requires some fore thought while en route to the incident. When giving orders to position your apparatus, especially during an investigation, do so to maintain maximum tactical advantage. Position yourself leaving the most possible options. One of the following three scenarios should play out w hen unable to position your unit.

16 4.5.1 A later arriving Engine is requested to bring a line in to the attacking engine. This is the least preferable solution. If the apparatus is used to lay the supply line the Engine Officer will be required to function initially as the hydrant person and remain behind to complete the hook- up. The nozzle firefighter will be re-assigned to the attacking engine, and the driver will move the apparatus to the fire area and assist with completing the hydrant connections. Every action on the fireground will be delayed. The primary duties of the second Engine Officer will be delayed under this circumstance and the work required to complete the hose stretch will be increased. This creates a classic belly to butt condition for the apparatus.

Fire building

Supply Attack

4.5.2 A split lay is ordered. A split lay might be ordered when an Engine Officer recognizes that a fire operation is necessary and due to tremendous setbacks elects to drop hose, at a directional change, and then proceeds into the fire building. Circumstances like this are best pre- planned and practiced during training periods. The second due nozzle firefighter will still proceed to the attacking Engine. The second due Engine Officer will initially function to ensure hose is removed at the split, prior to the apparatus proceeding to the hydrant. The hose then must be connected prior to this Officer proceeding to the fire.

17 To fire

To hydrant

4.5.3 Similar to a split lay, an apparatus can be positioned, and holds while the Engine Officer investigates. If a stretch is ordered it is executed from the rear of the apparatus, which is already positioned at the hydrant. Or, after the hose is removed the apparatus proceeds to the hydrant.

Stretch

Hydrant

Either / Or

18 Extinguishment Support Operations Private Dwellings Standard Operating Procedure

October 1st 2010

Table of Contents Private Dwellings………………………………………………………………………………………..………...…1.0 Concept of Operation…………………………………………………………………………………………...……2.0 First arriving Support Company………………………………………………………………….………………….3.0 Second arriving Support Company…………….…………………………………… ...…………..…...…………....4.0 Ventilation………………………….…………….………………………………………………………..…………5.0 Search...... 6.0

Private Dwellings

1.0 Private dwelling fires require a coordinated team operation and account for our most common type of structure fire. Fire problems are created by the combustibility of construction material, and are complicated by the unregulated furnishings used to decorate the living spaces. Fire conditions will generate heat, toxic smoke and gases.

1.0.1 Complicating fire operations we may expect obstacles such as; sloping terrain, set-backs, overhead wires, fences, trees, shrubbery diverse architectural features and a wide variety of floor plans.

1.0.2 The contents of this document will detail the basic operations, firefighting assignments, and associated tool compliments for operating in both detached and attached peak roof - private dwellings. It will be considered as the Standard Operating Procedure for operations in private dwellings.

1.0.3 It is intended to promote coordinated action of companies tasked to support water application and to fully utilize personnel and equipment with the ultimate goal of reducing loss of life and property in private dwelling fires.

1.0.4 Detached, peak roof buildings represent the vast majority of occupancies used as dwellings. However units that are attached and share one common roof are covered too. Operational principles are identical.

Description of Private Dwellings (General)

1.1 Originally built as one and sometimes two family occupancies, these structures are usually one to three stories in height. Many in our community are fully attached to the adjoining building, but they may be offset resulting in a partial attachment. The interior of split level homes may have as many as four levels within a 1 and one half story building.

1.1.1 Usually rectangular in shape, alterations and extensions create an endless gamut of possibilities. They average approximately 20' x 40' in dimension, although there are many much larger in size and area depending on which neighborhood we are operating in.

1.1.2 Exterior walls of wood, block, brick veneer, composition materials or aluminum siding is the most common.

1.1.3 Roofs can be peaked and vary greatly in slope, Mansard, Gable, Hip, Shed or Gambrel are less common but do exists in our community. Their use is dependent on the particular architectural design. The most prevalent roof covering is the asphalt material found as a 3 tab, or dimensional shingle. In extremely low pitched applications rolled roofing will be found. Some slate and tile roof covering applications are in the Township.

1.1.4 Skylights have become increasingly popular in homes constructed after 1990 but renovations in older homes do provide for the possibility for them to be present on the roofs of homes built in any era.

1.1.5 Windows may include the older wooden double hung type, jalousie, metal framed casement, aluminum sliders and vinyl type. Newer windows have double and triple pane glass.

1.1.6 Multiple entrances are usual with a main entrance in front and secondary entrances on the side or rear. The interior stairs to the basement will usually be located under the main stair in two story homes. Single story structures with minimal space have side or rear alternative entrances leading directly to the basement. This is also quite prevalent through the attached garage. Homes built in sloping terrain will have alternate entrances for the lowest levels.

1.1.7 Depending on the era of construction fire stopping may be a problem. It is particularly poor in balloon construction, having little or no vertical fire stopping between stories on the exterior walls.

Special Problems

1.2 The following, although not found in all Private Dwellings, are quite common, and create special fire safety and fire fighting problems:

1.2.1 Open and unenclosed stairway. This is the major weakness from a fire fighting and fire protection standpoint.

1.2.2 Lack of secondary means of egress from upper floors.

1.2.3 Interior stairs are often narrow and sometimes turning. Landings are small. Movement of the operating force is often restricted, impeding an interior attack.

1.2.4 Bedrooms are usually located on upper floors and bedroom doors may be removed, poorly fitted, or left open.

1.2.5 Individual window air conditioners in bedrooms may be installed in the only window in the room. The air conditioner may fall if the window is opened. Special care must be exercised if this window has to be entered from a ladder.

1.2.6 Windows of multiple varieties and dimensions are often inadequate in size for escape or rescue purposes.

1.2.7 Interior access to attic spaces is usually difficult. Where access is provided, it may be via a very narrow stair, a scuttle opening over the stair or in a bedroom closet, or a pull down type stairs.

1.2.8 Exterior access to attic space may be non-existent or difficult, as via small windows, louvered openings, etc.

1.2.9 Poor separation between the basement and first floor, e.g., open joists, flimsy doors, etc. Flooring is often burned through, even with limited fire.

1.2.10 Attached and built in garages, with the attendant problem of automobile fires, flammable liquids, etc.

1.2.11 Central Air Conditioning - Carries smoke and toxic gases from a small fire throughout the building especially into sleeping areas. Combined heat and air-conditioning units will be in operation throughout the year.

1.2.12 "Do-it-yourself" alterations and repair using sub-sta ndard materials, and often faulty workmanship.

1.2.13 Hard roofing, such as tile and slate, create special problem relative to laddering, footing, and falling debris.

1.2.14 Aluminum Siding - Fire involving the electrical service may charge the entire siding and the ground is completed when an aluminum ladder is placed against it.

1.2.15 Overhead Electrical Service supplying private dwellings require extra caution when operating around or near them with an aluminum ladder.

1.2.16 Shrubbery - Thoroughly examine areas under windows, porch roofs etc. as persons could have jumped before arrival of the Fire Department. Particularly if the house is surrounded by trees and bushes they may be easily overlooked. The outside team shall check this possibility, especially if windows are fully opened. A secondary search and examination shall be made as soon as possible

1.4 Life Hazard

1.4.1 A rapid build up of heat and smoke in the relatively small spaces of a private dwelling aided by open interior doors is an extreme threat to the occupants of the building. A coordinated effort by the Inside and Outside Group to search for and remove all endangered occupants must be the primary consideration of all fire ground support operations, especially on upper floors.

1.4.2 In some areas of the Township, and in communities surrounding us, buildings which were originally constructed as a one family dwelling have been converted into multiple dwellings. These properties may have additional families and "roomers" living in attic spaces, and basements.

1.5 General Areas of Responsibility

1.5.1 Due to the relatively small height and area of a private dwelling, as compared to multiple dwellings, the 1st to arrive Company responsible for Truck work will perform a tactical split and account for forcible entry, ventilation, and searching the fire floor and floors above. The second to arrive company responsible for Truck work will also perform a tactical split, and ensure that one member marries with the outside member of the first arriving unit. The remaining Group from the second arriving support company primarily will be used to augment the search for life or used to support the fire ground as needed.

1.5.2 First Support Company to Arrive

1.5.21 Will conduct a primary search of all occupied areas in the dwelling via the interior, or by a combination of an interior/exterior Vent, Entry and Search operation.

1.5.22 Will perform a comprehensive, rapid exterior size-up of the fire situation determining the life hazard and rescue as required.

1.5.23 Nothing should delay primary search, and an examination of entire building must be made as soon as possible.

1.5.24 After the arrival of the 2nd Support Company, the 1st Support Company will generally be responsible for the fire floor and the floor below the fire.

1.5.3 Second Support Company to arrive, report to the Officer in Command and prepare to:

1.5.31 Immediately supplement the member assigned to the outside laddering and ventilation operation of the first Support Company, where required.

1.5.32 Search, and support areas not yet covered by 1st Company.

1.5.33 As soon as possible, assume responsibility for operations above the main body of fire, to include opening of the roof if necessary.

CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS

2.0 Assumptions

2.0.1 There is a light to medium fire condition, one or more rooms involved, in an occupied attached or detached single family home with a peaked roof. The description of operations is based on this hypothetical fire situation.

2.0.2 Upon the arrival of the first company assigned suppression support responsibilities, they will operate in all areas of the building pending the arrival of the second support company.

2.0.3 Search and Rescue must be anticipated and will be of primary importance

2.0.4 The Support company is staffed with a Company Commander and two firefighters

2.0.5 The idea of VES (ventilation, entry, and search) as it is used in this procedure is, when necessary, the COMPLETE removal of glass, window sash, curtains, blinds, ect., from the window selected for entry/search/rescue. This is accomplished in preference to indiscriminate, rapid, incomplete ventilation of all available windows, with the sole intent of facilitating the inside operation. The combined ventilation, entry, search operations will be hereafter referred to as VES.

2.06 The degree to which this can be fully implemented is dependent on multiple unit response and individual unit’s time of arrival. .

2.0.7 These single family occupancies almost exclusively exist as detached units. They can have many different floor plans.

2.0.31 Ranch

2.0.32 Bungalow

2.0.33 Tri-level

2.0.34 Quad level

2.0.35 Raised Ranch

2.0.36 Colonial

2.1 The 1st Company on the scene assigned the responsibility for support will institute a two team offense that will attack, where applicable, on different levels of the private dwelling simultaneously.

2.1.1 An Inside Group consisting of the Company Commander and the Jump-seat firefighter will make their way through a first floor entrance and proceed to the areas of the highest probability of life.

2.1.2 An outside group, initially consisting of the Apparatus Driver and then immediately augmented by the second arriving support company’s Jump-Seat firefighter utilizing ladders (Aerial/Portable), to make their entry into the building at the upper level. This approach allows quick entry and search of bedrooms above the first floor.

2.2 The 1st support company to arrive will operate in all areas of the building pending the arrival of the 2nd support company.

2.3 The objective of this concept is to account for and remove all visibly endangered persons to safety, and to search for and rescue any trapped or overcome occupants, and to do so in the shortest possible time.

2.4 To eliminate duplication of effort and to permit rapid entry and search of all bedrooms on upper floors requires that specific areas or rooms be assigned to each member/team of the combined efforts of both companies assigned the support role. This SOP is as outlined in the diagram.

First arriving Support Company

3.0 Inside Group

3.0.1 General duties are to account for forcible entry, locate fire, search and removal of victims, ventilation as required.

Officer

3.0.11 As the first officer on the scene, make a rapid size-up. With evidence of a fire condition within the building, team will prepare to initiate SOP under the supervision of the Company Commander unless otherwise directed.

3.0.12 Order the positioning of the aerial ladder, if necessary.

3.0.13 Directly supervise the member assigned to the inside team. Determine the location of the fire, control ventilation, direct and participate in the search and rescue effort.

3.0.14 Coordination of activities will be accomplished by prep radio. When an outside operation is not necessary, notify members to prevent unnecessary window damage.

3.0.14 Duties are to lead while working in conjunction with the Jump-seat firefighter to force main entrance to the building. This usually presents no problem in Private Dwellings since the door and lock assembly are generally of light construction. Often there is a glass insert in or adjoining the door. It is easier and less damaging to break this small pane reach in and open the lock from the inside. In all cases try the door knob first. Forcing the main entrance provides access to the interior stair for the hose line to provide protection and control of this vital area.

3.0.15 If the stairs to the second floor would not be endangered, and Engine Company could extinguish the fire more readily from the side entrance then it too shall be used.

Jump-seat firefighter

3.0.16 Duties are to operate with the Officer and assist with forcible entry as may be needed. Conduct a search of the lower floors and ventilate as ordered.

3.0.17 Duties include the use of the portable extinguisher with specific objectives in mind. Specifically the extinguisher should be used to retard or hold in check a developing situation as order by the Officer. It can be used to impact the growth of an incipient fire long enough to get a door shut to the fire room.

3.0.18 Expending the extinguisher into a fully involved room solely for extinguishing purposes, will have minimal effect, and should be considered a waste of time.

3.1 Additional considerations for the Inside Team

3.1.1 The aggressive leadership by the Company Commander is the most important factor in conducting the search.

3.1.2 The primary consideration of the Inside Team is to search for those who have a chance for survival. Therefore if the officer and the jump seat firefighter are met in front by fire they should not wait to advance behind the line. The officer will consider another means of entry to access rooms not involved in fire by teaming with the driver of the apparatus. The jump-seat firefighter should be left with the engine company to assist as needed and perform any truck work as the line advances on the fire.

3.1.3 The time of the incident plays a key role in the search operations. During sleeping hours a heavy emphasis must be placed on bedroom search. Limited time is spent on Living room, Dining Room, and Kitchen areas. The concentration must be on first floor bedrooms (if any).

3.1.4 When the search of the first floor is completed, the inside team shall make a rapid advance to the upper floor bedrooms via the interior stairs.

3.1.5 For fires on a lower floor, where outside ventilation is necessary to permit the line to advance on the fire, the Company Commander will have to evaluate the circumstances. If the exterior group member’s duty of VES has them operating in an area where they can’t vent the fire, then the Company Commander shall send the inside group member to vent behind the fire.

3.1.6 Ventilation of lower floor windows shall not be attempted if this would jeopardize firefighters attempting to access upper floors from the exterior via ground ladders.

3.1.7 When determined to be a priority by the Company Commander, the search of the basement shall be the responsibility of the inside group.

3.2 Outside Group

3.2.1 General Duties

3.2.11 Ladder the building as directed in this document

3.2.12 Make a Vent/Enter/Search effort via upper level windows for search

3.2.13 Report the location or extension of fire to the Incident Commander

3.2.14 For upper level operation the aerial may be used when directed by the officer.

3.2.15 Consideration should be given to removing skylights, if required by fire conditions, to provide vertical ventilation.

Apparatus Driver

3.2.2 Duties:

3.2.21 Roof operations are generally not feasible during the initial fire operation at a peaked rook single family home.

3.2.22 Examine the rear or side of the building for trapped occupants. Operate as necessary

3.2.23 If no life hazard is immediately evident in the rear or on the side VES will be carried out at other strategic windows

3.2.24 Where a lengthy delay in the forming the two firefighter exterior group can be expected due to the late arrival of the apparatus, the apparatus driver shall target windows on the front or side of the home where they will be working in plain view of the incident commander or other uncommitted firefighters.

3.2.25 Where there is a porch roof or garage roof access to an upper floor window, a portable ladder will be raised to this roof. The driver will operate from this platform with the intentions of accessing a second floor window. This will allow the firefighter to operate rapidly if unpaired. All that is required to get on a porch roof is a short ladder which is easily handled by one person.

3.2.26 If there is no porch or roof access then the driver will select an area to work from that serves a second floor window and provides a physical butt for the ladder.

3.2.27 If the circumstances ever warrant immediate action be taken by the apparatus driver to enter a window prior to teaming with the second firefighter they will notify their officer, or the Incident Commander before entering to search.

3.2.28 Perform outside ventilation of upper most floor

3.3 Additional considerations of the Outside Group

3.3.1 Under light smoke and heat conditions an interior operation may be the only necessary action. Under any condition however, utilization of ladders to upper sleeping areas is usually preferable and can provide for:

3.3.11 A two sided approach to any potential area of life occupancy on upper floors.

3.3.12 Firefighters on ladders are often working in relatively “clean” air until actual entry into rooms.

3.3.13 Proper positioning of ladders, based on knowledge and outside size up assures putting a fire fighter into two of as many as 4 bedrooms on the upper level.

3.3.14 Firefighters entering rooms via ladder normally will not be more than twelve feet from the ladder or roof area. Chances of getting lost or disoriented are lessened.

Second arriving Support Company

4.0 Communication

4.0.1 Firefighters shall have the portable radios turned on en-route to hear any transmissions from first arriving units relative to the possible location of occupants, ventilation that may be required or receive instructions from the Incident Commander. If no instructions are received, perform the tactical split and the Officer should report to the Incident Commander.

4.1 Operation

4.1.1 Directing the firefighters to perform the tasks outlined shall be the duty of the Company Commander.

4.1.2 Indentifying which fire department unit, is the first arriving support Company, so the Jump-Seat firefighter is clear on who they will “marry” with.

4.1.3 Be prepared to reinforce either the VES operation from a secondary location or reinforce the Inside Group if directed by the Incident Commander.

4.2 Additional Considerations for the second arriving Support Company

4.2.1 May be utilized to relieve the inside group with overhaul duties

4.2.2 May be used to isolate the utilities

4.2.3 May be used to support fire ground for lighting

4.3 Outside Group

Second arriving Jump-seat

4.3.1 The 2nd arriving Jump-seat firefighter will assist and supplement with the duties of the first arriving Support Company’s driver.

4.3.2 If the Apparatus Driver is ready to enter a window, this jump-seat fire fighter will heal the ladder and otherwise assist as required

4.3.3 If a second window is selected for entry and search the jump-seat firefighter will exchange positions with the driver. They will make the search and the driver will act as the heal person.

4.3.4 If it is possible to heal the ladder by some physical source the member assigned to heal may climb the ladder to the window height after #1 firefighter has entered the window. This is to assist them in any way possible, render support, and to vocally direct the inside member back to the window area, if this becomes necessary due to an exceptionally heavy smoke condition. Similarly, once the room has been entered, the member assigned to heal may perform additional venting as long as they are alert to assist the other firefighter upon their return to the window.

4.4 Illustration of Concept

Third Engine Company arrives before Ladder or Ladder arrives prior to the third Engine Company

Inside Group

Position: Company Commander Position: Jump-seat Firefighter

Tools: SCBA Tools: SCBA Portable Radio Portable Radio Flat Head Axe 6’ Pike Pole Haligan Tool 2.5 gallon Water Extinguisher

Route: Through the Interior Route: With the Officer

Duties: Size Up and Supervise Duties: Aid with forcible entry Account for forcible entry Use extinguisher as ordered Conduct search Search as directed Evaluate possibility of extension Vent as ordered by the officer

Outside Group

Position: Apparatus Driver Position: 2nd arriving Jump-Seat

Tools: SCBA Tools: SCBA Portable Radio Portable Radio 14”, 16’ or 24’ ground ladder 6’ pike pole or Haligan tool Haligan tool or 6’ pike pole

Route: From the outside rear or side Route: With the 1st Apparatus Driver

Duties: Evaluate need to remove any Duties: Immediately team with Driver occupants in distress and work to accomplish search Report progress to Incident Commander Conduct VES of bedrooms on 2nd floor Vent for fire

Auxiliary Group

Position: Company Commander Position: 2nd arriving driver

Tools: SCBA Tools: SCBA Portable Radio Portable radio Haligan and Axe 6’ Pike Pole May need ground ladder

Route: Determination based on priority Route: With Company Commander

Duties: Reinforce Exterior or Interior Search Duties: Perform duties consistent with effort. those spelled out in this Group may be assigned to a lower procedure as ordered. priority operation when deemed appropriate by the Incident Commander.

4.5 Radio designations for first arriving support unit is as follows:

4.5.1 The inside group - Unit designation followed by the term “interior”.

4.5.2 The outside group - Unit designation of the first arriving company followed by the term “exterior”.

4.5.3 The Auxiliary group - Unit designation of Company followed by area of assignment. “Interior,” “Exterior”, “Roof.”

VENTILATION

5.0 Venting for Fire – Ventilation that is accomplished to facilitate the Engine Company’s advance towards, and extinguishment of, the fire. This venting is normally delayed until the attack line has water, the nozzle is bled, and they are ready to move in.

5.0.1 At fires in buildings of one story this will be carried out by the driver of the first arriving support company. The arrival of the first support company may be delayed to the extent that this duty will have to be assigned to a member not being utilized for the hose line. The judgment of when this is appropriate remains with the Incident Commander.

5.0.2 For fires on the upper level, the use of a ladder is often most appropriate to accomplish ventilation of the fire room. Windows serving the stairs also serve as excellent points to provide ventilation to the stairwell and foyer which the line must advance up and through. In older homes these windows can be identified as being offset from the line of first and second floor windows.

5.0.3 Opening high windows in any open floor plan design creates a great hazard from falling glass. Department members venting for fire must closely coordinate the removal of glass from these openings, with any members that are in direct line or in close proximity below the opening.

5.0.4 Windows that serve some rooms in homes with open floor plan that have high ceilings should be evaluated before the indiscriminate clearing of the opening. These windows often serve the lowest parts of the room and may work to feed the fire air, rather than remove smoke and heat. After making the first opening consider the resulting air movement before continuing to completely clean the opening.

5.0.5 To conserve time when using portable ladders, a ladder may be raised to the proper height and dropped in to the window to break the glass. This allows for the products of combustion to begin venting prior to the accession of the ladder. While one member is repositioning the ladder the other member can work to ready their gear so they may climb the ladder, clear the opening and enter for search when deemed necessary.

5.0.6 Porch or garage roofs provide a stable platform from which to operate and should be used whenever possible. They afford protection from fire venting below and provide a temporary refuge for rescued occupants. Screen or open porches may not provide protection from fire venting below and must be evaluated before use.

5.0.7 Under heavy smoke and heat conditions, proper window ventilation entails removal of all shades, venetian blinds, drapes, etc., that might hinder the free flow of the smoke and heat, out of the building, This cannot be accomplished from ground level by dropping portable ladders against the windows. To complete their removal would require ascending the ladder.

5.0.8 The windows vented for fire conditions, in the areas adjacent to the main body of fire, may be needed by members operating inside as secondary means of egress. This idea in itself facilitates the complete removal of any obstructions impeding travel through the opening.

5.1 Venting for life – Accomplished to facilitate ingress of fire department personnel into an area where there is a known or suspected life hazard. With an inherent calculated risk of eventually “pulling the fire” towards the point of entry it is performed as part of an attempt to reach possible survivors as soon as possible.

5.1.1 Portable ladders may be placed at the side of the window.

5.1.11 Ensures that the fire fighter is not hit by any debris being removed from the window.

5.1.12 Allows for stepping off directly on to the sill for big openings.

5.1.13 If search is successful, or if conditions deteriorate ladder must be repositioned at the sill to successfully exit window.

5.2 One of the most important features affecting the outside operation is the type and size of the windows used in the home. If the upper floor windows are inaccessible or cannot be entered due to size or construction, they should be vented if possible and the entry/search of the area must be completed from the interior. Communicate this outcome to the Incident Commander via portable radio.

5.3 Windows can cause problems based on the type found. Sash construction varies.

5.3.1 Steel casements windows are extremely difficult to disassemble and remove. Outside team members should communicate the presence of these windows via portable radio in the event they were not noticed or identified in the Officer’s size up.

5.3.2 Breaking windows that are high and inaccessible, or to small to enter, in attic spaces allows for the upper levels to be vented.

5.3.3 “Ranch type windows”, short wide windows, have a sill that is approximately chest high, requiring a drop to the floor by members entering from the outside. A stable piece of furniture may be placed below the window to assist egress.

SEARCH

6.0 Immediately upon entering a room from the exterior, begin your search. Attempt to locate the door to the hallway as quickly as possible and close the door to prevent the products of, and the fire, from entering or being pulled toward the room.

6.0.1 When no overcome persons have been found in the room, and in the event the door to the interior hallway has been closed to aid in the search, it should be reopened before leaving the room via the ladder.

6.0.11 This will aid in venting the interior of the bulding

6.0.12 Reopen the door carefully to ensure the conditions out in the hallway have not deteriorated. If it is a possibility that fire will be drawn towards the opening that will be used as the exit, it shall be left closed.

6.0.2 If an overcome occupant is discovered evaluate bringing them down the stairs. Seek help from other members operating in the building.

6.0.3 When operating as a team and dealing with a person who is at a window and in distress, get a firefighter into the room to help put the occupant out on the ladder, before exiting the room attempt to complete a quick search of the area.

6.0.4 Removal of an unconscious victim via portable ladder will require the member assigned to heal to ascend the ladder and assist with removal. When additional help cannot be secured consider enlisting the aid of civilians or patrolman to heal the ladder for safety. Other possible means of healing the ladder may be as simple as grounding a tool to act as a wedge.

6.0.5 The difficulty of removing an overcome adult victim from the second floor cannot be overstated. Practicing this during drill periods will pay off if a company is ever called upon to perform this duty.

Personal Grooming Department Policy Updated May 12, 2009

Table of Contents

1.0………………………………………………………………………………………………………...…Purpose 2.0………………………………………………………………………………………………Uniform & Hygiene 3.0…………………………………………………………………………………………………..……………Hair 4.0…………………………………………………………………………………………………………Sideburns 5.0……………………………………………………………………………………………………...…Facial Hair 6.0……………………………………………………………………………………………………..…..… Jewelry

Introduction

1.0 It has been officially recognized that matters of personal grooming have an effect upon safety of the members of the department and the public in their firefighting and life saving activities. The wearing of face masks, respirators, firefighting equipment, safety equipment, the administration of first-aid, and the application of other procedures, can be adversely affected by the growth of facial hair, other aspects of personal grooming.

1.1 The department administration will continue to recognize its present and future duty to do all that is reasonable for the safety and protection of its members and the public. The members of this department will understand its frequent contact with the public, recognizing the public good, and the need for maintaining a favorable image with the citizenry and will attempt to live up to that image at all times.

Uniform and Hygiene

2.0 The department members shall have an overall well kept appearance. Their uniform shall be maintained properly, free from rips, tears, and stains as outlined in the department uniform policy.

2.1 Each member shall maintain an acceptable level of personal hygiene that is conducive to favorable public image and one's co-workers. Such examples may include, but not limited to, body/feet odor, bad breath, consistently dirty grubby hands, dirty bedding, etc. Fingernails are to be kept at a reasonable length and clean.

Hair

3.0 Hair will be kept clean and neatly groomed. Bush, afro, natural, freedom or other similar styles will be worn in moderation. The length and the style of the hair shall not be excessive so that it;

3.0.1 Will not interfere with the proper placement and usage of uniform cap, helmet, face mask, or other firefighting equipment.

3.0.2 Will not present a ragged or unkempt appearance.

3.0.3 Will not present a hazard to firefighting, training, or inspection duties.

3.1 Hair, when combed, brushed, picked, blown, teased or otherwise worn, will not exceed two inches (2") in height. Hair, when combed, brushed or otherwise worn, will not fall further than the middle of the ear.

3.2 Hair, when combed, brushed or otherwise worn, will not extend below the top of the uniform shirt collar of a properly worn uniform shirt.

3.3 Laser cuts and pony tails are unacceptable. A laser cut (or line cut) is a hair style whereby lines and/or designs are cut into ones hair using a razor or T-edge shaper or trimmer.

3.4 Exotic dyed hair colors are not acceptable, such as green, blue, orange, etc. If an individual chooses to dye his/her hair it shall be standard hues of black, brown, blond or shades, thereof, that do not delude the department image.

Sideburns

4.0 Sideburns shall not interfere with the proper placement and safe usage of face masks and other firefighting equipment.

4.1 Sideburns will be neatly trimmed and close to the face so that they do not protrude or have grown thick so as to create an imperfect seal when the face mask is worn or used. They will not interfere with proper placement and usage of other firefighting equipment.

4.2 The base of the sideburn shall be a clean shaven, horizontal line.

Facial Hair

5.0 Members of the department shall be cleanly shaved when reporting for duty. Beards, goatees and chin whiskers of any type will not be permitted in order to ensure that facial hair will not interfere with the proper placement of face masks and any other firefighting or life saving equipment and to ensure that facial hair will not interfere with the administration of first aid or other life saving procedures.

5.1 Mustaches are permitted but must conform to the following

5.0.1 Mustaches must be neatly trimmed

5.0.2 Mustaches shall not extend horizontally over two inches (2”) beyond the corners of the mouth. The mustache can extend upward (handle-bar mustache).

5.0.3 Mustaches will be judged to be non-compliant with this policy any time a conditions develop that interfere with the face to face piece seal or the valve function.

Jewelry

6.0 Jewelry is to be worn in such a manner so as not to demean the uniform or image of the department. It is recommended that personnel in fire suppression remove all jewelry if assigned to apparatus due to safety.

6.1 Fire suppression division - when assigned to apparatus - one (1) neck chain, one (1) ring, one (1) watch, one (1) bracelet and earrings are an acceptable option.

6.2 Earrings (stud or post style) are not to be larger than one eighth (1/8") of an inch in diameter on outer surface of the ear. Any style is not to hang more than one quarter (1/4") of an inch below the earlobe. They are to be without precious or semi-precious gems/stones and not "gaudy" in appearance. Only one (1) pair is acceptable.

6.3 Nose rings, nose studs are unacceptable for all members of the department.

6.4 Staff personnel - the same principals and guidelines pertain to staff positions regarding jewelry.

Lock Box Program June 16, 2010

Table of Contents

1.0……………………………………..………………………………………………Introduction 2.0……………………………………..……………………………………...Lock Box Program 3.0…………………………………………………………………………………..…Key Secure 4.0………………………………………………………………………..Accessing Knox Boxes

Introduction

1.0 The purpose of the Lock Box Program is to provide the Clinton Township Department of Fire/ Rescue/EMS (CTFD) with the means for rapid, non-destructive access to certain occupancies and businesses within our jurisdiction. The International Fire Code requires certain types of commercial buildings that are not occupied and operating 24/7 to have a Knox Box installed. Through enforcement of the International Fire Code, the installation of Knox Boxes will be on- going.

1.1 The Clinton Township Fire Department has expanded the access program to include residential occupancies within the Township’s borders. For affordability we chose an additional vendor to supply key safes, in the residential setting. The intent of the program is to reach the elderly, and those we service through EMS, giving them the opportunity to provide us with a means of access.

1.2 Participants of the program, and their addresses, will be considered privileged information and the particulars should not be shared with anyone outside the department, or broadcast over the department radio.

1.3 All fire department officers will have a working knowledge of the Knox Box installations used in commercial applications within their response districts. This should be gained through familiarization inspections and preplanning.

Lock Box Program

2.0 The Lock Box installation program falls under the direct supervision of the FireMarshal’s Office.

2.1 Installation of commercial boxes will be handled by the Fire Marshal’s Office.

2.2 Property owners will be directed to the Knox Company at www.knoxbox.com, or instructed to call 1-866-625-4563 or 1-800-552-5669.

2.3 The property owner will be instructed to contact the Fire Marshal’s office when the Knox Box is installed to schedule key installation.

2.4 Once key safes have been installed the information shall be recorded into CAD for future information access.

2.5 Installation requests, (See fig. 2.1) for the residential program, will be directed to the Deputy Chief of Operations. Work will be distributed across all 3 platoons.

CLINTON TOWNSHIP FIRE-RESCUE-EMS

KEY BOX REQUESTS

X 24401 Pankow STREET ADDRESS RESIDENTIAL COMMERCIAL

Paul Berger 586-855-3141 CONTACT NAME CONTACT PHONE

5-18-2010 5-20-2010 TODAY’S DATE APPOINTMENT DATE

REFERRED TO: Battalion Chief Funkhouser SHIFT COMMANDER’S NAME

PILLAR BY FRONT DOOR 5-20-2010 #155 DESCRIBE KEY BOX LOCATION COMPLETED DATE BY (ID#)

Note: When finished, return form to Administration Secretary

(Fig 2.1)

2.6 Lock box paperwork flow

1. Member of the community make a request for installation

2. Fire prevention administrative support directs request to Inspectors for commercial installations, or the Deputy Chief of Operations for residential installations

3. Paperwork returns to executive support staff for information entry into CAD

2.7 Keys to be placed in a lock box are those that provide access to the building and grounds, rooms that house sprinkler control valves and alarm panels, building utilities, elevator penthouses and master pass keys in residential occupancies. Fireman service keys should also be available.

Key Secure

3.0 The integrity of this program and the good standing image of the Fire Department rely on the strictest accountability standards for the Knox key, and the associated key issued for the residential program.

3.1 Lost keys or evidence of tampering with the key ring will be immediately reported through the chain of command to the Fire Chief’s office.

3.2 Each fire apparatus is equipped with a Key Secure safe. In it is a key for the Knox safe and the residential safe. The Key Secure safe is programmed with software that records key removal activity. It provides the fire department with an audit trail. It is equipped with a light that flashes when the key is out.

3.3 The safe will not operate if it does not have power. Loss of power to the device should be reported up the chain of command immediately.

3.4 Every member in the fire department is issued a unique 4 digit code. In order to release the key from the safe enter the four digit code followed by the # sign. Any member aware of a conflict of 4 digit codes should report the matter up the chain of command.

3.5 An annual evaluation will be held to ensure each member can effectively operate the safe and that their 4 digit code works. The audit trail will be evaluated during the same time period.

Accessing the Knox Boxes

4.0 After the installation of a Knox Box, it can be accessed by fire department members to remove keys when a building, or a room within a building, is locked and it becomes necessary to gain access for fire department operations. The boxes may be opened by a Fire Company during building familiarization or when conducting a fire prevention inspection.

4.1 An incident commander who accesses the Knox Box, used in commercial settings, will ensure the Fire Marshal’s Office is advised. Upon notification the Fire Marshal’s office will in turn notify a business after the Knox Box was accessed for any after hour fire department emergency.

4.2 If the fire department is called upon to provide access to a Knox Box, in support of a Clinton Township Police Department operation, the responsible member of the fire department will remain at the incident until the key is returned to the safe.

4.3 When a Knox Box, or a residential safe, is accessed during an incident, the safe opening will be recorded in the narrative of the incident report, and the details will include the department member who opened the safe.

Fireground Incidents - Natural Gas & LPG Emergencies Standard Operating Procedures

May 1, 2009

Table of Contents 1.0…….……………………………………………………………………………………………………….Purpose 2.0………………………………………………………. …………………………………….…………...Procedure

1.0 Purpose

The purpose of this document is to provide a guideline for the operation at incidents or situations that may arise during the course of an operation. All personnel are expected to know, understand, and operate according to this guideline as each situation arises.

1.1 Responsibility

ƒ All officers are responsible for the training of firefighting personnel and for ensuring proper compliance with this guideline.

ƒ All personnel have the responsibility to adequately learn this guideline and to ensure its compliance.

ƒ All personnel shall show reasonable judgment in their use of this guideline.

1.2 Background

ƒ Natural gas is much lighter than air and will dissipate rapidly outside. Inside buildings, however, it tends to pocket, particularly in attics, under stairs, and in dead air spaces. The flammable limits are approximately 4%-15% in air.

ƒ LPG will vaporize when released, is heavier than air and will pocket in low air spaces. The flammable limits of propane are approximately 2%-9% in air.

ƒ Burning gas should not be extinguished unless the source can be shut off immediately, since this changes the hazard from visible to invisible and creates an explosion hazard.

2.0 Procedure

ƒ In all responses involving a possible natural gas leak, contact Consumers Energy @ 1-800-477-5050.

ƒ Consider wind direction and speed when placing apparatus and stop short of the address to protect the apparatus from possible exposure.

ƒ Do not park apparatus in front of any building suspected of having a natural gas leak.

2.1 Gas Leak Outside Without Fire or Explosion

ƒ Truck Rescue company shall use a monitor to check LEL levels in the immediate area.

ƒ Establish a hazard area of any readings higher than 7% LEL and attempt to minimize the number of personnel in the hazard area. All personnel approaching the hazard area should have complete PPE including SCBA with mask. Any additional units should be staged outside the hazard area.

ƒ Evacuate any civilians outside the hazard area.

ƒ Attempt to locate the source of the gas and any shut off devices that are available.

2.2 Gas is Burning Outside a Building

ƒ Do not attempt to extinguish the fire unless life is in jeopardy.

ƒ Do not assume that all of the escaping gas is being consumed by the fire, check for accumulations in nearby buildings and sewers.

ƒ Clear the area surrounding the incident and barricade to keep it safe. Restrict or reroute any traffic along roadways.

ƒ Never operate an underground gas valve in the street or sidewalk. Turning the wrong valve could further endanger life or property.

ƒ If it is necessary to extinguish a fire because life is in jeopardy, use a dry chemical and a water fog. Do not direct a straight stream on the burning gas at the source of ignition.

2.3 Suspected Gas in a Building

ƒ Rescue Company should use their multi-gas monitor and approach the structure.

ƒ Monitor the air for LEL and clear the building occupants if an LEL 7% or greater in found.

ƒ Shut off the gas at the meter or at a valve if the leak is at an appliance, and accessible.

ƒ Eliminate all ignition sources.

ƒ Turn on flashlights before entering the building. Do not turn on or off any electrical switches.

ƒ Ventilate the building by opening doors and windows.

ƒ In any contaminated atmosphere, all personnel shall where complete PPE including SCBA.

2.4 Escaping Gas Burning in a Building

ƒ The Incident Commander should determine if the gas could be safely shut off at the meter. If a fire is burning at an appliance the gas should be shut off with either the valve at the appliance or the meter.

ƒ If the resulting fire is not causing further damage or creating a life-threatening situation, allow it to burn.

ƒ If necessary extinguish areas that are burning. If possible allow the escaping gas to burn at its source. If this can not be done and the fire is extinguished follow the steps outlined above for escaping gas inside a building.

2.5 Gas in Manholes, Vaults, and Sewers

ƒ Do not attempt to extinguish flames if gas becomes ignited unless life is in jeopardy.

ƒ Water spray any burning or combustible material in the area of the vault.

ƒ No water shall be placed into a manhole unless the absence of electricity is confirmed.

ƒ Never enter a manhole, vault, or sewer if gases or vapors are even suspected to be present. Always have the atmosphere checked with the appropriate instrument. When enter follow the SOP’s for entering a confined space.

ƒ Ventilate manholes, vaults, and sewers by natural means or preferably by intrinsically safe mechanical blowers.

ƒ Check basements and rooms of adjoining buildings on both sides of the street for any evidence of gas. If gas is found follow SOP’s for gas escaping inside a building. Purchasing for Fire Department

Credit Cards

Effective Date: December 1, 2008

Index

1.0…………………………………………………………………………Intent and Responsibility 1.1……………………………………………………………………..Applicable Township Policy 1.2……………………………………………………...... How to Pay 1.3……………………………………………………………………….………Types of Purchases 1.4…………………………………………………………………….…………Exempt Employees 1.5…………………………………………………………………..………………Expense Reports 1.6…………………………………………………………..…….……………………..Late Filings 1.7……………………………………………………………..….….Accessing Reports on Internet 1.8…………………………………………………………………………Sample Requisition Form

Policy

1.0 The Township issued credit card’s intended purpose is to support fire department operations. Cards are issued on a broad basis for the sole intent to provide ease in executing authorized purchases. The responsibility for the proper use of each issued credit card lies with the member’s name found on it.

1.1 All applicable references made in the Charter Township of Clinton Policy titled Purchasing Card Program and Purchasing are in full force and shall be complied with.

1.2 Satisfying all payments for goods and services shall be first attempted with credit cards. The vendor will be notified of our tax exempt status. The tax exempt number can be found at the top of the card.

1.3 Purchases with issued credit cards will fall into two categories.

Planned purchases – these are purchases for goods and services that are coordinated through the chain of command and can best be described as matters involving maintenance and upkeep.

Emergency purchases – matters involving the immediate needs of the fire department to maintain operational readiness.

Planned purchases can be authorized by a Captain, and emergency needs by the Battalion Commander. Emergency requisitions will require a written explanation justifying the expenditure.

1.4 EMS and Supply officers are exempt from requisition and written justification standards. Purchase approval for any other needs shall be submitted on a CTFD requisition form 0708.

PURCHASING FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT – CREDIT CARDS Page 2 of 2 1.5 All receipts will be retained by the purchaser and attached to a monthly expense report. The billing cycle runs from the 6th day of a month, through the 5th day of the following month. The completed expense report is signed, and dated. It will be submitted in a manner that the Administrative Deputy will receive it no later than the 10th day of the month following the end of the billing cycle. See example that follows.

1.6 Any member expecting to be absent shall submit their report early. They will not use their card before the 6th day of the month. The Administrative Deputy will be contacted if unplanned absences arise that would result in the report being delayed.

1.7 Charter Township of Clinton Fifth Third Corporate Multi-Card Program Mastercard Smart Data Online (SDOL) Reporting

GENERAL INFO

• Each Department will identify the person(s) responsible for reviewing all expenditures and providing accounting detail using the SDOL feature (Intermediates).

• The online system relies on pop-up windows. Make sure blocker is turned off.

• ACCOUNT CODES AND EXPENSE DESCRIPTIONS must be entered for before the system will allow you to save (Apply) any information regarding a purchase.

• REPORTS (There are 40 standard unalterable reports.) o Expense Report pulls account information details and includes a signature line for both the cardholder and the supervisor

• Before trying to print expense reports, make sure you have done the following: 1. Open Internet Explorer 2. On the Tools menu, click Internet Options 3. On the Security tab, click Custom Level o Turn off the Information Bar for file downloads, in the Downloads section of the list, under Automatic prompting for file downloads, click Enablehe

• Purchasing Cards not used at least once a year will not be automatically renewed at the end of the two-year cycle. They must be requested to be reinstated.

• CAUTION: For security purposes, the website reporting program will time out after a five inactive minutes and any information entered but not saved will be lost.

SDOL LOG-IN INSTRUCTIONS

1. Go to http://sdol.53.com 2. Enter User ID and Password provided to you by the Company Administrator in the Treasurer’s office. 3. After logging in the first time, you MUST change your password. New passwords must be at least 8 characters, 2 of which must be numeric. NOTE: Your user ID and password are CASE SENSITIVE.

PURCHASING FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT – CREDIT CARDS Page 3 of 3 4. Passwords expire every 90 days for security purposes. The ability to use SDOL will become “inactive” if gone unused for 90 days. Cardholders should contact their individual department administrators to re-activate their privileges.

TO REVIEW EXPENDITURES DAILY, WEEKLY OR MONTHLY:

5. Click on the Financial tab at the top of the page. 6. Click on Account summary 7. Select Billing cycle and use the drop down menu to select the billing month 8. Click on View 9. In the account summary screen, you will need to enter the Expense Description and Munis codes for each purchase. a. Click on Expand All to make the Munis code fields and Vendor field visible. (Red * indicates a required field) b. Click on Edit Account Codes to be able to make appropriate entries. Drop-down menus assist you with Munis codes. 10. Check the box indicating Cardholder Reviewed/Supervisor approved if required by your department. NOTE: Checking either of these boxes locks the transaction from any editing. 11. Repeat steps 7 & 8 for every purchase shown. 12. Click Apply. 13. You can use the email option to notify others regarding the review of these expenses. (Click on the envelope icon located next to the “Apply” and “Discard” boxes.)

TO PRINT THE END OF MONTH EXPENSE REPORT:

14. Click on Report tab at the top of the page. 15. Click on Run Report. 16. In the Report Selection box highlight Expense Report. 17. Select Print Version. 18. Select Billing Cycle then use drop down menu to indicate correct month. 19. Click on Run. (If you are an approver, you must then select the person whose report you wish to print. Individual cardholders will not need this step.) 20. At the prompt, “Do you want to open or save this file?” select Open file. 21. Print the report. 22. Close out of the adobe report and logout of SDOL site.

TO SUBMIT YOUR EXPENSE REPORT TO ACCOUNTING:

NOTE: Account Stmt Closing Date – 5th of month; On-line stmt available on 7th of month 23. On your Expense Report, highlight the Munis account numbers for each purchase to assist clerks with processing. 24. Sign the Expense Report to indicate that the purchases were made by you. 25. Attach itemized receipts/invoices for each expense to the Expense Report. 26. Forward the report to your Department Head for approval. 27. Department Head will review and sign the Expense Report, approving the statement and documentation. 28. Approved Expense Reports must be submitted by the 10th of the month.

PURCHASING FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT – CREDIT CARDS Page 4 of 4

1.8 PURCHASE REQUISITION FORM – PURCHASING CARD/ACCOUNTS

Date: __September 2, 2008__ Name/Rank of Purchaser__Bernadette B., Office Manager______

Please provide a written explanation for the purchase. Please attach any supporting documentation such as written quotes, price comparisons, etc. If necessary, you may use additional paper.

Request to purchase five (5) power cords for the Datalux mobile computers. We do not have any spares at this time. Five cords have been damaged and been taken out of service since March, 2008. The cost of the product was verified, over the phone, by the sales department. Supporting documentation is attached.

Please describe the requisitioned items:

Item Description Quantity Price Total Datalux power cord, part no. 333-332 5 $75.00 $375.00

Total Cost ………………………………………………………………………………… $ __$375.00__

Please list selected vendor information:

Vendor/Business Name: Datalux Corporation______Vendor Address: 155 Aviation Dr, Winchester, VA 22602______Vendor Telephone: 888 811-0605______Vendor Contact Person/Telephone: Sales Department, www.datalux.com______

Please review both the Township’s and Department’s purchasing policy before submitting this form.

Approved Denied Reason for Denial: ______

______9/3/08______Michael C. Phy, Deputy Fire Chief Date bjb

Roadway Operations Standard Operating Procedures

November 24, 2008

Table of Contents 1.0………………………………………………………………………………….…………...... Purpose 1.1… …………………………………………………………………………Positioning and safety vests 2.0………………………………………………………………………………………...….Roadway work 2.1…………………………………………………………………………………….. Tactical procedures 2.2……………………………………………………………………………………..…Angling apparatus 2.3…………………………………………………………………………………………….Police support 2.4………………………………………………………………………………………………..White lights 2.5…………………………………………………………………………………………..…The Interstate 2.6……………………………………………………………………………………….. …….Limited sight 3.0……………………………………………………………………………….. Support agency conflicts 3.1……………………………………………………………………………………………..…MDOT help

Introduction

1.0 This procedure identifies practices for positioning Fire Department apparatus that will provide maximum protection and safety for personnel operating in or near moving traffic. It also identifies several operational considerations and approaches for individual practices to keep firefighters safe while exposed to vehicle traffic. It incorporates the usage of traffic safety vests.

1.1 Fire Department operations should strive to position apparatus and other emergency vehicles at any incident on any street, road, or highway in a manner that best protects the incident scene and work area. Such positioning shall afford protection to emergency service personnel, including tow truck operators and the motoring public from the hazards of working in or near moving traffic.

As a result of the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) part 634 ruling, standard on worker visibility, dated November 24th, 2006, ANSI/SEA 107-2004 compliant vests shall be worn when fire department operations involving non fire suppression activities are conducted on or in the right of way of any road. Subdivisions or any other residential communities are excluded.

Operating at roadway emergencies

2.0 The vast majority of fire department work involving roadway emergencies will center around traffic accidents. These accidents are more closely categorized as EMS work.

2.1 All fire department personnel are at great risk of injury or death while operating in or near moving traffic. Company Officers should be aware that there are several specific tactical procedures that should be taken to protect all emergency personnel at the incident scene including:

ƒ Establish an initial block with the first arriving fire apparatus. ƒ Never trust approaching traffic

2.2 When directing the apparatus driver to position Company Officer’s will consider the area needed to safely operate in the roadway. Angling fire department vehicles and turning the wheels of parked vehicles away from the scene are considered best practices.

2.3 Company Officers should utilize police department support as quickly as possible to provide traffic safety. Fire department members can limit exposure to vehicular traffic by aggressively handling the incident and clearing as quickly as possible.

2.4 Fire department personnel should turn off any white light source that is not essential to operating, during hours of darkness. The glare from headlights can actually hide fire department members from the view of oncoming traffic.

2.5 The practice of traveling against the flow of traffic on the Interstate is prohibited. In cases where a fire apparatus has to access the Interstate to travel with the flow of traffic, by using the exit ramp, the apparatus will proceed with extreme caution, at low speed, and travel on the shoulder of the exit ramp.

2.6 The positioning of the apparatus on the Interstate shall take into consideration all these factors that limit sight distance of the approaching traffic. They include ambient lighting, road and weather-related conditions, along with design curves, bridges, hills and over/underpasses.

Support Agency Conflicts

3.0 Law enforcement and the Michigan Department of Transportation (MDOT) have a desire to keep the traffic moving on these high-volume thoroughfares. When, in the judgment of the fire department command, it becomes essential for the safety of the operating personnel and the patients involved, any or all lanes and/or shoulders of these roadways can be completely shut down. This, however, should rarely occur and should be for as short a time as possible.

3.1 The Michigan Department of Transportation is available to support the dispatch center and any fire department needs related to communication involving roadway emergencies. They offer camera views. They dispatch courtesy patrol assistance, they advise of accidents on the roadway, and can post or update messages on freeway signs.

1. Contact information www.michigan.gov/its 2. Direct phone contact for issues listed above 1-313-965-0777 3. Camera views www.michigan.gov/drive

Rope Rescue Operations Department Policy Updated May 26, 2009

Table of Contents 1…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….Introduction 1.1 …………………………………………………………………………………………………Rope rescue defined 1.2……………………………………………………………………………………………… Tactical considerations 1.3…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. General Cautions 1.4………………………………………………………………………………….……………………….. Termination 2………………………………………………………………………………………………..…. Rope rescue system 2.1……………………………………………………………………… Rope and Equipment Inventory Procedures 2.2……………………………………………………………………………………………………...… Rappel Bag 2.3...... Belay Bag 2.4…………………………………………………………………………………………………..Harness 3……………………………………………………………………………………………………….….….. Rope Logs 4…………………………………………………………………………………………...…..Care and Maintenance 4.1……… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………Ropes 4.2………………………………………………………………………………………………...... …Inspections 4.3………………………………………………………………………………………………………….Maintenance 4.4……………………………………………………………………………………………….……………..Hardware 4.5…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Maintenance

1. INTRODUCTION

1.0 The purpose of this procedure is to establish guidelines for conducting rope rescues. Because of the infinite number of potential sites and situations that could be encountered, this procedure will not define a specific evolution to use, but will give guidelines to follow for conducting safe and effective operations.

1.1 Rope rescue is defined as any rescue attempt that requires rope and related equipment to safely gain access to, and remove patients from, hazardous geographic areas with limited access such as hills, ditches, high rise buildings, above or below grade structures; by means of a rope system.

1.2 Tactical considerations - Arrive on scene- Take command. Size-up.

1.2.1 First arrival. The first arriving company should assume command after arriving on the scene.

1.2.2 Secure responsible party or witness. Command should secure a witness as soon as possible after arriving on scene. This will help in identifying the problem and locating the victim.

1.2.3 Locate the victim. In most cases, Command will have to send a recon team to the area of the victim to determine the exact location of victim and nature of injuries. Command may wish to designate this as Recon.

1 Recon should have EMS equipment to begin to administer the first aid to the victim.

1.2.4 Assess the need for additional resources. Any on-duty member of the Macomb County Technical Rescue Team (MCTRT) shall be dispatched to the scene. The daily schedule will designate which on-duty members are part of the MCTRT. Recon should provide Command with enough information, or recommend the need for additional resources if the rescue/recovery is beyond the abilities of the resources that are present. Information that will be helpful in determining the need for additional resources would be: number of victims, location and condition of victims, estimated angle of terrain, distance to victim, and estimated time of extrication. Command should put in an early call for additional resources (Macomb County Technical Rescue Team). If MCTRT is requested, the dispatcher shall follow the MCTRT dispatch binder in the dispatch room. If additional resources are not needed after a call has been put in, Command can return those units to service.

1.2.5 Assess the hazards. Command shall designate a Safety Officer to identify all potential hazards to rescuers. Safety Officer will be responsible for securing those hazards or making all members aware of those hazards. Safety Officer shall also be responsible for assuring that all safety procedures are adhered to.

1.2.6 Decide on rescue or recovery. Recon should advise Command whether the operation will be conducted in the rescue or recovery mode. In the rescue mode, personnel assigned to Recon will be reassigned to EMS and recon will be terminated. If the operation is to be conducted in the recovery mode, command may wish to leave the victim and any related equipment in place for investigative purposes.

1.2.7 Command shall select an Entry Team Officer to effect the rescue/recovery operations. Consideration should be given to placing any on-duty member of the Macomb County Technical Rescue Team (MCTRT) to this position. Command shall be responsible for the overall scene while the Entry Officer will be responsible for the rescue/recovery efforts. The Entry Officer shall assemble the necessary personnel (rescuers, RIT, rigging, etc.) for the operation.

1.2.8 Decide on an action plan. With the recommendation from EMS, Command will have to decide on an action plan. Entry Team and Safety Officer shall be made aware of the specific action plan. The Entry Officer, in conjunction with the Safety Officer, should decide the most appropriate method to extricate the victim. This may include putting the victim in a harness or packaging them in a litter for the raising and/or lowering operation. In any case, a 15:1 safety factor shall be maintained and a double rope technique shall be used if at all possible. If possible, a separate anchor should be used for the working line and the belay line.

2 Proper care shall be taken to assure that the victim will not come out of the harness or litter used to extricate him/her. Whichever method of extrication is used, the Entry Officer shall ensure the overall safety of the raising/lowering system. Entry Officer shall designate the tasks of the individual rescuers during operation.

1.3 General Cautions

1.3.1 HEAT. Consider rotation of crews.

1.3.2 COLD. Consider effects of hypothermia on victim and rescuers.

1.3.3 RAIN/SNOW. Consider the effects of rain on the hazard profile.

1.3.4 TIME OF DAY. Is there sufficient lighting for operations extending into the night.

1.3.5 Make sure all knots are tied and dressed correctly.

1.3.6 Maintain at least 15:1 safety margin when not belayed.

1.3.7 Belay loads when safety margin is less than 15:1.

1.4 Termination

1.4.1 Personnel accountability.

1.4.2 Equipment accountability. If there has been a fatality, Entry Officer may consider leaving equipment in place for investigative purposes. This shall be agreed to by both Command and Entry Officer.

1.4.3 Restock vehicles.

1.4.4 Consider debriefing.

1.4.5 Consider news media; assign a P.I.O.

1.4.6 Consider the effect on family and friends; keep family informed.

1.4.7 Secure the scene. Return to service

2.0 The rope rescue system consists of a Rappel bag, a Belay bag and a harness. All rope and hardware shall be inspected bi-annually and after each use. Rope will be

3 inspected manually and visually. The rope will also be washed and dried as needed. Hardware is to be handled with care, no throwing, dropping, etc. Each bag has an inventory list clipped to each pocket. The pockets of both bags will be secured with a numbered security tag. If a tag is removed or missing, an inventory of that pocket will be conducted. Any time that a rope is used for any reason, its use will be documented on the rope log.

2.1 Rope and Equipment Inventory Procedures

2.1.1 Each truck will have a black and gray/silver file box at the station assigned to it that will contain the following materials. • The rope logs for the rope in the belay bag and the rappel bag. • The inventory logs for the belay bag and the rappel bag. • A collection of numbered seals to be used to seal the pockets of the bags.

2.1.2 To inventory the bags.

2.1.2.1 Check to see that the seal is intact. 2.1.2.2 Remove the contents of each pocket separately. Compare the actual contents of the pocket with the list for that pocket. Note any discrepancies and file a report.

2.1.2.3 Inspect each piece of equipment and rope (hardware and software). Ensure that each piece is in satisfactory condition. See Care and Maintenance procedures section 4.0.

2.1.2.4 Return each piece to its appropriate pocket.

2.1.2.5 Apply a numbered seal to the pocket.

2.1.2.6 Record the number under the appropriate column for that bag on the appropriate Bag Inventory Log.

2.1.2.7 Complete the rope log for the rope in the bag if the seal has been broken even if the rope was not used.

2.1.3 If a piece of equipment/rope is taken out of service.

2.1.3.1 Send it to the Battalion Chief who will forward it to the Chief of Operations.

2.1.3.2 Fill out a form 52 on it.

2.1.3.3. Note on the dry erase board at the station that it is no longer in the bag.

2.2 Rappel Bag

4

2.2.1 Main Pocket 1 - 200' lifeline 1 - Canvas edge pro 1 - Edge roller

2.2.2 Front Pocket 1- 8 Plate 1 - Brake Bar Rack 9 - Carabiners 2 - Double pulley 2 - Single pulleys 2 - Pick-off straps 1 - Rigging plate

2.2.3 Left Pocket 1- Long anchor strap with D rings 1- Short anchor strap with D rings 1- 1" Webbing – lenghts 10, 12, 15, 20' 3 -18" Edge pro 1- Carabiner

2.2.4 Right Pocket 2 - Prussiks sizes- 1, 2, 3, 5' 3 - 18" Edge pro 1 - Carabiner 1 - Load Releasing Hitch with 2 - carabiners

Sample Rappel Bag Inventory Log

2.3 Belay Bag

2.3.1 Main Pocket 1- 200' lifeline 1- Canvas edge pro 1- Edge roller

2.3.2 Front Pocket 1 - TRAVERSE, 540 Rescue Belay- Load Releasing mechanism

5 9 - Carabiners 2 - Double pulley 2 - Single pulleys 1 - Rigging plate 1 - Brake Bar Rack

2.3.3 Left Pocket 1 - Long anchor strap with D rings 1 - Short anchor strap with D rings 1 - 1" Webbing - lengths 10,12,15,20' 3 -18" Edge pro 1 - Carabiner

2.3.4 Right Pocket 2 - Prussiks sizes - 1, 2, 3, 5' 3 -18" Edge pro 1 – Carabiner

Sample Belay Bag Inventory Log

2.4 Harness

2.4.1 Inspect the harness to be certain that all buckles straps and webbing are in serviceable condition. 2.4.2 Complete harness log when finished and returning the harness to service.

Sample harness log

6

3.0 Rope logs Keeping track of the rope's history is the best way to know whether the rope is in good condition or not. When you get a new rope, inspect it carefully before placing it in service. The rope log should be completed every time the seal on the bag is broken. When ever a life safety rope is used, whether in training or during an actual rescue/emergency operation it must be logged. Note the use made of the rope and any suspected damage such as a shock load, observed fraying, or possible damage by rock-fall. It is recommended that the rope is inspected each time it is used, even if there was no record of possible damage. The following data will be logged for each entry.

3.1.1 Date: The date that the rope log is filled in.

3.1.2 Incident/Location: The incident number or the location where the hose was used. Examples: Station 5, Bud Park or water tank on 18 mile etc.

3.1.3 How Used: Details such as for rappelling, as a belay line or as part of a mechanical advantage system.

3.1.4 Possible Damage: List any factors that could have possibly damaged the rope. Details such as shock loading, excessive loads, exposure to high heat, contact with chemicals, heavy objects falling or impacting the rope, abrasion or cuts etc.

3.1.5 Inspection Results: Note any possible indicators of wear or damage and whether it is in service or out of service.

3.1.6 Sign In: Place your seniority # and initials in the box.

Sample Rope Log

7

4.0 Care and Maintenance Rope rescue equipment care and maintenance guidelines The purpose is to establish a guideline for the care, maintenance, and storage of rope and related rope rescue equipment.

4.1 Ropes

4.1.1 Care: Observe the following points

• Avoid cutting a rope. • Do not leave knots in a rope. Except Prusiks • Use the correct size pulleys. • Avoid shock-loading. • Avoid stepping or walking on rope. • Avoid passing a rope over a sharp edge or rough surface. If it is necessary to do this, protect the rope. • Avoid contact with contaminants such as grease, oil, gasoline, hydraulic fluid, acids, alkalis or other chemicals. • Avoid hauling ropes through mud, sand or grit etc. • Avoid friction damage caused by the movement of rope over rope or webbing. Excessive speed through friction devices. • Appropriately label damaged or defective ropes and remove from service immediately.

4.2 Inspection

Inspect all rescue ropes before and during use. Conduct a through inspection after each use by visually examining the rope and by thoroughly feeling the rope between your thumb and fore finger.

8

4.2.1 Visual examination: check for the following signs.

• Discolouration of the filaments—Any changes in the original colour of the rope filaments could indicate contamination by chemicals. • Melting—Any smooth areas could indicate the rope has been damaged by heat fusion. • White filaments—Where the sheath has been damaged, the white core filaments may protrude. • Size uniformity—The rope may be damaged by mechanical impacts or over stressing. This may be evidenced by a change in the obvious shape and diameter of the rope. • Abrasion—Excessive signs of abrasion may indicate the breaking of a sheath bundle and localized weakness. • White Powder- If a white powder or dust falls out from between the mantle fibers (jacket) when the rope is manipulated it may be an indication of a breakdown of the inner fibers.

• Thoroughly feel the rope: check for these additional signs.

• Stiffened filaments—This indicates possible overloading or contamination. • Changes in diameter— A bight of rope should have uniform radius around the bend. Depressed irregularities in the rope diameter (soft spots) may indicate core damage, while increases in the apparent diameter may be due to severe twisting of the core, or the protrusion of core filaments through the sheath. • Contamination—Presence of dirt or other materials.

4.3 Maintenance

4.3.1 Washing Ropes.

Wash ropes when dirty to reduce the effect of grit abrasion on both the rope and ascent equipment. Chain the rope to prevent tangling. Wash ropes in a washing machine, but set the machine on the cold or warm setting (never on hot), and do not use washing agents or fabric softeners. Where help is needed to clean a particularly dirty rope, refer to the rope manufacturer’s specifications.

The washed rope can be pulled under very slight tension through an in-line descender to remove excess water.

Dry the rope in a cool, shady area with good ventilation.

4.3.2 CMC washing recommendations Chain the rope before putting it in the washing machine to prevent tangles and knots. Run your washing machine through a rinse

9 cycle with plain water to remove any residue of detergent or bleaches from the previous use. Put the rope and Lifeline Cleaner into the machine and let it start to agitate. After a few minutes, turn the washer off and let the rope soak 25 to 30 minutes. Check the rope for any extra dirty spots and use a nylon brush to clean those spots. The Lifeline Cleaner will remove most of the dirt and grease. Let the washer finish its normal cycle. During the rinse cycle, add a small amount of Downy fabric softener. Three ounces is enough for a full washer. Use less softener for smaller amounts of water. The fabric softener replaces the lubricant in the rope lost during use and washing. This lubricant is put on the fibers by the nylon manufacturer and lets the fibers slide when the rope is loaded and unloaded. Without the lubricant, the fibers tend to cut each other, reducing the strength of the rope. The SMC Rope Washer works well for ropes caked in mud. It is available in sizes for 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch rope. The Rope Washer connects to a faucet or a hose, and the rope is pulled through it. Dry the rope by hanging it out of direct sunlight. Leaving it chained makes the rope easier to handle. When the rope is ready to go back into service, it should be inspected again and noted in the rope log.

4.4 Hardware

Care: Observe the following points

4.4.1 Avoid dropping any hardware. 4.4.2 Avoid getting grit, sand, mud or other contaminates in moving parts. 4.4.3 Do not use lubricants unless specified by the manufacture and than only those recommended. 4.4.4 Avoid loading hardware in a direction other than the one it was designed for. 4.4.5 Do not overload or shock load the hardware.

Visual examination:

Look for obvious signs of damage, some examples are:

4.4.6 Bent components such as

4.4.6.1 Carabiners that are twisted and do not lay flat. 4.4.6.2 Carabiners where the gate does not line up properly 4.4.6.3 Pulley with deformed plates 4.4.6.4 Pulley with deformed sheave (wheel) 4.4.6.5 Out of round holes (not original size or shape) 4.4.6.6 Shafts or pins

10 4.4.7 Cracks in any metal part. 4.4.8 Excessive wear 4.4.9 Missing parts

Problems that may not be visible:

4.4.10 parts that bind, threads that are to tight 4.4.11 pins that will not go in or come out as designed 4.4.12 holes that do not line up as they should 4.4.13 spring loaded parts where the spring is not working properly 4.4.14 locks or cams that do not grab as designed

Make sure that all moving parts move freely without grinding, wobbling or sticking.

4.5 Maintenance of hardware

Clean off all dirt and grime by rinsing with clean water. If necessary use a mild detergent and rinse. Allow the part to dry or hand dry if necessary. Follow the manufactures recommendations for additional instructions.

11 Supervision & progressive discipline April 17, 2009

Table of Contents 1.0…….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………Introduction 2.0………………………………………………………. …………………………………….…Employee Counseling Notice 3.0……………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………Coaching 4.0…………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………..…Warning 5.0…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………...…Reprimand 6.0……………………………………………………………………………………………………...…Progressive Discipline

INTRODUCTION

1.0 To operate an organization such as the Charter Township of Clinton Department of Fire/Rescue/EMS in a safe, orderly and effective manner certain rules and regulations are necessary. It is the desire of the Department to exercise a style of management that creates an attitude and organizational climate in which individuals will willingly conform to established standards, rules and regulations. Supervisors are expected to seek to build in the Department a sense of personal responsibility and self-discipline. We are fortunate in the Clinton Township Fire Department that most personnel do recognize that acceptance of some limitations on their conduct and performance is necessary to achieve their goals, and the goals of the Department.

1.1 All employees in the Township of Clinton Fire Department are members of a team working together to provide the services to which our citizenry are entitled. Any employee who fails to follow the necessary rules and regulations governing job performance and conduct is not only failing to do their duty to the Department and for the public, but is adversely affecting the image of all public service employees

1.2 Any large organization must have rules and regulations and standards of performance to insure that efficient and effective services are provided in an orderly manner. Such rules, regulations and standards are not adopted to restrict employee rights, but rather to provide working conditions, which will assure fair, equitable and consistent treatment of employees. The following guidelines for corrective action are structured to provide for equality of treatment in discipline. However, in recognition of the fact that the circumstances of each infraction or occurrence may differ in many respects from the circumstances in somewhat similar situations, the Department retains the right to treat each occurrence on an individual basis and without creating a precedent for other cases which may arise in the future. Examples given in any rule do not limit the generality of the rule. The guidelines for disciplinary action are not to be construed as a limitation upon the retained rights of the Department but are merely a guide. The guide provides recommended penalties to apply for specific offenses. However, a more severe penalty may be issued than that which appears in the guide, if it is felt necessary in the best interest of the Department. It is recognized that violations of rules and regulations, or standards of performance in the Department, and at operations that affect safety, health and/or welfare of citizens, may necessitate more serious disciplinary action than contained in these guidelines. . 1.3 An important aspect of discipline is that each individual know what, how and why he/she is supposed to do his/her job; he/she know the management policies and rules and regulations, and he/she should be systematically instructed to meet performance standards. Rules and performance standards should be fair, should be attainable with reasonable effort, and should be consistent from job to job. The attached guidelines for disciplinary action are direct towards communicating general rules, regulations, and standards to all personnel.

1.4 Even under ideal conditions, some individuals may occasionally violate rules and regulations, exhibit unacceptable behavior, or fail to meet performance standards. In accordance with the Department’s concept of positive, corrective discipline, only minor warnings are assigned for minor offenses under these guidelines. For the average employee such minor action is sufficient to prevent a repetition. If minor offenses occur again and again, the consequence becomes more severe. A very serious offense may bring immediate suspension and/or discharge.

1.5 It is Management’s belief that the guidelines for disciplinary action are fair, reasonable and attainable and will benefit employees of the Department and our residents by insuring a better work climate, fair treatment of employees and an increased level of public service to the community. Coaching, warnings and reprimands are the direct responsibility of all Officers in the Fire Department. . 1.6 Coaching is a teaching method that gives employees a clear understanding of what their job consists of, what is expected of them as Firefighters and Officers and what they should be doing to better themselves and the Fire Department in their day to day activities. Coaching is best utilized for Level One type offenses. Coaching sessions may or may not be documented. This is a decision made by the initiating Officer. If the initiating Officer feels that the coaching issue warrants creating a written record, a department form is provided. A warning is also a corrective measure and may be used for Level Two type offenses that are viewed as a more serious deficiency. Warnings are designed to be sufficient to prevent a repetition. Reprimands are given for infractions of an even more serious nature, like multiple offenses of the same matter, or Level Three type offenses. Warnings and reprimands are to be recorded on the appropriate department form and forwarded to the next level of supervision. The supervising Officer will review this documentation, make additional comments on the matter if required, initial it, and forward the record

1.7 The last part of this guide, 6.0, is divided into three (3) levels that reflect the seriousness of the offenses. In each level and for each infraction, consideration will be given to the severity of the offense, the actual or potential cost or damage involved, time interval between infractions, the length and quality of service records and any other pertinent matters. In imposing disciplinary action on a current infraction or offense, the Department will not take into consideration any prior infraction of department policy or Township rules that occurred more than two (2) years previously. Where combinations of offenses have occurred, whether at the same or different levels of offense, the Department may combine the penalties in a cumulative manner, as its judgment is warranted.

1.8 In addition to the procedure for disciplinary action and the offenses contained herein, the Department retains the right to affect discipline based on other rules and regulations and codes of conduct. Specifically, the Charter Township of Clinton Personnel Policies and other pertinent rules and/or policies may also serve as the basis for disciplinary action.

EMPLOYEE COUNSELING NOTICE

2.0 The Employee Counseling Notice is a tool to document communication between any supervisor and subordinate for three types of interaction. The form may be used to document a Supervisors effort to Coach, Warn or Reprimand.

The form needs to be completed in its entirety.

Print Employee Name, Badge Number and Date form is created.

Type of interaction (Check One) Coaching, Warning or Reprimand

Reason for Counseling Notice Choose One or Describe Other

Summary of Unacceptable Behavior Describe specific details relating to Reason for Counseling Notice

Previous Warnings Can be verbal or written

Employee Statement Allow employee to respond in writing

Signatures Employee and Supervisor sign the Notice

2.1 The purpose of creating an Employee Counseling Notice is to document anything you have done in the course of your duties to show at a later date, if anything were ever called into question, what you did about it. The need to document your actions depends on your level of supervision or tolerance. The more documentation – the less personal exposure you face as a supervisor.

COACHING

3.0 When coaching is required, it will be administered in a prompt, fair and private manner. An Employee Counseling Notice form may be completed to clearly define the expectations of a coaching session.

3.0.1 During any coaching session the subordinate is given feed back on his/her performance which occurs at any time following any incident, periodic incidents or, if prudent, on a daily basis. The supervisor may give positive and negative aspects, can express dissatisfaction with the performance or conduct with that individual and describe ways to correct these shortfalls. This is to be done in a coaching, non-threatening or belittling manner and should best be thought of and described as teaching. The supervisor should welcome feedback from the subordinate.

3.1 Coaching is an informal communication where the conversation is private between any supervisor and subordinate, within their respective chain of command. Coaching is used for minor infractions when an Employee needs to be reminded of policies and/or procedures for conduct unbecoming of Clinton Township Fire Department personnel. Examples include the little things that may become bigger issues if left unaddressed. Perhaps you may feel an employee is not taking you seriously when given direction.

• Apparatus checkout sheets • Missing computer entries • Repeatedly ignored tasks • Excessive speed while driving

3.1.1 Whenever the Employee Counseling Notice is used for coaching the initiating officer will keep the only copy. The officer is responsible to maintain the confidentiality of the form. This is their documentation of a private conversation.

3.1.2 The supervisor may choose to destroy the Employee Counseling Notice when an employee satisfies all of the criteria or after two years without a repeated occurrence. After working with a member of the department, and the performance is still unsatisfactory, the supervisor may choose to issue a written warning. In cases like this a supervisor can submit the Employee Counseling Notice to support the history of the matter.

WARNING

4.0 A Warning is a formal documented communication where the conversation is private between any supervisor and subordinate, within their respective chain of command. A Warning is necessary when an employee has a habitual performance problem not resolved through Coaching or a serious violation of the Contract, Rules and Regulations, SOP, SOG or Department Order. The Employee Counseling Notice is used when a Warning becomes necessary.

4.0.1 The purpose of the formal conversation and documentation is to correct a performance problem by discussing it with the employee and submit a signed Employee Counseling Notice through the chain of command for review and action.

4.0.2 There are several procedures to be followed whenever a Warning is created:

Before the meeting:

1. Prepare for the meeting by researching all applicable Contract, Rules and Regulations, SOP, SOG, Department Orders or any other pertinent material to complete the Employee Counseling Notice.

2. Complete the Employee Counseling Notice.

3. Arrange to meet the employee privately (free of distractions).

During the meeting:

1. Talk to the employee privately (free of distractions).

2. Use the Employee Counseling Notice to conduct the meeting.

3. State the problem in terms of desired performance and actual performance.

4. Tell the employee the specific change in his/her performance that you expect.

5. Refer to previous casual conversations about the problem if applicable.

6. Give the employee the chance to respond or explain.

7. Have the employee sign the form to confirm that he/she knows exactly what you expect.

8. Indicate your confidence in his/her ability to perform properly.

9. Give the employee a copy of the signed form with original signatures.

10. Monitor the employee so the performance is corrected.

After the meeting:

1. Forward the copy of the Employee Counseling Notice with original signatures to the Operations Chief through your chain of command. The Employee Counseling Notice will only be reviewed by personnel in the chain of command prior to reaching the Operations Chief.

2. Monitor the employee’s performance to make sure that the problem has been corrected.

3. The Fire Chief will be the only entity to determine if disciplinary actions are necessary. Files kept in the Operations Chief’s office are considered unofficial and will protect the privacy of both the officer and employee. Official files are kept by Civil Service.

REPRIMAND

5.0 Coaching or Warnings will not be appropriate in all instances. Where coaching and warnings have failed to achieve a change in behavior, a reprimand is appropriate. In the case where a supervisor is citing a re-occurring problem then the format laid out for a warning should be followed and the corresponding box should be checked on the Notice.

5.1 Some offenses are so serious that a reprimand is warranted, as a first step. In these instances the Supervisor should ensure the safety of everyone involved. Any officer, acting within the Chain of Command, is authorized to relieve a subordinate if they are deemed unfit for duty. If the infractions or events are witnessed, a supervisor may direct employees that written accounts be provided. They should also immediately notify his/her Supervisor. These incidents require the immediate and independent documentation of the events and notification of his/her Supervisor. These instances may include but are not limited to:

• Insubordination

• Fighting

• Theft

• Willful destruction of Township property

5.2 Some offenses described in our Rules and Regulations require a Supervisor to immediately notify the Police Department and his/her Supervisor for further investigation. These instances would include:

• Possession, sale or use of narcotics on Township property

• Possession of illegal weapons

• Reporting for work in an intoxicated condition

Our number one priority is Life Safety. When in doubt, make sure our employees and our citizens are safe and seek guidance from a supervising Officer.

5.3 Once the situation is stabilized, there are several procedures to be followed whenever a Reprimand is created:

Have the employee(s) complete an independent statement of all events relevant to the Reprimand.

Have the employee sign the documentation.

The Supervising Officer shall complete the Employee Counseling Notice to document their actions during the reprimand and attach the independent statements from involved employees.

Forward the copy of the Employee Counseling Notice with original signatures to the Operations Chief through your chain of command. The Employee Counseling Notice will be reviewed by personnel in the chain of command prior to reaching the Operations Chief.

The Fire Chief will be the only entity to determine if disciplinary actions are necessary. Files kept in the Operations Chief’s office are considered unofficial and will protect the privacy of both the officer and employee. Official files are kept by Civil Service.

PROGRESSIVE DISCIPLINE

6.0 Level 1 Offense

1. Failure to comply with Fire Department Policy and Procedures where the mistakes do not endanger life, property or equipment.

2. Discourtesy to persons of the public, or persons representing other agencies the fire department comes in contact with in the course of performing duty.

3. Violating a safety rule where the violation does not endanger the life of others, or property or equipment.

Level 2 Offense

1. Errors, omissions, or mistakes due to carelessness that result in expense to the Township.

2. Failure to comply with Fire Department safety policy and procedures where the violation endangers the life of others, property or equipment.

3. Failure to return from an authorized leave of absence.

4. Insubordination by refusal to perform work assigned, or fails to comply with written or verbal instructions of the supervisory force.

5. Officers or acting officers who knowingly fail to take official cognizance of violations.

6. Failure to keep the department notified of proper address and telephone number.

7. Failure to report an accident of personal injury in which the department member was involved while on the job, on the day the accident or personal injury occurred.

8. The unauthorized use of any Township or Department property.

9. Threatening, intimidating, coercing or interfering with fellow employees or supervision at anytime, including abusive language.

Level 3 Offense

1. Neglect to obey any authorized orders of a superior during an emergency operation.

2. Knowingly falsifying personal or Department records, including employment applications, accident or medical records or reports, purchase orders, time sheets, or any other report, record or application.

3. Provoking or instigating a fight or fighting at any time with a subordinate or supervisor while on duty.

4. Deliberately misusing, destroying or damaging any property or property of any Employee or of the public.

5. Theft or removal from department locations without proper authorization or any Department property or the property of any Department Employees.

6. Unlawfully obtaining money or other valuable consideration by use of Department position.

7. Destroying evidence or giving false testimony.

8. Leaving work post during assigned work before being relieved by a supervisor or relieving department Employee where operations are continuous and/or affect public safety and health.

9. Willful violation of written rules, regulations, policies and procedures.

10. The use and/or sale of illegal drugs, alcoholic beverages and/or narcotics while on duty.

Offenses, Occurrences, and Guidelines

Level 1 1st Offense: Verbal discussion identifying concerns 2nd Offense: Written account including direction for improvement 3rd Offense: Up to and including 30 calendar day suspension 4th Offense: Up to and including demotion or termination

Level 2 1st Offense: Written account including direction for improvement 2nd Offense: Up to and including 30 calendar day suspension 3rd Offense: Up to and including demotion or termination

Level 3 1st Offense: Up to and including termination

Employee Counseling Notice

Employee Name Badge Number Date Bill Brown 23 July 4, 2009

Type of Interaction † Coaching † Warning : Reprimand

Reason for Counseling † Attendance † Safety : Tardiness/Quit Early † Policy Violation † Insubordination † Rule Violation † Work Quality † Work Quantity † Working on Personal Matters † Other:

Summary of Unacceptable Behavior This summary has been prepared for you as a result of a situation or pattern of unacceptable behavior. We need your immediate cooperation to correct this. Any further occurrences may lead to further action up to and including termination.

Date(s) of Occurrence(s) Time Location July 2, 2009 0800 hrs 21250 15 Mile Road

Summary: Firefighter Brown you called in and used sick time. Your sick time was scheduled until 1500 hrs. You did not call to extend your absence and reported for duty 30 minutes later than you requested. Previous Warnings

Date Type By Whom N/A N/A N/A

† Additional Warnings or Information on Separate Sheet

† I agree with the above summary ; I disagree with the above summary because Employees Statement: I called the dispatch center and reported to Firefighter Jones, who failed to notify the Battalion Chief. *Please use back of page if necessary

Bill Brown John Smith Lt. Employee Signature Department Representative Title

Date: July 4, 2009

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICE #____101______INQUIRES EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Be advised that any questions or concerns pertaining to the office administration an employee may have, including, but not limited to, the following;

a. Computer questions and problems b. Personal business days c. Sick days d. Station office supplies (pencils, pens, staples, stationary, etc.) e. Telephone bills f. Payroll discrepancies g. Training records

The chain-of-command shall be followed. All inquires will be made through the Battalion Commanders.

The Battalion Commander will then, in turn, direct any inquires to the Fire Department Administration Offices, the Fire Administrative Supervisor or the Computer Systems Manager.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: LOG BOOK ENTRIES #____102______EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 14, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

STATION LOG BOOKS:

The following shall be included but not limited to:

Personnel: Each person on duty at a station and his/her duties i.e. John Doe E4 Driver/Engineer

Incidents: (For your Station) Incident number Time out & Time in Address or location of incident Type of incident (jaws, dwelling fire, etc.)

OT, Upgrade: Include all information about overtime, upgrades, time trade, PB time, etc.

Training: A brief description of training and location of same.

Repairs: A brief description of any repairs/maintenance to vehicles or station. Include name of business and time in and out.

BATTALION COMMANDER LOG BOOK:

The following shall be included but not limited to:

Personnel: Each person on duty at all stations and his/her duties. Watch schedule at HQ

Incidents: No longer necessary to log. Incidents may be referenced in the dispatch program and will be printed and placed in the “Incident Log” binder at the end of each month.

OT, Upgrade: Include all information about overtime, upgrades, time trade, PB time, etc. for entire shift

Apparatus: List any apparatus out of service or returned to service

Note: Both the Station Logs and the Battalion Chief’s Log shall account for all personnel for the entire 24 hours period. Include any important information to be passed-on to other platoons. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: MINIMUM MANPOWER #____103b______EFFECTIVE DATE: MAY 12, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

A minimum of twenty-three (23) personnel shall be assigned on duty each day. A minimum of five (5) sworn Officers will be included in this minimum. Upgrades will be used when needed as per contract. Personnel shall be assigned as follows:

TWENTY-THREE (23) PERSONNEL:

Battalion Commander (Bat 1) - One (1) Officer, assigned to all five (5) stations

Watchman - One (1) firefighter shall be assigned to the Watchroom

Engine 1 - Three (3) personnel, with a minimum of one (1) Officer

Engine 2 - Three (3) personnel, with a minimum of one (1) Officer

Rescue 1/Truck 1 - Three (3) personnel, with a minimum of one (1) Officer

Engine 3 - Three (3) personnel, with a minimum of one (1) Officer

Engine 4 - Three (3) personnel, with a minimum of one (1) Officer

Rescue 4/Truck 4 - Three (3) personnel, with a minimum of one (1) Officer

Engine 5 - Three (3) personnel, with a minimum of one (1) Officer

A sworn Officer in a light duty position shall be counted toward the five (5) Officer minimum. Additionally, a probationary employee in a light duty position shall not be counted toward the 23 firefighter minimum manpower requirement. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: ABSENTEE CALL-INS #____104______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 8, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

When Dispatch receives a telephone call regarding a member of this department being ill or injured and unable to report for scheduled duty, he will record same on Watchroom log sheet and immediately notify the Battalion Commander.

If the caller indicates he will be off for an extended period of time or the illness/injury is extraordinary in nature including, but not limited to, broken bones, strokes, heart attack or job stress, the call will be forwarded to the Battalion Commander to make sure all pertinent information is recorded.

If any employee calls in sick due to "job stress", or experiences the same while on duty, the Battalion Commander will immediately direct the employee to report to the Township’s current health clinic, Corporate Occupational Health Services, for an evaluation.

The Fire Chief or a Deputy Chief will be notified of any illness/injury that is long- term or serious in nature.

The following procedure will be used by all Fire Department personnel when they are calling in for any absence from duty:

All personnel are to make an effort, as in the past, to notify the Watchman at Fire Department Headquarters prior to 0700 hours, so that the appropriate steps can be taken to replace personnel, if needed.

The Watchman will then notify the Battalion Commander so that the appropriate paperwork can be filled out and passed on to the Administration office prior to the start of their work day.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PERSONNEL / APPARATUS #____105b______INSUFFICIENCIES EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 17, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Insufficient Personnel Available-

When the number of personnel on duty falls below the prescribed minimum of 23, the following will take place after all attempts to hire off-duty personnel for overtime has been exhausted:

1) A Truck/Rescue company will be taken out of service, with remaining company personnel distributed to Engine companies (or other companies, as needed) until such time as minimum manpower returns to required levels.

2) The Fire Chief of a Deputy Fire Chief will be notified immediately.

3) Continued attempts will be made to fill any vacancy or vacancies.

Insufficient Number of Apparatus Available-

When the number of Engines available for service falls to 4, the following will take place after attempts for emergency repairs have been exhausted:

1) An Engine company (normally E4) will be taken out of service with company personnel distributed to the Rescue company (or distributed among other companies in the event the Rescue is not in service) until such time as the number of in-service Engines returns to a level of five.

2) Continued attempts will be made to secure repairs to out-of-service apparatus.

3) Running procedures for fires are maintained, dispatching the closest and proper number of Engines, Trucks and Rescues available. Medical calls will be handled by the Rescue Company in the missing Engine Company’s area.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #105b Page 2 of 2

When the number of Trucks available for service falls to 1, the following will take place after attempts for emergency repairs have been exhausted:

1) Truck/Rescue company personnel will be assigned to the Rescue Company until such time as the Truck returns to service.

2) Continued attempts will be made to secure repairs to out-of-service apparatus.

3) Running procedures for fires are adjusted to dispatch Rescue and the remaining Truck on all fire incidents.

When the number of Rescues available for service falls to 1, the following will take place after attempts for emergency repairs have been exhausted:

1) Truck/Rescue company personnel will be assigned to the Truck Company until such time as the Rescue returns to service.

2) Continued attempts will be made to secure repairs to out-of-service apparatus.

3) Running procedures for fires are adjusted to dispatch this Truck and the remaining Rescue on all fire incidents.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: APPARATUS/VEHICLE #106_ ACCIDENTS EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Anytime an accident occurs which involves a Fire Department vehicle (or may be witnessed by on-duty Fire Department personnel), concern for the safety and well-being of our personnel and the civilians is to be of primary importance. Injuries resulting from such motor vehicle accidents are to be given a priority status over other matters, including an incident to which an apparatus may have been responding (unless the response was to a known life-threatening situation).

When involved in an accident or when witnessing an injury accident, Fire Department personnel will take whatever action may be necessary to secure the accident scene and protect those involved from exposure to further injury.

All of the following actions are to occur anytime a Fire Department vehicle is involved in a motor vehicle accident (those with a * apply to injury accidents witnessed by Fire Department personnel):

*1 - Company Officer is to notify Dispatch of accident;

*2- Medical attention is to be provided to injured persons;

*3- Dispatch to request ambulance, if needed;

*4- Dispatch to notify Police Department of locality where accident occurred;

*5- Dispatch to notify Incident Commander of original incident, if there is one, of delayed response. If vehicle was not responding/returning on an incident, a new incident report number is to be established;

*6- Company Officer shall complete a NFIRS report for any injury accident they witness or an accident that involves a department vehicle. The report shall reference the companies original response.

7- Dispatch to notify Battalion Commander;

8- Dispatch to notify Deputy Chief/Operations;

9- Dispatch to call for towing company, if needed, for FIRE DEPARTMENT VEHICLE ONLY;

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #106 Page 2 of 2

10- Battalion Commander shall perform visual inspection of Fire Department vehicle involved. If there is any question at all with regard to the safety and serviceability of the vehicle, it is to be placed out-of-service until an inspection is performed by a certified mechanic;

11- Company Officer on Fire Department vehicle involved in accident to complete a separate, hand-written report on the accident and turn it in to the Deputy Chief/Operations;

12- Driver of Fire Department vehicle involved in accident to file a separate, hand-written report on the accident and turn in to the Deputy Chief/ Operations

13- Injured Fire Department personnel are to fill out Form #15 “Employee Accident Report” and forward to Fire Department Administration and also complete Firefighter Casualty Module of NFIRS report.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: UNSCHEDULED STATION # 107 CHANGES EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

When members of this department are required to change station assignments as the result of others calling in sick, taking PB's, etc., they are required to report to their new station assignment by 0800 hours, provided they are notified to do so no later than the day/evening before their regularly scheduled duty tour. If an individual is not at his new assignment by 0800 hours, he will be considered late or A.W.O.L. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION # 109 (PID) EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

PURPOSE

The primary purpose of this procedure is to provide a mechanism for incident commanders to account for all personnel on an emergency scene and, in the event of disaster, to be able to have rapid access to vital information to aid an injured firefighter. Other subsequent justification for this procedure is; to provide incident commanders with a viable means of tracking any members of fire departments that may be working on/or in complex and threatening emergency incidents, and to be in compliance with any standard or law that demands an accountability system for emergency responders.

PROCEDURE

Each member of the department shall be provided a laminated personal identification (PID) card (green in color) that will be attached to a vehicle identification card (VID) (gray in color). These cards are to be in compliance with the guidance and examples as set by the Macomb County Fire Chiefs Association.

In the morning at the beginning of each shift, company officers are to collect the PID from each member of the company and attach them to the VID. This VID is to remain in the cab in front of the officer's seat, visible so that it could be readily obtained by another officer if needed.

The incident commander may at any time, when assigning companies to various functions/locations, direct the company officer to report to command and hand over his/her company's PID cards. At mutual aid runs, whether giving or receiving assistance, incident commanders are strongly encouraged to employ the PID system to better account for all personnel on the emergency scene. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: FIRE DEPARTMENT #_____111b______ARM INSIGNIAS EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Each probationary member of this department will initially receive eight (8) arm insignias/patches. At any time, additional patches can be purchased, for a nominal fee, from the administrative offices.

For all employees, the insignias shall be displayed as follows:

- Two (2) insignias per shirt, blouse or coat (one (1) on each arm), one (1") inch below shoulder seam, centered on the sleeve

- They are to be worn on each Class “A” and Class “B” shirt, dress uniform coat (blouse) and department winter jacket

- They are to be only worn on department approved attire

Tips for application and care:

- It is recommended by the manufacturer that the patches be soaked in warm water overnight before they are sown on to discourage any shrinkage or puckering

- Professional application is recommended

- Avoid the use of chlorine bleach when washing the garment to prevent fading

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: RELEASING INFORMATION #_____112______TO THE MEDIA OR PUBLIC EFFECTIVE DATE: SEPTEMBER 26, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

When speaking to members of the media regarding an incident, or when information is requested about an EMS patient, the following guidelines shall be used:

OVERVIEW: Representatives of the media will be given full respect at all times. It is better for the information to be generated by our department, rather than the media creating their own. Only designated personnel will make statements, and if patient related, HIPAA requirements greatly restrict the information that can be released.

OFF THE FIREGROUND: Any inquiries or communications from the media shall be directed to the Battalion Commander of the day or to the Administrative Offices.

If the Battalion Commander, Battalion Chief, Operations Chief, Deputy Chief or Chief feels the situation warrants, he may redirect the inquiries to the Incident Commander.

ON THE FIREGROUND: The same order as above should be followed. In certain instances, a Public Information Officer (PIO) will be designated by the Chief, Operations Chief or Deputy Chief. In their absence, the Incident Commander may designate a PIO.

GENERAL RULES: At no time should information be given out to the media by a Firefighter (unless directed to do so by the Battalion Commander or one of the Chiefs).

At all times, the fire department representative being interviewed should stick to the known facts and disregard any personal feelings.

Be cautious of using terms like "Arson" or "Suspicious". It is more appropriate to say “under investigation”.

No derogatory statements shall be made at any time about anyone.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #112 Page 2 of 2

EMS INFORMATION REQUESTS:

In order to ensure patient confidentiality and comply with HIPAA requirements, the following procedures are to be followed by all Fire Department Personnel:

Given the sensitive nature of the information, personnel are instructed to err on the side of confidentiality toward the patient. If unsure of what information to release, personnel should issue a “no comment” and refer the interested parties to the Fire Chief’s office.

EMS RESPONSE: Fire Department Personnel are not to release any information to the media pertaining to EMS calls. This includes incident location, patient name, age, sex, race, types of injuries, circumstances pertaining to the call, care given or hospital transported to.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENTS: A fire department spokesperson may provide general information including gross number of patients. No information may be released that could identify a specific patient.

SPECIAL RESCUE CALLS (including automobile extrications): Information may be released by a fire department spokesperson pertaining to the rescue/extrication. Information pertaining to the patient(s) and/or their condition may not be released.

FIRES WITH VICTIMS: General information pertaining to the fire may be released by a fire department spokesperson, however, specifics about the condition and treatment of the patient(s) may not be released.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DISBURSING PAYCHECKS # 114 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

It has long been the policy of Clinton Township that payday for the Fire Department is based on twenty-six (26) paydays per calendar year; every other Friday. In most of the various other departments of the Township paychecks are distributed the afternoon of Friday paydays so that employees would have their checks upon leaving work at 5:00 p.m., with the exception of the Police and Fire Departments. It is obvious that the above procedure for distributing paychecks which the "front office" uses may create a hardship for Fire Department employees due to the hours we work (24 hours). In addition, because of the change of shifts at 0800 hours on Friday, a lack of communication between Fire Department officers, Kelly days, and the last-minute changes of personnel for station assignments, the paychecks are not being made available to the men in a consistent, timely manner. Therefore, this office is establishing the following policy: A. The paychecks will be picked up by the Chief, or his designated representative, at the Township Treasurer's Office on Thursday afternoon preceding Friday paydays and made available to the Battalion Commander of the day at Headquarters Station #4 no later than 1700 hours.

B. The Battalion Commander of the day at Headquarters will then sort the checks by name and station the particular individual is assigned to that given Thursday, or for the next shift coming on at 0800 hours Friday, and either he or his designee will deliver all the checks to the various stations in a timely fashion. The Battalion Commander, or his designee, may use a Fire Department vehicle to deliver same. C. Any member of the Fire Department or immediate member of his family whom he designates may pick up his paycheck any time after 1700 hours Thursday at the appropriate station. However, it must be understood that at no time are any of these checks to be cashed at a bank, party store, bar lounge, or any other place of business willing to do so, until after 0900 hours Friday morning (payday). D. If a Fire Department member requests personally, or by phone, on Thursday before 1700 hours, to have his check left at, or delivered to a particular station as a matter of convenience for him to pick up same, the request shall be honored. E. At no time shall the disbursing or withholding of a member's paycheck become a form of reprimand or harassment. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PLATOON ASSIGNMENTS #______116_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: SEPTEMBER 26, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

The Suppression Division of the Fire Department shall consist of suppression personnel who are to be distributed as follows:

1- One Battalion Chief will be assigned to each platoon.

2- Two Captains will be assigned to each of two platoons, and one platoon will have three Captains.

3- Five (5) Lieutenants will be assigned to each of two platoons, and one platoon will have four (4) Lieutenants.

4- Firefighters (including probationary personnel) will be assigned to each platoon utilizing the seniority grouping parameters.

Administrative decisions to change platoons of personnel in the Suppression Division could occur when one of the following conditions (not inclusive) exists:

- A vacancy occurs due to a retirement, promotion, etc.

- An imbalance occurs with regard to the number of positions in a rank on each platoon

- Distribution of Officers or probationary employees dictates such.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: COMPANY STAFFING #______117______EFFECTIVE DATE: SEPTEMBER 26, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Designated permanent staffing assignments shall be made by Battalion Commanders on the basis of companies. While being permanent (usually annually under normal circumstances), these assignments do not preclude temporary changes in assignments due to Nightwatch duties, upgrades, or accommodation of probationary employees or otherwise to meet department needs (i.e. promotions, team assignments).

All companies shall have a sworn Officer or the senior-most firefighter in the company, upgraded to Acting Lieutenant.

On each platoon, the Firefighter with the least amount of seniority (does not include probationary employees) shall be designated as the “Floater” and will be assigned to fill vacancies as needed. (See SOP #302b.)

Probationary employees will be placed on a one-year schedule which will rotate their assignments through each of the companies in a specified order. To accommodate these assignments, it may be necessary to temporarily displace an assigned firefighter.

ENGINE/TRUCK/RESCUE COMPANIES

Each truck/rescue company will have a minimum of an Officer and two Firefighters assigned to it.

Each engine company will have a minimum of an Officer and two firefighters assigned to it, with at least one of the firefighters being a paramedic.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: CHAPLAINCY PROGRAM # 118 EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 1, 2001 Number of Pages: Page 1 of 2

Fire departments, by tradition, have had someone in the role of Chaplain since the beginning of the organized fire service. In many departments, a local representative of the clergy has been appointed as the Chaplain to assist in emergency situations within the department, such as serious injury to firefighters or line-of-duty deaths, including notification of family members. Chaplains have, additionally, fulfilled a traditional ceremonial role by giving the invocation at fire department functions, assisting in funerals for fire department members and their families, and being available for spiritual support to fire department members who desire it.

The Department of Fire/Rescue/EMS shall participate in a chaplaincy program through an annual appointment of a Chaplain by the Fire Department Administration. The appointment shall be for a term of April 1 of each year to March 31 of the following year. The Chaplain shall serve as a resource to all department personnel in the following capacities: 1. To assist firefighters and their families, when requested, in times of spiritual need, times of crisis, times of sickness or injury; 2. To respond at the request of an Incident Commander to a major fire, or other emergency, to comfort the bereaved and/or offer positive direction to victims and their families;

3. To respond at the request of an Incident Commander to a major fire or other emergency, to coordinate a clerical team for the purpose of comforting the bereaved and/or offering positive direction to victims and their families;

4. To respond at the request of an Incident Commander or the Fire Department Administration for assistance in making a death notification;

5. To assist, when requested by the Fire Department Administration and/or affected family members; in the arrangement of funeral or memorial services;

6. To make available, as may be requested by a member of the department, spiritual counseling and direction in the areas of marriage, substance abuse, critical incidents and stress management.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #118 Page 2 of 2

7. To visit, when requested, sick or injured department personnel at their homes or in the hospital. 8. To offer spiritual services in the department's Critical Incident Debriefing functions; and, 9. To be available to offer invocations and prayers, as requested, at various department ceremonies and functions. When requested for a response, the Chaplain shall respond in his/her own personal vehicle in a "normal traffic" mode. Immediately upon arrival, the Chaplain shall report to the Incident Commander, who will provide direction to him/her with regard to the needs of the situation. The Chaplain will be recognized for his/her specific religious and spiritual abilities and be allowed to function, as needed, in the capacity of his/her departmental role. At no time is the Chaplain to be requested to function in the capacity of, or within the job description of any other member of the department. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: MORNING ROLL CALL # 119 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages 1 of 1

All on coming Suppression Division personnel are to muster at the dining table in their respective station's day room by 0800 hours so the Company Officers can take the required roll call. Anyone not at the table at 0800 hours will be marked late for duty. Any absences or lack of manpower are to be reported immediately to the Battalion Commander. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: FORMS/REPORTS #_____120c______EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 14, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 5

In order to facilitate accurate Fire Department record-keeping, it is necessary for the proper forms to be utilized, thus creating the necessary flow of information to the correct place. To accomplish this, everyone should understand where the forms are to be found, who is responsible to fill them out, and what is to be done with them once they have been filled out.

The following forms are in use by the Department of Fire/Rescue/EMS:

ADMINISTRATION:

LEAVE DAYS #24

- Location: Arrives through station mail to be posted at Company Officers’ desks for 60 days. - Completed by Fire Department Administration and distributed for review by the fifteenth day of each month. - Disposition: Retained in station’s files for one year.

PAYROLL SHEETS

- Location: Arrives through station mail to be posted at Company Officers’ desks for 60 days. - Completed by Fire Department Administration and distributed at the time payroll is prepared to be sent to Township’s Accounting Department. - Disposition: Retained in station’s files for one year.

DOCUMENTATION - SUPPRESSION:

DAILY TRAINING DATA ENTRY

- Location: Company Officers’ computer. - Completed by the Company Officer. - Disposition: Automatically entered in data records.

DISPATCH DAILY LOG SHEET

- Location: Watchroom desk. - Completed continuously throughout the day by Dispatch Personnel.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #120C Page 2 OF 5

- Disposition: Given to Battalion Commander before going off duty so that information can be written into the Master Log.

MASTER LOG

- Location: Battalion Commander’s desk. - Completed by Battalion Commander on duty. - Disposition: Sheets remain in log as a permanent record, copies of front page to the Fire Administration office and to Watchroom at end of shift.

PHONE LOGS

- Location: Company Officer’s desk or Watchroom desk. - Completed by each employee who makes a long distance call to any Area Code except 586

- Disposition: Forwarded by Company Officer to the Fire Administration office.

DAILY PROBATIONARY REPORT (INITIAL SIX MONTHS)

- Location: Company Officers’ desks. - Completed and signed by the Company Officer; reviewed with probationary employee and signed

- Disposition: Forwarded to the Battalion Chief of the Probationary Employee’s shift, who will read, sign and file the report.

DAILY PROBATIONARY EVALUATION (FINAL SIX MONTHS)

- Location: Company Officers’ desks. - Completed and signed by the Company Officer; reviewed with probationary employee and signed

- Disposition: Forwarded to the Battalion Chief of the Probationary Employee’s shift, who will read, sign and file the report.

PROBATIONARY REPORTS – END OF COMPANY DETAIL

- Report completed and signed by the Company Officer at the end of the probationary’s detail on a company; e-mail not accepted

- Disposition: Forwarded to the Battalion Chief of the Probationary Employee’s shift, who will read and file the report, after forwarding one copy to the Deputy Chief of Operations STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #120C Page 3 OF 5

RADIO / PLECTRON / TEST SHEETS

- Location: Watchroom desk. - Completed by morning Dispatch Person. - Disposition: Given to Battalion Commander after completion of tests, with any discrepancies brought to the immediate attention of the Battalion Commander.

STATION LOG

- Location: Company Officer’s desk. - Completed by Company Officer. - Disposition: Sheets remain in log as a permanent record.

MISCELANEOUS FORMS:

BIO-HAZARD EXPOSURE (ECP APPENDIX D-1)

- Location: Battalion Commander’s desk. - Completed by employee, Company Officer and Battalion Commander. - Disposition: Forwarded to the Fire Administration office.

CLINIC FORMS

- Location: Company Officer’s desk or Battalion Commander’s desk. - Completed by employee and a Company Officer or Battalion Commander. - Disposition: Authorization presented to clinic prior to treatment.

EMERGENCY SUPPLY REQUISITION #25A

- Location: Company Officer’s desk. - Completed by Company Officer. - Disposition: Forwarded or taken to Battalion Commander prior to taking any supplies. Battalion Commander to forward to the Fire Department Supply Officer at HQ.

FIRE OFFICER / TRAINING SCHOOLS REQUEST #51

- Location: Company Officer’s desk. - Completed by individual requesting attendance to classes. - Disposition: Forwarded to Training Chief for approval.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #120C Page 4 OF 5

PERSONAL INJURY REPORT (EMPLOYEE ACCIDENT REPORT #15)

- Location: Company Officer’s desk or Battalion Commander’s desk. - Completed by employee and Battalion Commander on-duty at the time of injury. - Disposition: Forwarded to the Deputy Chief of Operations.

MONTHLY SUPPLY REQUISITION #25

- Location: Company Officer’s desk. - Completed by Station Captain or designee prior to the end of the month - Disposition: Forwarded to the Fire Department Supply Officer at HQ.

REPAIR FORM #52

- Location: Company Officer’s desk. - Completed by reporting employee, Company Officer; reviewed by Battalion Commander

- Disposition: Yellow copy to Deputy Chief of Operations; white copy kept in vehicle or station folder until repair is made, then forwarded with the repair information to the Deputy Chief of Operations.

VACATION REQUEST / 24 HOUR TIME TRADE #9

- Location: Company Officer’s desk and Dispatch desk. - Completed by employee. - Disposition: Forwarded to the Fire Administration office for approval.

SCHEDULES:

DAILY SCHEDULE

- Location: Battalion Commander’s desk. - Completed by Battalion Chief. - Updated by on-duty Battalion Commander. - Disposition: Original to Deputy Chief of Operations at end of shift.

DAILY TRAINING SCHEDULES

- Location: Company Officers’ computer.

- Completed, revised and amended by the Training Chief only. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #120C Page 5 OF 5

- Disposition: Automatically entered in data system.

MONTHLY SCHEDULE

- Location: Battalion Commander’s desk and distributed through Station mail. - Completed by the Battalion Chief on each shift and submitted to the Fire Administration by the Twenty-fifth day of the month preceding the effective date. - Disposition: Posted until expiration

PRE-SCHEDULED TIME OFF SHEETS

- Location: Battalion Commander’s desk area on wall - Entries by the Training Chief or Fire Administration only

- Disposition: After the affected dates have passed, sheet is to be filed in the Battalion Chief’s desk

OTHER:

BATTALION COMMANDER’S “NOTES” SHEETS

- Location: Battalion Commander’s desk - Completed by Battalion Commander, Training Chief or Fire Administration to post reminders of activities and notes relative to each date.

CHECK DISTRIBUTION LIST

- Location: Watchroom desk. - Completed by Dispatch personnel throughout the day on payday. - Disposition: One copy to each station along with the paychecks for that station, one copy to the Battalion Commander, and the original left in the Watchroom for the oncoming shift.

RECEIPTS

- Location: From any source pertinent to department business. - Disposition: Forwarded to the Fire Administration office.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: NFIRS REPORTING #_121b_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 1, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

NFIRS reports shall be completed by the assigned company officer upon returning to the station. Submitting the reports in this manner allows for the details of the incident to be fresh in the mind of the author, provides accountability for the report and allows immediate access to anyone needing information contained in the report.

It is of the utmost importance that the reports be complete and professional in content. With this in mind, all NFIRS reports submitted shall follow the guidelines set forth through the Tips for Completing NFIRS 5.0 Modules and the NFIRS Guideline Booklets found at each station. In the event a report has been rejected, the company officer will correct the report before going off shift for the Battalion Commander’s review.

To offer some protection to the individual writing a State incident report (NFIRS), the Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue-EMS and/or the Charter Township of Clinton, a clearly written and factual account of the incident(s) incurred by our personnel shall be required.

Additionally, the purpose of this procedure is to provide a guideline for the Narrative Module of the National Fire Incident Reporting System. The narrative should be written so that any person reading the report can get a clear picture of the incident and what the fire personnel’s actions were to mitigate the situation.

This procedure shall be followed by ALL report writers, for ANY incident that the Fire Department responds to.

Circumstances: What information was received? I.E.: An EMS run of an unresponsive person, a report of smoke in the area, or an injury accident at Garfield and Nineteen Mile Roads. Also include what kind of response the incident required: a non-emergency response, an emergency response, or a change of response mode en-route to incident.

Observations: This section will answer the Who, What, Where, Why, When and How requirements of a good report. This should be as accurate and descriptive as possible to show a reliable accounting of the situation.

Taken, as in action taken: What actions did your company take on this incident? Again, be as accurate and descriptive as possible to account for you and your company’s actions. If necessary, have each Company Officer and/or STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #121b Page 2 of 2

Battalion Commander fill out a narrative of their own actions or observations in larger incidents. This NFIRS program has the capability to allow company Officers at stations other than where the report was generated to add their own narrative from their location.

Status: What was the disposition at the close of the incident? Was the patient transported to a hospital, did the patient refuse assistance, are the CTFD Inspectors in the process of investigating or were no actions taken or hazards found, etc.?

The following is a sample narrative for a medical incident:

E-2 was dispatched on an EMS run for an unresponsive person. We responded from quarters in an emergency mode and were delayed approximately two minutes by a train (C). Upon arrival, the patient was found sitting up on a chair in her bedroom, responsive but lethargic (O). We made patient contact, began an IPS, then started ALS procedures. (See the ADV EMS Module for details.) Medstar A-122, arrived at the scene at 21:30 hours and assisted us with patient care. The E-2 company then helped with the packaging and loading of the patient (T) for transport to Mt. Clemens General Hospital. Firefighter #150 rode with the ambulance to assist the Medstar crew and was the Medic of Record. E-2 cleared the scene, in service, and proceeded to the hospital to pick up the firefighter prior to returning to the station (S). After leaving the hospital, we were sent on run #06-8776.

This style of a narrative offers a clear picture of what the incident was and what actions were taken. It is professional in style with the spelling corrected (Spell Check) and without "CapsLock" activated. Narratives using all capital letters will not be accepted.

It is important that ANY item that is pertinent to an incident be included in your narrative, such as a delay in the response, weather information, a door showing signs of being forced at a fire scene, etc. With the appropriate modules of the NFIRS report completed, including a detailed narrative, a comprehensive description of the incident will emerge. This will also serve as an accurate reminder of the event if the incident ever gets called into question either from the public and/or the legal community.

In addition, to insure a more standard and professional report, each respective Battalion Commander shall review each NFIRS report, and, if necessary, shall contact the author for corrections and/or additions. Upon their review, they verify that the report is complete and accurate and that all required information has been submitted. (See SOP 122b.)

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: REVIEWING NFIRS #__122b______EFFECTIVE DATE: FEBRUARY 28, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

To assure a more standardized and professional incident report, each respective Battalion Commander will review the previous days' NFIRS reports. Any reports in need of correction, additional information, or deemed sub-standard in any way, will be returned to the writer for correction. The author of the report will modify and resubmit the report on his/her next working day to the Battalion Commander.

The following is to be utilized as a guideline for reviewing printed NFIRS reports:

Is the report number correct? Refer to Master Log or Dispatch Sheet.

Is the Alarm Date and Arrival Date the same? -The day and date will appear to the right of the time. -Should only be different if the alarm time is prior to midnight and arrival, after. -If there is an error, times and dates must be corrected in the Apparatus section.

Is the Response Time reasonable? -Check for typographical errors, especially 23+ hour responses.

If Priority Response - Yes is present, was this an emergency run? -Non-priority runs do not appear on this line. -Non-emergency runs reports must not have this line present.

Does Completed – Yes appear? -If not present, the writer has not checked the box on the Authorization page. -Writer must check the box; this is required to submit the report.

Is there a Fire Department Station on the report? -This appears below the Completed line.

Incident Type: -A code ending in a “00” is known as a series code and should be avoided. -Check for accuracy, as most incident types are found in the program.

Fires: -If a 100-173 code is used, dollars values must be entered in the Property Loss and Contents Loss lines. This is required by the State. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #122b Page 2 of 2

False Alarms: -Check accuracy for all 700 series (False Alarm) codes. -Contact name, Telephone number and, if a commercial building, name of business must appear in report for all false alarms.

Actions Taken 1: -Check for excessive usage of code “86” Investigation. This is a given. We investigate all incidents. If, for instance, a 300 series code (rescue/medical) were used under the Incident Type, it would probably be more appropriate, under most circumstances, to use a 30 series code as the Action Taken.

Narratives: -Should answer the basics of who, what, when, where, how and why, following the department’s criteria or guideline. (SOP #121b) -Do not accept Narrative Modules written in all capital letters. (Caps Lock left on). -Was “Spell check” used?

Other areas to check: -All firefighter injuries, whether fireground or station, must be reported as a “Fire Service Casualty”. This information will appear below the “Basic” portion of the report. -Is the report signed in the "Authority" section?

Upon completion of the review, the Battalion Commander shall staple the white Dispatch Sheet to the report and initial the “Authority” section, verifying that the report has been reviewed and cleared. Cleared reports will be forwarded to the Systems Manager.

If a report has been rejected for any reason, the report (without the white Dispatch Sheet attached) shall be returned to the respective Battalion Chief who in turn will deliver the report in question to the company officer involved. The Company Officer shall, referring to SOP #121b, correct said report prior to leaving off shift.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: EMS REPORT WRITING #______124b______EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

All EMS procedures are to be documented in the NFIRS report. Not only shall ALS procedures be entered in the ADV EMS module under the "Flow Chart" tab, but BLS procedures as well. BLS procedures may include taking vitals, inserting a Combi-tube or utilizing the AED. In your "Action Taken" field, be accurate concerning BLS/ALS care given to the patient. All medical forms shall be sent directly to the EMS Officer in an inter-department envelope. Do not send any forms without an incident number for reference.

Medic of Record • County Run Form shall be completed with the Physician's signature and Medic of Record’s Signature.

• NFIRS Advanced EMS Module shall be completed by the Medic of Record and reviewed by the Company Officer prior to submitting.

Not Medic of Record • Record all EMS procedures provided by CTFD personnel in the NFIRS report. This information shall be entered by the senior CTFD Paramedic or designee. If a BLS crew provided care, the information shall be entered by the BLS provider.

Refusals • All "Refusals" shall be completed on a County Form (even by EMT’s and/or BLS crews) • Flow chart not required. • County Run Form shall have a narrative.

Priority Four CTFD Medic of Record • Complete the County Run Form with the Physician’s name, time of death, and the Medic of Record’s signature. • All EMS procedures shall be entered into NFIRS report. (Assessment; ECG) Medstar Medic of Record • Record all EMS procedures provided by CTFD personnel in the NFIRS report.

All County Run Forms shall be sent directly to the EMS Officer in an 'inter-department' envelope. The run number shall be written on all EMS forms.

Incomplete information will result in a Q/A follow-up form being generated through the Battalion Chief.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #124b Page 2 of 2

Entering EMS Data into Sunpro/NFIRS Using the Advanced EMS Tab

Clicking on “Advanced EMS” opens seven sub-tabs: √ Scene √ Patient Info √ History √ Assessment √ Flow Chart √ Other √ Narrative

How to complete these Sub-tabs:

• Scene Tab: No need to complete • Patient Info Tab: Click on “Add” to create a patient (create as many as appropriate) and fill in what information you have regarding each patient. • History Tab (red): Click on “Provider impression/assessment” and scroll down to click on the appropriate impression/assessment. Click on "Severity" and enter whether the patient is priority "1, 2, or 4" (if they are priority three leave it blank) • Assessment Tab: Optional; no need to complete • Flow Chart Tab: This is where you log all treatments provided. To create a treatment click “Add.” Once you add a treatment, a number of other fields open up. These are completed as appropriate, based on the treatment: Event time: enter the time the treatment was performed. Event provider: Enter the person’s number who performed the procedure or “Medstar” may be entered, if the C.O. wishes documentation (optional). Event details: complete the applicable fields: Click on “Aid given”: Scroll to find the appropriate treatment and click on it (IV, ET Tube, Vitals, etc.) Click the "Success box" if procedure was successful (successful IV or ET Tube, etc.) Note that different sub-fields open depending on what given aid you select (for example IV is different than ET Tube, etc.) Complete the appropriate sub-fields. Remarks: Optional Charge: (leave blank) Examples: For an IV, enter the catheter size, the location, the number of attempts, the rate, and the provider. For defibrillation, energy is the joules. If you are pacing, enter the rate. Note: you may enter multiple procedures for a patient.

• “Other” Tab: Optional: no need to complete.

• (ADV EMS) “Narrative” Tab: If the Medic is completing the advanced EMS Module (not the Officer), the Medic will enter their number in the narrative field. No need to complete a separate narrative in the Advanced EMS Module; however the Medic may, if he/she desires. This would be in addition to the Company Officer’s requirement of completing the “Narrative” in the Basic Module. SOP 121b provides guidance for the content.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: APPARATUS PLACEMENT #____201______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

Apparatus function should regulate placement. Poor apparatus placement can reverse this rule, limiting the options or eliminating functions we can assign to a unit. ______

Fire fighters operate with a natural inclination to drive apparatus as close to the fire as possible. This often results in positioning of apparatus that is both dysfunctional and dangerous. The placement of all apparatus on the fireground should be a reflection of the following:

* Standard operational guideline for first arriving Companies.

* Staging procedure.

* A direct order from Command.

* A conscious decision on the part of the Company Officer, based on existing predictable conditions. ______

Effective apparatus placement must begin with the arrival of first units. The placement of the initial arriving engine, truck, and rescue should be based upon initial size-up and general conditions upon arrival. First arriving companies should place themselves to maximum advantage and go to work; later arriving units should be placed in a manner that builds on the initial plan and allows for expansion of the operation. ______

Avoid "belly to butt" placement on the fireground. Do not drive all fire apparatus directly to the fire. Later arriving companies should stage short of the immediate fire area, and remain uncommitted until ordered into action by Command. Company Officers should select staged positions with a maximum of tactical options. ______

In large, complex, and lengthy fireground operations additional alarm companies should be staged consistent with Level II Staging procedure. Under these procedures, Command communicates directly with the Staging Officer for the additional resource required on the fireground.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #201 Page 2 of 4

Command must maintain awareness that access provides tactical options and that the immediate fire area can quickly become congested with apparatus. The officer must regard apparatus on the fireground in two categories:

* Apparatus that is working

* Apparatus that is parked

Park out of the way. Apparatus that is not working should be left in the Staging Area or parked where it will not compromise access. ______

Maintain an access lane down the center of streets whenever possible. ______

Think of fire apparatus as an expensive exposure: position working apparatus in a manner that considers the extent and location of the fire and a pessimistic evaluation of fire spread and building failure. Anticipate the heat which may be released with structural collapse. Apparatus should generally be positioned at least 30 ft. away from involved buildings, even with nothing showing. Greater distances are indicated in many situations. ______

Beware of putting fire apparatus in places where it cannot be repositioned easily and quickly - particularly operating positions with only one way in and out; i.e., yards, alleys, driveways, etc. ______

Beware of overhead power lines when positioning apparatus. Do not park where lines may fall. ______

If apparatus does become endangered, operate lines between it and the fire while you reposition it. When you do move it - move it to a position that is safe. It is dysfunctional to move apparatus several times throughout the progress of a fire. ______

Take maximum advantage of good operating positions and "build" the capability of units assigned to these effective positions. Initial arriving pumpers should be placed in "key" positions. These positions should offer maximum fire attack access to the fire area and be supplied with large diameter pumped supply lines as quickly as possible. Subsequent arriving companies can operate the hose lines from this apparatus. Place these "key" companies first, before access is blocked by later arriving units.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES # 201 Page 3 of 4

Key tactical positions should be identified and engines placed in those locations with a strong water supply. The water supply should be as least one pumped line from an engine on a hydrant. When high volume is indicated, two pumped supply lines should be provided. The forward engine can distribute this water supply to a variety of hand lines, master streams or devices. ______

Take full advantage of hydrants close to the fire before laying additional supply lines to distant hydrants. A pumper hooked up to a hydrant close to the fire can usually supply two "forward" pumpers in attack positions. ______

Secondary hydrants should be used to obtain additional supply if the demand exceeds the capability of the closest hydrant. ______

Take advantage of the equipment on apparatus already in the fire area instead of bringing in more apparatus. Connect extra lines to pumpers which already have a good supply line instead of making "daisy chain" supply line connections. ______

Do not hook up to hydrants so close to the fire building that structural failure or fire extension will jeopardize the apparatus. ______

Fire hose soon limits the general access as the fireground operation gets older. Command must direct apparatus to important positions as early as possible. Lines should be laid with attention to the access problems they present. Try to lay supply lines on the same side of street as the hydrant and cross over near the fire. ______

When the aerial apparatus is not needed for upper level access or rescue, spot apparatus in a position that would provide an effective position for elevated stream operation, if the fire goes to a defensive mode. Truck Officers must consider extent and location of fire, most dangerous direction of spread, confinement, exposure conditions, overhead obstructions and structural conditions in spotting apparatus. The truck should be spotted where the aerial can be raised and used effectively without repositioning. It must also be spotted for effective use of hand ladders and allied forcible entry equipment. ______

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #201 Page 4 of 4

Spot the command vehicle in a manner that will allow maximum visibility of the fire building and surrounding area and the general effect of the companies operating on the fire. Command vehicle position should be logical and easy to find and should not restrict the movement of other apparatus. ______

Rescue units should be spotted in a safe position that will provide the most effective treatment of fire victims and firefighting personnel, while not blocking movement of other apparatus or interfering with firefighting operations. ______

Rescue units must also provide for ambulance access to the Treatment Area in situations involving patient transportation.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: POSITIVE PRESSURE #_____202b______VENTILATION EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 25, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

PURPOSE

This procedure identifies the tactical application of positive pressure ventilation during structural fire operations and other techniques for use. ______

BENEFITS

Positive pressure ventilation (PPV) has many benefits to fire operations. They include:

1. PPV rapidly removes heat and smoke from the building, thus reducing the fires ability to propagate and advance.

2. PPV causes an improving atmosphere -thus improving patient survivability profiles.

3. Rapid removal of smoke improves Firefighter’s ability to conduct search and rescue operations as well as effective salvage operations.

4. The improved atmosphere and visibility increases the Firefighter’s ability to conduct many interior operations.

5. The improved atmosphere reduces Firefighter heat stress.

6. PPV reduces smoke/heat damage to the structure.

7. PPV can reduce the need and risk of roof ventilation at many fires. ______

APPLICATION

All truck companies are equipped with high volume positive pressure fans. Most offensive fire operations qualify for early application of PPV. Command should order PPV where appropriate.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #202b Page 2 of 4

Truck companies should expect to apply PPV and crews should dismount apparatus planning to take fans to the fire scene. ______

PLACEMENT OF FANS

Positive pressure fans should be placed at the point of entry(s) from the unburned side of the fire.

Fans should be positioned 12-15 feet back from the entry point. The objective is to create a pressure "cone" effect around the door. This position will also allow access for crews to enter the building.

Where additional fans are required, placing two or more fans in "tandem" - one behind the other is more effective than side by side. ______

REQUIRE TACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS

Positive pressure ventilation is effective only when applied properly. Two major items are required:

1. An "exit" for the pressurized air must be provided and must be located in the fire area. This is generally a window, door or other opening.

2. Positive pressure ventilation must be injected from the unburned side of the fire.

It will be the truck company officer’s responsibility to ensure that these two requirements are completed prior to injecting positive pressure into the structure. ______

CONTROLLING AIR FLOW

Air flow from PPV must be controlled throughout the operation. Too many openings or exit points reduce the effectiveness of PPV. In some cases, windows and doors that are already open may need to be closed to direct the air flow into the fire area, or the most densely affected smoke area.

As one area is cleared of smoke, that area may need to be sealed off and another exit created in another area of the structure to direct the air flow into the next area to clear.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #202b Page 3 of 4

Truck company officers or division officers will be responsible for coordinating this effect. ______

ATTIC FIRES

Isolated attic fires can benefit from PPV. During initial attack, fire crews should us small openings in the ceiling for water application. This will prevent the clear environment below the ceiling from rapidly filling with smoke. Moving from one room to another and "punching" the nozzle through the ceiling and using a fog application is very effective.

An "exit" for PPV in the attic must be in place. Most roofs/attics have pre-existing vents typically at the end of the attic space in a vertical wall. These are often adequate for an "exit".

Some structures may have a "sealed" attic space with no vent openings. In this case, opening a vertical wall on one end of the attic or cutting a vent hole in the roof may be required. If pre-exiting vents are too small, they may need to be enlarged.

Once PPV is in place, large sections of the ceiling can be pulled. PPV will keep the environment below the ceiling clear. Salvage covers should be applied first when possible before ceiling is pulled. ______

MULTI-STORY /HIGHRISE

In some cases, PPV can be used for exposure control. This is most effective with common attics (i.e., strip shopping centers, apartment complexes) or where separating walls may have been breach (i.e., plumbing, cracks, etc).

The objective is to introduce PPV ahead of a moving fire and force it back into the fire area.

An exit point in the fire area is needed in most cases.

For exposure control, the fan(s) would be placed at an entry point at most severe exposure first. If a heavy smoke condition exits, it may be beneficial to create an opening (i.e., door) to allow an exit for the pressure and smoke. Once smoke is cleared, the exit should be closed, the building sealed, so that it will "over pressurize" the exposure. An opening in the ceiling will be required to pressurize the attic area. Over pressurized air will force hot gases back across the

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #202b Page 4 of 4

beaches, or back down common attic spaces towards the fire area. This can prevent fire spread extension.

The second most critical exposure would then receive PPV in a similar manner.

The next priority would be the fire occupancy. ______

LARGE BUILDINGS

Buildings with large square footage may require multiple fans, perhaps at more than one location to effectively remove smoke. These situations are more complex and require close coordination of PPV with all division officers. Command should consider a ventilation group to coordinate all ventilation operations in large buildings. ______

PRECAUTIONS

Positive pressure ventilation can create problems if not effectively managed, monitored, and coordinated. Be aware of the problems listed below and take appropriate corrective action.

1. An exit must be in the burned area or the fire may be pushed into unburned portion.

2. Because of positive pressure, a "blow torch" effect of fire blowing far out of the exit may occur. This is normal and predictable. Adjacent exposures may need to be protected.

3. Do not direct a fire stream into an operating PPV exit point.

4. All concealed spaces need to be checked for extension.

5. Truck company officers and/or division officers will be responsible for monitoring and coordinating the application of PPV.

6. The gas powered fans do produce carbon monoxide and breathing apparatus may be required when PPV is used during overhaul operations. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: STAGING #_____203______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

STAGING - BASIC OPERATIONAL APPROACH

The objective of Staging procedures is to provide a standard system of initial placement for responding apparatus, personnel, and equipment prior to assignment at tactical incidents.

Effective utilization of these procedures will: * Prevent excessive apparatus congestion at the scene. * Allow time for Command to evaluate conditions prior to assigning companies.

* Place apparatus in an uncommitted location close to the immediate scene to facilitate more effective assignment by Command.

* Reduces radio traffic during the critical initial stages of the incident. * Allow Command to formulate and implement a plan without undue confusion and pressure.

* Provide a resource pool from which Command may assign units and resources at his/her leisure.

Staging involves two levels: LEVEL I and LEVEL II

I. LEVEL I STAGING

A. MODE - Nothing Showing 1. First engine and truck to front of building placed at best advantage. Leave yourself an out for possible relocation. This especially applies to a Truck Company.

2. Second engine at last water supply or F.D.C. if building is sprinkled. From this location, Company Officer can size up which hose lay is best for operation if I.C. calls for water.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #203 Page 2 of 3

3. All other units stage a minimum of 500 feet and in direction of travel (if possible).

4. Every rig reports i.e. - Rescue 4 staged north; Engine 2 staged at hydrant, etc.

5. Level I staging is initiated whenever three or more Companies respond to an incident. 6. Remember, these staging positions are guidelines. Conditions at the scene may cause some:

a. Heavy traffic, congestion, construction, collapse zone, or other factors may cause first due apparatus to choose a better staging location.

b. Companies may be approaching scene before "nothing showing" is announced. Pick the next best area that will avoid scene congestion.

c. If second due engine goes to F.D.C., third engine stages at last water. Every attempt should be made to assume these locations.

B. MODE - Smoke showing, fire showing, working fire

1. Requires immediate action by responding companies to stabilize. The first arriving officer will probably go "combat command". In this case, the second arriving officers should assume command.

2. Even though tasks are given to responding companies by I.C. in the order of fire ground priorities, there are some rules of thumb to follow:

If the first due engine company did not secure it's own water supply, this becomes the second engine's job.

Truck tasks by I.C. to support engine company operations.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #203 Page 3 of 3

II. LEVEL II STAGING

A. When the fire ground commander is faced with large complex or lengthy operations, consideration should be given to staging companies together in a specific location under the command of a staging officer.

This procedure is especially effective in managing multiple alarms. The first company officer in the staging area is usually the staging officer. However, as operations progress, this job is usually reassigned by I.C.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: TACTICAL PRIORITIES #_____204______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Tactical priorities identify the three separate tactical functions that must be completed in order to stabilize any fire situation -these priorities also establish the order in which these basic fireground functions must be performed. ______

These functions should be regarded as separate, yet inter-related, activities which must be dealt with in order. Command cannot proceed on to the next priority until the current function objective has been completed or sufficient resources have been assigned to complete it and it is being accomplished. ______

Basic tactical priorities are as follows:

#1 - Rescue

#2 - Fire Control

#3 - Property Conservation ______

Rescue = The activities required to protect occupants, remove those who are threatened and to treat the injured.

Fire Control = The activities required to stop the forward progress of the fire and to bring the fire under control.

Property Conservation = The activities required to stop or reduce additional loss to property. ______

The objectives of each priority are reflected in the following bench marks of completion:

#1 - Rescue - primary search (all clear)

#2 - Fire Control - under control

#3 - Property Conservation - loss stopped ______STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #204 Page 2 of 2

All three tactical priorities require somewhat different tactical approaches from both a command and an operational standpoint. ______

While Command must satisfy the objective of each function in its priority order, Command must, in many cases, overlap and "mix" the activities of each to achieve the current bench mark. Notable examples are the frequent need to achieve interior tenability with active/extensive fire control efforts before getting on with primary search, or the need to initiate salvage operations while active fire control efforts are being extended.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: FIRE CONTROL #_____205_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

It is standard operating procedure to attempt to stabilize fire conditions by extending WHENEVER POSSIBLE an aggressive well-placed and adequate offensive interior fire attack effort and to support that aggressive attack with whatever resources and action is required to reduce fire extension and to bring the fire under control. Unless otherwise stated, this department will assume an offensive attack. ______

A critical Command decision (both initial and on going) relates to the offensive/defensive mode of the situation:

Offensive Strategy - Interior attack and related support directed toward quickly bringing the fire under control.

Defensive Strategy - Exterior attack directed to first reduce fire extension and then bring the fire under control.

Command must declare which strategy is being used as part of the on-scene report. ______

Command must define offensive/defensive mode based upon:

* Fire extent

* Structural conditions

* Entry capability

* Ventilation profile

* Rescue ability of occupants

* Resources ______

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #205 Page 2 of 2

BASIC OFFENSIVE PLAN:

* Take Command

* First line - fast, aggressive interior attack

* Provide support activities (i.e., ventilation)

* Do primary search

* Second line - back up first/cover opposite side

* Pump water

* Quickly evaluate success and react

______

BASIC DEFENSIVE PLAN:

* Take Command

* Evaluate fire spread/write-off lost property

* Identify key tactical positions

* Prioritize fire streams

* Provide big, well placed streams

* Pump water

* Quick determination on additional resources

* Surround and drown

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: STANDARD COMPANY #_____206______OPERATIONS EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

Standard company operations assign basic fireground functions and activities to the various companies based upon the capability and characteristics of each type of unit.

Standard company operations assign major fireground functions to the particular company who can best accomplish the operation.

Standard company operations integrate the efforts of engine, truck and rescue companies to achieve effective rescue, fire control and property conservation.

Standard company operations increase the awareness and confidence of company members in the standard performance of other companies operating on the fireground.

Standard company operations reduce the amount and detail of orders required to get companies into action on the fireground.

______

The following items represent the standard operations that will normally be performed by engine, truck and rescue companies. These basic functions will provide the framework for field operations for these companies:

Engine Company Functions:

* Search, rescue and treatment * Stretch hose lines * Operate nozzles * Pump hose lines * Raise ground ladders

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #206 Page 2 of 3

Truck Company Functions:

* Search, rescue and treatment * Ventilate * Perform Salvage * Forcible entry * Raise ladders * Provide access/check fire extension * Utility control * Provide lighting * Operate * Perform overhaul * Extrication _

Rescue Company Functions:

* Search, rescue and treatment * Stretch hoselines * Operate nozzles * General firefighting duties as assigned by Command * Utility control * Provide lighting * Perform overhaul * Extrication ______

In Level I Staging situations, first arriving engine, truck, and rescue companies will automatically perform these functions as required unless ordered otherwise by Command. These companies will advise Command on the type of function they are performing.

______

Company Officers will determine, based upon conditions, the priority of the functions for their company unless otherwise ordered by Command.

______

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #206 Page 3 of 3

This does not limit a company to only its listed functions. Every company will be expected to perform all basic functions safely within the limits of their capability, and it will be the on-going responsibility of Command to integrate tasks and functions as required with the on-scene units.

______

In the absence (or delay) of truck company response, Command should assign truck functions to an engine company: "Engine II, perform truck functions." In such cases, engine companies will perform all truck functions within the capability of their company.

______

The assignment of these basic operations represents a standard fireground plan for tactical operations designed to improve the effectiveness and safety of all units working together. This plan should in no way limit the initiative of any officer and should enhance the decision making process of all officers by establishing a standard operational framework.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: SALVAGE #_____208b______EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 25, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

This procedure describes guidelines for conducting salvage operations. Virtually every fire, small or large, produces a need for some form of salvage operations.

Salvage includes activities required to stop direct and indirect fire damage in addition to those required to minimize the effects of firefighting operations. This includes damage from water, smoke and firefighting efforts.

Salvage operations must be aimed at aggressively reducing damage by the most expedient means. Salvage objectives are:

* Stop or reduce the source of damage

* Protect or remove contents

Command will provide for salvage at all fires or other incidents posing potential damage to property.

The most effective means of reducing property loss is to stop or impede the source of the damage. Frequently damage caused during fire suppression activities is accepted as a necessary evil. This attitude fails to address the actual source of the damage which may be ineffective or excessive water application, late or ineffective ventilation, or damage caused by broken water lines or activated sprinkler heads. Early attention to these and other damage contributing factors will result in a significant reduction in property loss.

Salvage operations most often involve early smoke removal and covering building contents with salvage covers or plastic. In some cases, the contents of all threatened areas, where appropriate, can be removed to a safe location. When removal is not practical, contents should be grouped in the center of rooms, elevated from the floor and covered to provide maximum practical protection.

The following items should be considered when addressing salvage.

* Building and occupancy type. * Type, value and location of contents. * The extent and location of the fire. * Recognition of existing and potential damage sources. * Estimate of required resource.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #208b Page 2 of 2

BUILDING AND OCCUPANCY TYPE

The salvage profile of a high-rise office building differs significantly from that of a single-story neighborhood grocery store. A basic approach to salvage activities for each of these buildings should be immediately recognized upon arrival. While the objective of salvage remains constant, the nature of the activities required to meet the objective may differ considerably. Fires above ground level pose salvage problems from smoke and heat above the fire in addition to the likelihood of severe water damage to floors below. Fires in single level structures confine these problems to a more manageable area. Basements and sub levels should receive early salvage attention as they frequently contain electrical panels and communications equipment. ______

EXTENT AND LOCATION OF FIRE

Salvage efforts should begin in areas most severely threatened by damage. In most cases that will be areas directly adjacent to or below the fire area. Additional salvage activities should expand outward until all areas of potential loss are secured. ______

RECOGNITION OF EXISTING AND POTENTIAL DAMAGE SOURCES

All firefighting activities have the potential to damage property and contents. The key to successful salvage is to distinguish between excessive damage and damage that is required to reduce potential fire damage. Aggressive salvage activities effectively reduce the effects of unavoidable damage incurred during firefighting operations. ______

TYPE, VALUE AND LOCATION OF CONTENTS

Replacement price and value should be primary considerations when performing salvage operations. It is often difficult to separate value from price, however, salvage crews should weigh the worth (value) of items in addition to their dollar cost. Salvaging what little a poorer family may have would be extremely important, for example. Business records have extremely high value to business owners, while their price represents only the paper they are printed on. Understandably, pictures, wall paintings, family mementos, etc., may have very high personal value to the property owner.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #208b Page 3 of 3

ESTIMATE OF REQUIRED RESOURCE

An early request for manpower and salvage equipment can significantly reduce loss. The first company assigned to salvage should consider the size-up factors and request sufficient manpower and equipment to stabilize the situation. Command should assign a "Salvage Group" early, particularly when more than one Company is committed to salvage operations. The Salvage Group should closely coordinate their operations with other Divisions and Groups.

Private contractors can provide extensive clean-up service once the fire scene has been secured and investigated. This type of service can significantly reduce loss. Property owners should be advised of this fact and urged to contact their insurance carrier and a contractor as soon as possible.

______

SALVAGE EQUIPMENT

The most common salvage equipment carried includes salvage covers, plastic sheeting, shovels and brooms., squeegees, and buckets. ______

TACTICAL GUIDELINES

When addressing salvage operations, Command should:

* Obtain an "all clear" from search and rescue officers.

* Obtain fire control.

* Obtain early ventilation - use positive pressure ventilation as early as possible.

* Determine the need for salvage.

* Stop/eliminate property damage causes.

* Determine/commit resources needed.

* Establish salvage group early.

* Obtain a "loss stopped" from salvage sector.

* Continue salvage operations through de-commitment. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #208b Page 4 of 4

* Transfer scene to investigation or property owner when all suppression division activities are completed.

______

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

Where possible and practical, Command and/or Salvage Group Officers should meet with the property owner or responsible party to determine/identify his salvage priorities. The earlier this can be done, the greater the opportunity to identify high value/priority items or areas. In some cases, where safe to do so, allowing the property owner to be escorted through the building by Fire Department personnel can be of great assistance to the salvage operation.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

#209a INCIDENTS & TEAM OPERATIONS EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

PURPOSE: Hazardous Materials incidents may include fires, spills, transportation accidents, chemical reactions, explosions and similar events. Hazardous materials maybe toxic, flammable, radioactive, corrosive, explosive or some combination of these with potential chemical reactions. This plan provides a general framework for handling a hazardous material incident.

ALARM: Upon receipt of an alarm, the dispatcher should gather as much incident information as possible. Additionally obtained information will be relayed to all responding equipment.

Example: 1. Location, wind direction, velocity 2. Material name, DOT placard # 3. Amount and size of containers 4. Problem (leak, spill, fire) 5. Dangerous properties

UNITS: The first arriving unit shall place itself in a safe position and establish command. They shall not commit themselves to a dangerous situation for which they are not prepared or trained to handle.

SIZE UP: Command must make a careful size-up of the situation considering life and property exposures. Immediate action may be required to affect a rescue, but a more calculated approach should be taken. Risk/benefit assessment is mandatory at this point. The effect on the incident by weather, topography, spill flow, and explosion potential will be considered.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENTS REQUIRE A CAUTIOUS AND DELIBERATE SIZE-UP.

IDENTIFICATION: Identification is accomplished by looking at labels, shipping papers, MSDSs, placards, container shapes, pre-fire surveys and questioning associated personnel at the scene. Any persons with pertinent material information should stay at the Command Post as needed. Untrained personnel should not place themselves at risk to identify a material. Once the product is identified, agencies STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #209a Page 2 of 2

such as Chemtrec, the manufacturer, etc. should be contacted for additional information.

IC will confirm with dispatch the incident level (minor, alert, site emergency, or community emergency) and dispatch will activate the appropriate response of personnel and equipment. A second dispatcher may be called in to assist.

ACTION PLAN: Command will develop an action plan based on the available information. The HazMat Branch Leader will advise the IC on the team’s ability to control the situation.

The plan must include: 1. Firefighter Safety 2. Citizen Safety - rescue 3. Evacuation or shelter in place 4. Needed resources 5. Site Control 6. Containment 7. Disposal by an outside agency

ZONING: The Incident Commander should limit access to the incident location to limit exposure to the public and fire personnel until the Hazmat Team has defined the hot, warm, and cold zones.

EVACUATION ZONE: Evacuations should be considered in situations that pose eminent danger to the public or fire personnel. If the IC and HazMat Branch Leader determine an evacuation is necessary they should work with the police department to implement the department evacuation plan.

NON-FIRE PERSONNEL: If non-fire department personnel are needed in a hazardous area, they will be accompanied by department personnel. The IC will be kept advised of the status of these personnel. Non-fire personnel shall be advised of the proper use of PPE and the incident hazards.

PERSONNEL: The Team should have a minimum of 16 members, including 1 HazMat Coordinator and 3 HazMat Leaders. Members should become technician level within one year and shall attend 50% of team meetings. Membership will be determined by the HazMat Coordinator subject to the Chief’s confirmation.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #209a Page 3 of 3

CHAIN OF COMMAND: The first arriving Hazmat Team member will be the HazMat Branch Leader, responsible to the incident commander (IC). They will remain HazMat Branch Leader until relieved by a Team Leader/Coordinator or passed to another Team member. Team members will be noted on the Shift Commanders Daily Schedule with an “H” and their helmets will be marked with a Hazmat Team sticker.

DISPATCHER'S LIST: Upon receipt of an alarm, the dispatcher should gather as much incident information as possible and determine the level of response. Additional information obtained will be relayed to all responding equipment.

Example: 1. Location, wind direction, velocity 2. Material name, DOT placard # 3. Amount and size of containers 4. Problem (leak, spill, fire) 5. Dangerous properties

The Battalion Commander and one on duty Hazmat Team member must be notified of all hazardous materials incidents. Incident levels may change with additional information. The Dispatcher should relay weather conditions to all responding equipment and monitor the conditions for abrupt changes.

On arrival, the first due company should confirm or modify the incident level. The IC should confer with the HazMat Branch Leader as the Incident Action Plan is implemented.

HazMat Still Alarm: Dispatch the nearest Engine and/or Truck/Rescue Company (non-emergency)

This is a relatively small incident that has no immediate danger to life or the environment; which will not require chemical protective clothing or decontamination. (i.e. automobile leaking gas or CO detector activation)

HazMat Special Alarm: Dispatch the nearest Engine, Truck/Rescue, Battalion Chief, and an on-duty HazMat Team Member.

Any HazMat incident that requires more than a single company response.

On Duty Deployment (level 1): Dispatch the nearest Engine, Truck/Rescue, Battalion Chief, HazMat 1 with Engine 5, an ambulance, all on duty HazMat members, the HazMat Coordinator, a Hazmat Leader and all Chief Officers.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #209a Page 4 of 4

A larger incident that may have an impact on health and/or the environment; may require a full decon and equipment from HazMat 1: can be handled by on-duty HazMat Team personnel. (i.e. Oil in the red run drain, barrel leaking in a field).

On-duty Team members will respond with their assigned company to the scene. The remaining available suppression personnel on the scene will be reassigned to maintain staffed companies. On-duty HazMat Team members who are committed to an incident shall be replaced, as needed, with emergency call back personnel.

Full Team Deployment (Level 2): On duty activation (Level 1) plus off duty team members, as decided by the IC and HazMat Branch Leader.

This incident poses an immediate danger to health and/or environment; and it requires more members than are on duty. (i.e. Leaking barrels from an overturned truck).

Off-duty Team members will be paged with where to report. Off-duty Team members will notify dispatch if they are responding. Dispatch will contact any member, via their emergency call back number, who has not called in after 10 minutes.

HazMat Mutual Aid (level 3): Initial response will be HazMat 1 immediately and five (5) on-duty Team members if available. If there are not five on-duty Team members, the on-duty Team members will be dispatched with non-team members at the Battalion Commander’s discretion for a full compliment of five (5). Their response should not be delayed. On duty members will be transported to mutual aid incidents in a department vehicle.

The first arriving Hazmat Team member will decide if more personnel will be needed.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: FIRE CONTROL #_____210______OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

Many times offensive/defensive conditions are clear cut and Command can quickly determine the appropriate strategy. In other cases, the situation is marginal and Command must initiate an offensive interior attack, while setting up defensive positions on the exterior. The effect of the interior attack must be evaluated and the attack abandoned if necessary. Mode changes can develop almost instantly or can take considerable time; Command must be aware and responsive to such mode changes.

______

Command must consider the most dangerous direction and avenues of fire extension particularly as they affect rescue activities, confinement efforts, and exposure protection. Command must allocate resources based upon this fire spread evaluation.

______

In some cases, the most effective tactical analysis involves an evaluation of what is not burning rather than what is actually on fire. The unburned portion represents where the fire is going and should establish the framework for fire control requirements.

______

Offensive fires should be fought from the INTERIOR-UNBURNED SIDE (Interior capability is the principal offensive strategy factor).

______

Initial attack efforts must be directed toward supporting primary search - the first attack line must go between the victims and the fire to protect avenues of escape.

______

Determine fire location and extent before starting fire operations (as far as possible). Do not operate fire streams into smoke. ______

STANDARD OPRATING GUIDELINES #210 Page 2 of 2

Command must not lose sight of the very simple and basic fireground reality that at some point the fire forces must engage and fight the fire. Command must structure whatever operations are required to PUT WATER ON THE FIRE. The rescue/fire control/extension/exposure problem is solved in the majority of cases by a fast, strong, well-placed attack.

______

Effective fire control requires that water is applied directly on the fire or directly into the fire area. (Fire streams can be bounced off roofs and operated into smoke all night and the fire will progress until it runs out of fuel.) Command must establish an attack plan that overpowers the fire with actual water application.

______

Where fires involve concealed spaces (attics, ceiling areas, construction voids, etc.), it becomes very important that companies open-up and operate fire streams into such areas. Early identification and response to concealing-space fires can save the structure. Officers who hesitate to open up because they don't want to beat up the building may lose the structure.

______

Command must consider 7 sides of the fire: front, back, both sides, top, bottom, and interior.

______

Where the fire is sizable, establish a safe and remote position from which to begin operations - then move in on the fire.

______

The basic variables relating to attack operations involve:

* Location/position of attack

* Size of attack

* Support functions

Command develops an effective attack through the management of three factors.

Time becomes an extremely important factor with regard to attack operations. STANDARD OPRATING GUIDELINES #210 Page 3 of 3

The bigger the attack, the longer it takes to get it going. The more an attack is oriented to an interior position, the longer it takes. Command must balance and integrate attack size and position with fire conditions and resources.

Tactical realities many times require that pure placement principles are violated. Such violations generally relate to the factor of time vs. pure placement. When such principles are violated, Command must implement back-up action to cover the "uncovered" area(s). Violations of placement principles must be a conscious decision. ______

Lacking direction, when fire is showing, companies will many times lay hose and put water on the fire utilizing the fastest, shortest, methods - everyone wants to go to the flame. This is referred to as the "candle moth syndrome." ______

An attack from the burning side generally will drive the fire, smoke and heat back into the building and drive the interior fire control forces out of the building. ______

The fastest application of water on a fire is generally from the outside at the point where the fire is burning out; however, it is the very worst application point most of the time. ______

When fire is venting out of a building and not affecting exposures, let it burn out and advance an interior attack line from the unburned side since it is probably venting in the proper direction. It requires discipline on the part of attack forces to do so and not submit to "candle moth" temptations. Command must develop and communicate a fire control plan of attack that first stops the forward progress of the fire and then brings the fire under control. In large complex fires, Command will not immediately have adequate resources to accomplish all of the attack needs. Command must prioritize attack efforts, act as resource allocator and determine the level of resources that will eventually be required. Accurate forecasting of conditions by Command becomes critical during this initial evaluation process. ______

STANDARD OPRATING GUIDELINES #210 Page 4 of 4

Command must make critical decisions that relate to cut-off points and must develop fire control strategy pessimistically. It takes a certain amount of time to "get water" and the fire continues to burn while the attack is being set up. Command must consider where the fire will be when attack efforts are ready to actually go into operation; if misjudged, the fire may burn past the attack/cut-off position. Don't play "catch up" with a fire that is burning through a building: project your set-up time, write-off lost property and get ahead of the fire. Set up adequately and overpower it.

______

Don't put water into burned property, particularly where there is unburned property left to burn. Many times fire streams are directed into property that is already lost, often at the expense of exposed unburned property.

Write-off property that is already lost and go on to protect exposed property based on the most dangerous direction of spread. Do not continue to operate in positions that are essentially lost.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: TASK ASSIGNMENTS

#211a TRUCK / RESCUE EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 5

Based on the tactical priorities of Rescue, Fire Control, and Property Conservation, many of the functions performed by firefighting personnel are common on most responses to working fires.

Company functions, in general, are addressed in SOG 206, “Standard Company Operations.”

This guideline more specifically details the duties and responsibilities of the personnel assigned to the Truck and Rescue companies. These duties are indicated on the basis of position within the company.

Often, individual circumstances will dictate the priority of tasks or, possibly, the lack of need for certain tasks to be addressed. In either situation, assignments to other tasks or functions by the Incident Commander are not precluded.

The Officer (or Acting Officer) is responsible for the entire crew of a company and shall follow through to see that all required tasks are completed.

It is paramount that communication with the Incident Commander be made relative to the completion of each task. Communications clarity will be enhanced by the Incident Commander staying, whenever possible, at the Command Car.

Many of the functions of a Rescue Company overlap into functions of an Engine Company or a Truck Company. Normally, Rescues will arrive at an incident after an Engine Company and Truck Company have already arrived. Upon arrival at a working fire, the Officer and Jumpseat positions from the Truck are teamed together to perform some of the Truck Company functions and the Driver and Officer positions from the Rescue are teamed together to accomplish task assignments for the Rescue. The “Boxman” from the Rescue is immediately and automatically reassigned to the Truck Company and is teamed with its Driver for other Truck Company functions.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #211a Page 2 of 5

Utilizing tactical considerations and an awareness of ever-changing circumstances, a state of preparedness and improved efficiency in task assignments can be accomplished by recognizing the “Four Primaries” for each crew member.

1- Primary Equipment 2- Primary Fireground Location 3- Primary Route 4- Primary Duties and Responsibilities

DEFINITIONS:

Primary Equipment-

Primary Equipment is the equipment each crew member is assigned to carry onto the fireground.

Primary Fireground Location-

Primary Fireground Location is the principle location on the fireground where crew members should direct their immediate attention, relative to the tasks that may need to be performed there.

Primary Route-

Primary Route is the general direction or means to reach the primary fireground location where tasks are to be carried out. Although the layout of buildings, parking lots and other considerations make each incident unique unto itself, the route will usually be the same.

Primary Duties and Responsibilities-

Primary Duties and Responsibilities are the functions which should, under normal circumstances, be carried out automatically and expeditiously through a thorough understanding of each crew member’s assigned tasks. Understanding each other’s responsibilities avoids confusion, eliminates duplication of effort, and helps reduce oversight on the fireground.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #211a Page 3 of 5

PRIMARY EQUIPMENT

TRUCK COMPANY-

A) Officer position B) Jumpseat position

1) S.C.B.A. 1) S.C.B.A. 2) Portable radio 2) Pike pole 3) Flat head axe 3) 2.5 gal extinguisher 4) Haligan bar 4) Portable radio

C) Driver position D) Boxman position

1) S.C.B.A. 1) S.C.B.A. 2) Portable radio 2) Haligan bar 3) Pike pole 3) Pick-head axe 4) Portable radio RESCUE COMPANY-

A) Officer position B) Driver position

1) S.C.B.A 1) S.C.B.A. 2) Portable radio 2) Utility Kit 3) Salvage cover 3) Hot Stick 4) Salvage cover 5) Portable radio

PRIMARY FIREGROUND LOCATION

TRUCK COMPANY-

A) Officer and Jumpseat positions - Inside Crew

1) Fire floor 2) Floor above fire (may be attic space or roof)

B) Driver and Boxman positions - Outside Crew

1) Roof, if building has a common hallway 2) Rear of fire (not necessarily rear of fire building)

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #211a Page 4 of 5

RESCUE COMPANY-

A) Officer and Driver positions

1) Apparatus for lighting (at night) 2) Utility service connections 3) Rehab setup area 4) Interior of fire building 5) As assigned

PRIMARY ROUTE

TRUCK COMPANY-

A) Officer and Jumpseat positions

1) Entrance doors 2) Stairwell 3) Ground or aerial ladder

B) Driver and Boxman positions

1) Side yard 2) Ground or aerial ladder

RESCUE COMPANY-

A) Officer and Driver positions

1) Side or rear of fire building

PRIMARY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

TRUCK COMPANY-

A) Officer and Jumpseat positions

1) Forcible entry 2) Remove obstructions to allow Engine Company to attack fire 3) Conduct size-up of fire extension 4) Primary search for victims 5) Overhaul activities

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #211a Page 5 of 5

B) Driver and Boxman positions

1) Outside removal of trapped occupants 2) Placement of ground and aerial ladders, as needed 3) Ventilation, as required

a) Horizontal (windows, doors, gables) b) Vertical (roof) c) P.P.V. (set up, initiate only as directed)

4) Elevated fire streams 5) Overhaul activities

RESCUE COMPANY-

A) Officer and Driver positions

1) Priority tasks, as needed 2) Provide general outdoor lighting of the fireground 3) Shut down gas company service to the building 4) Disable electric service to the building (requesting Edison, if needed) 5) Implement S.C.B.A. exchange at Rehab area 6) Secondary search 7) General firefighting duties

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: TASK ASSIGNMENTS

#212a ENGINE COMPANIES EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 6

Based on the tactical priorities of Rescue, Fire Control, and Property Conservation, many of the functions performed by firefighting personnel are common on most responses to working fires.

Company functions, in general, are addressed in SOG# 206, “Standard Company Operations.”

This guideline more specifically details the duties and responsibilities of the personnel assigned to the engine companies. These duties are indicated on the basis of position within the company.

Often, individual circumstances will dictate the priority of tasks or, possibly, the lack of need for certain tasks to be addressed. In either situation, assignments to other tasks or functions by the Incident Commander are not precluded. The Officer (or Acting Officer) is responsible for the entire crew of a company and shall follow through to see that all required tasks are completed.

It is paramount that communication with the Incident Commander be made relative to the completion of each task.

When responding to working fires, factors influencing fireground operations for engine companies are assessed enroute to the scene and upon arrival at the scene, as well as throughout the duration of the incident. The “type” of alarm is the factor which determines the number of engine companies responding to an incident. The actual order of arrival on scene determines the function each engine will serve when it gets there. It follows that the personnel on each company should understand what their company’s function is and what is expected of them as a team, as well as individually.

Efficiency and proficiency can be achieved in fireground operations utilizing an anticipated, coordinated procedure for engine companies to execute upon arrival at structural working fires. The “first-arriving” engine company will function as the “Attack Engine”, laying out hoselines and equipment needed for the initial fire attack and rescue. The second-arriving engine will function as the “Supply Engine”, establishing necessary water supplies to meet the needs of the “Attack Engine” and/or the Truck, with its crew serving as the Rapid Intervention Team. The third-arriving engine company (General Alarms) will establish a water supply from a hydrant, through the engine’s pump, to the Fire Department Connection (F.D.C.) or standpipe on sprinklered buildings as a supplement to the existing water supply. On non-sprinklered buildings, this engine company is to stage in STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #212a Page 2 of 6

an appropriate area and ready itself to assist in the fire attack. The task assignments are based upon tactical priorities, fire control principles and standard company operations for “regular alarm” and “general alarm” situations. Special circumstances may warrant variances from the anticipated assignments (i.e. multiple alarms occurring simultaneously, apparatus being out of service, etc.)

Utilizing tactical considerations and an awareness of ever-changing circumstances, a state of preparedness and improved efficiency in task assignments can be accomplished by recognizing the “Four Primaries” for each crew member:

1- Primary Equipment 2- Primary Fireground Location 3- Primary Route 4- Primary Duties and Responsibilities

DEFINITIONS:

Primary Equipment-

Primary Equipment is the equipment each crew member is assigned to carry onto the fireground.

Primary Fireground Location-

Primary Fireground Location is the principle location on the fireground where crew members should direct their immediate attention, relative to the tasks that may need to be performed there.

Primary Route-

Primary Route is the general direction or means to reach the primary fireground location where tasks are to be carried out. Although the layout of buildings, parking lots and other considerations make each incident unique unto itself, the route will usually be the same.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #212a Page 3 of 6

Primary Duties and Responsibilities-

Primary Duties and Responsibilities are the functions which should, under normal circumstances, be carried out automatically and expeditiously through a thorough understanding of each crew member’s assigned tasks. Understanding each other’s responsibilities avoids confusion, eliminates duplication of effort, and helps reduce oversight on the fireground.

FIRST-ARRIVING ENGINE COMPANY

PRIMARY EQUIPMENT

A) Officer position B) Jumpseat position C) Driver position

1) S.C.B.A. 1) S.C.B.A. 1) Fire pump 2) Portable radio 2) Portable radio 2) Portable radio 3) Fire attack lines 3) Fire attack lines 3) Attack & supply 4) Flathead axe/haligan line connection to attack engine

PRIMARY FIREGROUND LOCATION

The preparation for the initial fire attack will occur in the area between the engine and the fire building. The engine will be placed in a position where the needed hoselines, as well as backup hoselines, and equipment will be readily available for the fire attack (usually with the rear of the engine at the driveway or property line, leaving ample room for the truck company and water supply lines). Sufficient lines for the fire attack are determined by the Company Officer, based on the fire conditions upon arrival, as well as anticipated changes in the fire conditions. The means and path of entry into the fire building will be determined by the Company Officer. Initial offensive fire attack efforts will be directed toward the building level and location where the fire conditions seem to be originating. On defensive operations, the exact outside fireground location with the most advantage for the fire attack will be determined by the Company Officer.

PRIMARY ROUTE

On offensive operations, the primary route for the initial fire attack will best be determined through utilization of normal means of ingress or egress.

On defensive operations, the primary route will be a specified location in the yard or parking area surrounding the fire building.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #212a Page 4 of 6

PRIMARY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

A) Officer position

1) Size up and report of fire conditions 2) Determination and implementation of fire attack strategies 3) Preparation of fire attack lines 4) Initial fire attack

B) Jumpseat position

1) Preparation of fire attack lines 2) Preparation of necessary fire attack equipment 3) Initial fire attack

C) Driver position

1) Preparation of engine for pumping operations 2) Connection and straightening of fire attack lines and water supply lines to engine 3) Operate pump panel & continuously monitor water supply needs of attack lines 4) Assist in providing needed equipment from Attack Engine

SECOND-ARRIVING ENGINE COMPANY

PRIMARY EQUIPMENT:

REVERSE LAY FORWARD LAY

A) Officer position A) Officer position

1) S.C.B.A 1) S.C.B.A. 2) Portable Radio 2) Portable Radio 3) Flathead axe & haligan 3) Flathead axe & haligan 4) Box light 4) Box light

B) Jumpseat position B) Jumpseat position

1) S.C.B.A. 1) S.C.B.A. 2) Portable Radio 2) Portable Radio 3) RIT rope bag (yellow) 3) Hydrant bag/hydrant 4) Backup hoseline 4) Hoseline connections to hydrant STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #212a Page 5 of 6

C) Driver position C) Driver position

1) Fire pump 1) S.C.B.A. 2) Portable Radio 2) Portable Radio 3) Hoseline connections at 3) RIT rope bag (yellow) supply engine and hydrant 4) Backup hoseline

PRIMARY FIREGROUND LOCATION & PRIMARY ROUTE

The establishment of water supply to the attack engine and truck will normally take place in the roadway or parking area between those apparatus and the nearest hydrant. Connections will be made at the hydrant, as needed to maintain sufficient water flow for any and all attack lines that may be utilized. The crew will then report to the immediate area of the Initial Attack engine to establish the Rapid Intervention Team (driver staying at the pump on a reverse lay).

PRIMARY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

It is the responsibility of the second-arriving engine company to provide water supply to the apparatus involved on the fire attack and assume Rapid Intervention Team duties on the fireground. 1) Determine location of nearest hydrant 2) Determine whether forward or reverse lay is to be utilized 3) Make hydrant and supply line connections 4) Provide sufficient water flow to attack apparatus 5) Report to the Incident Commander, the completion of water supply assignment. 6) Prepare backup hoseline and/or lifeline for entry as Rapid Intervention Team

THIRD-ARRIVING ENGINE COMPANY

PRIMARY EQUIPMENT

A) Officer position B) Jumpseat position C) Driver position

1) S.C.B.A. 1) S.C.B.A. 1) Fire pump 2) Portable Radio 2) Portable Radio 2) Portable Radio 3) Hoseline connections 3) Hydrant bag/Hydrant 3) Hoseline to standpipe 4) Hoseline connections connections to hydrant to engine

PRIMARY FIREGROUND LOCATION STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #212a Page 6 of 6

The third-arriving engine company will be directing its initial activities in the area between the standpipe or F.D.C. and a nearby hydrant on a sprinklered building. These connections are usually, but not always, found to the rear or side of the fire building. The completion of the task of providing water supply to the sprinkler is to be reported to the Incident Commander, who may possibly reassign the crew (not including the Driver, who is to remain at the pump panel of the engine) to other fireground activities once the connections have been made. In the event the building is not sprinklered, positioning to the rear or side will better facilitate an additional entry point for fire attack, if needed. For reasons of safety for other crews who may be inside the fire building, the opening of additional entryways into the fire building must be cleared through the Incident Commander.

PRIMARY ROUTE

The primary route will normally be through driveways, parking areas and yards which lead to the side and or rear of the fire building, or wherever the F.D.C. happens to be.

PRIMARY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Working together as a crew, the third-arriving engine company will be responsible for establishment of the supplemental water supply to sprinkler systems and/or serve as an additional fire attack team.

1) Determine location of the Fire Department Connection (F.D.C.) 2) Determine location of hydrant to be utilized 3) Make hoseline connections through engine fire pump 4) Provide sufficient water flow and pressure to sprinkler system 5) Report completion of sprinkler connection to Incident Commander 6) Prepare for fireground assignment and report to Incident Commander (if pumping to standpipe, Driver stays at pump)

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: ADDITIONAL RESOURCE #_____213______MANAGEMENT EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 OF 2

The decisions required to provide for adequate resources are an important factor in effective fire ground management. Command must balance the tactical problems with the resource required to control those problems and stay ahead of the situation through effective forecasting. Beware of “Crisis Management”: situation grows at a rate faster than the response rate to that situation - Command ends up with an out of control situation and inadequate resources to control it.

Many times Command will reach a point where Command begins to debate whether to call another alarm or not - in such cases call for it. If the extra resource is not needed, it can easily be put back in service.

In most cases, Command should utilize the greater alarm mechanism - it is the quicker, provides for automatic move-ups and indicates in a standard manner that the fire problem is in an expanded mode. Command should resist the temptation to request assistance in a piecemeal fashion.

It is the continuing responsibility and function of Command to determine the resource required to control the situation and to provide for the timely call for any additional resource required. The early call for additional resource will tend to consistently save the day.

Command must be aware of both the capability and response time of additional resource and effectively integrate these facts into calls for additional resource.

Some tactical situations move slowly, while some move very quickly. Command must call for additional resource at a rate that stays ahead of the fire. Some situations require the categorical call for additional alarms or upgrading an assignment upon knowledge of particular characteristics or conditions; in other situations, Command will initiate some fire control activities, ask for reports and, based upon receipt of bad news, will strike more alarms.

When calling for additional resource, Command must build a corresponding command organization - structure to manage that additional resource. Command cannot encounter a big fire situation, call additional alarms and then expect to effectively manage that additional resource in a single alarm command mode.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #213 Page 2 of 2

Additional resources should be requested when: an actual or potential fire situation exists and the life hazard exceeds the rescue capabilities of initial alarm companies.

The number, location and condition of actual victims exceed the rescue/removal/treatment capabilities of companies.

An actual or potential fire situation exists and the property protection demand (both internal and external) exceeds the fire control capabilities of initial alarm companies.

Fire conditions become more severe or the situation deteriorates significantly.

All companies have been committed and the fire is not controlled.

Forces are depleted due to exhaustion or injury or are trapped or missing: Command must forecast the effect the fire will have on personnel and provide for the support of such personnel in advance.

Command runs out of some resource (men, apparatus, water, equipment, command, etc.).

There is evidence of significant fire but companies are unable to determine location and extent.

The commitment of companies is not effective.

Companies cannot effectively perform early salvage operations.

Situation becomes so widespread / complex that Command can no longer effectively “cope” - the situation requires larger command organization and more sector functions.

Command instinctively feels the need to summon additional resource - (don’t disregard fireground hunches).

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: RESCUE #______214b_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: FEBRUARY 28, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

It is standard operating procedure to extend a primary search in all involved and exposed occupancies which can be entered. Command must structure initial operations around the completion of the primary search. Primary search means companies have quickly gone through all affected areas and verified the removal and/or safety of all occupants.

Time is the critical factor in the primary search process. Successful primary search operations must necessarily be extended quickly and during initial fire stages.

The rescue functions that follow lengthy fire control activities will be regarded tactically as presenting a secondary search. Secondary search means that companies thoroughly search the interior of the fire area after initial fire control and ventilation activities have been completed. Secondary search should preferably be completed by different companies than those involved in primary search activities. Thoroughness, rather than time, is the critical factor in secondary search.

The completion of the primary search is reported utilizing the standard radio reporting term “ALL CLEAR”. It is the responsibility of Command to coordinate primary search assignments and secure completion reports from interior companies.

The stage of the fire becomes a critical factor that affects the rescue approach developed by Command. The following items outline the basic Command approach to fire stages:

• In ‘nothing showing’ situations, or in very minor fire cases that clearly pose no life hazard, the first arriving company is to conduct a rapid interior search and report “ALL CLEAR”. (The interior search for victims will also verify no fire.)

• In smoke showing and working fire situations, fire control efforts must be extended simultaneously with rescue operations in order to gain entry and control interior access to complete primary search. In such cases, Command and operating companies must be aware the operation is in a rescue mode until primary search is complete, regardless of the fire control required. In working fire situations, primary search must be followed by a secondary search.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #214b Page 2 of 3

• In cases of fully involved buildings or sections of buildings, immediate entry and primary search activities become impossible and survival of occupants is improbable. Command must initially report fully involved conditions and that he will not report an all clear. As quickly as fire control is achieved, Command must structure what is, in effect, a secondary search for victims.

Command and operating companies cannot depend upon reports from spectators to determine status of victims. Control forces should utilize reports as to the location, number, and condition of victims as supporting primary search efforts and must extend and complete a primary search wherever entry is possible.

Command must consider the following factors in developing a basic rescue size- up:

#1 - Number, location and condition of victims #2 - Affect the fire has on the victims #3 - Capability of the control forces to enter the building, remove/protect victims and control fire

Command must make the basic rescue decision:

Do we remove victims from fire? OR Do we remove the fire from the victims?

In some cases, occupants are safer in their rooms than moving through contaminated hallways and interior areas. Such movement may also impede interior firefighting.

Command must realistically evaluate the manpower required to actually remove victims and then treat their fire-affected bodies. In cases involving such multiple victims, Command must call for the timely response of adequate resources and quickly develop an organization that will both stabilize the fire and provide for the removal and treatment of the occupants.

Rescue efforts should be extended in the following order:

#1 - Most severely threatened #2 - The largest number (groups) #3 - The remainder of the fire area #4 - The exposed areas

STANDARD OPRATING GUIDELINES #214b Page 3 of 3

Command must make specific primary search assignments to companies to cover specific areas of large, complex occupancies and maintain on-going control of such companies until the entire area is searched. When primary search companies encounter and remove victims, Command must assign other companies to continue to cover the interior positions vacated by those companies.

All initial attack efforts must be directed toward supporting rescue efforts and hose lines must be placed in a manner to control interior access, confine the fire, and protect avenues of escape. Hose line placement becomes a critical factor in these cases and Command and all operating companies must realize that the operation is in a rescue mode. It may be necessary to operate in a manner that writes off the structure in order to buy rescue time.

Normal means of interior access (stairs, halls, interior public areas, etc.) should be utilized to remove victims whenever possible. Secondary means of rescue (platforms, ladders, fire escapes, helicopters, etc.) must be utilized in their order of effectiveness.

Command must structure treatment of victims after removal. Multiple victims should be removed to one location for more effective triage and treatment. Command should coordinate and utilize MFR EMS capability wherever available and assign treatment companies as required to an exterior Medical Division.

Once the primary search has been completed and an “ALL CLEAR” transmitted, Command must maintain control of access to the fire area; beware of occupants (and others) re-entering the building.

The most urgent reason for calling additional alarms is for the purpose of covering life safety - Command must develop a realistic (and pessimistic) rescue size-up as early as possible.

The term “SEARCH & RESCUE” should be used when structuring a primary search over the radio; “ALL CLEAR” should be used only as a completion report.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: OVERHAUL #_____215______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

This procedure describes guidelines for conducting overhaul operations. The main objective of overhaul operations is to seek out and extinguish all remaining fire, and stabilize the incident scene by providing for safety and security. Rekindles must always be eliminated. Additional objectives should include:

• Preserve evidence

• Secure the fire scene

When addressing overhaul operations, Command should:

• Insure all fire is extinguished.

• During rest breaks of fire crews, insure at least, two firefighters remain in the fire area to detect any possible hidden fire and reignition.

• Use continuing positive pressure ventilation to maintain an acceptable working environment.

• Meet with the property owner/responsible party concerning overhaul operations.

• If necessary, schedule post-incident drive-by/walk-through of fire building by fire companies to check for potential reignition sources.

• Closely coordinate overhaul with fire investigators.

Customer Relations

Where possible, Command or Company Officers of overhaul crews should meet with the property owner / responsible party to explain the reasons for overhaul operations on such matters of pulling ceilings, opening walls, etc. In some cases, where safe to do so, allowing the property owner / responsible party to be escorted through the fire area can help him see and visualize the need for overhaul operations. Proper salvage operations should, of course, be completed prior to any walk-through. The property owner/responsible party should not be allowed entry prior to overhaul operations and only after approval by a Fire Investigator.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #215 Page 2 of 3

Allowing the property owner/responsible party the opportunity to remove personal possessions/valuables, where safe to do so, or removing these items for him/her is excellent customer relations.

Every effort should also be made to assist the property owner/responsible party in notifying insurance agents, etc., and answering his questions. In all cases the property owner/occupant should be provided the Fire Department publication “After the Fire” to assist him/her in the recovering process.

A key to the property from the property owner/responsible party for post-incident drive-by / walk-through inspections (for rekindle prevention) should be obtained when possible. A means of returning the key should also be arranged.

Hidden Fires

Fire suppression operations often overlook small pockets of fire concealed in construction voids or hidden under debris. Overhaul activities must thoroughly search the fire scene to detect and extinguish these hidden fires or “hot spots” before they rekindle.

Floor, wall or ceiling areas showing evidence of extensive decomposition due to fire should be thoroughly examined during overhaul. Additional areas to check include wooden door jambs, air conditioning vents and registers, baseboards, door and window casings, and around light fixtures and electrical outlets. Axes, pike poles and haligan tools are most commonly used for this purpose. Attic fires pose a special hazard for rekindle where insulation has been exposed to fire. Large areas can receive fire damage and can be located in difficult to reach areas. In some cases, all insulation must be removed to extinguish all remnants of fire. Plenum spaces, soffits and pipe chases should receive careful inspection as they provide possible routes for fire to spread throughout a structure. Failing to overhaul these areas invites fire extension to uninvolved building areas.

Command will be responsible for insuring that the fire area has been thoroughly overhauled and no hidden fire remains. The company officer last leaving the scene will be responsible for insuring total fire extinguishment. Crews should search for any evidence of smoke or remaining hot spots. An examination of contents below salvage covers should be conducted. In some cases, additional openings in the structure may be required.

Evidence Preservation

Companies performing overhaul should continuously weigh the importance of preserving evidence with the desire to immediately remove debris and completely STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #215 Page 3 of 3

extinguish all traces of fire. In some cases, it may be necessary to monitor spot fires until investigators arrive on the scene. Where possible, evidence should remain untouched, undisturbed and in its original location. Where circumstances prohibit this, evidence should be removed under the direction of a fire investigator.

Securing the Fire Scene

Securing the fire scene is also a function of overhaul. Securing refers to actions required to protect the structure and contents from damage after the fire suppression companies have departed from the scene. Roof ventilation holes and broken windows should be covered to reduce weather damage. Rolled plastic is ideal for this use. For safety reasons, remaining glass shreds should be removed from the frames of broken windows prior to installing covers and always prior to leaving the scene.

Securing the scene also includes the action required to insure the safety of all persons likely to visit the incident scene. Once a hazard zone is established during firefighting operations, it must not be abandoned prior to removing or stabilizing the hazard. Overhaul companies must provide a means of identifying and guarding hazards that cannot be removed or stabilized. Barricades, hazard tap, and the posting of guards are all suitable methods depending upon the severity of hazard.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: WATER SUPPLY AND FIRE #_____216______STREAM MANAGEMENT EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 5

This procedure provides guidance to Company Officers in determining water supply needs and selecting the most effective hose line size.

Overview

Adequate water supply during fire attack operations has a critical impact on fire control outcomes. A good water supply and adequate GPM flows from attack lines result in good outcomes. Delayed or limited water supply and inadequate GPM flows lead to delayed fire control, increased risk to firefighters and victims, and greater fire loss.

Hydrant Water Supply

• Hydrants provide the best source of water supply

• Second-arriving engine companies approaching the scene of a working fire involving a structure should expect to lay the water supply line and make necessary supply line connections.

• First-arriving Engine companies, under ideal conditions (hydrant located within 100 ft. of either property line), may actually find it beneficial to lay their own supply line in a “forward lay” fashion, always maintaining a best advantage position to address the initial fire attack. If they do so, they must relay a radio message indicating their action.

• The second-arriving engine will still be responsible to make all necessary supply line connections, while the first-arriving engine company establishes the initial fire attack.

• There would be few exceptions to this guideline (i.e., obvious critical rescue requiring a full crew, unsure of actual fire location in a multi-unit building complex, etc.)

Pumped Water

Pumped water supply is necessary when large volumes of water are required on the fire ground. This normally occurs later in the attack operation when Engine Mounted Master Streams, elevated pipes, or multiple high GPM attack lines are in operation.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #216 Page 2 of 5

A non-pumped 500 foot 4’ supply line can flow 800 GPM on a residential working fire, this amount of water supply would be sufficient under most circumstances. Unless specifically directed by the Incident Commander, the determination whether to have a “pumped” or “non-pumped” supply line will be made by the second-arriving engine company’s officer. Most “initial attack” operations do not involve Engine Mounted Master Streams operations.

Command should address the need for pumped water as elevated pipes or Engine Mounted Master Streams are ordered into operation and assign engine companies to pump lines.

When pumped water is initiated, Command should maintain control of key hydrants and order pumped water on a priority basis.

Engine Mounted Master Streams

Engine Mounted Master Streams offer very large GPM flows (500 to 1,000 GPM), quick operation, reach and penetration. (A solid bore tip offers greater reach, penetration, with a more intact stream than a peripheral nozzle that is set on straight stream).

Engine Mounted Master Stream should be considered for structures that are well involved, beyond rapid reach of attack lines, for exposure protection, and situations that pose an unusual safety risk to firefighters.

Attack Hose Line Choice

The objective of the attack hose line choice is to provide enough GPM flow to overcome the volume of fire being produced, or adequate flow to effectively cool and protect exposures.

The 1-3/4 inch attack line can be used for most small fires (i.e., one or two rooms in a residential fire). The company officer however should order larger or additional attack lines for a larger volume of fire (i.e.., when a fire has vented itself through the roof before or upon arrival).

Basic Attack Hose Line Placement

When operating in the offensive attack mode, attack hose lines of adequate volume should be advanced inside the fire building in order to put water on the fire and to control access to halls, stairways, or other vertical and horizontal channels through which people and fire may travel.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #216 Page 3 of 5

• The first stream should be placed between the fire and persons endangered by it.

• When no life is endangered, the first stream should be placed between the fire and the most severe exposure.

• A second hose line should protect a secondary means of egress (always bear in mind the presence of Fire personnel operating in opposing positions).

• Additional hose lines should cover other critical areas or when covered, back up in place hose lines.

• Whenever possible, crews should position hose lines in a manner and direction that supports rescue activities, begins confinement, and protects exposures.

When a change from offensive to a defensive operation occurs, crews should pull hand lines out of the fire building only if safe to do so. Do not delay exit from the building for the sake of salvaging a few feet of hose and a nozzle if conditions are deteriorating rapidly, unless the line is needed for crew protection during exit operations.

FIRE STREAM CHARACTERISTICS AND CONSIDERATIONS

Fire control forces must consider the characteristics of fire streams and choose the most effective nozzle and stream for the task;

• Solid Stream: Greater penetration, reach and striking power. Less steam conversion.

• Peripheral: Increased heat absorption/expansion. Shorter reach. Most effective in confined spaces and protecting exposures.

Choose the proper sized attack hose line;

• 1-3/4” Lines: Fast, mobile, 176 GPM.

• 2-1/2” Lines: Slow/difficult to move. Volume at 250 GPM.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #216 Page 4 of 5

• Elevated Master Stream: Mostly stationary, slow to set up - maximum water, 500 to 1000 GPM.

Offensive attack activities must be highly mobile - as mobility is slowed, attack activities begin to become more defensive in nature and effect. Many times effective offensive operations are often referred to as “aggressive.”

Fire Stream Considerations

An offensive attack mode should achieve an effect on the fire quickly - consequently, backup judgments should also be developed quickly. If you apply water to an offensive attack position and the fire does not go out - React! Back it up or Re-deploy.

Think ahead! Predict where the fire is going to go and put crews in position ahead of the fire.

Beware of hose lines that have been operated in the same place for long periods. Fire conditions change during the course of fire operations (most things will only burn for a limited time) and the effect of hose line operation must be continually evaluated. If the operation of such lines becomes ineffective, move, adjust, or redeploy them.

Beware of the limitations of operating nozzles through holes. The mobility of such streams is necessarily limited and it is generally difficult to evaluate their effectiveness. Sometimes you must breach walls, floors, etc. to operate - realize the limitations of such situations.

When utilizing crews with hand lines to enter basement fires, crews should not open nozzles until they can see and/or are near the fire - crews should use caution when deploying fog streams in basement fires. Steam production may be extensive. Straight streams should be considered first.

If you commit attack crews to inside operations, command must closely coordinate exterior streams - particularly elevated pipes and engine mounted master streams. Extreme caution should be taken with interior and exterior attacks in the same building. It may be necessary to coordinate pulling crews out of the building while an exterior heavy streams knockdown is made. Know when to shut down nozzles - many times continuing operations of large streams prevents entry and complete extinguishment. Do not operate fire streams into smoke - fire location must be determined before water can be effectively applied.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #216 Page 5 of 5

Have attack lines ready during forcible entry operations. Attack crews should be fully protected and supervised before forcible entry is initiated.

Company Officers must assume responsibility for the effectiveness of their fire streams. These officers must maintain an awareness of where fire streams are going, their effectiveness and then report the general operational characteristics back to the Incident Commander. Company Officers must be aware that nozzle diameter adjustment or nozzle tip reduction may be necessary in order to produce an effective stream.

Elevated pipes are particularly useful and effective when operated on large open- type fires. A good general rule is that you have written off the building (or portion) when you initiate elevated pipe operations and you are essentially in a defensive mode. Ground crews should be advised before elevated pipes go into operation.

When positioning elevated pipes to protect adjacent exposures (common walls) during defensive operations, the ladders turntable should be lined up with the wall to be protected, to permit the most effective operation.

Do not apply water to the outside of a roof and think you are extinguishing the fire. Such water application may offer effective exposure protection; but if part of the roof is intact, it will shed water just like it was built to do and will prevent water from reaching the seat of the fire. This is particularly true of elevated pipe operations.

Do not operate fire streams down ventilation holes during offensive operations. This reduces the effect of ventilation and may seriously endanger interior attack crews.

Once offensive operations change to a defensive mode, command must prioritize hand line operations. Most often, hand lines will need to be shut down to provide adequate water supply for master streams.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: CAR FIRES #_____217______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

This procedure identifies operational tactics for safe handling of motor vehicle fires.

FIRE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The minimum level of protection for Firefighters is full protective clothing with SCBA (with facepiece in place). Officers must wear full protective clothing in order to directly supervise crews.

The minimum size of hoseline is the 1-1/2” handline.

APPARATUS PLACEMENT

Apparatus should be placed upwind and uphill of the incident if possible. This is to afford protection from hazardous liquids and vapors and reduces smoke in the work area.

Consideration should be given to using the apparatus as a barrier, to shield the incident scene from traffic hazards. Warning lights should be left operating.

Additional consideration should be given to positioning the apparatus at an angle to better allow the removal of any hose from the preconnect cross-lay compartments.

WATER SUPPLY

If the water carried on the responding apparatus will not be sufficient, early consideration must be given to additional water supply sources. A supply line or other engines may be required.

FIRE ATTACK

A working fire involving the interior of the vehicle passenger compartment will damage the vehicle beyond repair. As such, the attack plan should consider the vehicle as a “write off” and a safe and appropriate approach and fire attack must be implemented.

Where victims are trapped in the vehicle, first water should be applied to protect the victims and permit rescue.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #217 Page 2 of 3

When rescue is not a factor, first water should be applied for several seconds to extinguish fire or cool down the area around any fuel tanks or fuel systems. This is especially important if the fuel tanks are Liquidified Petroleum Gas (LPG) or Liquid Natural Gas (LNG).

At least one member of the attack team must have forcible entry tools in his/her possession to provide prompt and safe entry into the vehicle.

HAZARDS AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

• Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG) and Liquid Natural Gas (LNG) are becoming common place as fuel for vehicles. Pressure release devices can create a lengthy “blow torch” effect, or should the pressure relief device fail, a BLEVE may occur. Vehicles may not be marked to identify this fuel hazard. If there is flame impingement on a visible LPG/LNG storage tank, take action to control the fire and cool the tank. If vapors escaping from the storage tank relief valve have ignited, allow the LPG/LNG to burn while protecting exposures and cooling the tank. Flow of gas through piping can be controlled by shutting off the valve at the storage tank. • Energy Absorbing Bumpers - Consist of gas and fluid filled cylinders that, when heated during a fire, will develop high pressures which may result in the sudden release of the bumper assembly. This could result in serious injury to anyone in its path. Bumper assemblies have been known to travel 25 feet. • Batteries - Explosion hazard due to presence of hydrogen vapors. Avoid contact with battery acid. When the situation is stable, disconnect battery cables (ground cable first). • Combustible Metals - Some vehicles have various parts made of combustible metals, such as engine blocks, heads, wheels, etc. When these metals are burning, attempts to extinguish them with water will usually add to the intensity of the fire. Large quantities of water, however, will cool the metal below its ignition temperature. After some initial intensification, the fire should go out. Dry chemical extinguishers can also be effective.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #217 Page 3 of 3

• Trunk/Rear Hutch/Engine Hoods - Hold-open devices may employ, along or in any combination with any of the following: springs, gas cylinders, extending arms, etc. When gas cylinders are exposed to heat, failure or rupture of these devices should be expected. Excessive pressure may develop in liftassists causing a trunk, hatch or hood to fly open with explosive force when the latch mechanism is released. To insure personal safety, be sure to allow sufficient clearance when releasing latches.

Fires involving the trunk/cargo area should be approached with extreme caution. Contents may include toxic, flammable or other hazardous materials. Expect the worst!

• Fuel Tanks - May be constructed of sheet metal or plastic. A rupture or burn-through may occur with these tanks causing a rapid flash fire of the fuel. Do not remove gas cap, as tank may have become pressurized. Do not direct hose stream into tank, as this will cause pressurization of tank, with a possible result of burning fuel spewing from the tank fill opening.

• Interior - Well sealed interiors of modern vehicles present the potential for backdraft. Use caution when opening doors or breaking windows. Appropriate approach, ventilation, and safety concerns must be considered. Have a charged handline ready before making entry.

• Vehicle Stability - Tires or split rims exposed to fire may explode, causing the vehicle to drop suddenly. Expect exploding rim parts or tire debris to be expelled outward from the sides. Approach at a diagonal from the front and/or rear corner of the vehicle for maximum protection from potential flying debris. Some larger vehicles, such as buses, employ an air suspension system. When these systems are exposed to heat or flame, they may fail, causing the vehicle to SUDDENLY drop several inches.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: FIREGROUND FACTORS #______218_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 5

Fireground factors offer a standard list of basic items Command must consider in the evaluation of tactical situations. This list should provide Command with a “checklist” of the basic items that are involved in size-up, decision making, initiating action, review and revision on the fireground.

The effective Command Officer can only deal with a limited number of factors of any kind on the fireground. Within the framework of that limitation, the identification of critical factors is extremely important. All the factors are not critical in any one tactical situation. Command must identify the critical fireground factors that are significant in each tactical situation - the list of factors offers a framework for that process.

Many times we begin operations before adequately considering the critical fireground factors. Size-up is a conscious process involving the very rapid but deliberate consideration of the critical factors and the development of a strategy and rational plan of attack based on those conditions. Attack is many times an instinctive action-oriented process that involves taking the shortest and quickest route directly to the fire. Action feels good in fireground situations while thinking delays action. Beware of non-thinking attack situations and non-thinking attackers!

Fireground factors represent an array of items that are dynamic during the entire fireground process. The relative importance of each factor necessarily changes throughout that time frame. Command must continually deal with these changes and base decisions on factor information that is timely and current. Beware of developing an initial plan of attack and sticking to that same initial plan throughout the fire, even though conditions continue to change. Effective fire operations require attack plan revisions that continually reconsider fireground factors based upon information feedback.

In critical fire situations, Command may develop an initial plan and initiate an attack based on an incomplete evaluation of fireground factors. In such cases, efforts must continue throughout the operation to improve the information on which those decisions are based. Command will seldom operate with complete information during initial operations.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #218 Page 2 of 5

The effective management of each fireground factor requires Command to apply a somewhat different form of information management (visual, recon, preplan) to each factor. This is particularly true between the major categories of factors. Command must deal with each factor in the most effective manner.

Most tactical situations represent a complex problem with regard to how Command deals with fireground factor information. There are factors that can be determined from a command position on the outside of the structure and other factors that can only be determined from other operating positions - both outside and inside the structure. Fireground intelligence available to Command is developed utilizing an overlapping variety of information management factors and forms. These forms of information management revolve around the three basic information factors:

1. Visual Factors - These factors include those obvious to visual observation and those absorbed subconsciously. This visual information is categorized as the type that can normally be gained by actually look at a tactical situation from the outside. This form of intelligence involves the perceptive capability of Command.

2. Reconnaissance Factors - These factors include information that is not visually available to Command from a position on the outside of a tactical situation and must be gained by actually sending someone to check-out, go-see, look-up, research, advise, call, go-find, etc. This generally involves Command making a specific assignment and then receiving an information-oriented report.

3. Preplanning and Familiarity Factors - These factors include the intelligence that is gained from formal pre-fire planning, general informal familiarization activities and through the C.A.D. System (i.e., bldg., drawings, hazardous materials, etc.). Such intelligence increases the information initially available to Command from the OUTSIDE of a tactical situation. This information provides Command with intelligence that otherwise may not be available.

The following are fireground factors which should be evaluated by Command as they pertain to each tactical situation. They can be obtained by using the above information management factors.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #218 Page 3 of 5

BUILDING

Size Roof type (Bow string, bar joist, etc.), and condition Interior arrangement/access (stairs, halls, elevators) Construction type Age Condition - faults/weaknesses Value Compartment /separation Vertical-horizontal openings, shafts, channels Outside openings - doors and windows/degree of security Utility characteristics (hazards/controls) Concealed spaces/attic characteristics Exterior access Effect the fire has had on the structure (at this point) Time projection on continuing fire effect on building

FIRE

Size Extent (% of structure involved) Location Stage (inception --- flashover) Direction of travel (most dangerous) Time of involvement Type of amount of material involved - structure/interior finish/contents/ everything Type and amount of material left to burn Product of combustion liberatio

OCCUPANCY

Specific occupancy Type-group (business, mercantile, public assembly, institutional, residential, hazardous, industrial, storage, school) Value characteristics associated with occupancy Fire load (size, nature) Status (open, closed, occupied, vacant, abandoned, under construction) Occupancy associated characteristics/hazards Type of contents (based on occupancy) Time - as it affects occupancy use Property conservation profile/susceptibility of contents to damage/need for salvage STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #218 Page 4 of 5

LIEF HAZARD

Number of occupants Location of occupants (in relation to the fire) Condition of occupants (by virtue of fire exposure) Incapacities of occupants Commitment required for search and rescue (men, equipment, and command) Fire control required for search and rescue Needs for EMS Time estimate of fire effect on victims Exposure of spectators/control of spectators Hazards to fire personnel Access rescue forces have to victims Characteristics of escape routes/avenues of escape (type, safety, fire conditions, etc.)

ARRANGEMENT

Access, arrangement, and distance of external exposure Combustibility of exposures Access, arrangement, and nature of internal exposures Severity and urgency of exposures (fire effect) Value of exposures Most dangerous direction - avenue of spread Time estimate of fire effect on exposures (internal and external) Obstructions to operations Capability/limitations on apparatus movement and use

RESOURCES

Personnel and equipment on scene Personnel and equipment responding Personnel and equipment available in reserve or in Staging Estimate of response time additional resources Condition of personnel Capability and willingness of personnel Capability of command personnel Availability of hydrants Supplement water sources Adequacy of water supply Built-in private fire protection (sprinkler, standpipe, alarm) Outside agency resource and response time

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #218 Page 5 of 5

OTHER FACTORS/CONDITIONS

Time of day/night Day or week Season Special hazards by virtue of holidays and special events Weather (wind, rain, heat, cold, humid, visibility) Traffic conditions Social conditions (strike, riot, mob, rock festival) CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: SUPPORT ACTIVITIES #_____219______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Tactical support activities are those functions that assist active fire control and rescue operations. They generally include forcible entry, ventilation and the provision of access. Most confusion on the fireground is the result of lack of such support functions and does not generally relate to a breakdown of basic water application activities. Command must cause these support functions to be completed in a timely and effective manner - he/she must support the end of the nozzle. We lose most often because of a lack of support, not a lack of water.

You ventilate a building principally for two reasons:

1. To prevent mushrooming

2. To gain (and maintain) entry

Vertical ventilation, as close to directly over the fire as possible, is the most effective form of ventilation in working interior fire situations.

The timing of ventilation becomes extremely important and must be coordinated with fire attack activities - ventilation should be provided in advance of attack lines. Portable radio communications between engine and ladder companies facilitate this interaction.

Fire will naturally burn out of holes in roofs, regardless if you cut the hole or if the fire does. If the fire burns through the roof (defensive ventilation), it will generally do so in the best location - directly over the fire. If truck companies cut the roof they must locate ventilation holes in a manner that will support rescue activities and fire confinement. If vent holes are cut in the wrong places, the fire will naturally be channeled to them and expand loss.

When you cut a hole in a roof, cut a big one.

We ventilate to alter interior conditions. THE BEST OPERATING POSITION TO DETERMINE IF A BUILDING REQUIRES VENTILATION AND THE LOCATION AND TIMING OF THAT VENTILATION IS THE INSIDE. Interior and roof forces must communicate in order to coordinate the effort effectively.

STANDARD OPRATING GUIDELINES #219 Page 2 of 2

Do not operate hose lines, particularly elevated pipes, down ventilation holes. Be cautious of hose lines to roofs - “candle moth” syndrome tends to overpower personnel operating on roofs when fire and smoke come out vent holes. Operate roof lines only for the purpose of protecting personnel and external exposures unless Command orders a coordinated roof attack.

Effective topside ventilation will tend to keep roofs intact longer and roof condition necessarily becomes extremely important to ventilation activities. If truck crew cannot get on the roof to ventilate because of advanced fire, Command had best begin to react in marginal offensive/defensive terms. Hose line crews can probably get inside and stay inside longer than truck crew can stay on the roof. Axiom: It is better to abandon the building a bit too soon rather than a bit too late.

Forcible entry involves a trade-off in time versus damage; the faster you force - the more damage you do. The more critical the fire, the less important forcible entry damage becomes and vice versa. If the fire is progressing and you must go in and attack from the unburned side, don’t waste time trying to pick the locks - bash the doors.

The provision of access many times will determine if the fire is cut off and extinguished or not. These access-oriented activities generally involve pulling ceilings, opening up concealed spaces and voids, and the activities required to get fire attack efforts in to operate on hidden fire. Such operations beat up the fire building and must be done in a timely, well-placed manner. In such cases, do not hesitate - if you size up fire working inside a concealed space, get ahead of it, open up and cut it off.

Beware of the premature opening of doors, holes, access efforts, etc. before lines are placed and crews are ready to go inside. Good timing requires effective communication between engine and truck companies. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: POST INCIDENT ANALYSIS

#220b EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 24, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

A Post Incident Analysis (P.I.A.) affords the opportunity to review the effectiveness of actions and procedures in their actual application on real incidents. This is an extremely valuable tool in the continuing review and development process through which improved methods and systems are established. It also allows focus on lessons learned in each significant incident and a review of actions taken. The P.I.A. is not to be utilized as a form of criticism toward anyone; however, it should be viewed constructively as an avenue for improvement.

The Training Chief, who also functions at working fires and other major incidents as a Safety Officer, will be responsible to work with the involved Platoon’s Battalion Commander to gather and coordinate information relevant to each particular incident.

Often, this will include items such as:

1. Dispatch radio and phone recordings 2. Dispatch Notes 3. Copy of Company Officer’s complete NFIRS report 4. Aerial map, if available 5. Building layout drawings 6. Apparatus placement drawings 7. Photographs (Fire, Police and/or By-stander) 8. Size and lengths of hoselines 9. Water supplies 10. Strategy and tactics employed 11. Outside resources 12. Difficult or unusual conditions 13. Information released by Fire Marshal’s Division

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #220b Page 2 of 2

A P.I.A. will be formulated whenever a “Working Fire” occurs involving a structure (or inside of a structure where there was active smoke or fire showing), requiring the use of S.C.B.A.’s, charged hoselines and a commitment of all responding companies (including any Multiple Alarm), whenever the Special Operations Team is utilized, or whenever unusual circumstances or major problems occur in which the Chief, or Deputy Chiefs or a Shift Commander determines a need.

This P.I.A. package of information is to be gathered in a timely manner and a meeting with the P.I.A. Review Committee, scheduled through the Training Chief, will occur within 14 calendar days of the incident. The package will then be reviewed by the P.I.A. Review Committee, consisting of the following personnel:

Deputy Chief/Operations Battalion Chief or Commander whose Platoon is involved Training Chief Initial arriving Command Officer

After insuring accuracy and completeness of the P.I.A. package, the Committee will set a date for presentation of the P.I.A. by the Battalion Chief involved in the incident or a designated Command Officer. The Committee will select one of three ways for presentation of the P.I.A., which will be one of the following:

1. In-service presentation to key Companies at a Fire Station;

2. Presentation to key Incident Officers and support personnel;

3. Written format distributed to all stations.

Once a date, time and location are scheduled for a P.I.A. presentation the On-duty Battalion Commander will make notification of such to all personnel via the E-Mail communications system.

During the P.I.A., all Company Officers are required to participate. The Training Chief will create a summary of key issues of discussion and lessons learned in the process. Following the P.I.A., the complete P.I.A. package, including the summary and lessons learned, becomes part of the permanent records of the Training Division.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: SPRINKLED BUILDING #_____222______PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

When responding to a known sprinkled building: It shall be the job of the third engine at the scene to stand by or feed the sprinklers if necessary.

Hooking to Siamese

Hooking to the sprinkler Siamese shall be done using the 4” to 2-1/2” adapter to hook on the sprinkler Siamese. If necessary screw the 2-1/2” male plug adapter into the other Siamese opening. Stretch the 4” hose from the engine to the Siamese.

Exception: St. George Tower where only 2-1/2” hose will be used to hook to the Siamese because the building is over 7 stories.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: HIGH - RISE PROCEDURES #______223_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

High - Rise Definition - A structure of four (4) floors or greater at ground level is to be considered a High - Rise.

Alarm Response (General) 3 - Engines 1 - Ladder 1 - Rescue 1 - Shift Commander 1 - Engine (additional for working fire)

Use of Elevators -

Access to floors above the fourth (4th) floor may be accomplished with the use of elevators only if equipped with Automatic Recall and Emergency Fire Department Key Control.

Elevators shall be stopped two (2) floors below the fire floor.

Floors four (4) and below should be accessed by stairwell.

Vehicle Placement and Assignments -

1st arriving Engine - Main entry point attack team (full crew of three (3)), High- Rise Bag and Bundle, Forcible Entry Tools, S.C.B.A., Prep Radios, Extinguisher.

2nd arriving Engine - Water Supply (not F.D.C. source).

Officer and Jumpseat - R.I.T.: Thermal Imaging Camera (T.I.C.), Rope Bag, Spare Bottles, Forcible Entry Tools, Prep Radios.

Driver/Engineer - Stand by for establishing water supply.

3rd arriving Engine - F.D.C. Connections. After connection to F.D.C., Driver/Engineer stays with engine. Officer and Jumpseat - Back-up Team with High-Rise Bag and Bundle S.C.B.A., Prep Radios, Spare Air Bottles. B

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #223 Page 2 of 2

1st arriving Truck - Stage and wait for positioning from I.C. Inside Crew-Search & Rescue, Floor above fire floor. S.C.B.A., Forcible Entry Tools, Thermal Imaging Camera (T.I.C.), Prep Radios, Rope Bag.

1st arriving Rescue - Officer and Driver - Search and Rescue Fire Floor. Ventilation. S.C.B.A., Forcible Entry Tools, Preps, (T.I.C.), Boxman - Team-up with Truck Driver/Engineer.

Battalion Commander - Command Post located with two (2) sides of building visible, if possible. Assign Divisions, Groups, Sectors, etc. as needed.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: THERMAL IMAGING #_____224 ______CAMERA EFFECTIVE DATE: SEPTEMBER 26, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

One Argus or Argus III “Thermal Imaging Camera” (T.I.C.) will be carried on one apparatus assigned to each station and stored in its carrying case or mounted in a vehicle charging unit. The T.I.C. will be employed at the Company Officer’s discretion. It is recommended to utilize this tool early in fire suppression activities, especially for rescue or possible rescue situations.

Basic Camera Fundamentals:

1. Familiarize yourself with the operational manual to assist you in the following:

a. Proper battery replacement b. Low level Battery Indicator c. Quick release on shoulder strap for Emergency Situations

2. Camera should be checked out (1) time per month for a minimum of ten (10) minutes.

3. If equipped, the shoulder strap should be used at all times to decrease the possibility of the dropping camera.

4. All companies should know where the T.I.C. is stored on the apparatus for use at emergency scenes.

The T.I.C. can be used in, but not limited to, the following situations:

1. To assist rescue teams to quickly find fire victims.

2. To assist fire attack crews in finding the seat of a fire and visualize unsafe conditions in a smoke-filled area.

3. To assist in smoke and odor investigations by scanning electrical equipment for overheated motors or ballast’s or other smoldering fires.

4. To assist at hazmat scenes in identifying vapor clouds and their path of travel, or to determine liquid or gas levels in a container.

5. To assist in finding dust-covered victims at blast or collapse scenes.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINES #224 Page 2 of 2

When the T.I.C. is employed:

1. Always have a backup battery pack in the storage case.

2. Never leave the camera unattended or accessible to unauthorized persons.

Maintenance:

The T.I.C. is easily maintained by wiping the exterior with a clean cloth moistened with warm, soapy water. The lens can be wiped clear in an emergency situation by use of the hand or glove.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM

#225 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 34

INDEX

INDEX ------01 PURPOSE ------02 INTRODUCTION ------02 INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM TERMINOLOGY ------03 ASSUMPTION OF COMMAND ------07 ICS RESPONSIBILITIES (OVERVIEW) ------08 ICS RESPONSIBILITIES (DEFINED) ------08 SELECTION OF COMMAND MODE ------11 GEOGRAPHIC DESIGNATOR ------11 COMPLETION OF ASSIGNMENT REPORT ------11 ICS ORGANIZATION (DIVISIONS/GROUPS)------12 STAGING ------12 RETREAT SIGNAL ------13 ICS AT LARGE INCIDENT ------14 COMMAND POST ------15 TRANSFER OF COMMAND ------15 COMMAND STAFF POSITION/SAFETY ------16 LIAISON OFFICER ------17 INFORMATION OFFICER ------17 OPERATIONS RESPONSIBILITY ------19 PLANNING RESPONSIBILITY ------20 LOGISTICS RESPONSIBILITY ------22 FINANCE RESPONSIBILITY ------24 GLOSSARY ------26

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 2 of 34

PURPOSE This procedure is established to:

1. Provide for the safety of personnel operating at emergency incidents.

2. Improve command and control (or management of emergencies).

3. Improve the use of resources and tactical effectiveness.

4. Meet the OSHA/EPA regulations requiring the use of an Incident Command System for hazardous material incidents.

5. Meet NFPA Standard 1500 requirements for the use of an Incident Command System for operations at all emergency incidents.

6. Meet the philosophy/intent of the mission statement of the Charter Township of Clinton Department of Fire/Rescue.

To meet these goals: The department shall implement the Incident Command System appropriately at all incidents for which it has managed responsibility.

Further, Macomb County Fire Chiefs and the Charter Township of Clinton Department of Fire/Rescue have collectively and appropriately decided to adopt the National Fire Academies by January, 1993. Through this endeavor, Incident Commanders are better able to manage their resources, develop strategies and prioritize tactical objectives while at the scene of emergencies. The direct result of all this activity is singularly focused; effective fireground/emergency management resulting in improved protection of our citizens.

To this end, Macomb County Fire Chiefs and the Charter Township of Clinton Department of Fire/Rescue are committed to the total adoption and implementation of the Incident Command System and a county-wide uniform terminology. It is the purpose and scope of this document to achieve a county-wide accepted language for the Fire Service that is also recognized and able to integrate with the Nation’s Fire Society.

INTRODUCTION The various functions are presented in this material as they would be implemented in day-to-day situations. Using this practical approach will help you obtain a realistic understanding of the system and its simplicity.

The one function that will always be filled at every incident, regardless of size, is the Incident Commander’s (IC) position.

The IC has responsibility for overall management of the incident. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 3 of 34

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM TERMINOLOGY (COMMUNICATIONS) Purpose The purpose of this is to simplify and create a user-friendly system to identify all/any apparatus that my be operating at the scenes of emergencies (or non- emergencies). The following nomenclature shall be used at all times, whether that apparatus is operating within its own community or while involved on a mutual aid run.

DEFINITIONS Engines Apparatus equipped with ground ladders, attack and supply line, and a fire pump. Its primary role is to perform engine work at the scene of fire and/or other emergencies. The term “engine” will be used in place of pump, pumper, fire truck.

Rescues Apparatus designed and equipped to transport 2 or 3 people. Equipment carried on rescues may be specialized fire equipment, air packs, ventilators, rescue equipment, O2, first aid equipment, etc. Rescues are not primarily used for transporting patients to hospitals. The term “rescue” will be used for apparatus of this nature in place of squad or rescue squad.

Trucks Any apparatus that is primarily designed for “truck” type activity. This apparatus is generally equipped with a compliment of ground ladders with an extending ladder, articulating boom, elevating platform, etc....or device that allows firefighting/ventilating and/or rescue activity to be conducted from. This equipment may or may not also have a pump and water carrying capability.

The term “truck” will be used in place of ladder, aerial, platform, or stick. Quints Apparatus that is equipped with a fire pump, water tank, ground ladders, an aerial device, and hose.

Crash An apparatus that has a self-supporting foam generating system equipped with turret foam nozzles and other specialized equipment primarily designed for aircraft/fuel fire rescue.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 4 of 34

Utility A pickup truck, van, or similar vehicle that is used to pick up hose, supplies, work on hydrant maintenance, or similar type of work.

Mini Pump A small engine equipped with a small fire pump, a couple hundred gallons of water, and specialized fire/rescue tools.

Grass A vehicle equipped with a small fire pump, water tank, brooms, shovels, portable extinguishers/indian cans, and other tools used for brush fires. This vehicle may/may not be a 4-wheel drive and may/may not be able to pump while in motion.

There may be several sub-categories of tender. They are:

Water tender A vehicle that is primarily designed/equipped for transporting large volumes of water. Its primary purpose is for water supply at the scene of rural operations - water carrying capacity shall be 1000 gallons of water or greater.

Hose tender A vehicle that is designed to primarily carry an ample amount of “supply” line (4” or greater).

Air tender Apparatus equipped with a cascade system, portable air compressor, large supply of air bottles, and/or device to provide a transportable air supply to scenes of emergencies.

Light tender A vehicle equipped with generators, portable lights, or pole mounted lights. The primary purpose of this vehicle is to provide light at the scene of emergency.

HazMat tender A vehicle that is equipped with all the necessary resources to manage a hazardous materials incident, i.e., gloves, boots, suits, SCBA, resource manuals, FAX capabilities, diking or neutralizing materials, etc....Primary function to provide support or equipment at a hazmat incident.

Alpha STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 5 of 34

An ALS (Advanced Life Support) ambulance. Primarily designed to transport patient)s) to the hospital while providing all the necessary advanced personnel and equipment as mandated by MDPH and Macomb County EMS Council Protocols.

Bravo A BLS (Basic Life Support) ambulance that can transport patients to the hospital. This unit shall also meet all the requirements as set forth by MDPH and MCEMS Protocols.

Echo An advanced medical unit that carries the same equipment and personnel as an alpha unit, however an echo does not/cannot transport.

Specialized Equipment Other specialized equipment that may be brought to the scene by trailering behind a motorized vehicle will be identified by the name of the equipment, i.e., boat, air unit, light unit, generator, pump, etc.

Dispatch Dispatch is the term used when communicating with your base radio/or the communication center that routinely dispatches/routes your equipment to the scenes of emergencies.

VEHICLE APPARATUS/DEPARTMENT IDENTIFICATION Example When a community has only one Fire Station, its primary engine will be identified by the prefix of the name of the City and then Engine 1, i.e., “Clinton Engine 1”. Its back-up engine or rescue will be called “Clinton Engine 2”, and so on.

STAFF The Fire Chief (C.E.O.) Clinton Chief 1 Deputy Chief Clinton Chief 2 Deputy Chief Clinton Chief 3 Clinton Training Chief, Clinton Fire Marshal, Clinton Fire Inspectors and such will be identified by their titles.

Car #424 (Battalion Commander) will be known as Battalion 1

RADIO COMMUNICATIONS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 6 of 34

All communications shall be clear text. Radio communications shall be receiver from sender using the following model: 1. Request to initiate communications and determine that the intended receiver is listening.

2. Transmit the message or order concisely. 3. Receive feedback from the receiver to ensure that the message was received and understood.

4. Confirm that the message or order was understood. If not, correct and clarify the message (“Round Robin” communications).

Examples: First Arriving Company Engine 1: Clinton Dispatch, Clinton Engine 1 Dispatch: Clinton Engine 1, Dispatch Engine 1: Engine 1 is at 42315 Kentvale St., fire showing from floor 1, side A of a 2- story dwelling, 30 x 40; Lieutenant Engine 1 is Kentvale St. Command. Dispatch: Engine 1 is at 42315 Kentvale St., fire showing from floor 1, side A of a 2- story dwelling, 30 x 40; Lieutenant Engine 1 is Kentvale St. Command.

Kentvale St. Command: Affirmative

Examples:

Kentvale St. Command: “Clinton Engine 1 from Kentvale St. Command” Clinton Engine 1: “Clinton Engine 1” Kentvale St. Command: “Protect the exposure, side C” Clinton Engine 1: “Protect the exposure, side C” Kentvale St. Command: “Affirmative”

Considerations Whenever a department is on a run or has a working fire, other departments should delay (or postpone) radio tests or similar non-important radio activity to allow for better radio communications at the scenes of emergencies.

ASSUMPTION OF COMMAND STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 7 of 34

Command shall be established at all incidents. The Officer of the first arriving Company shall assume command. When multiple resources will be committed to the incident, command shall be formally established by transmitting a brief initial report containing the following information to the Dispatch Center.

1. Identity of the Company transmitting the report. 2. Actual location of the incident. 3. Brief description of the incident and report of conditions. 4. Designation of the individual assuming command and incident name. Incidents are given a specific name to reduce confusion when multiple incidents share the same radio frequency and/or dispatcher.

An attempt to name the command location will be made at all times for all runs. Example: First Arriving Company -- “Nothing Showing.” Engine 1: Clinton Dispatch, Clinton Engine 1 Dispatch: Clinton Engine 1, Dispatch Engine 1: Engine 1 is at 42315 Kentvale St., nothing showing, will investigate, Lieutenant Engine 1 is Kentvale St. Command.

Dispatch: Engine 1 is at 42315 Kentvale St., nothing showing, Lieutenant Engine 1 is investigating will be Kentvale St. Command.

Kentvale St. Command: Affirmative

Example: First Arriving Company -- “Active Fire Showing.” Engine 1: Clinton Dispatch, Clinton Engine 1 Dispatch: Clinton Engine 1, Dispatch Engine 1: Engine 1 is at 42315 Kentvale St., fire showing from floor 1, side A of a 2-story dwelling, 30 x 40; Lieutenant Engine 1 is Kentvale St. Command. Dispatch: Engine 1 is at 42315 Kentvale St., fire showing from floor 1, side A of 2-story dwelling, 30 x 40; Lieutenant Engine 1 is Kentvale St. Command. Kentvale St. Command: Affirmative

INCIDENT COMMANDER’S RESPONSIBILITIES (Overview)

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 8 of 34

The following list outlines the basic responsibilities of the IC at every incident. Each of these responsibilities is discussed, in detail, in the following sections.

The Incident Commander:

• Assesses the incident priorities.

• Determines the incident’s strategic goals and tactical objectives.

• Develops or approves and implements the incident action plan.

• Develops an incident command structure appropriate for the incident.

• Assesses resource needs and orders, deploys, and releases needed resources.

• Coordinates overall emergency activities.

• Serves as the ultimate incident safety officer; responsible for preventing firefighter injuries and/or death.

• Coordinates activities of outside agencies.

• Authorizes information release to the media.

RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE I. C. (Defined) The Incident Commander at any fire incident shall be responsible for the following:

1. Assessment of Incident Priorities. Incident priorities provide a framework for command decision making. Tactical activity may address more than one incident priority simultaneously. • Life Safety (first priority) R = Rescue • Incident Stabilization (second priority) E = Exposure, C = Containment

• Property Conservation (third priority) E = Extinguish, O = Overhaul

The R E C E O matrix fits these priorities very precisely: 2. Perform Size-Up. The IC must perform an initial assessment of the situation, incident potential, and resource status. This assessment must address the following three questions: STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 9 of 34

• What have I got? (situation) • Where is it going? (potential) • What do I need to control it? (resources) • Size-up is not static and must be continued throughout the duration of the incident. 3. Select the Strategic Mode. A critical decision having an impact on the safety of personnel and the effectiveness of tactical operations is the selection of strategic mode. Operations may be conducted in either an Offensive or Defensive mode. The decision is based on the answers to the following two questions: • Is it safe to conduct offensive operations? • Is access and capability of resources (present and projected) adequate for sustained offensive operations to control the incident?

4. Establish Tactical Objectives. Tactical objectives are the specific operations that must be accomplished to achieve strategic goals. Tactical objectives must be both specific and measurable, defining:

• Assignment of resources • Nature of the tactical activity. • Location in which the tactical activity must be performed • If the tactical action must be performed in sequence or coordinated with any other tactical action.

5. Implement Action Plan. Implementation of the incident action requires that the IC establish an appropriate organizational structure to manage the required resources and communicate the tactical objectives. The incident action plan may be communicated by Standard Operating Procedure, assigning tactical objectives, or by assigning task activity.

Tactical Standard Operating Procedures may define common components of the incident action plan such as water supply, standard apparatus placement, and the methods used for basic tactical evolutions. Orders from the IC may specify tactical objectives assigned to subordinate positions within the ICS structure or to a specific Resource.

Example: Kentvale St. Command: Clinton Engine 1, Kentvale St. Command Clinton Engine 1: Kentvale St. Command, Clinton Engine 1 STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 10 of 34

Kentvale St. Command: Initiate fire attack on floor 1, as soon as Truck 1 establishes a vertical vent. Kentvale St. Command: Affirmative 6. Developing An Appropriate Organizational Structure. The organizational structure is not based on the size or area of involvement; it depends on the complexity of the incident.

For instance, an incident involving structural collapse, hazardous materials, several exposures, and considerable fire may not be large, yet the ICS organization would be expanded, due to the numerous functions that must be staffed. Other incidents in progress within the same area could also affect the organizational structure.

7. Managing Resources. The IC must continually evaluate and adjust the deployment of resources at all incidents. Initial assessment of the incident and the needed resources is only the first step. As soon as the IC determines the incident’s strategic goals and tactical objectives and then evaluates the resource needs to meet those goals and objective, one of two actions occur.

Either the initial action plan will be successful or it will need to be revised. Additional resources may be needed, requiring reorganization. If the IC believes he or she has enough resources for the required work, it is time to order additional companies and/or other resources. Coming out exactly even means the IC is a gambler instead of a true emergency manager.

Effective resource management requires that personnel safety be given the highest priority. Although everyone working at an incident must serve as his or her own safety officer, the ultimate responsibility for incident scene safety rests with IC. All goals and objectives must be evaluated against the benefit/risk factor. Taking unnecessary risks with the lives of firefighting personnel when there is no appreciable benefit is irresponsible. As the incident escalates, the IC will need to assign a person as Safety Officer, with specific safety responsibilities.

SELECTION OF COMMAND MODE The Incident Commander must determine if initial command activity will be conducted from a fixed position, or if it will be conducted simultaneously with the tactical operation of the first arriving unit. This has particular application for STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 11 of 34

Satellite Station Engine Companies arriving in advance of the complete first alarm assignment.

If the initial tactical operations of the first arriving unit will have significant impact on the eventual outcome of the incident or; the performance of tactical operations by the Incident Commander will have a significant impact on the ability of the unit to achieve their assigned tactical operations, command in the attack mode should be performed until command can be transferred. This mode will be referred to as “Combat Command.”

A fixed command position is preferred for a complex or rapidly escalating incident.

(See page 15 for Identification of Command Post location)

GEOGRAPHIC DESIGNATION SYSTEM

Each exterior side of a structure shall be given a letter designation. The side of the structure facing the street (address side) shall be designated A. The remaining sides shall be designated B, C, and D, in a clockwise manner. Exposure shall be designated in a like manner as shown below:

The interior of a structure shall be designated by floor (1,2,3, etc.) The basement, attic, and the roof shall be designated by name.

COMPLETION OF ASSIGNMENT REPORT

When a unit completes its assignment, the Group or Division Leader shall make a report to the person who gave the order, i.e.;

Clinton Engine 2: “Front St. Command, Clinton Engine 2

Front St. Command: “Clinton Engine 2, Front St. Command”

Clinton Engine 1: “Primary search completed” (or) “All Clear”

Front St. Command: “Primary search completed” )or) “All Clear”

Clinton Engine 2: “Affirmative”

ICS ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE FOR INITIAL OPERATIONS

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 12 of 34

The ICS shall be used to maintain an effective span of control and workload for all supervisory personnel.

Divisions and groups

When multiple resources are assigned to the same function incident-wide (such as ventilation or search rescue), a Group shall be established to provide coordination and control of tactical operations.

Designation of divisions and groups

When Division boundaries are established on the exterior of a structure or in nonstructural incidents (such as wild land fire), a letter designation (A, B, C, D, etc.) shall be used. In addition to establishing the Division designation, specific boundaries must be defined. This is particularly important in nonstructural incidents.

When Division boundaries are defined by level in a structural incident, a number or descriptive designation shall be used (1, 2, 3, basement). If a Division is given responsibility for the entire structure, it shall be designated as the Interior Division.

In radio communications with Division the letter or number designation shall follow “Division” (Division A, Division 3) if a descriptive designation is given it shall precede “Division” in radio communications (interior Division, Exposure Division, etc.).

Groups shall be designated by function (Vent, Water, Supply, etc.). In radio communications with a Group, the function shall serve as the designated.

STAGING

When IC has not defined an assignment for on scene or responding resources, Staging shall be established.

When an incident is escalating or has not yet been stabilized, sufficient resources to meet potential incident development should be available in Staging until the incident has been established.

The IC or Operations shall establish Staging by defining its location and communicating this information to the Dispatch Center. The Dispatcher shall inform all responding resources of the location of Staging.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 13 of 34

If responsibility is not specifically assigned, the commander of the first company to arrive in Staging shall assume the function of Staging Area Manager.

Resources in Staging shall retain integrity (remain with their company) and be available for immediate assignment and deployment.

The Staging Area Manager shall keep the IC or Operations advised of resource availability in Staging whenever resource status changes.

The IC or Operations shall request on scene resources through the Staging Area Manager and shall specify where and to whom those resources shall report.

In radio communications with Staging, the incident name shall precede the designated “Staging”.

RETREAT SIGNAL

The Fireground is never static. It is dynamic, constantly changing and requires vigilant observation. When conditions change, so must the course of action.

A Universally understood retreat signal is imperative for safer and more effective fireground operations. This method of notification must be easily understood and easy to implement.

The “retreat signal” short and rapid blasts from an air horn (truck air horns or hand held air horn) will provide the signal of retreat. (Short blasts approximately one second in duration at one second interval).

The retreat signal may be utilized whenever evacuation of the forces is warranted.

Example: Backdraft conditions

1. Offense fire becomes defensive

2. Structural collapse is imminent

3. Missing troops

4. Any event or condition the Incident Commander, Safety Officer, or member of the command structure perceives as too hazardous for standard assault/entry tactics. This retreat signal shall be sounded until all personnel are accounted for or until the Incident Commander orders it to be ceased. Once the evacuation has been accomplished, guidance should be provided for troops to regroup, re- communicate, and be redeployed. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 14 of 34

Another method to alarm troops of impending danger or alert personnel of a perilous situation would be to use the radio system. This method shall be referred to as the “Emergency Traffic Announcement.”

The “Emergency Traffic Announcement” is designed to provide immediate notification for all fireground personnel of a notable hazard that is either about to occur, or has occurred. The use of the “Emergency Traffic Announcement” should be initiated only when the hazard appears to be imminent.

Any member has the authority to utilize the “Emergency Traffic Announcement” when it is felt that a notable danger to personnel is apparent; however, considerable discretion should be applied to its use -- emergency traffic announcements become ineffective if over used.

When an imminent hazard has been realized, the emergency traffic process should be initiated. Usually either a company or sector officer will be the initiator. The initiator should describe the apparent hazard and order a positive response, usually to evacuate a particular area or section, according to the scope of the hazard.

If possible, the division officers or company officers of those areas to be evacuated should request and acknowledgment of the emergency traffic dispatch from those crews to be evacuated.

ICS ORGANIZATION FOR LARGER INCIDENTS

ICS organizational structure should be based on the management needs of the incident and should be developed on a proactive basis. Incident resource and management ends must be projected adequately ahead to allow for the reflex time of responding resources.

The IC and other supervisory personnel should anticipate span-of-control problems. Subordinate management positions should be staffed to maintain an acceptable span of control and workload. This may necessitate requesting additional command officers to fill these overhead positions.

Whenever Safety, Planning, Logistical, or Finance functional responsibilities become a significant workload for the IC, the appropriate Sections should be staffed. This will prevent overextension or the IC’s span of control.

(REFER TO GLOSSARY) COMMAND POST LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 15 of 34

1. A fixed command post (CP) shall be established at all incident actively involving (3) three or more units, i.e., R-4, E-2, E-3.

2. The CP should be located at the front of the structure so as to afford a view of (2) two sides.

3. The CP should be identified through use of the flag “COMMAND POST” and/or a green flashing light,

4. Once established, the Incident Commander shall remain at the CP until proper transfer of command has taken place.

5. The location of the CP will be transmitted over the radio as to inform all participants at the incident.

TRANSFER OF COMMAND

Command may be transferred from the initial IC (often a Company Commander) to a later arriving or senior Command Officer. Transfer of command shall take place on a face-to-face basis, whenever possible to facilitate effective communication and feedback. If face-to-face communication is not possible, transfer of command by radio may be conducted.

If command has been established by a Firefighter, command shall be transferred to the first arriving Officer. Command shall be transferred to the first arriving Command Officer at the Officer’s discretion (the Command Officer may choose to allow the Company Commander to continue as IC). Transfer of command to higher ranking command officers is also discretionary. When a Command Officer allows a lower ranking Officer to retain command, this does not remove the responsibility for the incident from the higher ranking individual.

Transfer of command shall include communication of the following information:

1. The status of the situation

2. Resources committed to the incident and responding, as well as the present incident organizational structure.

3. Assessment of the current effect of tactical operations.

Following transfer of command, the IC may return the previous IC to his or her Company (if a Company Officer) or specify assignment to a subordinate management position within ICS organizational structure. A radio STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 16 of 34 communication should be initiated to dispatch to document the event and to advise all participants of the incident.

COMMAND STAFF POSITIONS

At large-scale or complex incidents, consideration may have to be given to the functions of Safety, Liaison and information. If the IC cannot effectively handle any of these functions, they should be delegated.

It shall be the intent of the Charter Township of Clinton Department of Fire/Rescue to have a member trained to function as a safety officer at an incident where the IC needs assistance in the area of safety.

SAFETY

The individual given the Safety Officer’s assignment must monitor and assess the safety hazards and unsafe situations to develop measures for ensuring personnel safety.

The NFPA 1501 Standard shall be used as a reference for development of the Safety Officer position.

The Safety Officer position is implemented to manage the safety of all personnel and to relieve the IC of direct involvement in this responsibility. The Safety Officer also keeps the IC informed of present problems and potential hazards. He/she should not only identify problems, but should suggest solutions to minimize the risks. The IC will use the information provided by the Safety Officer during development of the incident action plan.

The Safety Officer has the authority to bypass the chain of command only when it is necessary to correct unsafe acts immediately, such as removing all personnel from areas of imminent danger. The IC must always be informed of these corrective actions.

For a Safety Officer to be truly effective, he/she must have knowledge of fire behavior and building construction.

LIAISON OFFICER

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 17 of 34

A Liaison Officer is the point of contact for assisting or coordinating agencies. This function is assigned since the IC may become overloaded by questions from the number of assisting agencies that some incidents attract.

One of the most important responsibilities of the Liaison Officer is to coordinate the management of assisting or coordinating agencies. This is essential to avoid the duplication of efforts. It allows each agency to perform what it does best. Liaison management provides lines of authority, responsibility, and communication, and increases the control necessary to provide for the safety of personnel from all involved agencies.

The Liaison Officer acts as a diplomat in cases of any agency’s lack of familiarity with ICS, particularly useful when agencies lack the joint training necessary to understand their involvement in the incident. It eliminates the desire for agencies to set up separate Cps.

Occasionally it becomes necessary to give strong direction to help agencies understand where and how they fit into the system. This may mean “telling” instead of requesting.

The agency representatives, with whom the Liaison Officer interacts, need to have decision making authority since the time delay of “going through channels” to get answers may have negative effect on the needed coordination.

Liaison Officers need to have a specifically identified place for agencies to report in, to work, and to communicate with each other.

The Liaison Officer position is usually implemented at large or complex incidents. At smaller or less complex incidents, face-to-face communication may be used in place of radios.

INFORMATION OFFICER

The Information Officer is responsible for interface with the media and other appropriate agencies. This function is implemented to relieve the IC of working directly with media, taking him/her away from command responsibilities. The media needs are real and must be met. They need accurate and consistent information. When the IC is not able to handle both incident and the media, the Information Officer’s position should be implemented. (See S.O.P. #004 for guidance).

If an incident is so complex that it requires the implementation of an Information Officer it is recommended that a fire department representative works in concert with the Township Supervisor’s office. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 18 of 34

A press area may need to be established. It should be away from the CP and all incident activities. Media representatives need to be made aware of its location and the importance for them to report there.

The media will want tours of the incident and photo opportunities. They need to understand which areas are safe and which areas are off-limits. It is essential that the press do not go into unsafe locations. Equally important is that the members of the media not interfere with the incident activities.

Your department’s Information Officer may want to work with members of the local media; regular meetings could allow both groups to understand each other’s needs and responsibilities during an incident. The emergency scene is a poor place to train press members on the role of the Information Officer.

The Information Officer acts as a central clearing point for dissemination of information, reducing the risk of receiving conflict information from multiple sources.

The Information Officer must coordinate all releases of significant information with the IC. He/she will decide on sensitive topics, such as the cause of the incident, victims’, names, and any other information that should not be (and does not have to be) released immediately to the press.

At some time in the incident, arrangements should be made for press to have the opportunity to talk to the IC. The IC may have to transfer command of the incident for a few minutes while he/she meets with the press.

TOTAL ICS MANAGEMENT

Effective incident management involves more than just putting water on a fire. The IC needs to be aware of the full range of management tools that are available to handle the entire incident. If major functional authority for Operations, Planning, Logistics, and/or Finance is not delegated, the IC must perform those functions.

OPERATIONS

Definition: Operations is responsible for management of all tactical operations STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 19 of 34

at the incident.

Operations is implemented when the IC is faced with a complex incident having major demands in one or more of the remaining major functional areas. For example, the IC may be faced with a rapidly escalating incident with a significant need to evaluate strategy and to develop alternative tactical options. Faced with a major functional responsibility in addition to management of tactical operations, the IC may choose to staff Operations. Another reason to staff Operations would be multiple functional demands placed on the IC, such as, the Planning, Logistics, and Finance workload generated by a hazardous material incident. When major functions have been delegated, the IC may need to staff Operations to maintain an effective span of control.

OPERATIONS SECTION CHIEF RESPONSIBILITIES

The Operations Section Chief is responsible for the direction and coordination of all tactical operations. As a part of this overall responsibility, Operations also:

ƒ Assists the IC developing strategic goals and tactical objectives fro the incident. ƒ Develops operational plans. ƒ Requests or releases’ resources through the IC. ƒ Consults with the IC about the overall incident action plan. ƒ Keeps the IC informed of situation and resource status within Operations. ƒ Supervises the Staging Area Manager.

WHEN TO STAFF OPERATIONS The most common reason for staffing Operations is to relieve span-of-control problems for the IC.

A complex incident, in which the IC needs assistance determining strategic goals and tactical objectives, may also require implemented Operations.

However, Operations should only be implemented to improve the management of the incident. If it is not used to maintain a manageable workload or an effective span of control, the IC could end up with a span of control of one.

PLANNING SECTION CHIEF RESPONSIBILITIES

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 20 of 34

The Planning Section Chief is responsible for information management about the incident status and resources. As a part of this major responsibility Planning also performs the following functions: Information Management:

ƒ Collection of information regarding the incident and resources. ƒ Evaluation of information received from a variety of sources. ƒ Dissemination of information to the IC, Operations, and incident personnel, as necessary.

ƒ Use of information in preparation of the incident action plan.

Assists the IC in:

ƒ Developing an effective incident action plan bases on projected needs.

ƒ Modifying the incident action plan to meet changing needs. ƒ Anticipating changing resource needs. ƒ Preparing alternate strategies and tactical options based on incident potential.

One great value is that the Planning Section Chief assists the IC in being proactive manger, rather than reacting to the demands of the incident.

The Planning Section Chief is responsible for all Planning functions needed for an incident. This individual should establish functional units when needed to maintain an acceptable workload and span of control. Subordinate Planning functions may be combined when workload permits.

The Planning Section Chief should be assigned before implementation of subordinate units to prevent an excessive span of control or information overload for the IC.

PLANNING COMPONENTS

Situation Status Unit (SITSTAT) The Situation Status Unit is responsible for analysis of the situation as it progresses, through the recording and evaluation of information about the status of the incident.

Major concerns of this Unit are: ƒ What has happened? STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 21 of 34

ƒ What is currently happening? ƒ What may happen? Situation Status may be staffed in large or complex incidents. In smaller or less complex incidents, this responsibility may be combined with responsibility for tracking resource status.

Resource Status Unit (RESTAT)

The Resource Status Unit is responsible for recording the status of resources committed to the incident.

Major responsibilities of this Unit are evaluation of: ƒ Resources currently committed to incident. ƒ Impact that additional responding resources will have on incident. ƒ Anticipated resource needs.

As with Situation Status, the Resource Status Unit may be staffed in large or complex incidents. In many incidents, the Situation and Resource Status functions may be performed by a single individual.

The Planning Section Chief’s interaction with the Situation and Resource Status Units focus around the following concerns:

ƒ What impact are current resources having on controlling the incident? ƒ Are there enough resources? ƒ Are there too many resources? ƒ Are they the right resources to solve the problem?

PLANNING COMPONENTS

This information provides the Planning Section with the information required to predict:

What additional resources may be needed? ƒ From where? ƒ When will they arrive? ƒ Will relief personnel be needed? ƒ To gain control of the incident? ƒ For relief or overhaul? Effective prediction of probable incident outcomes will allow timely and effective modification of the incident action plan. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 22 of 34

Documentation Unit

The main responsibilities of the Documentation Unit are to record and protect all documents relevant to the incident. Examples of incident documentation include: incident reports, communication logs, injury claims, and situation status reports. In major incidents, thorough documentation is critical to post-incident analysis.

Demobilization Unit

The Demobilization Unit is responsible for the development of a plan for the demobilization of the resources omitted to an incident and assisting in the implementation of that plan. In incidents requiring a major resource commitment, an effective, safe, and cost-effective demobilization and return to service is dependent on adequate planning.

TECHNICAL SPECIALISTS

Technical Specialists are persons with relevant special skills or knowledge that may be applied to support incident operations. Examples include: building maintenance engineers, industry representatives, or private-sector chemists.

Technical Specialists may be assigned anywhere in the ICS organization (such as to a Division or a Group within the Operations Section) as needed.

LOGISTICS

Definition: Logistics is responsible for providing facilities, services and materials for the incident.

As incidents grow in size, complexity, and duration, the logistical needs of the operating forces also increase. Even in a relatively simple structure fire, there are requirements for breathing air supply, drinking water for fluid replacement, and provision of emergency medical are for firefighting personnel. When faced with a major incident, such as a hazardous material spill, a large wild land fire, or a structure fire involving a large building or multiple buildings, the logistical requirements are significant. Long duration incidents of any type require provisions for feeding personnel, toilet facilities, refueling of apparatus, and a myriad of other service and support resources.

The potential magnitude of the service and support requirements may indicate that the IC delegates the functional authority for Logistics to maintain an effective span of control and an acceptable workload.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 23 of 34

LOGISTICS SECTION CHIEF RESPONSIBILITIES

The Logistics Section Chief manages service and support resources for the incident. The Logistics Section Chief is responsible for all Logistics functions needed for an incident. This individual should establish functional Units when needed to maintain an acceptable workload and span of control. Subordinate Logistics functions may be combined when workload permits.

The Logistics Section Chief should be assigned before implementation of subordinate Units to prevent an excessive span of control or information overload for the IC. Branches may be required within Logistics to maintain span of control when all six functional Units are established.

Service Branch

The Service Branch is responsible for service activities at incident. These activities include communications, emergency medical services for incident personnel, and provisions for feeding operating forces. The Service Branch is managed by a Branch Director and contains three functional Units.

Communications Unit

The Communications Unit develops the incident communications plan, distributes communications equipment, supervises the communications network, and maintains/repairs communications equipment.

Medical Unit

The Medical Unit is responsible for providing emergency medical treatment of emergency personnel. This unit does not provide treatment for civilians. If there is a requirement for provision of emergency medical services for injured civilians, this would be an Operations function.

Food Unit

Providing meals for personnel involved with an incident is the responsibility of the Food Unit. This may be a significant logistical task at major incidents and is often required even at relatively minor incidents during severe environmental conditions or extended operations.

Supply Unit

The Supply Unit orders the equipment and supplies required for incident operations and maintain ongoing inventory and control of these resources. Equipment and supplies may include additional self-contained breathing STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 24 of 34

apparatus cylinders; specialized equipment required for a hazardous material spill; or may be expendable supplies, such as breathing air or foam concentrate.

Facilities Unit

The Facilities Unit provides fixed facilities for an incident. Fixed facilities are most often required for incidents of long duration, and may include;

Incident Base. The Base services several functions. It is the location where the primary support activities are performed and serves as a reporting and marshaling area for resources not considered available for immediate assignment.

Base is not commonly used at structure fire incidents. However, it may be used during wild land or high-rise incidents.

Other fixed facilities include: Feeding and sleeping areas, sanitary facilities, and a formal CP.

Ground Support Unit

The Ground Support Unit is responsible for fueling and maintenance or repair of vehicles, transportation of personnel and supplies, and preparation of an incident traffic plan, if necessary to facilitate the flow of apparatus and equipment within the incident area.

FINANCE

Definition: Finance is responsible for tracking all incident costs and evaluating the financial consideration of the incident.

Financial considerations are not a major factor during most incident operations. However, when a department is involved in any incident that requires the use of private-sector resources or incidents where agencies involved in response will be seeking reimbursement, the financial considerations can be extensive.

FINANCE SECTION CHIEF RESPONSIBILITIES

The Finance Section Chief must provide for the documentation of all incident costs, and provide guidance to the IC on financial issues that may have an impact on incident operations. These responsibilities include: STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 25 of 34

ƒ Future payments ƒ Future budgeting ƒ Payment of personnel costs ƒ Cost recovery

STAFFING OF FINANCE SECTION

Finance is usually staffed in large-scale or complex incidents. Most fire departments lack the organizational structure to manage the financial demands of large-scale or complex incidents. Likely candidates for Finance Section Chief might be the township finance director or county budget director.

Since most of the activities of Finance do not require face-to-face communication, these operations may be located remote from the incident site.

The Finance Section Chief is responsible for all finance functions needed for an incident. This individual should establish functional Units when needed to maintain an acceptable workload and span of control. Subordinate Finance functions may be combined when workload permits.

The Finance Section Chief should be assigned before implementation of subordinate Units to prevent an excessive span of control or information overload for the IC.

FINANCE COMPONENTS

Time Unit

The primary function of the Time Unit is the timekeeping required for personnel working at an incident.

Procurement Unit

When incident operations require procurement of goods or services from vendors, the Procurement Unit manages this function.

Compensation/Claims Unit

The function of the Compensation/Claims Unit involves record keeping and financial concerns resulting from injuries or fatalities at incident.

Cost Unit

The principle functions of the Cost Unit are tracking costs, analyzing cost date, making cost estimates, and recommending cost-saving measures.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 26 of 34

If these functions are not assigned, the IC will be responsible for handling those requirements of the incident.

GLOSSARY

AGENCY REPRESENTATIVE: Individual assigned to an incident from an assisting or cooperating agency who has been delegated full authority to make decisions on all matters affecting that agency’s participation at the incident. Agency Representatives report to the Incident Liaison Officer.

ALL CLEAR: When the primary search has been completed, the rescue group will give the report to the IC.

ALLOCATED RESOURCES: Resources dispatched to an incident that have not yet checked in with the Incident communications Center.

AMBULANCE: A ground vehicle providing patient transport capability, specified equipment capability, and personnel (basic life support ambulance or advanced life support ambulance, etc.).

ASSIGNED RESOURCES: Resources checked in and assigned work tasks on an incident.

ASSISTING AGENCY: An agency directly contributing suppression, rescue, support or service resources to another agency.

AVAILABLE RESOURCES: Resources assigned to an incident and available for an assignment.

BASE: That location at which the primary logistics functions are coordinated and administered. (Incident name or other designator will be added to the term “Base”.) The Incident Command Post may be co-located with the Base. There is only one Base per incident.

BRANCH: That organizational level having functional/geographic responsibility for major segments of incident operations. The Branch level is organizational between Section and Division/Group.

CHIEF: ICS title for individuals responsible for command of the functional Sections; Operations, Planning, Logistics, and Finance. GLOSSARY CONT’D.

CLEAR TEXT: The use of plain English in radio communications transmissions. No Ten Codes or agency-specific codes are used when using Clear Text.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 27 of 34

COMMAND OFFICER: An Officer who is not a part of the staffing of a Single Resource.

COMMAND POST (CP): That location at which primary command functions are executed; usually co-located with the Incident Base.

COMMAND STAFF: The Command Staff consists of the Safety Officer, Liaison Officer, and Information Officer, who report directly to the Incident Commander.

COMMAND: The act of directing, ordering, and/or controlling resources by virtue of explicit legal, agency, or delegated authority.

COMMUNICATIONS UNIT: Functional Unit within the Service Branch of the Logistics Section. This unit is responsible for the incident communications plan, the information and repair of communications equipment, and operation of the Incident Communications Center. Also may refer to a vehicle (trailer or mobile van) used to provide a major part of an Incident Communications Center.

COMPANY OFFICER: The individual responsible for command of a Company. This designation is not specific to any particular fire department rank (may be Firefighter, Lieutenant, Captain, Battalion Chief or Chief Officer, if responsible for command of a single Company).

COMPANY: A ground vehicle providing specified equipment capability and personnel (Engine Company, Truck Company, Rescue Company, etc.).

COMPANY: Any piece of equipment having a full complement of personnel.

COMPENSATION/CLAIMS UNIT: Functional Unit within Finance Section. Responsible for financial concerns resulting from injuries or fatalities at incident.

COOPERATING AGENCY: An agency supplying assistance other than direct suppression, rescue, support, or service functions to the incident control effort (Red Cross, Law Enforcement Agency, telephone company, etc.).

COORDINATION: The process of systematically analyzing a situation, developing relevant information, and forming appropriate command authority (for its decision) of viable alternatives for selection of the most effective combination of available resources to meet specific objectives. The coordination process (which can be either intra or interagency) does not, in and of itself, involve command dispatch actions. However, personnel responsible for coordination GLOSSARY CONT’D. may perform command or dispatch functions within limits as established by specific agency delegations, procedures, legal authority, etc.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 28 of 34

COST UNIT: Functional Unite within the Finance Section. Responsible for tracking costs, analyzing cost data, making cost estimates, and recommending cost-saving measures.

CREW TRANSPORT: Any vehicle capable of transporting personnel in specified numbers.

CREW: A specified number of personnel assembled for an assignment such as search, ventilation, or hoseline deployment and operations. The number of personnel in a crew should not exceed recommended span-of-control guides (3-7). A Crew operates under the direct supervision of a Crew Leader.

DEFENSIVE STRATEGY: An exterior attack, with related support, designed to stop the forward progress of a fire and then provide fire control.

DEMOBILIZATION UNIT: Functional Unit within the Planning Section. Responsible for assuring orderly, safe, efficient demobilization of resources committed to the incident.

DIRECTOR: ICS title for individuals responsible for command of a Branch.

DISPATCH CENTER: A facility from which resources are directly assigned to an incident.

DISPATCH: The implementation of a command decision to move a resource or resources from one place to another.

DIVISION: That organization level having responsibility for operations within a defined geographic area. The Division level is organizational between the Single Resource, Task Force or Strike Team and the Branch.

DOCUMENTATION UNIT: Functional Unit within the Planning Section. Responsible for recording/protecting all documents relevant to incidents.

EMERGENCY TRAFFIC: A priority message to be immediately broadcast throughout the fireground.

ENGINE COMPANY: A ground vehicle providing specified levels of pumping, water and hose capacity, and personnel.

GLOSSARY CONT’D.

ENGINE: A ground vehicle providing specified levels of pumping, water, and hose capacity but with less then specified level of personnel.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 29 of 34

FACILITIES UNIT: Functional Unit within the Support Branch of the Logistics Section. Provides fixed facilities for incident. These facilities may include the Incident Base, feeding areas, sleeping areas, sanitary facilities and formal Command Post.

FINANCE SECTION: Responsible for all costs and financial considerations of the incident. Includes the Time Unit, Procurement Unit, Compensation/Claims Unit, and Cost Unit.

FIREGROUND: Defined by an imaginary line (fireground perimeter) which encloses the space where the fire situation creates potential hazard to fire personnel.

FIXED POSITION COMMAND: An IC performs strategic operations from a standard position, command post. To be used when (3) three or more units are committed to the scene.

FOOD DISPENSER: Any vehicle capable of dispensing food to incident personnel.

FOOD UNIT: Functional Unit within Service Branch of the Logistics Section. Responsible for providing meals for personnel involved with incident.

FULLY INVOLVED: Immediate entry and search activities are impossible and victim survival is improbable. The affect of the fire is such that an “all clear” will not follow.

FUEL TENDER: Any vehicle capable of supplying fuel to ground or airborne equipment.

GENERAL STAFF: The group of incident management personnel comprised of the; Incident Commander, Operations Section Chief, Planning Section Chief, Logistics Section Chief, and Finance Section Chief

GROUND SUPPORT UNIT: Functional Unit within Support Branch of the Logistics Section. Responsible for fueling/maintaining/repairing vehicles and the transportation of personnel and supplies.

GROUP: That organizational level having responsibility for a specified functional assignment at an incident (ventilation, salvage, water supply, etc.) GLOSSARY CONT’D.

INCIDENT ACTION PLAN: The strategic goals, tactical objectives, and support requirements for the incident. All incidents require an action plan. For simple STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 30 of 34

incidents the action plan is not usually in written form. Large or complex incidents will require that the action plan be documented in writing.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM (ICS): The combination of facilities, equipment, personnel, procedures, and communications operating within a common organization structure with responsibility for the management of assigned resources to effectively accomplish stated objectives pertaining to an incident.

INCIDENT COMMANDER (IC): The individual responsible for the management of all incidents operations.

INFORMATION OFFICER: Responsible for interface with the media or other appropriate agencies requiring information direct from the incident scene. Member of Command Staff.

INITIAL ATTACK: Resources initially committed to an incident.

INITIAL REPORT: A short radio transmission to provide a description of conditions and the confirmation and designation of command.

KIND: The basic nature or purpose of a Company (Engine, Truck, etc.).

LADDER COMPANY: See Truck Company

LEADER: ICS title for individuals responsible for command of Crew, Task Force, Strike Team, or functional Unit.

LIAISON OFFICER: The point of contact of assisting or coordinating agencies. Member of the Command Staff.

LOGISTICS SECTION: Responsible for providing facilities, services, and materials for incidents. Includes the Communications Unite, Medical Unit, and Food Units within the Supply Unite, and Ground Support Units within the Support Branch.

MEDICAL UNIT: Functional Unit within the Service Branch of the Logistics Section. Responsible for providing emergency medical treatment of emergency personnel. This Unit does not provide treatment for civilians.

GLOSSARY CONT’D.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 31 of 34

NOTHING SHOWING: A very minor fire or smoke scare that allows for an exterior search until it can be reported “all clear”. Usually, occupants will not have to be removed.

OFFENSIVE STRATEGY: An interior attack, with related support, designed to quickly bring the fire under control.

OFFICER: ICS title for the Command Staff positions of Safety, Liaison, and Information. Also used when a single individual performs a Unit function within Planning, Logistics, or Finance.

OPERATIONAL PERIOD: The period of time scheduled for execution of a given set of operation actions as specified in the Incident Action Plan.

OUT-OF-SERVICE RESOURCES: Resources assigned to an incident but unable to respond for mechanical, rest, or personnel reasons.

OVERHEAD PERSONNEL: Personnel who are assigned to supervisory positions, including Incident Commander, Command Staff, General Staff, Directors, Supervisors, and Unit Leaders.

PLANNING MEETING: A meeting held as needed throughout the duration of an incident to select specific strategies and tactics for incident control operations and for service and support planning.

PLANNING SECTION: Responsible for the collection, evaluation, dissemination, and use of information about the development of the incident and the status of resources. Includes the Situation Status, Resource Status, Documentation, and Demobilization Units, as well as Technical Specialists.

PRIMARY SEARCH: A rapid search of all involved and exposed areas affected by the fire that can be safely entered. Its purpose is to verify the removal and/or safety of occupants. Occupant status can be verified on every offensive operation, whether or not actual fire is involved.

PROCUREMENT UNIT: A functional Unit of the Finance Section. Responsible for financial matters involving vendors.

REHABILITATION CENTER: An area outside the fireground perimeter where crews can go for rest, nourishment, comfort, and medical evaluation, usually established at greater alarm incidents.

GLOSSARY CONT’D.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 32 of 34

REPORTING LOCATIONS: Any one of the six facilities/locations where incident-assigned resources may check in. The locations are: Incident

Command Post-Resources Unite (RESTAT), Base, Camp, Staging Area, Helibase, or Division Supervisor for direct line assignments. (Check in at one location only.)

RESCUE COMPANY: A ground vehicle providing specified rescue equipment, capability, and personnel.

RESCUE MEDICAL: Any staffed ground vehicle capable of providing emergency medical services.

RESCUE MODE: The state of activities on the fireground until primary search is completed and the “all clear” signal given.

RESOURCES STATUS UNIT (RESTAT): Functional Unit within the Planning Section. Responsible for recording the status of resources committed to incident and evaluation of resources currently committed to incident, the impact that additional responding resources will have on incident and anticipated resource needs.

RESOURCES: All personnel and major items of equipment available, or potentially available, for assignment to incident tasks on which status is maintained.

SAFETY OFFICER: Responsible for monitoring and assessing safety hazards or unsafe situations and developing measures for ensuring personnel safety. Member of the Command Staff.

SECONDARY SEARCH: A complete thorough search of the interior fire area after completing fire control, ventilation, and other required support activities.

SECTION: That organization level having functional responsibility for primary segments of incident operations, such as: Operations, Planning, Logistics, and Finance. The Section level is organizational between Branch and Incident Commander.

SERVICE BRANCH: A Branch within the Logistics Section. Responsible for service activities at incident. Components include the Communications Unit, Medical Unit, and Foods Unit.

SINGLE RESOURCE: An individual Company or Crew.

GLOSSARY CONT’D.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 33 of 34

SITUATION STATUS UNIT (SITSTAT): Functional Unit within Planning Section. Responsible for analysis or situation as it progresses. Reports to the Planning Section Chief.

SMOKE SHOWING: The conditioned exist where it is possible to conduct rescue and fire control simultaneously to gain entry and control of interior access.

STAGING: The management of committed and uncommitted apparatus to provide orderly deployment.

STAGING AREA: That location where incident personnel and equipment are assigned on a immediately available status.

STRATEGIC GOALS: The overall plan that will be used to control the incident. Strategic goals are broad in nature and are achieved by the completion of tactical objectives.

STRATEGIC OPERATIONS: The management of the fireground by the IC who established priorities and allocates resources.

STRIKE TEAM: Five (5) of the same kind and type of resources with common communications and a leader.

SUPERVISOR: ICS title for individuals responsible for command of a Division or a Group.

SUPPLY UNIT: Functional within the Support Branch of the Logistics Section. Responsible for ordering equipment/supplies required for incident operations.

SUPPORT BRANCH: A Branch within the Logistics Section. Responsible for providing the personnel, equipment, and supplies to support incident operations. Components include the Supply Unit, Facilities, and Ground Support Units.

TACTICAL OBJECTIVES: The specific operations that must be accomplished to achieve strategic goals. Tactical objectives must be both specific and measurable.

TACTICAL OPERATIONS: The actual “hands on” work of companies involved in rescue, fire control, and property conservation. These operations are designed to support the Strategic Operations established by the IC.

GLOSSARY CONT’D.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #225 Page 34 of 34

TASK FORCE: A group of any type and kind of resources, with common communications and a leader, temporarily assembled for a specific mission (not to exceed five resources).

TECHNICAL SPECIALISTS: Personnel with special skills who are activated only when needed. Technical Specialists may be needed in the areas of fire behavior, water resources, environmental concerns, resource use, and training. Technical Specialists report initially to the Planning Section but may be assigned anywhere within the ICS organizational structure as needed.

TIME UNIT: A functional Unit within the Finance Section. Responsible record keeping of time for personnel working at incident.

TRUCK COMPANY: A ground vehicle providing aerial ladder or other aerial device and specified portable ladders and equipment capability, and personnel (Engine company, Truck Company, Rescue Company, etc.).

TYPE: The defined capability of a specified kind of company (e.g., pumping, hose, water, and staffing of an Engine Company).

UNIT: That organization element having functional responsibility for a specific incident’s Planning, Logistics, or Finance activity.

WATER TENDER: Any ground vehicle capable of transporting specified quantities of water.

WORKING FIRE: See “Smoke Showing.”

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: MASTER STREAM DEVICES #_____226 ______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

All of the department’s apparatus mounted Master Stream Devices are to have straight-hose tip 2 1/2” nozzles in place as standard equipment.

These nozzles are only to be changed when specific fireground conditions dictate a need for fog pattern or foam application. The combination “fog hog” nozzles are to be kept in a position to facilitate rapid deployment as needed. .

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: BOOSTER LINE ON #_____227 ______EXTRICATION’S EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

On all automobile/truck extrication’s a minimum of one (1) booster line will be pulled off a pumper as “stand-by” for the safety of the firefighters and the victims involved.

Also, the “fire line” will be charged, and if at all possible, manned at all times.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: SEARCH AND RESCUE #_____228______OPERATIONS EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

For the safety of the firefighters, anytime the members of this department perform a search and rescue operation in heavy smoke or any suspected toxic atmosphere, they shall use a charged hose line and/or a rope life line.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: SERVICING OF UTILITIES #_____230 ______(Electric/Gas Shutoff) EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

The following procedures will insure the health and safety of our personnel at an incident when utility service needs to be disconnected from service.

DISCONNECTING EDISON RESIDENTIAL SERVICE:

PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

When it has been determined that the energy to a structure/facility/unit must be de-energized, the following procedure will be followed.

1. Pulling or disengaging circuit breakers, master switches, or fuses should be the first approach unless fire prohibits entry to this area. Fuse panel is source of fire, standing water in area, etc.

2. If unable to disconnect at main panel due to the amount of fire involvement, direct damage to panel, water in area, etc., CALL DETROIT EDISON REPRESENTATIVE TO THE SCENE FOR AN EMERGENCY DISCONNECT.

NOTE: For fire alarms, after the first arriving companies have confirmed a working fire, the Incident Commander will summon Detroit Edison (via dispatch) whenever he/she determines it appropriate.

3. If meter must be pulled before Detroit Edison arrives, SEE ELECTRICAL METER REMOVAL PROCEDURE (Below).

4. If wires must be cut before Detroit Edison representative arrives, See CUTTING WIRE PROCEDURE (Below).

PAD-MOUNT/WALL-MOUNT PEDESTALS, TRANSFORMERS AND SWITCH PANELS:

Under no circumstances will Fire Department Personnel attempt to gain access to any Pad-Mount or Wall-Mount electrical service installation, even if the unit is suspected to be involved in fire.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE # 230 Page 2 of 4

Edison, or other electrical service authority, will be notified and the Fire Department will protect exposures, isolate the area, and/or perform other Fire Department functions.

The following procedure should be performed by a minimum of two (2) trained firefighters.

A. If a residential meter must be pulled before the Edison Representative arrives, the prime consideration in determining the need to shut off the residential electrical utility is the safety of the firefighter participating. Consideration should also be given to shutting off a portion of the service whenever possible. Example: If a fire was confined to a TV in the family room and if no other damage is found in the wiring, the appropriate breaker or fuse should be pulled.

B. Whenever a meter is to be removed by the firefighter, he/she shall wear and use full protective gear:

1. Helmet with shield down 2. Turnout coat and pants 3. Boots 4. Linesman gloves (Class II), with leather gloves 5. A second firefighter shall be present as an observer, ready to assist if necessary, a safe distance from the firefighter pulling the meter. He/she shall wear and use full protective gear, including linesman gloves (Class II), with leather gloves.

C. The firefighter shall have a plastic protector or meter cover and utility kit with him/her, before disconnecting the electrical power by pulling the meter.

D. If the firefighter performing removal is confronted with stubborn clips, retainers, etc., used in holding meter in place, removal should be aborted (it will be necessary to wait for a Detroit Edison Representative). AT NO TIME SHALL A FIREFIGHTER USE ANY TOOL(S) INSIDE OF A METER BOX, EXCEPT FOR THE "INSULATED NUTDRIVER" USED ON A-BASE METERS.

E. When the meter has been pulled, it shall NOT be replaced or power restored for any reason by Fire Department Personnel.

F. When the firefighter has removed all of the meters, install the plastic protector and metal cover, on all meters pulled. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #230 Page 3 of 4

G. After removal, the meter shall be given to the Incident Commander. The meter is to be hung somehow, from the meter box or placed on the ground below it. We are NOT to leave the scene with the meter.

CUTTING WIRES:

The cutting of wires shall be a "LAST RESORT" maneuver and shall be considered only when Edison has not arrived and life safety is threatened.

1. If there is no meter to pull or the meter box is inaccessible (burning, smoking, etc.), and the energized structure, vehicle, etc. still poses a hazard to life safety.

2. When life safety is threatened and there is no other means of protection.

CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Only "Hotsticks" or tools designed for cutting electrical wires for correct voltage are to be used.

2. The member initiating the cut is to be in full turnout gear and Class II gloves and alone (no one making any physical contact with him/her). He/she is to be observed by another fire department member. This observer must have full turnout gear and Class II gloves on as well.

3. Wires to a structure are to be cut at the drip-loop structure attachment only.

4. Again, Detroit Edison is to be the primary agent for the cutting of any Edison lines.

NATURAL GAS SHUTOFF PROCEDURES:

PROCEDURE OVERVIEW:

When it has been determined that it is necessary to shut the gas supply off to a structure, due to a leak/break of a supply line, the following procedure will be followed, when possible.

1. Turn supply off at the shutoff valve using spanner wrench/other tool.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #230 Page 4 of 4

2. DO NOT USE any type of crimping devise to close/pinch plastic gas lines.

3. Use wooden tapered plugs with/plastic mallet to stop/plug leaks in RIGID gas pipe only. DO NOT USE wooden plugs on plastic gas lines.

4. DO NOT USE expansion plugs on any type of gas lines.

UTILITY KITS

Utility kit/hotsticks are located on Rescue #2, #4, Truck #2 and Truck #4.

KIT CONTENTS:

2 pair Class II rubber linesmen gloves (stored in protectors). 2 pair leather protective gloves (for Class II rubber gloves). 1 roll "Live Wire" yellow caution tape. 8 Plastic meter covers. 1 pair Side cutters. 1 Flashlight (explosion proof). 1 "States" meter wrench (insulated nut driver). 4 Tapered wood plugs. 1 Plastic head mallet. 1 Spanner wrench #10.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: CIVIL DISTURBANCE #_____231______RESPONSE EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

In the event that we are called to any community to respond to a civil disturbance either through a mutual aid agreement or by a higher governmental dictate, (State Fire Marshal), there will be a particular set of rules of engagement that will be adhered to. These rules are ultimately for the overall safety and well being of this department's members.

All chiefs shall be notified immediately in the case of any response to a riotous area.

When responding to a community that has an emergency incident due to a civil disturbance, riots, etc., the responding company will not proceed to the final destination without the assistance/accompaniment of an armed law enforcement officer (township police, state police, sheriff, etc.). You may proceed to a staging area unescorted.

If at any time while performing firefighting activities your company or any part of your company comes under attack or is fired upon, all firefighting activities shall cease. Attack and supply lines will be disconnected from the apparatus and retreat will be immediate.

If a Company Officer witnesses any situation that appears threatening, rocks or bottle throwing, large pushy crowds, clubs or weapons, he/she may call for an immediate withdrawal of apparatus and manpower to a safe location. Proper justification of all actions will be documented. However, Company Officers are to lean to the side of caution in all situations.

The retreat signal, to alarm the on scene companies can be handled by two methods: i.e. radio message - "Retreat - return to the engine" or blasts from the air horns, one second on, one second off and so on until all members are accounted for. If there is time, nozzles and other appliances that are easily disconnected should be brought back to the apparatus when retreating.

At no time will any member of this department direct a hose stream on people for the purpose of riot control, crowd dispersion, etc.

The incident command system shall be utilized by all officers at all incidents. All job assignments shall be assigned to no less than two firefighters, no matter how mundane the assignment shall seem. Apparatus operators will be operating with the incident commander as a team so as not to leave any member alone for even a brief period. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: BOMB THREATS #_____233______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

PURPOSE

The Clinton Township Department of Fire/Rescue's function is to assist police agencies in bomb threat situations. To be present in the event of needed evacuation or detonation.

a. The fire personnel on the scene are to assist in evacuation and/or searches when requested by the police department.

b. When the police are not on the scene the fire department Incident Commander may initiate evacuation.

c. There will be a one engine response on a bomb threat - normal traffic.

d. Upon arrival at the scene, stage all apparatus at a prudent distance and proper position to the building.

e. The Incident Commander shall report to the police officer in charge.

f. The engine company will remain on "standby" at the ready for immediate service. During the "standby" period, consideration should be given to topics of; fire attack, water supplies, medical procedures, etc.

g. When necessary the Incident Commander will sound the alarm of fire (via radio), engage in firefighting and/or treat the injured.

h. In the area of the building where a bomb is suspected, radio communications or beepers are not to be used due to the possibility of detonation.

I. In the event there is a detonation or fire, the Fire Incident Commander will be in full charge of the fire but once the fire/explosion has been suppressed, the Police Department will resume responsibility.

j. No member of this department is to handle a suspected explosive device for any reason.

k. Bomb threat calls are normally handled by "911" police dispatch but in case the call is received by fire dispatch the following steps are to be followed: STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #233 Page 2 of 2

1. Signal an officer to listen in on the conversation. If no officer is available, a fellow firefighter should be signaled.

2. Keep the caller talking as along as possible. Ask the caller to repeat his message and write down every word.

3. If the caller does not indicate the location of the bomb or the time of detonation, the person receiving the call should ask for this information as well as any other pertinent information.

4. In some cases, it may be feasible to advise the caller that the building is occupied; and the detonation of the bomb could result in death or serious injury to many innocent people.

5. The person receiving the call should listen for any unusual background noises, such as motors running, music, or any other noises which may indicate the place or location from which the call is being made.

6. Listen closely to the voice to determine voice quality, accents, speech impediments, sex, or unusual characteristics.

7. If the caller can be kept talking, ask specific questions regarding the bomb, such as size, detonating device, construction, appearances, etc.

8. Notify the police department as soon as possible and relay all information to them as the responsibility for handling the incident is theirs.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: RED RUN DRAIN AGREEMENT #_____234 ______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

NOTIFICATION

That the government entity being first alerted would contact all members of this pact. See below:

Clinton Township...... Emergency: 911 Business: 263-8444

Harrison Township...... Emergency: 466-1414 Business: 466-1450

City of Warren...... Emergency: 573-7111 Business: 756-2800

Sterling Heights...... Emergency: 264-8835

DNR...... (800)292-4706

Macomb County Health Department Business: 469-5236

R. MacDonald or C. Shoemaker (24 hour): .... 296-4499

Macomb County Emergency Services:...... 469-5151 Business: 469-5270

Mt. Clemens Fire Dept. Business: 469-6840

Red Run Drain Comm. Business: 544-4694

Kurt Castellani Home: 583-3425

Macomb County Drain Comm. Chapaton 772-3425

RESPONSE

Upon notification each agency will activate a Red Run Drain Response based upon local SOP's. Intersection at which the drain may be observed should be designated. Responding personnel should receive copies of an incident report form for final submission to the Command Center.

Each involved agency should plan to have a representative at the Command Center during an incident. The Clinton Township Fire Department has agreed to use their fire station at 16870 Clinton River Road, (West of Garfield - North of Metro Beach Parkway) as a site for this purpose. The purpose of this planned response and actions of the operations group can be specific: 1. To identify the source of contaminants entering the Red Run Drain. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #234 Page 2 of 2

2. To coordinate and facilitate any actions taken to mitigate an occurrence as listed.

3. To identify any contaminants and determine potential for environmental damage.

REMEDIAL ACTION

Based upon findings made by responding agencies the capture of contaminants using available resources should be considered. Samples of apparent product should be taken and tested to determine its impact and future actions.

Specific contamination sites or pollution sources should be identified and appropriate actions taken to prevent reoccurrence.

Responsible agencies, groups or activities should be identified for corrective action.

The Optimum objective would be to prevent any contamination of this waterway. Realistically, identification and planned mitigation of environmental impact should be achieved.

RESPONSE TO THE RED RUN DRAIN

I. Purposes: to develop a plan for the mitigating, response, and recovery from product found in the Red Run Drain.

II. Procedure:

A. The 911 center receives a call for response to the Red Run Drain.

1. The Fire Department is notified immediately.

2. The Incident Commander will notify the Chiefs and the Emergency Preparedness Director of the location of the Command Post.

B. The Incident Commander will request checks at the following points to determine whether product is in the drain and the amount:

1. The Utica Road Bridge over the Red Run Drain.

2. 16 Mile Road Bridge over the Red Run Drain.

C. The information gathered from these locations will be forwarded to the Incident Commander. The Red Run Incident Report Form shall be filled out and this information forwarded to the Chiefs and the Emergency Preparedness Director.

D. The following Agencies shall be contacted to activate the Red Run Drain Agreement: 1. Macomb County Health department 469-5236 ask for Bob MacDonald or Cole Shoemaker or, if after normal business STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #234 Page 3 of 3

hours and on weekends .296-4699 advise operator what has happened and where the Command Post is located.

2. Warren Fire Department...... 574-9111

3. Sterling Hgts. Fire Department...... 264-8835

4. Harrison Township Fire Department...... 466-1414

5. DNR...... (800)292-4706

6. Macomb County Emergency Services...... 469-5151

7. Mt. Clemens Fire Department...... 463-0561

8. Red Run Drain Commission: Kurt Castellani...... 544-4694 Home...... 583-1611

9. Macomb County Drain Commission Chapaton...... 772-3425

III. Other Important Agencies Numbers:

A. United State Coast Guard.-.MSO office Detroit...... (313)568-9580 (The Coast Guard is responsible for navigable waters west to I-75).

B. Marine Pollution Control...... (313)849-2333

C. EnManCo...... (313)731-3130

D. Great Lakes Environmental...... (313)758-0400

E. National Response Center...... (800)424-8802 (WITHIN 24 HOURS)

F. City of Warren Helicopter:

Authorization through Lt. Jerry Dolsen, Emergency Management Coordinator (313)574-9111 Car Phone .815-2712 (The helicopter pilot can determine the location of the product in the drain).

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: SAFE DELIVERY OF NEWBORN #_____236 ______INFANTS EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2001 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Any newborn accepted at a fire station shall be transported to the hospital by an ambulance. If the fire department does not provide EMS transport, then an EMS provider should be called. The law specifically requires that the fire department initially taking custody of the child must “transfer the newborn to the hospital.” Taken literally, the fire department cannot transfer temporary protective custody of the newborn to the ambulance crew, but must accompany the child to the hospital and transfer temporary protective custody to the hospital.

PURPOSE

To implement the provisions of 2000 PA 232, 233, and 234.

BACKGROUND

In response to the significant number of newborn infants being abandoned by their parents, the Michigan Legislature passed Acts 232, 233, and 234 in the summer of 2000, with an effective date of January 1, 2001. These acts affect ALL FIRE DEPARTMENTS in Michigan. They provide that a parent may surrender an infant to an emergency service provider, and go on to define an emergency service provider as “…a uniformed or otherwise identified employee or contractor of a fire department, hospital, or police station when such individual is inside the premises and on duty.” This means, quite simply, that a parent (either parent) of a newborn can drop off an unwanted newborn at any fire department and remain anonymous.

The fire department has statutory obligations under the law, including:

1. Assume that the child is a newborn

2. Accept temporary protective custody.

3. Make a reasonable effort to inform the parent that:

a) By surrendering the newborn, the newborn will be placed for adoption

b) That they will have 28 days to petition to regain custody

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #236 Page 2 of 3

1. Make a reasonable attempt to:

a) Reassure that shared information obtained will be kept confidential

b) Encourage the parent to identify himself or herself

c) Encourage the parent to share relevant family/medical history

d) Inform the parent that they can receive counseling or medical attention

e) Inform the parent that a reasonable effort must be made to identify the non-surrendering parent

f) That the placement agency can provide confidential services to the parent

g) Inform the parent that they should sign a release for the newborn to be used in the termination hearing

1. Provide the parent a packet of written information that includes:

a) Parent’s due process rights

b) Pamphlet describing the Safe Delivery Act

c) Release form

d) Family/medical history background

1. “Transfer the newborn to a hospital” (It appears that the newborn should be transported by an ambulance; however, temporary protective custody cannot be turned over to the ambulance crew if the crew is not part of the fire or police department receiving the baby from the parent – a representative or the fire or police department must also go to the hospital to turn custody over to the hospital.)

PROCEDURE

In the event that a person comes to the station and desires to surrender an infant, use one of the following checklists, as applicable:

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #236 Page 3 of 3

CHECKLIST

(For a fire department that does not provide ambulance transport)

_____Take the infant into protective custody

_____Request that an ambulance be dispatched

_____Provide a “Surrendering Parents Rights” (ATTACHMENT #1) information sheet to the person surrendering the infant.

_____Obtain as much medical history as possible, using the “Voluntary Medical Background Form for a Surrendered Newborn” (ATTACHMENT #2) provision of this information is voluntary on the part of the surrendering parent – they are not required to provide any information – however it may be helpful in making certain that the infant receives proper care in the future.

_____Ask the person surrendering the infant to complete and sign a “Voluntary Release For Adoption of a Surrendered Newborn by Parent” form (ATTACHMENT #3) Provisions of this information is voluntary on the part of the surrendering parent – they are not required to provide any information – however it may be helpful in making certain that the infant receives proper care in the future.

_____Accompany the infant to the hospital

_____Transfer custody of the infant to the hospital emergency room staff

_____Complete an incident report

_____Attach this checklist, the “Voluntary Medical Background Form for a Surrendered Newborn”, the “Voluntary Release for Adoption of a Surrendered Newborn by Parent” form, if completed and a copy of the ambulance report to the incident report form CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND/INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: RED TAGS #______238______EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 14, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Located in each clipboard of the department’s apparatus are red-tag packets. These consist of a numbered red tag and a four part carbonless form. When certain dangerous conditions are discovered that could lead to personal injury or death to occupants of a dwelling or business, the act of red-tagging an item or piece of equipment shall be implemented.

Red tags shall be applied, but not exclusively, to the following malfunctioning equipment or systems:

- Heating systems, including boilers - Air conditioners (fixed, not window unit) and HVAC systems - Fireplaces (solid fuel-fired or gas) - Chimneys (masonry and factory built) - Exhaust hood systems (outside vented) - Commercial refrigeration units - Commercial cooking units - Commercial machinery, compressors - Electrical wiring, breakers or breaker/fuse panels - Hot water heaters

In most all cases, the equipment in question should be de-energized; in the case of commercial equipment, for our personnel’s safety, a representative from the business should be consulted to assist shutting down any equipment or system.

Normally, natural gas problems with piping/distribution systems should be referred to Consumers Energy for service, as should carbon monoxide problems. A red tag is also prudent.

As a rule of thumb, equipment that is not permanently installed, for instances, a stove, dryer or a window mounted air conditioner, does not require a red tag to be affixed, however, if it is believed to be a problem with the electrical circuit, apply a red tag to the fuse or breaker panel.

When in doubt, apply a red tag. It is the fire administration’s view, as well as the Clinton Township Building Department, that a red tag should be utilized anytime that the company officer feels a dangerous condition exists, one that could result in injury or death to the occupants.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #238 Page 2 of 2

Red Tag Procedure:

- Fill in information requested on the red tag; make every attempt to get owner/contact info

- Peel only a portion of the backing of the red tag and affix it to the unit or equipment, if possible, in an area easily visible

- Fill in information on white carbonless form; press hard, there are four copies

- The owner or occupant shall sign the Responsible Party Signature/Title line

- The bottom of the page beginning with “ROUTING” should be left blank

- Leave the original, the white (top) copy with the occupant/owner

- Advise the owner/occupant to contact a licensed, qualified contractor to perform the repair within 24 hours; include this information in the narrative of the NFIRS report. (Note: In the case of weekends or holidays, for instance, equipment can be repaired and placed back into service prior to being re- inspected.)

- Send the remainder of the paperwork to the Fire Prevention Division who will properly route the forms

- After completing the NFIRS report, e-mail the Fire Prevention Group that a red tag was used. Always include the incident number for reference.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND I INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE–RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: TWO IN - TWO OUT # 251 EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 26, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

TWO IN / TWO OUT

Purpose

To provide for a Rescue Team that will be immediately available for the search and rescue of interior firefighting crews that become trapped or incapacitated during initial company operations.

Procedure

The Clinton Township Fire Department shall have a minimum of four members present on scene before interior operations can be initiated on any structure fire that cannot be contained by a hand held fire extinguisher, and requires the use of SCBA. Two firefighters may begin interior operations provided two other firefighters remain outside for assistance or rescue of the interior crew.

Exception

The one exception to this guideline will be if an imminent life-threatening situation exists prior to the assembling of sufficient manpower, where immediate interior operations may prevent the loss of life or serious injury, the officer in command has the authority to take action as deemed necessary.

Interior Crew

All personnel working in an IDLH atmosphere (SOP 413) shall use SCBA and work in two man minimums. A constant means of communication using voice, visual, or physical contact, such as a tethered line, shall be maintained at all times between members of the interior team. Interior personnel shall also maintain radio or other form of communication with IC and exterior companies.

Exterior Crew

The exterior crew shall be responsible for maintaining a constant awareness of the number and identity of members operating in the hazardous area, their location and function. They shall maintain radio, visual, voice, or signal line communication with other outside crewmembers.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #251 2 of 2

Working Fire

It is most important for first arriving companies to give an accurate and detailed size up statement - What is the situation and what is the company about to do?

If the first arriving company identifies a "working fire"; this will trip a support system to be activated by dispatch (SOP 307a) and the above assignments communicated amongst subsequent companies. It will become necessary to establish an outside crew before an additional engine company will arrive with Rapid Intervention Team assignments.

If the conditions are not present for the above stated exception and four members are on the fire scene, two members are permitted to work in the hazard area with two members outside. Full protective clothing, protective equipment, and SCBA shall be immediately accessible for use by the outside team if the need for rescue activities inside the hazard area is necessary.

Our experience has shown us that the first arriving engine company would function as the attack engine (SOG 212). The second arriving company, not limited to a truck company, will assign two members to an interior crew for search and rescue and one member assigned to an outside crew (SOG 211). During this initial fire attack, the pump operator, dressed in full PPE with SCBA unit available, and the exterior crewmember, dressed in full PPE with SCBA, shall have rescue responsibilities of 2 In – 2 Out.

The second arriving engine, or a third company, will function as the "Supply Engine" (SOG 212) and assume rescue responsibilities from the pump operator and outside crewmember. This transfer shall be automatic with the company's "on scene" radio transmission.

Rapid Intervention Team assignments shall be assumed upon arrival of the additional company designated in SOP 307a. These assignments will also become automatic with their "on scene" radio transmission. The Rapid intervention Team will operate as outlined in SOG 252.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND I INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE–RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: RAPID INTERVENTION TEAM # 252 EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 26, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

RAPID INTERVENTION TEAM

Purpose

To provide a Rapid Intervention Team (RIT) to search for, locate and remove firefighters who become trapped or are in distress in a building or surrounding area.

Procedure

A RIT company will be automatically dispatched when a "working fire" is declared (SOP 307a). The RIT Company will report on scene with RIT designation. (i.e. E-3 on scene, E-3 will be the Rapid Intervention Team) The Company Officer of the RIT will then report to the command post wearing full turn out gear and SCBA for a briefing.

The RIT shall have no other purpose on the fire ground and will never be involved in any firefighting activity without being released from their RIT responsibility.

The sole purpose of the RIT is to constantly assess the situation, monitor communications, assemble rescue equipment, and remain properly outfitted and ready to respond should a rescue of the interior crews become necessary.

The RIT should be responsible for:

• Maintaining a constant awareness of the number and identity of members operating in the hazardous area, their location and function

• Entrances used by fire personnel and any potential exit points

• The standby members shall remain in radio, visual, voice or signal line communications with the RIT Company Officer

• RIT personnel must also continually size-up fire conditions noting fire progress, building construction and building conditions.

• Gather any available pre-plan information including known hazards.

• Any other information that may be useful during search, removal or recovery operations.

• Review the Mobile Data Computer for building layout while enroute to the scene. STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #252 Page 2 of 2

Tools and Equipment

While standing by, the RIT shall assemble assigned equipment, but not limited to, on the RIT Staging Tarp. The tools can be found in the designated compartments on our Trucks and/or Rescues:

• RIT Emergency Bottle carrying bag • Pre-rigged 4:1 Denver Drill Removal System • Large Area Search Bag with designated hand tools. • One TNT Tool and One Haligan Bar • Hand Lights and strobe • Designated RIT radio for Mutual Aid companies • Stokes Basket • Red SCBA Bottle covers for RIT members

This equipment should be staged separate from the rehabilitation and other staging areas. The stokes basket can be used to stage the RIT equipment and nobody can use these tools except RIT.

Activation of RIT

The Incident Commander shall activate a Rapid Intervention Team response.

Upon activation, the RIT company officer shall be assigned RIT Officer operation. This position should not be handled by the Incident Commander. The IC should maintain control of the scene to allow for a continuously smooth flow in operation. Any and all information regarding the individual calling for assistance should be given to the RIT Officer. This officer shall be required to have a minimum of RIT training and FO I.

The Safety Officer should maintain documentation of RIT members, time in, time out, locations searched, and all other pertinent information.

In the event that the RIT is pressed into service, another RIT will be established. If the fire is in a large structure, more then one RIT may be established. Whenever more than one RIT is set up they should have a numerical designation assigned to them so the IC and RIT Officer can differentiate which team in handling a given assignment (Example: RIT-1; RIT-2)

Our RIT team will work with any Mutual Aid Company assigned to RIT. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: EMERGENCY EVACUATION &

#253 MAYDAY SIGNAL EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 26, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

In an effort to standardize emergency procedures in the event an evacuation from a dangerous location is necessary, or to call for help, the guideline listed below will be utilized.

The Macomb County Fire Chief’s Association has adopted, as part of the Mutual Aid Pact, standard language and procedures for emergency evacuation of an area, if the need arises. The Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue-EMS will also adopt this procedure.

EVACUATION PROCEDURE:

When it has been identified that a potential building collapse is imminent the radio transmission “EMERGENCY TRAFFIC: EVACUATION” will be broadcasted and the Evacuation Signal will be initiated. The evacuation signal is a 1-second-on-1-second-off blasting of the air horns for 15 seconds, followed by a 15-second pause to accommodate for radio traffic. This evacuation signal process shall be repeated three times and then a Personal Accountability Report (PAR) should be taken. If all members are not accounted for an Incident Action Plan shall be developed to find those unaccounted for. This process shall be repeated until all members have been evacuated and accounted for.

MAYDAY SIGNAL AND PROCEDURE:

When a firefighter needs immediate assistance because he/she is lost/disoriented/entangled/low on air or otherwise in immediate danger he/she should call a Mayday. The call should be made three times (MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY) followed by pertinent information such as location, type of emergency, what company and how many personnel are involved. The IC will acknowledge the receipt of this information. All other radio traffic, unless pertinent to the Mayday, should cease. If the IC does not acknowledge the Mayday call, dispatch should repeat the MAYDAY call.

The Rapid Intervention Team should be activated to the MAYDAY signal and operate according to SOG 252 – Rapid Intervention Team.

When a MAYDAY is broadcasted, the IC shall immediately sound an additional alarm. This will bring outside departments to the scene to assist with any RIT or fire control measures. The request for assistance should include the fact that it is for a “Firefighter Down.” CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: FIREGROUND / INCIDENTS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE- EMS STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE Subject: PERSONNEL ACCOUNTABILITY

# 254b REPORT (PAR) EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

A Personnel Accountability Report (PAR) involves a roll call of personnel.

Company PAR

For the Company Officer, a PAR is an accounting of all crewmembers assigned to his/her company. Reports of PAR should be conducted face-to-face within a company whenever possible.

For the purpose of conducting a PAR, our Truck / Rescue companies will be split into three companies. Truck – Interior, Truck-Exterior and Rescue.

Incident or Sector PAR

For the Incident Commander (IC), an incident PAR is an accounting of all personnel at an incident. A PAR could also be called by the IC for a specific area. For example, an IC could call a PAR for the companies operating on a roof. Reports of PAR’s should be conducted face-to-face whenever possible.

Conducting an Incident or Sector PAR

When an IC conducts a PAR, he/she should use a checklist to record the companies involved, the status report from the companies and the time when the PAR was conducted. Companies should be contacted one at a time with their response documented.

The IC may have the Safety Officer or another designee conduct a PAR.

A Personnel Accountability report will be required for:

• Any change of fireground channel, especially for a multiple alarm • Any report of a missing or trapped firefighter • After an Evacuation Signal has been sounded • Any collapse, partial or complete, of a structure • Any change from an offensive to defensive fire attack • No more than 20 minute intervals during any alarm • Any time Command feels it is necessary

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #254b Page 2 of 2

Personal Accountability Report

Time Company Status Location

Status Key A – Accounted For U – Unaccounted For CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: FIRE COMMUNICATIONS

#301b CENTER EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

The Battalion Commander, on any given day, has overall responsibility for the Fire Communications Center dispatch (Watchroom) operations.

The Fire Communications Center shall be staffed at all times. The personnel assigned to dispatch duties shall report directly to the Battalion Commander and inform him/her of any significant information relative to Fire Department operations. This would include, but not be limited to, items such as daily personnel assignments, watch assignments, unusual incident responses, apparatus or equipment reported in/out of service, changes in duty personnel, etc. In addition, a daily log sheet shall be maintained each day and kept up-to-date, recording all such activities.

Upon receiving notification of absences or requests for sick or personal business time, the individual assigned to the Fire Communications Center shall immediately notify the Battalion Commander.

Emergency communications (telephones, fire radios, C.A.D.) shall always have first priority over any and all other activities in the Fire Communications Center. The dispatch of companies, through the plectron shall be stated twice after the tone signals are activated. On all alarms of a “fire” nature, the dispatch information, including any updates, will be rebroadcast (without tones) once all units have indicated their response, through updating their mobile data computer (MDC) status to “En-Route”. All required dispatch notifications shall be made immediately upon receipt of information that a “Working Fire” or Mutual Aid situation exists.

All radio communications from dispatch to an incident shall be through the Incident Commander on the scene, or if no units have yet arrived, the first due company. Dispatch shall not call off apparatus responding to a fire. Responding companies may only be called off of a response, released, or rerouted by the Incident Commander, The Battalion Commander, a Deputy Chief or Chief. If called off of a response, the company will, then, notify dispatch of its status and update their MDC screen by selecting the “Busy but Available” icon. Dispatch will acknowledge.

An Incident Commander has the sole authority to “release” companies which have reported “on the scene” at an incident. When releasing companies, the Incident STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #301b Page 2 of 2

Commander will report such a release to Dispatch. Dispatch will acknowledge the report, then wait for reports of “Busy but Available” from each individual company being released. Although being released, it may take a minute or two for personnel to get situated on their apparatus. This would indicate, then, that although available for reassignment, they may not be quite ready for a “Busy but Available” status. Dispatch should not call each company individually, but once again, wait for the returning report from the companies.

Note: The status of “Enroute to second location” will not allow that vehicle to be suggested for another response until upgraded to “Busy but available.”

The necessity for “reassignment” (or rerouting) of a Company could occur at any time, depending on circumstances. The Battalion Commander has the ultimate authority for reassigning a Company. Such a reassignment will always be communicated through Dispatch. If a reassignment is necessitated while a Company is enroute to another incident, this change will be done only after Dispatch clears such with the Battalion Commander. Once a Company is “on the scene” at an incident, its release for reassignment, also, must be cleared through the Incident Commander (who may or may not be the Battalion Commander) if a “release” report has not yet been received by Dispatch.

The individual assigned to nightwatch, each day, shall be responsible to update watch, personal business and overtime records, test the 911 direct line, assure the security camera system is operating, conduct a morning daily radio check, complete the Watchroom checklist and review any printed information published to assist with the operation of the CAD system.

Each apparatus radio is to be tested daily, beginning at 08:15 hours. Should a particular unit be out of service due to mechanical reasons, it will not be included in the morning radio test, but will be tested immediately upon returning to service.

If a portable radio should be discovered missing for any reason, an investigation is to be commenced immediately by the Company Officer; the Battalion Commander shall be notified by the dispatcher of the situation. The Deputy Chief of Operations will be notified before the shift is relieved, if a radio has not been located.

When a reserve apparatus is placed in service, it will take on the designation of the unit it is replacing. Like apparatus will assume like designations, (i.e.; if E6 replaces E4, it will be referred to as E4). If a truck replaces an engine, it will retain its “truck” designation.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: NIGHTWATCH / WATCHROOM # 302b EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Nightwatch duty shall be assigned to members of the Firefighter rank. The Group 1 and Group 2 members, as defined by language in Article III, Section 7, paragraph f, of the Local 1381 Bargaining Agreement, assigned to Engine 4 and Truck 4 are exempt from drawing the Nightwatch. This applies when the platoon they are assigned to, is scheduled for duty.

Exceptions:

• Any officer, or members assigned to the previously identified units, may be assigned the Nightwatch duty when their work status is designated “Light- Duty.” • Absences which arise from personal business requests and sick time uses, which result in the need to be covered immediately, will be filled at the Battalion Commander’s discretion.

Eligible firefighters shall be assigned the duty for a one-day period, provided the exemption does not apply. Overtime personnel can be used to fill the Nightwatch assignment. An attempt to evenly distribute the Nightwatch duty across a given platoon shall be made. A written record of duty served shall be maintained by the Battalion Chief. The record shall be kept in the Battalion Chief’s office.

Operational responsibility for the Watchroom lies with the Nightwatch assignment as follows:

• From 0800 hours-1200 hours. • Any time period that goes uncovered by a member assigned a Daywatch due to emergency run activity, training, or any other company activity. • From 2200 hours-0800 hours.

Daywatch times cannot be exactly defined. They are subject to the number of personnel being used to cover this period. This number fluctuates for several reasons. These watch times are defined by dividing the number of personnel assigned to cover them, into the ten-hour period. The responsibility for the proper operation of the Watchroom, during daytime hours, belongs to the member assigned. This includes the gathering of information, processing of the information, determining the response, and transmitting the alarm. It also includes any and all other functions of the Watchroom. It may include recording absences, answering telephones, activating the siren, monitoring weather bulletins and contacting support agencies.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #302b Page 2 of 2

Having a member stand in, who is not assigned the Watch, is a common practice. It should be understood that while this practice is allowed, the overall responsibility for the proper execution of the duties remains with the member assigned the Daywatch, or in their absence, the member assigned Nightwatch.

Watches are assigned through the database in the Fire Communications Center computer and shall be recorded in the Battalion Chief’s logbook.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DISPATCH

#______303e _ EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 19, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 8

DISPATCH POLICY

The Clinton Township Fire Department will respond to any EMERGENCY situation which threatens LIFE, SAFETY or PROPERTY. In cases when the Clinton Township Fire Department is not the appropriate agency or is not capable of delivering the needed assistance, or if the situation is not a true emergency, an attempt will be made to place the caller in contact with the appropriate provider. The Clinton Township Fire Department will dispatch the closest available unit(s) with the capability to control an emergency situation. The judgment of both dispatch and emergency response personnel is an integral part of the decision process, considering both information received and potential.

Timely response and effective management of rescue and fire control situations represent the most immediate priorities of the Fire Department. Upon receipt of adequate information (location and nature of the emergency) the dispatcher will dispatch the appropriate assignment.

CALL SCREENING

Determination of the nature of the problem may indicate that a true emergency response exists, a non-emergency response exists, or that Fire Department response is inappropriate. The call screening process must not delay response to valid emergency incidents, but should attempt to verify the nature of questionable calls. When a positive determination of the need for emergency response cannot be made, the Fire Department policy is to go ahead and dispatch for the benefit of the public.

INCIDENT TAKER/DISPATCHER

The primary responsibility of the Incident Taker/Dispatcher is to determine, without delay, the nature and locations of the emergency, and the source of the call (call back number), to initiate the dispatch process. This information is necessary to process the incident additional details may be added later.

The Incident Taker/Dispatcher makes the initial assessment of the appropriate response based on information received from the caller. Incident Taker/Dispatcher uses the plectron system as the primary means of transmitting an alarm, which is to include the following information.

1. Companies assigned 2. Nature of incident 3. Location of incident 4. Additional available information regarding incident

ASSIGNMENTS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #303e Page 2 of 8

The Incident Taker/Dispatcher will select units for dispatch according to their distance from the location of the call and the service capabilities of each company.

EMERGENCY MEDICAL ASSIGNMENT

1. One (1) Paramedic Engine Company from the closest Fire Station to the incident.

2. If the closest Paramedic Engine Company is not available, the next closest available company to the incident. If a BLS unit is closest, back up with additional Paramedic Engine Company.

3. If the call is of citizen assist in nature, the closest appropriate unit will be sent.

MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENT ASSIGNMENT

PERSONAL INJURY (Emergency Mode), or UNKNOWN (Normal Traffic Mode):

1. One (1) Paramedic Engine Company from the closest Fire Station to the incident AND One (1) Truck/Rescue Company next closest to the incident.

If cancelled while responding, one company is to continue normal traffic for a drive-by.

STILL ASSIGNMENT

A still assignment consists of an appropriate company and will be dispatched for a non- structural fire, a fire reported as out, any false alarm or the following:

1. Dumpster Fire (Closest Engine)

2. Burning Complaint (Closest Engine)

3. Wires Down (Closest Engine)

4. Wash Down (Closest Engine)

5. Bomb Threat (Closest Engine)

6. Check-out (Closest Engine)

7. Service Call or Citizen Assist (Closest Appropriate)

8. Automatic False Fire Alarm (Closest Appropriate)

9. Cancelled MVA (Closest Appropriate)

When responding to checkouts, burning complaints or dumpster fires away from exposures, assigned apparatus will operate in a “Normal Traffic Mode”. The use of warning lights and siren STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #303e Page 3 of 8

will be at the discretion of the Company officer upon receipt of additional information received at the time of dispatch and/or enroute to the scene indicating life safety or property exposure issues.

AUTOMOBILE FIRE ASSIGNMENT

One (1) Engine Company closest to the incident; AND

One (1) Truck/Rescue Company next closest to the incident.

TRUCK OR BUS FIRE ASSIGNMENT

Two (2) Engine Companies closest to the incident; AND

One (1) Truck/Rescue Company next closest to the incident.

GRASS FIRE ASSIGNMENTS

One (1) Engine Company closest to the incident; AND

One (1) Truck/Rescue Company next closest to the incident.

REGULAR ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

A regular alarm assignment will be used for structural fires (or a report of smoke or odor of smoke) including:

1. Single family residence 2. Garage 3. Shed 4. Smoke/Odor of smoke in residence A regular alarm assignment consists of two (2) Engine Companies, two (2) Truck/Rescue Companies and the Battalion Commander. If any of these companies is not available, an additional company shall be dispatched.

GENERAL ALARM ASSIGNMENT

A general alarm assignment will be used for structural fires (or a report of smoke or odor of smoke) including: STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #303e Page 4 of 8

1. Multiple family residences

2. Places of assembly (ex. schools, convalescent homes, churches, etc.)

3. Commercial / industrial structure, sprinkled or un-sprinkled

4. Sprinkler flow alarms in assembly, multi-residence and commercial

A general alarm assignment calls for three (3) Engine Companies, two (2) Truck/Rescue Companies and the Battalion Commander. If any of these companies is not available, an additional company shall be dispatched.

AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM – SINGLE FAMILY

The response to an automatic fire alarm, as reported by an alarm company, will consist of two (2) Engine Companies, two (2) Truck/Rescue Companies, and the Battalion Commander. The first due Engine will respond in the emergency mode and all others will respond in the “normal traffic” mode unless additional information enroute is obtained or the first due report indicates a modified type of response. The Battalion Commander will make the determination based upon this additional information.

AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARMS – ASSEMBLY, MULTI – RESIDENCE AND COMMERCIAL

The response to an automatic fire alarm, as received from an alarm company, will consist of three (3) Engine Companies, two (2) Truck/Rescue Companies, and the Battalion Commander. Only the first due Engine will respond in the emergency mode, while all other responding apparatus will run in the “normal traffic” mode unless additional information is obtained enroute, or the first due report indicates a modified type of response. The Battalion Commander may change the response after receiving this additional information.

CARBON MONOXIDE (C.O.) DETECTOR ASSIGNMENTS

A carbon monoxide detector assignment consists of one (1) Truck/Rescue Company.

SPECIAL DUTY ASSIGNMENTS

Special duty assignments shall be assigned by the Battalion Commander as needed.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS OR SPECIAL OPERATIONS ASSIGNMENTS

The Battalion Commander must be notified of all hazardous materials incidents. The Dispatcher should gather as much information as possible from the caller concerning the incident. Based on this information the Dispatcher and/or Battalion Commander will determine an initial response level. As additional information is received, the level of the incident may change. The STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #303e Page 5 of 8

Dispatcher should relay weather conditions to all responding equipment and monitor the conditions for abrupt changes.

When first due companies arrive on the scene, they should confirm or re-establish the level of the incident. Other Departments may be called for special operations mutual aid by direction of the Incident Commander who should confer with the Special Ops division leader for the specific aid needed.

The Dispatcher should reference the Special Operations dispatch card and/or the Special Operations section of the watch room manual for the following information.

1. How to activate the Special Operations Team by pagers. 2. Home phone #’s of Team members for after 2200 hrs. 3. Resource list for hazmat specific agencies. 4. Information sheet that is needed for calling CHEMTREC. (1-800-424-9300) 5. How to contact state police lien service.

Level I:

Dispatch the nearest Engine and/or Truck/Rescue Company.

A relatively small incident that has no immediate danger to life or the environment; will not require chemical protective clothing or decontamination; can be handled by on duty suppression personnel and the team leader may need to be notified. (i.e. automobile leaking gas or a barrel in a field that is not leaking).

Level II:

Dispatch the nearest Engine, Truck/Rescue, Battalion Commander, Special Ops tractor / trailer with Engine 5, an ambulance, Special Ops team leader and all Chiefs.

A larger incident that may have an impact on health and/or the environment; may require a full decon and equipment from Special Ops: can be handled by on-duty and Special Ops personnel. (i.e. Oil in the red run drain, barrel leaking in a field).

Level III:

Dispatch level II response plus any additional equipment or personnel deemed necessary by the Battalion Commander.

This incident poses an immediate danger to health and/or environment; off-duty Special Ops personnel will be needed and outside assistance may be necessary. (i.e. Leaking barrels from an overturned truck).

These levels have been established to provide consistency when dispatching hazardous material responses. However, the Battalion Commander has the flexibility to upgrade or downgrade the initial response based on the information received.

Any on-duty Special Ops personnel that are committed to an incident shall be replaced with emergency call back personnel.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #303e Page 6 of 8

When there is a Special Ops incident in the township requiring the services of on-duty Special Ops personnel, the team members will respond with their assigned company to the scene. The remaining suppression personnel on the scene, if not needed, will be reassigned to allow as many companies as possible to remain staffed and in service

When the Special Operations Team is requested for mutual aid, the initial response will be five (5) team members and the Special Ops tractor / trailer. On duty members will be transported to mutual aid incidents in a township vehicle which is deemed most appropriate by the Battalion Commander.

MUTUAL AID ASSIGNMENT

Responses of apparatus, equipment and personnel are determined by Mutual Aid protocols as per the Macomb County Mutual Aid Agreement, or “specials” that may be requested by another community. All Chiefs are to be notified immediately upon dispatching any of our resources to any type of mutual aid assignment.

WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION ASSIGNMENT

Responses of apparatus, equipment and personnel are determined by Mutual Aid protocols as per Macomb County and State of Michigan mutual aid Agreements, or “specials” that may be requested by another community. All Chiefs are to be notified immediately upon dispatching any of our resources to any type of WMD assignment.

CIVIL DISTURBANCE ASSIGNMENT

See S.O.P. # 231.

ON SCENE REPORTS

Units arriving at the scene of incidents will report "ON THE SCENE" and follow I.C.S. procedure (S.O.P. #225)

COMMAND

Once Incident Command has been established for any incident, all routine communications between dispatch and units assigned to an incident will be directed through the Incident Commander (see S.O.P. # 225).

PROGRESS REPORTS

During active fire fighting operations, Command will provide Dispatch with regular progress reports when significant tactical plans are changed or unusual situations are encountered. The first progress report should be given after initial action has been implemented and should include the correct address and an improved description of the building and fire conditions if the STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #303e Page 7 of 8

arrival report was incomplete. The first report should include the declaration of a working fire when appropriate.

WORKING FIRE

The term “Working Fire” indicates a fire involving a structure or inside of a structure where there is active smoke or fire showing and will require the use of S.C.B.A.’s, charged hose lines and a commitment of all responding companies. A “Working Fire” can be identified by the first arriving Company’s Officer, a Battalion Commander, or the Fire Department Dispatcher based upon information received by a reliable agency that indicates an eyewitness of significant smoke or fire showing. A “Working Fire” report advises Dispatch that the companies will be engaged in tactical activities and will be held at the scene for an extended period of time. The Fire Department Dispatcher shall make the calls for a “Working Fire” according to S.O.P. # 307a. Dispatch will monitor radio traffic on all incidents to anticipate the needs of Command.

EMERGENCY TRAFFIC

The term "EMERGENCY TRAFFIC" will be utilized by any unit encountering an immediately perilous situation and will receive the highest communications priority from Dispatch, Command and all operating units. EXAMPLE: “Dispatch from Rescue 4 with emergency traffic…” THE AIR ABSOLUTELY BELONGS TO ANY UNIT GIVING THE "EMERGENCY TRAFFIC" CALL.

GOOD RADIO PROCEDURE

Short Specific

Before transmitting, know what you are going to say: don't make it up as you go along. Choose precise terms to communicate the desired message as clearly and briefly as possible without wasting air time.

Clear Tone/Self Control Effective Rate

Speak clearly at a practiced rate.... not too fast or too slow. Control your emotions and excitement deliberately. If you do not consciously control your voice, it will become garbled under stress.

Well Timed/Spaced

1. Prioritize your messages. Do not use up valuable air time with unimportant messages and insignificant details. Let critical messages go first. Maintain an awareness of the overall situation and how you fit into it.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #303e Page 8 of 8

2. Do not interrupt conversations unless you have Emergency Traffic. Listen before transmitting and wait until a message transaction has been completed.

3. Pause between consecutive messages. This will make it clear when one has been completed and another message started. It will give other units a chance to get on the air with important messages.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: SECOND DISPATCHER

#304a EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

A second dispatcher shall be called into the Watchroom anytime one of the following occurs:

a. A multiple alarm fire occurs within the township.

b. An official Severe Thunderstorm and/or Tornado Warning is received for our area from the National Weather Service information network or Emergency Management.

c. Severe weather creating conditions that may contribute to an abundance of emergency responses or impair the department’s ability to deliver services to the public.

d. An extraordinary emergency situation exists requiring commitments of multiple companies for extended periods of time.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: SEVERE WEATHER PROCEDURE

# 305c EFFECTIVE DATE: APRIL 2, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Upon receipt of any of the following severe weather statements:

- Severe Thunderstorm Warning - Tornado Watch OR Warning - Other severe or unusual weather warnings

Fire dispatch shall:

1. Check the Siren Remote Activation Device located in the Watchroom, on the shelf above the left dispatch console. See that it is turned on, properly addressed, and ready for activation if so ordered. Detailed instructions are contained on page 2 of this policy and in the cover of the encoder.

Sirens shall be activated on orders from the Emergency Management Coordinator, his designee, or a department command officer, and normally only in the event of a system failure at the EOC.

2. Check the radar screens for direction and severity of the storm.

3. Immediately notify:

Battalion Commander Clinton Township 911 Dispatch Center All Fire Stations Chief and Deputy Chiefs, via “Chiefs” group page Township Offices (if opened)

4. Call in a second Barnman (S.O.P. #304a)

5. Generally assist with information and other activities as requested.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #305c Page 2 of 2

Operating Instructions for Early Warning System

Select “F2” on either dispatch console under the “COUNTY FIRE” label

Power Switch on Upper Left Side of encoder box should be ON; switch will glow Red in color. (Unit should always be left ON)

The address in Upper Middle must read 11 11 11 11 on thumbwheel.

Press ALRT button. The light above the button will come on.

Press SEND button located next to the address numbers in upper right section of unit

Sirens will activate at this time.

Sirens will sound for 3 ½ min.

Notes:

If it becomes necessary to stop the sirens manually press the ALL button at the bottom of the encoder; Red light will appear. Press the CLR button next to the ALL button, red light will appear. Press the SEND button and sirens will stop.

***The early warning system will never be activated without direct orders to do so by a representative of the Emergency Management Division, a Fire Department Command Officer or a Police Command Officer***

We must notify Police Dispatch and a representative of the Emergency Management Division when we activate the Early Warning System.

The sirens are only activated for a Severe Weather Statement of a Tornado Warning.

We do NOT send an All Clear siren notification.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE UNPLUGGED

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: CONFINED SPACE RESCUE #______306b_____ DISPATCH EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 14, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 OF 7

Confined Space Rescues are usually preceded by a pre-planned, permit required, confined space entry. Clinton Township Fire Department has been designated as the Confined Space Rescue Team for all Township Departments such as D.P.W. and the Water and Sewer Department. In addition, other Municipal Agencies and private contractors may call us at any time for a rescue. In order to provide an effective rescue response, this department will dispatch equipment and personnel to the scene of a Confined Space Entry or Rescue according to the following guidelines:

Level I - On Site Standby When notified of a Confined Space Entry, the Dispatcher shall fill out the confined space entry log which is kept in the Watchroom. (A copy is included in this SOP.) The dispatcher shall dispatch the following equipment:

1. Notify the Battalion Commander 2. Dispatch Special Ops 1 and Engine 5 3. If Engine 5 is not available consult the Battalion Commander for assignments. Upon arrival at the scene, E5 Officer shall fill out a Confined Space Survey Form and make whatever preparations he feels are needed to affect a rescue, if it shall become necessary. Additional resources may be requested if deemed necessary.

Level II - Rescue When a call for a Confined Space Rescue is received the dispatcher shall fill out the Confined Space Entry Log and dispatch the following equipment:

1. Battalion Commander 2. Special Ops-1 and Engine 5 3. Nearest Truck 4. Nearest Rescue 5. Nearest Engine 6. Safety Officer 7. Fire Chief and Deputy Chief / Operations and Deputy Chief / Administration

After the equipment has been dispatched, page the Special Operations Team All Call and have members report to the scene.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #306b Page 2 of 2

Level III - Mutual Aid Request

When a Mutual Aid request for Confined Space Rescue is received, notify the Battalion Commander and dispatch the following equipment and personnel.

Special OPS-1 with five (5) Special Operations Team Members. Battalion Commander Safety Officer

Fire Chief and Deputy Chief / Operations and Deputy Chief / Administration

Transportation of Special Operations Team members shall be according to the Special Operations SOP.

If five (5) Special Operations Team members are not on duty, then fill the positions with suppression personnel.

After the equipment has been dispatched, page the Special Operations Team “All Call” and have team members report to the scene.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #306b Page 3 of 3

CONFINED SPACE SURVEY FORM

Run# ______Time: ______Date: ______LOCATION: ______Who is making entry?______Contact Person: ______Phone #______What is the purpose of the entry? ______Describe the Confined Space ______What hazards are or could be present? ______Atmosphere Readings:

Time LEL OXYGEN H2S CO TOXINS ______What Rescue Preparations did you make: ______Describe how the operation proceeded: ______

Who completed this form? ______

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #306b Page 4 of 4

INSTRUCTIONS

LOCATION: Where is the confined space located? Give enough detail so it can be relocated. Example: The manhole is located 27' southeast of the hydrant on the west side of the building. WHO IS MAKING ENTRY? What agency is actually making entry? (Water Department, Road Commission, etc.) CONTACT PERSON: Who do we contact for more information about this space? We need a name and phone number. We may want to go back for training. WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THE ENTRY? Why are the entrants going into the confined space? Are they cleaning debris or taking samples or whatever. DESCRIBE THE CONFINED SPACE. Give details on the size of the opening, type of hatch, interior dimensions, depth below ground, type of construction. WHAT HAZARDS ARE OR COULD BE PRESENT? Describe what hazards are known to be present such as high liquid level, explosive gases, electrical devices. AIR MONITORING. Take readings periodically and record them on the survey. WHAT RESCUE PREPARATIONS DID YOU MAKE? This may be as simple as familiarizing your crew with their tripod and winch to calling in additional equipment and manpower. DESCRIBE HOW THE OPERATION WENT. Give a detailed narrative on what the entrants and your crew did during the operation. SKETCH THE CONFINED SPACE: Make a drawing of the confined space. This information may be used and entered in our dispatch system for pre incident surveys.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #306b Page 5 of 5

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY LOG

Date: ______Time: ______Caller’s Name: ______Ph. # ______

Location of Entry: ______Purpose of Entry: ______

______Expected Hazards:______

______

What Action was Taken? ______

______

______

Date: ______Time: ______Caller’s Name: ______Ph. # ______

Location of Entry: ______Purpose of Entry: ______

______Expected Hazards: ______

______

What Action was Taken? ______

______

Date: ______Time: ______Caller’s Name: ______Ph. # ______STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #306b Page 6 of 6

Location of Entry: ______Purpose of Entry: ______

______Expected Hazards: ______

______

What Action was Taken? ______

______

______

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #306b Page 7 of 7

OPERATIONS CHECKLIST:

Size-Up: a. Secure the person in charge / witness b. Obtain their "Entry Permit" c. Identify any immediate hazards d. Location & Number of victims e. Is this RESCUE or RECOVERY? f. Call for any resources that may become necessary

Pre-Entry: a. Safety Officer b. Set up a Perimeter (Yellow Tape) / Staging Zone c. Test Atmosphere d. Ventilate if necessary e. Lockout / Tagout any hazards

Entry: a. Plan of action b. Assign Entrants / Backups c. Protective Equipment d. Suits, Boots, Gloves, Hardhat e. SCBA / Airline f. Harness g. Explosion Proof Lighting h. Communications i. Medical Considerations j. Patient Packaging k. Retrieval System l. Tripod, A-Frame, Ladder, Truck Boom m. Fall Protection (Belay Line) n. Hoisting Equipment o. Block & Tackle p. Winch

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #306b Page 8 of 8

OPERATIONS CHECKLIST CONT’D.

Resources:

Special Ops 1 – Big Red Tractor/Trailer a. Tripod-Winch b. Air Tanks - c. Air Monitoring Instruments d. Suits, Boots, Gloves, Hardhats e. Ventilation Fans / Hoses

Rescue 1/ 4 Rope Rescue Equipment Stokes Basket Air Tanks

Truck 4 / 1 Elevated attachment point Patient Transport Air Supply (T-4) Ground Ladders (A-Frame) PPV

Medstar ALS service and transport

Water / Sewer Department Tripod Air Monitoring Instrument Vacuum Truck Familiarity with Sewer System

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DISPATCH NOTIFICATIONS # 307 (a) EFFECTIVE DATE: JUNE 15, 2001 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

THE FOLLOWING ARE TO BE CONTACTED, IN ORDER: WORKING FIRE 1) RAPID INTERVENTION TEAM-ADDITIONAL ENGINE 2) AMBULANCE FOR STANDBY 3) CHIEFS AND SAFETY OFFICERS Fire Chief, Dep. Chief/Operations, Dep. Chief/Administration AND Safety Officers (Training Division) are to all be notified via the WORKING FIRE "ALL CALL" on the paging system, followed-up by telephone contact for an incident response as follows: One Safety Officer One Chief for REGULAR ALARM Two Chiefs for GENERAL ALARM 4) FIRE INSPECTOR 5) POLICE DEPARTMENT 6) UTILITY COMPANIES 7) SPECIAL AGENCIES / EQUIPMENT, AS NEEDED

MUTUAL AID RESPONSES 1) BATTALION COMMANDER 2) CHIEFS Fire Chief, Dep. Chief/Operations AND Dep. Chief/Administration are to all be notified via the CHIEFS' "ALL CALL" on the paging system, followed- up by telephone contact for a an incident response by one Chief. 3) EMERGENCY CALLBACK OF PERSONNEL, as needed.

SPECIAL OPERATIONS TEAM RESPONSES 1) AMBULANCE FOR STANDBY 2) CHIEFS, SAFETY OFFICERS, SPECIAL OPS TEAM MEMBERS Fire Chief, Dep. Chief/Operations, Dep. Chief/Administration, Safety Officers (Training Division) AND Special OPS Team Members are to all be notified via the SPECIAL OPS "ALL CALL" on the paging system, followed-up by telephone contact for an incident response as follows: One Safety Officer One Chief 3) FIRE INSPECTORS, POLICE, UTILITY COMPANIES AND SPECIAL AGENCIES/EQUIPMENT, AS NEEDED

SEVERE WEATHER- See S.O.P. # 305b CONFINED SPACE- See S.O.P. # 306b CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PROBATIONARY PEOPLE #_____308_____ ON WATCH EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Be advised, that probationary employees will not serve in a watch, a Nightwatch or a dispatch position without an experienced non-probationary employee being assigned along with them.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: EMS RADIOS

#309d EFFECTIVE DATE: August 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

PURPOSE:

For personnel to have clear and correct communications with Medical Control.

CALL SIGN DESIGNATIONS FOR VEHICLES:

Non-transporting ALS vehicles are referred to as “Echo” units. For example: Engine 2- Clinton Echo 2. Non-transporting BLS units are referred to as “Tango” units. For example Truck 1- Clinton Tango 1.

If a BLS vehicle is temporarily upgraded to ALS that vehicle will use the “echo” designation of the apparatus it is replacing.

These call signs shall be used at all times when communicating with Medical Control or at any MCI.

PATIENT REPORTS – TRANSPORTING VIA PRIVATE AMBULANCE:

When contacting a hospital we shall use our normal call designation (for example “Clinton Echo 3”), and end the transmission with the transporting agency’s designation. (For example, “…transporting via Medstar Alpha 125”).

Hospital notification:

Hospitals are to be notified of incoming Priority 1 and 2 patients. The primary means of notifying a hospital is via 800 MHz radio. The secondary means of notifying the hospital is VHF radio. If unable to contact the hospital via radio the hospital may be notified by telephone.

Hospital notification of incoming Priority 3 patients is optional. If the paramedic chooses to notify the hospital of a Priority 3 patient the report is to be given via VHF radio and is to be kept as brief as possible.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENTS:

All area Hospitals should be notified as soon as possible of a Mass Casualty Incident (MCI). MCI communications are via VHF radio. Personnel should refer to the Macomb County EMS Mass Casualty Incident Protocol for specific MCI radio protocol. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: EMS DISPATCH PROCEDURE #310a EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

PURPOSE: To establish a standardized dispatch procedure for medical emergencies and motor vehicle accidents.

PROCEDURE:

Requests for response to medical emergencies and motor vehicle accidents will be handled as follows:

INITIAL CALLS, directed through the E911 telephone system, will be received by the Police Department Dispatch. Police Dispatch will immediately contact Fire Department Dispatch via direct ring-down telephone line (fire radio backup) with notification of the location, nature of the incident and any other pertinent information.

The Fire Department Dispatcher shall screen all calls to determine if the EMS incident is life threatening or non-life threatening. Dispatchers shall obtain all available information concerning the conditions of the victim(s) and the cause of the incident, and relay that information to the fire companies and other agencies responding.

Upon receipt of an EMS call, the dispatcher shall immediately notify the closest medical response unit. If the call is life threatening in nature and the closest unit is a BLS rig, then a Paramedic Engine shall also be dispatched.

On all motor vehicle accidents with injuries, at least one Fire Department Paramedic Engine, a Fire Department Rescue/Truck Unit and an ambulance will be dispatched.

If a medical call is received directly by the fire department, the private ambulance company must be notified.

ORDER: UPON NOTIFICATION of any medical emergency or motor vehicle accident, FIRE DISPATCH shall immediately take these actions, IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER:

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #310a Page 2 of 3

1. Input location or landmark in CAD system computer.

2. Dispatch Fire Department Companies to respond to the incident.

3. If received directly, dispatch Medstar ambulance via direct ring-down telephone line (Medstar Dispatch is equipped with our fire radio as backup) to notify them of: a. location b. nature of incident c. type of Fire Department response (i.e. emergency, normal traffic) d. any other information received through the original call and/or Police Department

The direct ring-down lines between Fire Dispatch and the Police Department and Medstar Ambulance are to be used for business only.

The fire radio is to be used for backup dispatching ONLY in the event of failure of the direct ring-down telephone line.

LIFE THREATENING DEFINED:

An emergency medical incident may be considered to be life threatening if it involves one or more of the following situations: 1. Heart attack (chest pain) 2. Major trauma (severe bleeding, amputation, severe head injury, etc.) 3. Severe orthopedic emergency (spinal injuries, pelvic fractures, multiple fractures etc.) 4. Gun shot/stabbing wounds (requires Police response) 5. Respiratory/difficulty breathing 6. Drowning 7. Electrocution 8. Overdose (unconscious) *Illegal substances require Police response 9. Poisonings * 10. Stroke 11. Seizures 12. Heat exhaustion/heat stroke 13. Burns covering major portions of the body, all electrical burns. 14. Diabetic emergency 15. Altered levels of consciousness. 16. Motor Vehicle Accidents with Injuries 17. Childbirth 18. Possible deceased person. (See Hospice) 19. Any other condition the Company Officer considers to be life threatening. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #310a Page 3 of 3

HOSPICE:

When notified of the death of a hospice patient, the appropriate paramedic engine shall be dispatched, in a normal traffic mode. This procedure is to be followed for confirmed hospice patients only.

NON-LIFE THREATENING NATURE DEFINED:

Non-Life Threatening Calls shall require the nearest paramedic engine and an ambulance to respond. Generally, the response will be handled in a normal traffic mode however, based on the information received, response mode discretion is left to the Company Officer. An ALS Unit may be cancelled by an on-scene BLS Unit.

An emergency medical incident is considered to be non-life threatening if it involves the following situations:

1. Fractures with no other medical complications 2. Abrasions/contusions (i.e. assault & battery, trip & fall) 3. Overdose (conscious) * 4. Minor cuts (no severe bleeding) 5. Illnesses requiring only transportation to hospital 6. Public intoxication (minor injury) 7 Any other condition deemed by the Company Officer as non-life threatening. 8. Confirmed Priority 4 (by Police or Hospice)

*OVERDOSE OR ACCIDENTAL POISONING

Upon receipt of an overdose or accidental poisoning, the call taker should attempt to determine the substance involved (while not delaying dispatch of emergency units) and advise the responding units of the substance identity as soon as possible. Note: Illegal substances require a Police response.

NON-EMERGENCY RESPONSES:

In situations where an individual wishes transportation only to a hospital or doctor’s office, the information will be relayed to the private ambulance service. No Fire Department dispatch will be required, unless specifically requested by the ambulance company.

The Fire Department does respond to citizen assist calls in a non-emergency mode, dispatching the closest appropriate company. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: ALTERNATE COMMUNICATIONS # 311c FOR EMERGENCY DISPATCH EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

PURPOSE: To establish and regulate alternate emergency communications for emergency responses and for sensitive emergency traffic communications i.e., "Alert Level-Condition Red" circumstances occurring in Clinton Township.

ORDER: Effective immediately, an alternate (or secondary) means of emergency communications is established for enhancement of incident response communications capabilities between Fire Department divisions and employees. These are Verizon phones which have a limited number of usable minutes on them. Chargers for these phones are provided.

The Fire Communications Center and each fire apparatus (excluding Advanced Life Support companies; Special Ops; and Battalion 1) shall be provided a cell phone to be used only for emergency dispatching situations and/or incidents.

Advanced Life Support Companies shall be provided a cell phone. These phones are to be used only for department related business. The cellular capability of these phones is to be used only for transmitting 12 Lead ECG’s and/or contacting a participating hospital regarding patient information.

Battalion 1 and Special OPS 1 shall be provided a cell phone. These phones are to be used only for department-related business.

The phone in the Fire Communications Center shall be left ON at all times. All other phones are to be kept OFF until needed.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: EMS SPECIAL ALARM

#312a EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

PURPOSE:

To assure a prompt EMS response when all CTFD apparatus are unavailable.

PROCEDURE: (LIFE THREATENING)

In the event that all department ALS and BLS apparatus are unable to respond to a call for medical assistance it is the duty of the fire department dispatcher to follow this procedure by calling an EMS Special Alarm for life threatening incidents:

1) Notify the closest municipality to the scene, by phone, of the following: a) a request for an EMS Special Alarm to Clinton Township b) type of incident c) location of the incident, including general directions and/or cross-streets d) any other pertinent information e) follow-up calls with updates and/or specific directions - Sterling Heights FD (586) 446-2800 - Roseville FD 445-5444 - Fraser PSD 293-1425 - Shelby FD 731-2121, Ext. 3 - St. Clair Shores 445-5222 - Harrison Township 466-1414

2) Notify the Shift Commander of the situation if possible (this should not delay the request for aid).

3) Notify the private ambulance company that we are unavailable for the particular EMS run and that a neighboring community has been called for EMS mutual aid.

Apparatus responding from the neighboring community is responding to provide ALS first response. They are not responding to transport. Medstar will be in charge of the transportation of the patient(s). Only in the event that Medstar is not able to respond shall the mutual aid request include transport.

STANDARD OPERATING GUIDELINE #312a Page 2 of 2

PROCEDURE: (NON-LIFE THREATENING)

In the event that all department ALS and BLS apparatus are unable to respond to a non life threatening call for medical assistance the private ambulance dispatch will be notified by phone that they will be responding alone; no fire department assistance will be provided by means of a medical Special Alarm. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DISPATCH COMPUTER #______313______SYSTEM - WATCHROOM EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 3, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

At no time shall the dispatch computer system and/or monitors in the fire communications center be utilized for any purpose other than dispatching or dispatch training.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: RESPONDING TO INCIDENTS #______314______EFFECTIVE DATE: MAY 8, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

A prompt response to a request for assistance is integral to the professional operation of this fire department. Timely responses save lives and property. Timely responses also lend to a sense of security to those residents or visitors in need of our help. Irrespective of the type of incident, each call received shall be handled in a manner that promotes quick and efficient response of apparatus.

Key areas to a timely response include professionally collecting information and entering the information into the dispatch system, prompt dispatching of the company or companies, judiciously donning PPE, if necessary, and expediently boarding the vehicle(s) for a safe trip to the incident.

In an attempt to improve response times and the service to our community, the Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue-EMS will strive for 100% compliance to the following procedure, derived from NFPA 1221 (Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Emergency Services Communications Systems, 2002 Edition) and NFPA 1710 (Standard for the Organization and Deployment of Fire Suppression Operations, Emergency Medical Operations, and Special Operations to the Public by Career Fire Departments, 2002 Edition):

- Alarms (call for service) shall be answered within 15 seconds (95% of the time) – (NFPA 1221, 6.4.2)

- The dispatch of the emergency response agency shall be made within 60 seconds (95% of the time) of the receipt of an emergency alarm. Dispatching is defined as when “sufficient information is known to the dispatcher and applicable units are notified of the emergency” (NFPA 1710 3.3.42.3). After the fire dispatcher hangs-up with the 911 operator, we shall have entered the information into the computer and dispatched all rigs within the 60 second time frame.

- Any additional calls from the 911 operator should not pre-empt the completion of dispatching apparatus.

- Turn-out time shall not exceed 60 seconds (NFPA 1710 4.1.2.1.1 (1)). After the company has been alerted to an alarm, whether or not the donning of turnout gear is required, all personnel shall be on the apparatus within this time. This shall apply to all emergency responses.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #314 Page 2 of 2

- Response time to the scene for the first arriving engine company at a fire suppression incident and/or a medical emergency shall not exceed 240 seconds

- Full first alarm assignments shall not exceed 480 seconds of travel time, nor shall the response time of a fire department Advanced Life Support unit (NFPA 1710 4.1.2.1.1 (2, 3, 4).

Recapping the guidelines:

- No more than 15 seconds to answer alarm (phone or radio) - No more than 60 seconds for dispatching; this includes gathering information and re-transmittal of alarm (phone call, CAD entry and tones) - No more than 60 seconds for turnout time and boarding vehicle - No more than 240 seconds travel time to the scene, for 1st due company - No more then 480 seconds for the remainder of the 1st alarm responders to a fire incident or fire department ALS units on medical emergencies

This information is taken from National Fire Protection Administration standards, referring to fire and medical incidents; however, the Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue-EMS shall extend these rules to include all emergency responses handled by our agency.

All non-emergency responses shall be processed in the same manner, with the exception of the standard established for response time to the scene.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: MULTIPLE ALARMS #315c EFFECTIVE DATE: April 30, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

This SOP is designed to guide our dispatchers through a request for Mutual Aid or responding to requests for Mutual Aid.

All information contained within has been provided by the Standard Operating Procedures for the Mutual Aid Resolution for the Macomb County Fire Departments, updated April, 1999, by the Macomb County Fire Chiefs Association.

Any questions not answered by this policy can be found in the formal Macomb County Resolution, located in the Watchroom at each fire station.

REQUESTING MUTUAL AID

The dispatcher shall make the request via phone, and not by radio. As an example, “Clinton Township has a second alarm at (location street number) involving (type of incident).” The dispatcher should also include nearest cross-streets, hazards and the staging location, if known.

Second Alarm Response for Clinton Township

2nd Alarm Mt. Clemens 586-469-5502 1 Truck Sterling Hgts. 586-446-2800 1 Engine Harrison Twp. 586-466-1414 1 Engine Roseville 586-445-5444 1 Engine St. Clair Shores (fill sta 1) 586-445-5222 1 Engine Fraser (fill sta 3) 586-293-1425 1 Truck Shelby (fill sta 4) 586-731-2121 x3 1 Engine

- A second barn man shall be called in to assist the dispatcher using the firefighter’s “Emergency Call-Back Dispatcher” list.

- The closest off-duty sworn officer, eligible to be upgraded to Battalion Chief, will be called-in to assume the duties of the interim Shift Commander. The order will be determined by the “Emergency Call-Back Dispatcher” list posted in the Watch room, with the eligible officers having a “Y” in the “BC” column. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #315c Page 2 of 2

- A sworn officer, when available, shall be hired to ride with neighboring communities that have filled our station, using the “Emergency Call-Back Fire” list. An upgradeable firefighter shall be hired if sworn officers are unavailable. - The Incident Commander, or the Chief or a Deputy Chief may call-in additional fire department personnel to staff any un-manned apparatus, if deemed necessary.

- All on-duty Clinton fire personnel shall be sent to the scene of our multiple alarms, immediately after the Incident Commander declares a second alarm.

RESPONDING TO A MUTUAL AID CALL

We shall receive and acknowledge a Mutual Aid request by telephone. Upon request, we shall send the nearest company to the scene, followed by the appropriate apparatus and/or additional personnel. The Chief’s Group shall be notified via the paging system.

If two companies respond to a scene, one piece of apparatus will return to Clinton Township with the appropriate number of personnel left at the scene to fulfill the Mutual Aid request (normally five personnel, unless a “Special Alarm”). The Battalion Commander will be considered to be committed and should be temporarily replaced unless relieved by the Chief or a Deputy Chief at the scene.

MUTUAL AID SCENES

The following is an overview of scene requirements, as set forth by the Macomb County Fire Chief’s Association and endorsed by the Clinton Township Department of Fire- Rescue-EMS:

- The primary fireground channel/talk group shall be 50FIRE1, on any multiple alarm throughout the county

- On Special Alarms, Command may opt to remain on their own channel/talk group or switch to ITAC, but must have this information communicated to incoming aid

- Command Post shall be marked with a green rotating light

- At a minimum, the IC, Safety and Staging vests will be used

- IC has the option to have PID and VID tags collected by the Staging Officer

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: VHF RADIOS # 316a EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

The Clinton Township Fire Department operates and maintains VHF radios in accordance with the Macomb County Fire Chief’s Mutual Aid Agreement as well as the State and Macomb County MEDCOM Plans. These frequencies allow for mutual aid and Mass Casualty Incident (MCI) communications as well as direct communication with the hospital emergency departments for daily EMS use.

All EMS licensed vehicles are equipped with a mobile radio containing:

Official frequency name / how they appear on our radio (Bold):

1. 154.130 Macomb County Fire (Primary)/ County Fire 1 2. 154.070 Macomb County Fire (Fireground)/ Fireground 3. 154.355 Macomb County Fire (Secondary/alerting)/ County Fire 4 4. 155.175 Macomb County Fire (EMS Mutual Aid)/ County Med M1 5. 154.295 Macomb County Fire (DNR; Multiple Alarm)/ DNR 6. 154.280 Macomb County Fire (Statewide disaster)/ Fire Disaster 7. 154.400 SE Michigan Disaster Frequency/ SE MI Disaster 8. 155.280 Michigan Disaster Frequency (back-up)/ ERCC 9. 155.355 PL Tone 210.7 Hz State Disaster (on-scene)/ State Disaster 10. 154.340 PL 167.9 Mt. Clemens Regional Medical Center/ MCRMC 11. 154.340 PL218.1 Henry Ford- Macomb/ SJMMMC 12. 154.340 PL 162.2 William Beaumont Troy/ WB Troy 13. 154.340 PL 186.2 St. John’s North Shore/ SJNS 14. 154.340 PL 88.5 St. John’s Macomb/ SJ Macomb 15. 154.340 PL 118.8 St. John’s Main (Detroit)/ SJ Main 16. 154.340 PL 91.5 Henry Ford Bi-County/ Henry Ford BC 17. 154.340 PL 179.9 Crittenton/ Crittenton 18. 154.340 PL 94.8 St. John’s Oakland/ SJ Oakland

All EMS licensed vehicles are equipped with a six (6) channel portable (prep) radio containing the following frequencies:

1. 154.130 Macomb County Fire (primary) 2. 154.295 Macomb County Fire (DNR; Multiple Alarm) 3. 155.355 PL Tone 210.7 State Disaster (on-scene) 4. 154.070 Macomb County Fire (Fireground) 5. 154.340 PL Tone 167.9 HERN- Mt. Clemens Regional Medical Center 6. 154.340 PL Tone 218.1 HERN- Henry Ford- Macomb

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #316a Page 2 of 2

The Hazmat and Technical Rescue Teams operate on scene with VHF mobile and portable radios.

The Technical Rescue Vehicle (Special Ops I) contains a VHF Mobile radio programmed with the following frequencies: 1. 154.295 Macomb County Fire (DNR; Multiple Alarm) 2. 154.070 Macomb County Fire (Fireground) 3. 154.280 Macomb County Fire (Statewide disaster) 4. 154.280 Michigan Disaster Frequency 5. 162.550 NOAA Weather 6. 154.130 Macomb County Fire (Primary)

Hazmat and Technical Rescue Team portable (prep) radios are programmed with the following frequencies: 1. 154.295 (DNR; Multiple Alarm) 2. 154.070 Macomb County Fire (Fireground)

The following Staff/Utility Vehicles are equipped with VHF mobile radios: 1. Fire Chief (127)* 2. Deputy Chief of Operations (227)* 3. Deputy Chief of Administration (327)* 4. Chief of Training (128) 5. EMS Officer (328) 6. Station 5 Dually 7. Fire Investigation Vehicle 8. Water Rescue Vehicle *- Also issued a VHF Portable (Prep) radio

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATION DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: CAD SYSTEM

# 317c RESPONSIBILITES EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

RESPONSIBILITES – COMPANY OFFICERS:

The Company Officer will be responsible for:

- rebooting the mobile data computer each morning upon beginning the shift and assuring the computer is functioning properly - assuring no equipment is placed on the computer, keyboard or related wiring - placing his/her vehicle Enroute, OnScene, Left for a second location, Arrived at a second location and Busy but available, by touching the appropriate icon on their mobile data computer - accompanying the status update, except Enroute, with radio traffic stating the same (full- circle communication) - being able to navigate through the Dispatch Screen of the mobile data computer (MDC) for additional information such as alerts, directions, knox box locations, entry codes, FDC locations and sprinkler details - reporting every problem, in detail, to the Administrative Supervisor, regarding the mobile data computers (MDC)

RESPONSIBILITES – DISPATCHERS:

The fire department Dispatcher will be responsible for:

- reviewing any documentation posted in the Watchroom to assist with CAD duties, including short-cut/review cards or cheat sheets (especially Nightwatch personnel) - the immediate processing of all alarms - monitoring all radio traffic and ultimately assuring any change in status has been updated accurately - monitoring and checking the status, via radio, of “Overdue” vehicle(s) - being the only person to “Remove” (clear) a call - reporting every Watchroom CAD problem, in detail, to the Admin Supervisor - adding the on-scene times for other agencies that assist us by using the appropriate abbreviation of the agency in the Com window, as listed below (entries are automatically time stamped)

Clinton Twp Police PD Clinton Twp Water WTR Clinton Twp DPW DPW Detroit Edison DTE Consumers Energy CE Medstar MS CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: DETROIT EDISON WEBSITE # 318 EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 24, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

REPORTING DETROIT EDISON PROBLEMS ON THE WEBSITE

The website address is www.dteenergy.com

¾ Click on the green “Utility Customer Service” tab for next window.

¾ Go to the third group down in the right column—“For My Business”

¾ Click on the “POLICE/FIRE TROUBLE REPORTING” link for the next page.

¾ Enter: 915004 [pin number] and click “Continue” for the next page.

This will put you into a web based Police/Fire Trouble Report with six steps.

There is no training data base. You can become familiar with the process by exploring this website until you stop at step five. If you are only training with it, click “cancel” instead of submitting page 5.

It is very user-friendly except it requires that you enter the correct suffix for the street name. For example, Romeo Plank will have to be entered as Romeo Plank [ Rd ] (in the suffix box.) For reference, our CAD automatically fills in the appropriate suffix for a street address.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: 800 MHz TEMPLATES # 319b EFFECTIVE DATE: November 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 5

The Clinton Township Fire Department operates and maintains 800 MHz radios in accordance with the Macomb County Fire Chief’s Mutual Aid Agreement as well as the State and Macomb County MEDCOM Plans. These frequencies allow for mutual aid and Mass Casualty Incident (MCI) communications as well as direct communication with the hospital emergency departments for daily EMS use.

The 800 MHz system is being phased in across the State of Michigan and Macomb County. Currently, Macomb County Fire Departments and the local hospitals have not completed their implementation plans. Their target date is January 1, 2008. We will update the appropriate policies when their respective 800 MHz programs are implemented.

We have two templates being used on CTFD radios. All suppression radios have a Fire General template. This template is used for all fire ground activities. There are a few radios that have a Fire Administrative template. This template is used for administrative purposes.

FIRE GENERAL - ZONE A

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTFT Clinton Twp. Fire Training 4 50 CT COM Clinton common 5 50 COMM Macomb common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb Fire 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb Fire 2 8 50 SHFD Sterling Hgts. Fire Department 9 50 RVFD Roseville Fire Department 10 50 MCFD Mt. Clemens Fire Department 11 50 HTFD Harrison Twp. Fire Department 12 50 FRFD Fraser Fire Department 13 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 14 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #319b Page 2 of 5

FIRE GENERAL - ZONE B

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTFT Clinton Twp. Fire Training 4 50 CT COM Clinton common 5 50 COMM Macomb common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb Fire 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb Fire 2 8 50 SCFD St. Clair Shores Fire Department 9 50 MTFD Macomb Twp. Fire Department 10 50 CHFD Chesterfield Fire Department 11 50 STFD Shelby Twp. Fire Department 12 UTFD Utica Fire Department 13 50 SFFD Selfridge Fire Department 14 50 EPFD Eastpointe Fire Department 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

FIRE GENERAL - ZONE C

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTFT Clinton Twp. Fire Training 4 50 CT COM Clinton common 5 50 COMM Macomb common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb Fire 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb Fire 2 8 50 WAFD Washington Fire Department 9 50 RTFD Ray Twp. Fire Department 10 50 NBFD New Baltimore Fire Department 11 50 SPEV1 Special Event 1 12 50 SPEV2 Special Event 2 13 50 SPEV3 Special Event 3 14 50 SPEV4 Special Event 4 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #319b Page 3 of 5

FIRE GENERAL - ZONE D

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTFT Clinton Twp. Fire Training 4 50 CT COM Clinton common 5 50 COMM Macomb common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb Fire 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb Fire 2 8 50 SJOMH Henry Ford Macomb Hospital 9 50 MCRHC Mt Clemens Regional Hospital 10 50 TROYH Troy Beaumont Hospital 11 50 SJN St. John Detroit Hospital 12 50 SJNSH St. John North Shore Hospital 13 50 SJMCH St. John Macomb Hospital 14 50 HFBCH Henry Ford Bi-County Hospital 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

FIRE ADMIN - ZONE A

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTFT Clinton Twp. Fire Training 4 50 CT COM Clinton Twp. all depts. general-common 5 50 COMM Macomb County general-common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb County common fire ground 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb County common fire ground 2 8 50 SHFD Sterling Heights Fire Department 9 50 RVFD Roseville Fire Department 10 50 MCFD Mt. Clemens Fire Department 11 50 HTFD Harrison Twp. Fire Department 12 50 FRFD Fraser Fire Department 13 50 CTEOC Clinton Twp. Emergency Ops Center 14 STATEWIDE 2 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #319b Page 4 of 5

FIRE ADMIN - ZONE B

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTAD Clinton Twp. common - dept. admin. 4 50 CT COM Clinton Twp. all depts. general-common 5 50 COMM Macomb County general-common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb County common fire ground 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb County common fire ground 2 8 50 SCFD St. Clair Shores Fire Department 9 50 MTFD Macomb Twp. Fire Department 10 50 CHFD Chesterfield Twp. Fire Department 11 50 STFD Shelby Twp. Fire Department 12 UTFD Utica Fire Department 13 50 SFFD Selfridge Fire Department 14 50 EPFD Eastpointe Fire Department 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

FIRE ADMIN - ZONE C

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTAD Clinton Twp. common - dept. admin. 4 50 CT COM Clinton Twp. all depts. general-common 5 50 COMM Macomb County general-common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb County common fire ground 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb County common fire ground 2 8 50 WAFD Washington Twp. Fire Department 9 50 RTFD Ray Twp. Fire Department 10 50 NBFD New Baltimore Fire Department 11 50 SPEV1 Special Event 1 12 50 SPEV2 Special Event 2 13 50 SPEV3 Special Event 3 14 50 SPEV4 Special Event 4 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #319b Page 5 of 5

FIRE ADMIN - ZONE D

TALKGROUP DEPT. NAME 1 50 CTFD Clinton Twp. Fire Department 2 50 CTFG Clinton Twp. Fire Ground 3 50 CTAD Clinton Twp. common - dept. admin. 4 50 CT COM Clinton Twp. all depts. general-common 5 50 COMM Macomb County general-common 6 50 FIRE 1 Macomb County common fire ground 1 7 50 FIRE 2 Macomb County common fire ground 2 8 50 SJOMH St. Joseph Hospital 9 50 MCRHC Mt. Clemens Regional Hospital 10 50 TROYH Troy Beaumont Hospital 11 50 SJN St. John’s Main Hospital – Detroit 12 50 SJNSH St. John’s North Shore Hospital 13 50 STJMH St. John’s Macomb Hospital 14 50 HFBCH Henry Ford Bi-County Hospital 15 ITAC 2 TA 16 ITAC 1 TA

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: HEADQUARTERS PHONE LINES

#______320 ______EFFECTIVE DATE: JULY 1, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

In a continued effort to reduce the amount of distractions, including the unnecessary communication traffic to the dispatch center, this procedure shall be followed:

- All fire suppression personnel will be required to instruct family members and any other contacts to utilize (586) 263-8445 for all non-urgent personal phone calls to Headquarters

- When calling headquarters for non-essential business, all off-duty fire personnel will also utilize (586) 263-8445

- All outlying fire station personnel, when calling Headquarters for business outside of a dispatching or overtime issue, will use (586) 263-8445 ______

When utilizing 263-8445, the phones will ring at all the following locations, or each can be called directly, using the listed department extensions:

Ext 421, for the Company Officer’s work station Ext 416, for essential business with the Battalion Commander Ext 413, for the Day Room, Workout Area Ext 474, for the Hose Dryer area

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PORTABLE RADIOS &

#321a HOLSTERS EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 5, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

The Clinton Township Fire Department operates and maintains 800 MHz radios. There are engraved holster strap assemblies that have been assigned to each portable fire suppression radio and for the portable spare station radio. The radios with the attached microphones shall be kept and worn in their designated holsters. Obviously, daily maintenance of the radio or battery will require the radio to be removed from the holster. Any radio that is not being worn will be stored in a designated location determined by the Station Captain.

Personnel have the flexibility to wear the holster strap assemblies and radios as they deem appropriate, however, the wearing of the holster strap assemblies/radios will not compromise wearing any personal protective equipment to manufacturers specifications.

The Company Officer shall be held accountable for the four portable radios and holster strap assemblies assigned to his/her company for that day, along with the portable radio and holster strap assemblies assigned to the station.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: 800 MHz RADIO

#353 OPERATION EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 7

The following is a guide in assisting in the operation and usage of the Motorola XTS 2500 portable radios:

NORMAL OPERATION:

Standard configuration:

- Talk group selector knob in the 1 position - Zone A - Scan selector ring in position A

The display on the front of the radio:

- The radio does not emit a tone when first turned-on - A light on the top of the radio will blink green once and then red twice - Current time is indicated in upper left corner - Below time is signal strength; at least one bar is needed to guarantee that transmissions will reach a tower

Zones

The ZONE the radio is presently in is indicated by a letter from A to H that precedes the talk group identifier. On start-up the display should read “A 50CTFD”, if it does not, press and hold the home key for 2 to 3 seconds. This overrides the current settings and returns the user to “A 50CTFD.” The talk group selector knob must be turned back to position 1 before turning off the radio. If the user fails to move the selector back, the next time the radio is turned on it will start at the talk group for that position on zone A.

When the microphone is keyed, a “chirp” tone should be heard and indicates a message can be transmitted. If a “bonk” tone is heard, it means the talk group is busy and the user must wait for another user’s transmission to finish. All transmissions have a ½ second delay because they are routed through the repeater. Wait before speaking.

If having trouble hitting a repeater, it may be because of the user’s location. Take a few steps from your location and the problem may clear up.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #353 Page 2 of 7

If a “bonk-bonk-bonk” is heard, it means that all circuits are busy; wait a few seconds and try again. This should be a rare occurrence and may never happen in normal use.

OPERATIONS OTHER THAN NORMAL:

• The “Talk Groups” are with whom a user can talk to.

Our dispatch talk group is “50CTFD”. The 50 indicates Macomb County, “CTFD” is the designator for our department.

• ZONEs are a collection of talk groups in one “folder.”

It does not matter what folder the talk group is in or what position in the zone it is in. It works the same.

To change zones, press the oval white two-dot menu button under the display panel below ZONE. Then use the large navigation button to scroll through the zones by pressing the side arrows. When in the zone you want, turn the talk group selector knob to the desired group.

RADIO TEMPLATES (custom talk group assignments):

NOTE: Radios from other departments will not have zones A, B, C, and D programmed the same as ours.

This means that on mutual aid operations, the user must find the channel needed, since the location on other departments’ radios most likely will be different than ours. For example, 50MTFD is found in Zone B, Channel 9 on our radios, but will be Zone A, Channel 1 on Macomb Township’s radios.

GENERAL:

The first seven channels (selector knob positions) have the same talk groups assigned to them in zones A, B, C, and D. The last two positions are ITAC TA channels in those zones.

Zones E, G, and H are not custom programmed and are standard on all 800 MHz radios in the state.

ZONE E are MSP statewide talk groups. Each talk group represents an MSP district. We are in district 2.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #353 Page 3 of 7

ZONE G and H are special event talk groups. The state police can turn them on when necessary. To activate an event talk group, the Network Communication Center at MSP must be contacted. They will assign the talk group for the event. If the event is preplanned, the Fire Administration will fax an Event Request Form to MSP. (See page 6 of 7.)

ZONE F is a federally mandated analog zone (ITAC) that every 800 MHz radio in the country should have. This is where the ITAC talk groups are located. There are two modes for each ITAC. For example, ITAC1 is analog but does use the towers to increase its range (more than ten miles). ITAC1 TA is a direct radio-to-radio talk group (talk-around group). Its range limited to about 1.5 miles.

ADMIN:

The administration template is the same as the general template with the following exceptions. - Position 3 zones A-D is talk group 50CTAD - Position 13 zone A is talk group 50CTEOC - Position 14 zone A is talk group STATEWIDE2

GENERAL INFORMATION:

Radio ID display

All 800 MHz radios transmit an ID number each time they are keyed. That ID number appears on the display of every radio in the talk group the radio is on. A user does not have to talk to be identified; keying the microphone will do this.

If the radio is on scan, the ID numbers will not appear.

Lost Radios

If a radio is lost or stolen it can be deactivated by the MSP. The Fire Administration will be notified and a fax will be sent to MSP using the Inhibit/Xinhibit Request Form. (See page 7 of 7.) If the radio should turn up again, they can re-activate it using the same form.

CHARGING THE BATTERIES:

Battery Life

Battery life is determined by several factors. Among the more critical is the regular overcharging of batteries and the average depth of discharge with each cycle. Typically, STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #353 Page 4 of 7

the greater the overcharge and the deeper the average discharge, the fewer cycles a battery will last. For example, a battery which is overcharged and discharges 100% several times a day, will last fewer cycles than a battery that receives less of an overcharge and is discharged to 50% per day. Further, a battery which receives minimal overcharging and averages only 25% discharge, will last even longer.

The battery should be at about 77°F (25°C) (room temperature), whenever possible. Charging a cold battery (below 50° F [10°C]) may result in leakage of electrolyte and ultimately in failure of the battery. Charging a hot battery (above 95°F [35°C]) results in reduced discharge capacity, affecting the performance of the radio.

Motorola rapid-rate battery chargers contain a temperature-sensing circuit to ensure that batteries are charged within the temperature limits stated above.

Battery Charge Status

A radio can indicate the battery’s charge status by the following:

LED and Sounds

- the LED flash red when the PTT Button is pressed indicating low battery - hearing a low-battery “chirp” (short, high-pitched tone)

Conventional Fuel Gauge Symbol

- A flashing fuel gauge symbol (b) is displayed only when the battery voltage drops to low level. In this case, replace the battery with a fully charged one

CLEANING THE RADIO:

Per manufacturer’s instructions, clean the external surfaces of the radio as follows:

1) Combine one teaspoon of mild dishwashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution)

2) Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth.

3) Clean battery contacts with a lint-free cloth to remove dirt or grease. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #353 Page 5 of 7

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #353 Page 6 of 7

MPSCS

Event Request Form

Agency Name:

Contact Name: Contact Phone:

Description of Event:

Coverage Area Required: (City, County(ies), entire 800 MHz area, etc.)

Date Needed: Date No Longer Needed:

Other:

MSP Assigned TG / Enable TG / Disabled TG MSP Talkgroup Name: MSP Job Ticket #:

Fax to the Network Communications Center (NCC) at (517) 333-5015

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #353 Page 7 of 7

MPSCS

Inhibit/Xinhibit Request Form

Agency Name:

Contact Name: Contact Phone:

Radio ID:

Specify Inhibit or Xinhibit?:

Date Needed: Date No Longer Needed:

Other:

MSP Inhibited / Xlnhibited MSP Job Ticket #: Fax to the Network Communications Center (NCC) at (517) 333-5015

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: 800 MHz SPECIAL

#354 EVENT CHANNELS EFFECTIVE DATE: November 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Additional special event channels can be created on our 800 MHz system by contacting the Michigan State Police Network Communications Center.

The emergency telephone number is (517) 333-5050, or fax the attached page to: (517) 333-5015.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #354 Page 2 of 2

MPSCS

Event Request Form

Agency Name:

Contact Name: Contact Phone:

Description of Event:

Coverage Area Required: (City, County(ies), entire 800 MHz area, etc.)

Date Needed: Date No Longer Needed:

Other:

MSP Assigned TG / Enable TG / Disabled TG MSP Talkgroup Name: MSP Job Ticket #:

Fax to the Network Communications Center (NCC) at (517) 333-5015

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DRIVER SAFETY #______401_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 6, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

It is the responsibility of the driver of each Fire Department vehicle to drive safely and prudently at all times. Vehicles shall be operated in compliance with the Michigan Motor Vehicle Code. This code provides specific legal exceptions to regular traffic regulations which apply to Fire Department vehicles when responding to an emergency incident. Emergency response (300) does not absolve the driver of any responsibility to drive with due caution. The driver of the emergency vehicle is responsible for its safe operation at all times. ______

When responding 300, warning lights must be on and sirens must be sounded to warn drivers of other vehicles, as required by the Michigan Motor Vehicle Code.

The use of sirens and warning lights does not automatically give the right-of-way to the emergency vehicle. These devices simply request the right-of-way from other drivers, based on their awareness of the emergency vehicle presence. Emergency vehicle drivers must make every possible effort to make their presence and intended actions known to other drivers, and must drive defensively to be prepared for the unexpected inappropriate actions of others.

Fire Department vehicles are authorized to exceed posted speed limits only when responding 300 under favorable conditions. This applies only with light traffic, good roads, good visibility and dry pavement. Under these conditions a maximum of 10 mph over the posted speed limit is authorized.

Under less than favorable conditions, the posted speed limit is the absolute maximum permissible.

When emergency vehicles must travel in center or oncoming traffic lanes, the maximum permissible speed shall be 20 mph. ______

Intersections present the greatest potential danger to emergency vehicles. When approaching and crossing an intersection with the right-of-way, drivers shall not exceed the posted speed limit.

When emergency vehicles must use center or oncoming traffic lanes to approach controlled intersections, (traffic light or stop sign) they must come to a complete stop before proceeding through the intersection, including occasions when the emergency vehicle has green traffic lights.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #401 Page 2 of 4

When approaching a negative right-of-way intersection (red light, stop sign), the vehicle shall come to a complete stop and may proceed only when the driver can account for all oncoming traffic in all lanes yielding the right-of-way. ______

A 300 response is authorized only in conjunction with emergency incidents. Unnecessary emergency response shall be avoided. In order to avoid any unnecessary emergency response, the following rules shall apply.

* When the first unit reports on the scene with "nothing showing" or an equivalent report, any additional units shall continue 300, but shall not exceed the posted speed limit.

* The first arriving unit will advise additional units to respond normal traffic whenever appropriate. ______

Drivers shall avoid backing whenever possible. Where backing is unavoidable, guides shall be used. If no guide is available, the driver shall dismount and walk completely around apparatus to determine if obstructions are present before backing. (See SOP #402). ______

All Fire Department employees are required to use seat belts at all times when operating a Township vehicle equipped with seat belts. Anyone riding as a passenger/attendant in a Township vehicle is also required to use seat belts; i.e., ambulance, engine, ladder, utility service van, staff vehicle, etc. The Company Officer/driver of the vehicle will confirm that all personnel and riders are on-board, properly attired, with seat belts on, before the vehicle is permitted to move.

All personnel shall ride only in regular seats provided with seat belts. Riding on tailboards or other exposed positions is not permitted on any vehicle at any time, with the exception of re-packing LDH. In this case, the driver shall never proceed greater than idle speed. ______

During an emergency response, fire vehicles should avoid passing other emergency vehicles. If passing is necessary, permission must be obtained through radio communications. ______

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #401 Page 3 of 4

The unique hazards of driving on or adjacent to the fireground requires the driver to use extreme caution and to be alert and prepared to react to the unexpected.

Drivers must consider the dangers their moving vehicle poses to fireground personnel and spectators who may be preoccupied with the emergency, and may inadvertently step in front of or behind a moving vehicle. ______

When stopped at the scene of an incident, vehicles should be placed to protect personnel who may be working in the street and warning lights shall be used to make approaching traffic aware of the incident. At night, vehicle mounted floodlights and any other lighting available shall be used to illuminate the scene. ______

If it is not necessary to park vehicles in or near traffic lanes, the vehicle should be pulled off the road to parking lots, curbs, etc., whenever possible. ______

The officer in charge or driver of the vehicle is responsible for the safety of all vehicle operations and managing compliance of this procedure. ______

Emergency Response Policy

Clinton Township Fire Department vehicles shall be operated in a manner that provides for the safety of all persons and property. Safe arrival shall always have priority over unnecessary speed and reckless driving en-route to an emergency incident.

Prompt, Safe Response Shall be Attained By:

1. Leaving the station in a standard manner:

* quickly mounting apparatus * all personnel on board, dressed appropriately, seated, with belts on * station doors fully open

2. Driving defensively and professionally at reasonable speeds.

3. Knowing where we are going.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #401 Page 4 of 4

4. Using warning devices to move around traffic and to request the right-of-way in a safe and predictable manner.

Fast Response Shall Not Be Attained By:

1. Leaving quarters before crew has mounted safely and before apparatus doors are fully open.

2. Driving too fast for conditions.

3. Driving recklessly or without regard for safety.

4. Taking unnecessary chances with negative right-of-way intersections.

5. Intimidating or scaring other drivers.

Emergency Response Criteria

1. Maximum 10 mph over posted speed limit.

2. Traveling in center or oncoming traffic lanes, 20 mph maximum.

3. Traveling in center or oncoming traffic, complete stop at all traffic lights/stop signs.

4. Posted speed limit when entering intersections with green light.

5. Complete stop at all red lights, stop signs.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: BACKING OF FIRE APPARATUS

#402 EFFECTIVE DATE: JULY 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

VEHICLE BACKING AND SIGNALS

Backing of Fire Department vehicles should be avoided whenever possible. Where backing is unavoidable spotters shall be used. In addition, spotters shall be used when vehicles must negotiate forward turns with restrictive side clearances and where height clearances are uncertain.

Under circumstances where the vehicle is manned by only the driver, that vehicle driver shall attempt to utilize any available fire department personnel to act as spotters. Where no personnel are available to assist, the vehicle driver shall get out of the vehicle and make a complete 360 degree survey of the area around his vehicle to determine if any obstructions are present.

Where engine or ladder companies are backed, all crew members will dismount the apparatus and act as spotters, including the Company Officer. Spotters should be located at as many corners as possible with at least one spotter at the left rear corner of the apparatus. Where only a single spotter is available, the spotter should be located off the left rear corner, and will act as the primary spotter.

Spotters are not permitted to ride tailboard positions while backing fire apparatus.

Spotters will discuss the backing plan with the engineer/driver before proceeding. The communication/warning process will be agreed upon prior to backing. Driver door windows will be in the down position to allow for maximum communication/hearing between spotters and the engineer/driver.

The vehicle shall not be backed until all spotters are in position and communicate their approval to start the backing. Spotters will remain visible to the engineer/driver. Anytime the driver loses sight of the primary spotter, the vehicle shall be stopped immediately until the spotter is visible, and the communication to continue backing is processed.

When vehicles must be backed where other vehicle traffic exists, the vehicle's emergency lights (if equipped with such lights) shall be operating.

The Company Officer is responsible for compliance with this procedure and the safe backing of the apparatus.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #402 Page 2 of 2

SIGNALS

STRAIGHT BACK: One hand above the head with palm toward face, waving back. Other hand at your side (Left or right hand optional) See Figure 1.

TURN: Both arms pointing the same direction with index fingers extended. See Figure 2. (Driver will advise the spotter which way the turn will be made. The spotter then assists the driver in backing apparatus. The driver's intentions must be verbally communicated to the spotter).

STOP: Both arms crossed with hands in fist. See Figure 3. Be sure to yell the stop order loud enough that the engineer/driver can hear the warning. ______

NIGHT BACKING

Signals will be the same. The spotter will assure that the spotlights on rear of apparatus are turned on before allowing apparatus to be backed. A flashlight may be carried, but at no time will it be directed toward mirror. See Figures 4, 5, 6 and 7.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: SUPERVISING LESS #______403_____ EXPERIENCED PERSONNEL EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

The purpose of this guideline is to describe the requirements necessary for supervising less experienced personnel at working incidents.

The integral part of safe operations at an incident site is that the fire company functions as a team and is supervised by the Company Officer. The Company Officer is responsible for the supervision and welfare of all personnel in his/her company and other firefighters assigned to his/her supervision at an incident.

It is important to recognize that firefighters will gain "experience" at different rates. Experience levels will depend upon time on the job, number, type and intensity of past incidents, and the type and quality of supervision and training that the firefighter gains from Company Officers.

It is also important to recognize that inexperienced personnel caught in a hot, smoke- filled environment with zero visibility, or other hazardous or unfamiliar environment, can easily take inappropriate action that may cause injury or death to themselves or others.

With the arrival of a new or less experienced firefighter to the company, the Company Officer - and all crew members assume a special responsibility toward the new firefighter until he/she obtains training and experience. ______

For the purpose of this procedure, a "less experienced" firefighter is defined as:

a. Probationary firefighter.

b. Any member with less than two years total experience assigned to firefighting duties.

It should be noted that just because a firefighter has more than two years firefighting experience, does not necessarily qualify that individual as experienced. Some firefighters may still require direct supervision. ______

_

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #403 Page 2 of 3

It will be the responsibility of the Company Officer to determine the experience level of all firefighters assigned to his/her company using the following format:

Interview: Interview the firefighter to determine time assigned to firefighting duties, previous companies assigned, type and amount of fire and emergency incidents engaged in the past.

Evaluate: Evaluate the firefighter's skill level in hose lays, SCBA, ladder, evolutions, etc. Determine the firefighter's knowledge of firefighting and safety procedures. Interview previous Company Officers on the firefighter's past performance.

Training: Provide frequent and appropriate training to bring skill levels up and to maintain acceptable skill levels.

Follow-up: Provide follow-up evaluation and training. Evaluate the firefighter's performance at each incident. Interview other firefighters who may have worked with the firefighter at the incident.

Those firefighters determined to be inexperienced will be directly supervised by the Company Officer or a firefighter with greater than two years total firefighting experience. ______

Direct supervision will be required at the moment the firefighter enters an area that subjects the firefighter to potential injury or death. Examples include:

a. Entering a building involved with smoke or fire.

b. Approaching a potential collapse area.

c. Potential explosion or flash fire.

d. Approaching a hazardous materials incident.

e. Entering an area where hazard line tape is present.

f. Any other area that could cause injury or death to the firefighter.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #403 Page 3 of 3

It should be noted that the mere fact that the firefighter may meet the time in assignment criteria for an experienced firefighter does not permit non-supervision at the incident. All personnel at an incident will be supervised by and accountable to a Company Officer or Command Officer.

The inexperienced firefighter, however, may be permitted, under appropriate and safe circumstances, to function at the incident without direct supervision of a Company Officer.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: STATION SAFETY

#404 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

A large percentage of personnel injuries occur while participating in routine activities at or around the station. Most of these injuries could be prevented by observing proper safety practices and adopting a safety conscious attitude. ______

STATION MAINTENANCE

Many personnel injuries could be avoided through a policy of safety conscious station maintenance.

Efforts should be made to keep apparatus floors free from slippery substances and obstructions; water, oil, hydraulic fluid, etc. should be mopped up whenever accumulations appear, especially on the traffic areas around and between apparatus.

Station floors also must be free of slippery substances. Traffic route areas, hallways, stairs, etc., should be clear of unnecessary obstacles and obstructions.

Safety precautions shall be observed when using power lawn equipment: mowers, trimmers, edgers, etc.

LIFTING/PULLING

Utilize the following proper lifting techniques when lifting moderate to heavy objects:

* Use your legs to lift - bend your knees.

* Keep you back straight.

* Do not twist you body while lifting - reposition your feet to avoid twisting.

* To lift heavy objects, get your body as close to the object as possible.

* Use of back support devices if previous back problems. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #404 Page 2 of 2

Heavy objects should ideally be stored at approximately waist level - to prevent unnecessary lifting.

Do not attempt to lift or carry more than you can easily handle - if necessary get help!

When you are dragging or raising hose with a halyard, or lifting, do not pull more than you can pull with relative ease - if necessary, get help! ______

PHYSICAL FITNESS

One of the main objectives of the Physical Fitness Program is to lessen the frequency and severity of employee injuries by increasing the muscular stress and physical stamina of the body. To fulfill this objective, the intent of the phases and steps of the program must be understood by all participants.

* Are you doing all aspects of the program in the manner intended?

* Do you follow the program warm-up procedures?

* Do you follow the prescribed exercises as illustrated?

* Do you have a proper attitude and approach toward the program?

* Do you follow prescribed cooling down procedures?

* Do you have proper exercise shoes, etc.?

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: HYDRAULIC RESCUE TOOL #______405_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Full protective clothing shall be worn by those members operating, or in close proximity to the operation of the Hydraulic Rescue Tool. ______

The fluid used to operate the Rescue Tool can cause damage to the eyes. To provide eye protection, allowing for the event of a hose or coupling failure where fluid could be expelled, all members in the area of operation of a Rescue Tool shall place their face shield in the down position to provide for such protection. Full protective clothing should be worn when operating the rescue tool.

NOTE: SHOULD FLUID GET INTO THE EYES, THE EYES SHOULD BE FLUSHED IMMEDIATELY WITH COPIOUS AMOUNTS OF WATER AND THAT PERSON SEEK MEDICAL ASSISTANCE. ______

Precautions shall be taken to protect the trapped and injured from further injuries during the operation (i.e. sparks, propelled objects, flying glass, etc.) and a charged 1-1/2" foam hose line in place, manned by personnel in full protective clothing. ______

The Hurst Tool engine should be kept away from the injured and placed down wind of the work area. It must be placed where it would not provide a source of ignition for any flammable vapors in the air.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PROTECTIVE CLOTHING #_____ 406b______EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 8, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

The following are the Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue-EMS guidelines for wearing protective clothing. These policies apply to all members, line and staff. ______

DEFINITION

Full protective clothing: Helmet with faceshield, Nomex hood, turnout coat, boots with turnout pants, gloves. ______

Full protective clothing shall be worn by fire fighting personnel while responding to all structural fire alarms. (Optional for drivers, Command personnel, etc.)

When responding from quarters, all members shall dress accordingly prior to response.

Company Officers may use their discretion to regulate the "suit up" criteria in terms of unusual circumstances such as extremely long responses, out of quarters responses, or when the vehicle is moving at the time they are dispatched. At no time will employees be permitted to "suit up" without being secured by a seat belt while riding in a moving vehicle.

It is the intent of this guideline that no member shall cause a delay in any fire fighting operation by not being fully prepared to engage in fire fighting activities in a safe manner. ______

While operating at EMS incidents, all members shall wear whatever protective clothing is required to afford complete personal protection. ______

When operating forcible entry equipment and tools, full protective clothing shall be worn. ______

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #406b Page 2 of 2

Full protective clothing shall be worn at all times when operating on the fireground or other incidents requiring full protective clothing for personal protection, whether an actual or a potential hazard exists.

The Nomex hood shall be worn when engaged in firefighting and any other situation where injuries to head and face are likely to occur.

The use of turnout coats and Nomex hoods during overhaul operations will be at the discretion of command, however, helmets and boots will always be worn.

The face shield shall be utilized at any time the need for eye protection seems apparent such as during overhaul, when operating hand or power tools, and when fighting trash fires, grass fires, and any other fires where the SCBA facepiece is not being worn.

Gloves shall be worn when engaged in firefighting, overhaul, training with hose and ladders, when using hand or power tools, and any other situation where injuries to the hand are likely to occur.

In specific situations for which no guidelines have been provided, the proper protective clothing to protect against all foreseeable hazards shall be worn.

CLEANING / DECONTAMINATION

Personal protective equipment, when exposed to fire or atmospheres of contamination, shall be cleaned and/or decontaminated per manufacturer’s recommendations, as provided with the equipment.

Washing machines, for the purpose of laundering personal protective clothing, are available for use at Station 4 and Station 5.

When necessary, worn or contaminated pieces of personal protective equipment will be replaced.

Each December and June, Battalion Chiefs are to conduct complete inspections of their respective platoon’s personal protective equipment, with reports on each individual’s equipment turned in to the Operations Chief. Repairs and replacements are to be facilitated as soon as possible.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: MULTIPLE APPARATUS #_____407______RESPONSE EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

This S.O.P. is a supplement to SOP 401-01, Driver Safety that specifies an Emergency Response Guideline. This Guideline states department vehicles shall operate in a manner that provides overall safety and a safe arrival shall always have priority over unnecessary speed. In addition to increasing safety to personnel and property, a standardized multiple apparatus response from Stations 2 and 4 will facilitate correct apparatus placement at an emergency incident and will provide consistency throughout the department in our method of operation. ______

Our apparatus will respond in the following manner when all apparatus is in the station at the time of alarm and all personnel are ready to respond in a timely manner.

STATION 2

Fire Alarm: Engine followed by the truck or Engine followed by the rescue and then the truck

M.V.A.: Rescue followed by the engine

STATION 4

Fire Alarm: Engine followed by the rescue and then the truck

***Bat I may respond before or after the engine***

M.V.A.: Rescue followed by the engine

If, for some explainable reason, these two conditions cannot be satisfied then it is permissible for pieces of apparatus to respond individually.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: INCIDENT SCENE SAFETY #______408_____ OFFICER / INCIDENT SAFETY TEAM EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

There are many circumstances, foreseen and unforeseen, at emergency incidents that would require the immediate response or attention of a Safety Officer. The Safety Officer is a Command Staff Position within the Incident Command System and is filled at every incident. The Incident Commander assumes the responsibilities of the ISO until the position is delegated at an emergency scene. It is important, then, that the position of the Incident Scene Safety Officer (ISO) be delegated, at the discretion of the Incident Commander, anytime an incident involves a high risk to fire fighting personnel.

Circumstances warranting an Incident Scene Safety Officer would include Fire Suppression, Emergency Medical Services, Hazardous Materials, and Special Operations or any other time fire department personnel may be at a high risk, as determined by an Incident Commander, Deputy Chief, or Chief.

At such times as the need for an Incident Scene Safety Officer is identified, the position shall be filled according to department guidelines. At large or complex incidents, additional members may be assigned to a safety group, if needed, to provide a level of safety supervision appropriate for the magnitude of the incident and the hazards associated with it.

The Incident Scene Safety Officer (ISO) shall report directly to the Incident Commander (IC) as defined within the Incident Commander System. The main function of the ISO is to assist the IC, identify and monitor hazards at an emergency scene and to ensure safety for personnel while they implement the incident action plan. These guidelines have been established according to NFPA 1521, Standard for Fire Department Safety Officer.

For all incidents the standard requires…

• The ISO shall monitor the scene and report the status of conditions, hazards, and risks to the Incident Commander.

• When activities are judged by the ISO to be unsafe or involve an imminent hazard, the Incident Safety Officer shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate those activities.

• The Incident Safety Officer shall immediately inform the Incident Commander of any actions taken to correct imminent hazards at the emergency scene.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #408 Page 2 of 3

• The ISO shall ensure a rehabilitation area is established.

• The ISO shall ensure the personnel accountability system is being utilized.

• The Incident Commander shall provide the Incident Safety Officer with an incident action plan.

• The ISO shall provide the Incident Commander with a risk assessment of incident scene operations.

• The ISO shall ensure that established safety zones and other designated hazard areas are communicated to all members present at the scene.

• The ISO shall evaluate motor vehicle scene traffic hazards and apparatus placement at the scene.

• The ISO shall monitor radio traffic and stay alert to transmissions reporting hazards or communication barriers.

• The ISO shall survey and evaluate the hazards associated with the designation of a landing zone and interface with helicopters.

• The ISO shall evaluate the need for critical incident stress management and assist the Incident Commander to establish an action plan.

Fire Suppression Operations

• The ISO shall ensure that a rapid intervention crew is available and ready for deployment.

• The ISO shall advise the Incident Commander of hazards, collapse potential and any fire extension in a structure.

• The ISO shall evaluate visible smoke and fire conditions and advise the potential for flashover, backdraft, or other fire event that could pose a threat to operating teams.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #408 Page 3 of 3

• The ISO shall monitor the accessibility of entry and egress of structures and the effect it has on the safety of members conducting interior operations.

• The ISO shall document Carbon Monoxide levels within the working areas of a structure when SCBAs are removed.

Emergency Medical Services Operations

• The ISO shall ensure compliance with the department’s infection control plan.

Hazardous Material Operations

• The ISO shall attend strategic and tactical planning sessions and provide input on risk assessment and member safety.

• The ISO shall ensure that a safety briefing, including an incident action plan and incident safety plan is available, and made available, to all members on the scene.

• The ISO shall ensure that hot, warm decontamination, and other zone designations are clearly marked and communicated to all members.

Special Operations

• The ISO shall have the appropriate education, training, and experience in special operations.

• The ISO shall attend strategic and tactical planning sessions and provide input on risk assessment and member safety.

• The ISO shall ensure that a safety briefing, including an incident action plan and incident safety plan is available, and made available, to all members on the scene.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: CONFINED SPACE #_____ 409_____ OPERATIONS EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

Incidents which require Fire Department personnel to enter confined spaces to fight fires or to rescue and remove persons in need of assistance present very serious potential dangers. In order to operate safely in these situations, special precautions must be taken and rigidly enforced.

Confined spaces include caverns, tunnels, pipes, tanks, and any other locations where ventilation and access are restricted by the configuration of the space. These factors may also apply to basements or attics. Confined space incidents may involve injured persons, persons asphyxiated or overcome by toxic substances, cave-ins or fires occurring within the space. Pre-incident planning is an important factor in dealing with these situations.

DISPATCH

In addition to fire apparatus, an ALS ambulance shall be requested to respond to any incident where confined space operations are indicated. The Special OPS Team and Safety Officer shall also be dispatched except attics and basement, where Special OPS Team response is optional.

SITE OPERATIONS

Operations within confined spaces shall be approached with extreme caution. Direct supervision is required and all safety precautions and procedures shall be rigidly enforced. Operations shall be conducted in a manner which avoids premature commitment to unknown risks.

Command shall assure that personnel entering a confined space do not commit themselves to travel within the space beyond a point that provides sufficient air reserve to return and exit safely, with a least a five (5) minute safety margin. The time available for operations inside shall be estimated based on air supply and monitored by personnel outside, as well as the entry team. Where feasible, lifelines shall be used by personnel entering the confined space.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #409 Page 2 of 4

In order to provide adequate support for confined space incidents, Command shall provide a minimum 2:1 ratio of personnel outside the confined space to support personnel working within. This shall include a stand-by rescue team with a 1:1 ratio to provide emergency assistance to the personnel in the confined space. This team shall be equipped with breathing apparatus and in a full standby mode and ready to enter if needed. An ambulance with ALS capability shall also be provided near the entrance/exit point.

Before allowing personnel to enter a confined space, the officer in Command must attempt to gather any available information about the nature of the situation or hazard, particularly as it pertains to the atmosphere inside the space. THIS IS CRITICAL WHEN THE SITUATION INVOLVES UNCONSCIOUS VICTIMS OR PERSONS WHO MAY HAVE BEEN OVERCOME BY THE ATMOSPHERE INSIDE THE SPACE. Command must assume that an unsafe atmosphere exists within the confined space until/unless testing establishes it is safe. When test instruments are available, readings of oxygen concentration, explosive gas or vapor concentrations, carbon monoxide and hydrogen sulfide shall be taken before entering. If these instruments are not immediately available, a Special OPS Team member shall be requested to respond and evaluate the atmosphere as quickly as possible.

PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

ALL PERSONNEL entering confined spaces shall use breathing apparatus. Either self-contained or airline supplied breathing apparatus may be used, depending on the nature of the situation. Command must evaluate the need for extended duration breathing apparatus and provide for the response of this equipment when necessary.

Breathing apparatus shall be used without exception in confined spaces until or unless analysis of the atmosphere confirms that it is safe to breath. Personnel shall not remove facepieces or take any other action to compromise the effectiveness of their breathing apparatus while inside the confined space atmosphere.

Protective clothing shall be worn as required by the situation, depending on an evaluation of the hazards and the products which may be inside the confined space.

When working in confined spaces with very restricted access, personnel shall wear harnesses or wrist straps to provide for extrication by rope.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #409 Page 3 of 4

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS/GROUPS

The Incident Scene Safety Officer's position will be filled at all confined space incidents to consult with Command on the safety measures and precautions to be taken in each case. Command may assign Safety Officer responsibilities to a Company Officer, Chief Officer or a Staff Officer during the initial stages of the incident until a member of the Incident Safety Team arrives on the scene.

The Incident Scene Safety Officer shall evaluate the risks and enforce all safety requirements associated with the particular situation. If the Safety Officer judges that an operation is unsafe, the operation shall be suspended and Command notified immediately.

When feasible, Command should establish a Ventilation Group to begin operations directed at providing fresh air and/or exhausting contaminated air from confined space. Any electrical or mechanical equipment taken inside the confined space, including lighting equipment, shall be an explosion-proof type, when any flammable hazard is suspected. When ventilating a confined space containing flammable vapors or gases, ventilation must consider the concentration in relation to the flammable limits.

An Accountability Officer shall be established at the entrance/exit to control access to the confined space. The Accountability Officer shall maintain a record of personnel entering a confined space, and note entry time and SCBA cylinder pressures of all personnel entering the confined space. He/she will maintain a time awareness of the expected exit time for each individual based on air supply at the time of entry and provide a warning at the predetermined time to begin exit procedures. Warning will be provided by radio or other communications system.

A primary function of the Accountability Officer is to control the number of personnel entering the confined space and prevent crowding at the entrance to the confined space.

An Extrication Group may be required. Such operations would occur within the confined space. Close coordination with the Accountability Officer will be required.

A Transportation Group may be required if multiple patients are encountered.

A Rescue Group may be established to provide backup rescue personnel.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #409 Page 4 of 4

A Resource Group may be required to provide equipment and supplies, and a reserve pool of personnel.

A Staging Group may be established to stage equipment, and apparatus, particularly ambulances.

ATTIC SPACE OPERATIONS

Operations that require personnel to enter attic spaces for victim extrication, electrical problems, etc., will require the following minimum precautions:

* Accountability Officer

* Standby rescue personnel

* Positive pressure ventilation (if possible)

* Breathing apparatus (self-contained or airline supplied)

* Hose lines or other equipment for fire control and/or extinguishment

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: ON DUTY INJURIES / TREATMENT #_____410____ EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 14, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Emergency medical services for Fire Department employees who acquire duty related illnesses or injuries are of extreme importance to the Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue-EMS. It is our endeavor to provide the best services available in the interest of the individual employee who may become injured or ill while on duty.

Fire Department personnel are to use the St. Joseph’s Business Health system or a local hospital emergency room for treatment of work-related injuries and back-to-work requests. St. Joseph’s Business Health Centers operate locations at:

15717 15 Mile Rd (Fraser Health Center) - (586) 285-3850 30795 23 Mile Rd (Chesterfield Health Center) - (586) 421-3050 80650 Van Dyke Rd (North Macomb Health Center) - (810) 798-6410

In the event of a life-threatening emergency, the nearest medical facility may be utilized at the discretion of the Battalion Commander.

A treatment authorization form for St. Joseph’s Health Centers is available in each station, from the Battalion Commander, or from the Fire Department Administration. This form must be completed, signed and sent with the employee when first obtaining treatment for an injury. Hospitals require verifications (sometimes verbal) from the Fire Administration or a Battalion Commander.

During the first ten (10) days for on-the-job injury treatments, employees shall report back to the same medical facility.

The Battalion Commander or a designee shall provide transportation to and from the treating medical facility, as needed, unless ambulance transportation is required.

All injuries received while on duty shall be reported immediately to an employee’s Company Officer and/or the Battalion Commander.

All duty injuries shall be recorded in both the station log book and the Battalion Commander’s log book. Entry should consist of, for example, “FF #199 injured on incident 06-8103”. No specific details of the injury need to be logged.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #410 Page 2 of 2

Employee accident report, Form #15 is to be completed and signed by the injured employee immediately upon return from the medical treatment facility (if physically possible) and prior to returning to duty or being excused from work for the duty-related injury. Once completed, Form #15 must be forwarded to the Battalion Commander on duty for his/her signature. The form is to be forwarded to the Fire Department Administration to facilitate any payment of Workers Compensation claims.

The immediate supervisor (Company Officer) of the injured employee shall cause an incident report to be generated through dispatch and create an NFIRS fire report, as required; this is mandatory for all injuries, whether or not treatment is sought at the time of injury. (Note: Injuries or illnesses occurring while responding to, at a scene or returning from a scene shall be attached as a fire casualty on said NFIRS report; in these cases, a new incident report is not generated.)

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: INFECTIOUS DISEASE

#411a NOTIFICATION EFFECTIVE DATE: August 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

OFFICERS RESPONSIBILITY

The Company Officer at a scene where exposure to bodily fluids affects our personnel must take complete and thorough notes when gathering information for his report. Include all vital information on the report.

- All members who responded to incident. - Members who were exposed. - Date of exposure. - Patient(s) name (victim). - Type of exposure. - Time of exposure. - What barrier precautions were followed, i.e. latex gloves, other gloves, mask, goggles, protective clothing. - Carrier who transported patient to medical care facility. - Name of Medical Care Facility patient taken to.

HOSPITAL RESPONSIBILITY

Act 490, 1989, Requires that:

Hospitals must notify persons exposed to certain infectious diseases, in writing, within 48 hours of any exposure to infectious disease identified in a patient. They may or may not identify the infectious agent in the initial letter. They will NOT identify the patient.

The hospital will research their records to find all those who had contact with the patient and may or may not notify them individually. The hospital will notify the department in a general letter that an exposure has occurred

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #411a Page 2 of 2

THE FIRE FIGHTERS RESPONSIBILITY

Have a clear understanding of what constitutes and “exposure”. Be aware of and practice Universal Safety Precautions as outlined in the OSHA standard for exposure control at all possible exposures. • Wear Protective latex gloves. • Proper hand and gear washing. • Use goggles (face shield). • Wear your turn-out gear.

Exposure Types:

A. Blood/body fluids - blood, urine, feces, vomitus, sputum or any bodily secretion. 1. Percutaneous via needle stick or other sharp instrument which break the skin. 2. Mucous membrane via splash to eyes, nose, mouth or broken, inflamed skin.

B. Respiratory - sputum, aerosolized droplets as generated by cough or sneeze. 1. Contact with sputum/oral secretions via mouth to mouth resuscitation, close contact to expelled secretions.

If you are exposed 1. Immediately notify your Company Officer. The Company Officer will be responsible for gathering the necessary information for the bio-hazard follow-up team. 2. Take proper/appropriate actions to cleanse yourself and equipment. 3. Report the exposure as follows: • Fill out Form 15, “Employee Accident Report”

• Complete the “Fire Service Casualty” module in the NFIRS report. Note: each employee exposed is constitutes a separate casualty.

• Fill out Form H-10 “Bio-hazard Employee Exposure Form”.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #411a Page 3 of 3

• Seek medical attention at the same facility in which the patient was transported. • When seeking medical attention you will be asked to sign in at the admission desk and be examined by a physician. • Fill out page 1 of Form J-427, “Michigan Department of Public Health Request for HIV/Hepatitis B testing of Emergency Patient” and present both pages of this form to the attending physician. • Contact a member of the Exposure Control Team Liaison within 8 hours of the incident (Federal Law allows a small window of 48 hours for follow up testing from an incident.)

If you receive notification from hospital of exposure

• Seek medical attention at hospital from which you’ve been notified. • Submit completed Form J-427 “Request for HIV/Hepatitis B Testing of Emergency Patient” to health care facility. • Contact Exposure Control Liaison as soon as possible. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: ELECTRICAL LOCKOUT #______412_____ EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

This procedure is developed to help make sure that you, or anyone working on equipment, isn’t electrocuted, hit, crushed, or otherwise hurt during repair or maintenance of equipment, through proper lockout/tagout programs.

PROCEDURE

Before performing maintenance/repairs on equipment the following procedure shall be followed at all times:

SHUTDOWN

1. PREPARE FOR SHUTDOWN: Know what type of energy the machine uses. Identify its potential hazards. Find the switches, valves, or other devices that control energy and need to be locked out.

2. LET AFFECTED EMPLOYEES KNOW: Inform these affected that you’ll be locking or tagging out the equipment and why.

3. TURN OFF: Turn off the machine or equipment.

4. LOCATE AND ISOLATE: Locate and isolate all energy sources. Get rid of any stored energy, as in springs, hydraulic systems, or air pressure. You may have to block, bleed, vent, etc. to be sure there’s nothing left to move a machine part.

5. LOCK OUT THE SWITCHES: Always lock out the switches or other energy controls when possible. Attach a lock that holds them in an “off” or “safe” position. Attach lockout tag with nylon cable tie and name of employee who installed tag.

6. TAG OUT THE SWITCHES: Some equipment can’t be locked out. Attach tag to energy control in the “off” or “safe” position with nylon cable tie and name of employee who installed tag and warning not to remove or turn on. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #412 Page 2 of 2

7. TEST THE OPERATING CONTROLS: Be sure no one is close enough to get hurt. Put all controls in the “on” position. Make sure the power DOESN’T go on and that the equipment won’t operate.

8. PUT OPERATING CONTROLS OFF: Put operating controls back in the “off” or “safe” position.

9. TEST THE CIRCUITS: Test the circuits and electrical parts of the equipment to be sure they are de-energized.

10. PERFORM WORK: Perform necessary service or maintenance

TURN ON (REENERGIZE)

1. Make sure all employees are a safe distance from equipment.

2. Remove all tools from machine or equipment.

3. Reinstall any machine guards.

4. Remove lockout devices.

5. Turn on energy.

6. Notify other employees that the machine or equipment is working again.

When maintenance or service is done, ONLY the employee who installed the lock and/or tag may remove them. Special circumstances may apply during shift changes or when an employee who laced a lock or tag is not available to remove it. The officer in-charge of that location will be notified and only he will remove lock and/or tag, following turn on (reenergize) procedures.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: SELF CONTAINED #_____413_____ BREATHING APPARATUS EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 6

It is the policy of the Clinton Township Fire Department that all personnel expected to respond and function in areas of atmospheric contamination, shall be equipped with self-contained breathing apparatus (S.C.B.A.) and trained in its proper use and external maintenance.

Each member of the Department that is assigned to a rig shall be responsible for their S.C.B.A. and shall check the condition of that S.C.B.A. at the beginning of each shift, after each use, and at any other time it may be necessary to render the equipment in a ready state of condition. Each crew member will be responsible for the proper use and function of that S.C.B.A.

If a S.C.B.A. is found to be functioning improperly, it shall be taken out of service, reported to the Battalion Commander, and replaced immediately. No personnel, other than currently certified technicians of the Clinton Township Fire Department or a certified vendor contracted by the Fire Department, shall open any regulators or perform maintenance /repair functions other than external cleaning of the S.C.B.A. units.

The intent of the S.C.B.A. policy is to avoid any respiratory contact with products of combustion, superheated gases, toxic products or other hazardous contaminants.

The use of breathing apparatus means that all personnel shall have facepieces in place, breathing air from the supply provided.

Self Contained Breathing Apparatus shall be used by all personnel operating:

- in a contaminated atmosphere - in an atmosphere which may suddenly become contaminated - in an atmosphere which is oxygen deficient (19.5%) or oxygen enriched (21.0%) - in an atmosphere which is suspected of being contaminated or oxygen deficient

This includes all personnel operating:

- in an active fire area - directly above an active fire area - in a potential explosion of fire area, including gas leaks and fuel spills - where products of combustion are visible in the atmosphere, including vehicle fires and dumpster fires. - where invisible contaminants are suspected to be present(i.e. Carbon Monoxide during overhaul) - where toxic products are present, suspected to be present, or may be released without warning - in any confined space which has not been tested to establish respiratory safety STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #413 Page 2 of 6

In addition to the above, S.C.B.A. shall be worn by all personnel operating at fire incidents above ground, below ground or in any other area which is not, but which may become contaminated by products of combustion or other hazardous substances. In certain circumstances such as this, with permission of the Company Officer, the S.C.B.A. may be worn with the facepiece removed providing it will be immediately available for use if conditions change or if personnel are to enter an area where S.C.B.A. is required.

Premature removal of S.C.B.A. must be avoided at all times. This is particularly significant during overhaul when smoldering materials may produce increased quantities of carbon monoxide and other toxic products. In these cases S.C.B.A. must be used or the atmosphere must be changed.

In routine fire situations, the decision to remove S.C.B.A. shall be made by company or command officers, based on an evaluation of conditions. Prior to removal, a carbon monoxide detector should be used to determine that NO personnel are working in an area where 200ppm of carbon monoxide is present. By way of reference, NIOSH allows a Time Weighted Average exposure of 200ppm for 15 minutes during any 8 hour period. Fire areas shall be thoroughly ventilated and, where necessary, continuous ventilation shall be provided.

If there is any doubt about respiratory safety, S.C.B.A. use shall be maintained until the atmosphere is established to be safe by testing. This is required in complex situations, particularly when toxic materials may be involved.

An evaluation of all members of the Department in the use of the S.C.B.A. shall be conducted annually. Each member shall be able to demonstrate a high level of proficiency and compatibility with the S.C.B.A. under conditions which simulate those expected as a job requirement.

S.C.B.A. IDENTIFICATION:

ALL BREATHING APPARATUS ARE MARKED WITH A NUMBER CORRESPONDING TO THEVEHICLE THEY ARE ON. S.C.B.A. ON ENGINES ARE MARKED ENG-1, ENG-2, ENG- 3, OR ENG-4, etc. IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS CAN BE FOUND AS FOLLOWS:

ENGINES/TRUCKS RESCUES

DRIVER OFFICER DRIVER OFFICER A B A B

L.JUMP R.JUMP FORWARD BOX D C C CENTER BOX D REAR BOX E

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #413 Page 3 of 6 LOOK AT S.C.B.A. AS IT IS MOUNTED ON TRUCKS; ON THE TOP OF THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE METAL FRAME HOLDING THE BOTTLE, YOU WILL FIND THE NUMBERS ENGRAVED.

REMOVING S.C.B.A. FROM SERVICE:

WHEN REMOVING S.C.B.A. FROM SERVICE WE ARE ASKING THAT A FEW THINGS BE DONE TO ASSURE THAT PROPER REPAIRS ARE MADE. FIRST, THERE WILL BE MANILA TAGS IN A COFFEE CAN IN THE "WATCHROOM” AT EACH STATION. ON THESE TAGS YOU WILL PLACE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: DATE, PERSONS NAME REMOVING S.C.B.A. FROM SERVICE, NATURE OF PROBLEM. TIE TAG, WITH THE STRING PROVIDED, ON HOSE OR OTHER PART OF S.C.B.A. WHERE IT WON’T FALL OFF. ENTIRE UNIT WITH BOTTLE ATTACHED MUST THEN BE SENT TO STATION 420 (HEADQUARTERS). PLEASE DON’T TAKE MORE SPARE UNITS THAN ARE BEING REMOVED FROM SERVICE. TRANSFER THE P.A.S.S. DEVICE TO THE SPARE S.C.B.A. AND BACK TO THE UNIT WHEN RETURNED TO SERVICE.

S.C.B.A.

DAILY CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

1. COVER DISCHARGE PORT WITH RUBBER COVER.

2. OPEN TANK VALVE COMPLETELY. AUDI-LARM SHOULD RING BRIEFLY AS YOU OPEN VALVE. THEN OPEN MAINLINE VALVE OR REGULATOR.

3. COMPARE TANK GAUGE WITH REGULATOR GAUGE. PRESSURE DIFFERENCE ON GAUGES SHOULD NOT BE GREATER THAN FIVE PERCENT (5%) WITH A MINIMUM OPERATING TANK PRESSURE OF 2000 PSI/90%.

4. TURN TANK VALVE OFF.

5. SLOWLY BLEED AIR FROM SYSTEM BY GENTLY LIFTING RUBBER CAP AND OBSERVE REGULATOR GAUGE. AUDI-LARM SHOULD RING BRIEFLY AGAIN BETWEEN 570-540 PSI (25% OF RATED SYSTEM CAPACITY).

6. CLOSE MAINLINE VALVE ON REGULATOR.

7. ASSURE THAT DISCHARGE PORT ON REGULATOR IS COVERED WITH RUBBER CAP OR ATTACHED FACEPIECE.

NOTE: TANK VALVE AND MAINLINE VALVE ON REGULATOR SHOULD BE IN THE CLOSED POSITION WITH NO PRESSURE ON THE SYSTEM

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #413 Page 4 of 6 UNTIL IT IS NEEDED. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF EACH INDIVIDUAL TO CHECK OUT THEIR OWN S.C.B.A. ADDITIONAL S.C.B.A. ON APPARATUS SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ASSIGNED DRIVER THATDAY.

S.C.B.A. SATURDAY CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

1. VISUALLY INSPECT S.C.B.A. FOR ANY OBVIOUS DAMAGE TO UNIT SUCH AS TORN STRAPS, LOOSE OR MISSING SCREWS, OR BROKEN GAUGE LENS. BE SURE RUBBER CAP IS ON DISCHARGE PORT. THERE HAVE BEEN SEVERAL INCIDENTS OF WATER GETTING INTO THE REGULATOR AND THIS IS THE ONLY PORT FROM WHICH TO ENTER.

2. OPEN TANK VALVE COMPLETELY. ADUI-LARM SHOULD RING BRIEFLY AS YOU OPEN VALVE. THEN OPEN MAINLINE VALVE ON REGULATOR

3. COMPARE TANK GAUGE WITH REGULATOR GAUGE. PRESSURE DIFFERENCE ON GAUGES SHOULD NOT BE GREATER THAN FIVE PERCENT (5%). MINIMUM OPERATING TANK PRESSURE IS 2000 PSI/90%.

4. TURN MAINLINE VALVE OFF.

5. ATTACH AND DON FACEPIECE.

6. OPEN MAINLINE VALVE AND CLOSE TANK VALVE

7. BREATH SYSTEM DOWN. AUDI-LARM SHOULD RING BETWEEN 570-540 PSI (25% OF RATED SYSTEM CAPACITY).

NOTE: TANK VALVE AND MAINLINE VALVE ON REGULATOR SHOULD BE IN THE CLOSED POSITION WITH NO PRESSURE ON THE SYSTEM UNTIL IT IS NEEDED. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF EACH INDIVIDUAL TO CHECK OUT THEIR OWN S.C.B.A. ADDITIONAL S.C.B.A. ON APPARATUS SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ASSIGNED DRIVER THAT DAY.

SCBA AIR BOTTLE FILL PROCEDURE

The following procedure will be used to fill SCBA air bottles.

1. Make sure all three (3) fill valves are closed.

2. Open door and place low or empty bottles in sleeve.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #413 Page 5 of 6 3. Attach appropriate fill hose to bottle and hand tighten.

4. Close bleeder valve hand tight.

5. Open bottle.

6. Close door.

7. Set regulator to desired pressure setting for bottle being filled. (2216-Yellow) (3000-Grey/Silver) (4500-Green) Never mix bottle types being filled. Never set the regulator at a pressure that is less than the pressure in the bottles being filled. This will allow air to back feed through the regulator and escape, possibly damaging regulator.

8. Open fill valves slightly and allow bottles to fill slowly. Conservative fill rate is 4-5 minutes for an empty bottle. You may have to slightly adjust regulator while filling.

9. When bottles are full, close fill valves.

10. Turn regulator counter clockwise to bleed off pressure. Do not tighten regulator valve in the decrease or off position. Leave slightly loose

11. Open door.

12. Close bottles.

13. Open bleeder valve and release inline pressure. Re-tighten bleeder valve so it will not fall off and be lost.

14. Disconnect fill hose and remove bottles.

15. When finished filling bottles, place fill hose valve in sleeve to avoid damage while door is being opened and closed.

IMPORTANT NOTE: If bottles have been filled quickly they will heat up and give a false pressure reading. Pressure may drop as much as 190 psi. after cooling, resulting in less air time for wearer.

In cold weather, bottles may give a false low reading. Use caution when refilling and do not overfill.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #413 Page 6 of 6 S.C.B.A. Placement by Assigned Letter/Number System

Officer = B Jumpseat = C

Front ENGINES/TRUCKS

Driver = A Jumpseat = D

Officer = B

Seat = D Seat = E

RESCUE FRONT Seat = C*

Driver = A

• = Rescue 2 will be slightly different because of mounting restrictions. Letter designation will be the same order.

Equipment is placed in this order for accountability purposes and should not be changed. If a unit is taken out of service a spare should be requested Headquarters.

Example – Driver side S. C. B. A. unit on E-1 will be E1A, E-2 is E2A, etc.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PERSONAL GROOMING #______415_____ (APPEARANCE & SAFETY) EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

PURPOSE:

It has been officially recognized that matters of personal grooming have an effect upon safety of the members of the department and the public in their firefighting and life saving activities. (There is also a consideration of cleanliness and personal hygiene toward one's co-worker that must be contemplated.)

The wearing of face masks, respirators, firefighting equipment, safety equipment, the administration of first-aid, and the application of other procedures, can be adversely affected by the growth of a beard, length of hair, facial hair and other aspects of personal grooming.

Various organizations, individuals, and experts, who are concerned with safety of firefighters and others who use equipment similar to that used by firefighters, are in agreement that lack of personal grooming standards may adversely affect safety considerations, particularly with respect to the use of face masks.

The American National Standards Institute has approved certain standard practices for respiratory protection which include: 7. Use of respirators" 7.5 Facepiece fit and procedure; “ Respirators shall not be worn when conditions prevent a good face seal. Such conditions may be a growth of beard, sideburns, a skull cap that projects under the facepiece, or temple pieces on glasses...."

The Occupational Safety and Health Act (O.S.H.A.) Fire Protection Regulations proposed by the American National Standards Institute includes the aforementioned paragraph 7.5.

The National Fire Protection Association which sets national recognized standards in the fire service stated in N.F.P.A. Standard #1500 - Self Contained Breathing Apparatus.

5-310 - Beards or facial hair that interferes with the face piece seal shall be prohibited for members required to use S.C.B.A. If eyeglasses are worn, the member shall use frames that do not pass through the seal area of the facepiece.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #415 Page 2 of 4

A-5-310 - An effective face-to-facepiece seal is extremely important when using S.C.B.A. Even a minor leakage can allow contaminants to enter the facepiece, even with positive pressure S.C.B.A. Any outward leakage will increase the rate of air consumption, reducing the time available for use and safe exit. The facepiece should seal tightly against the skin without penetration or interference by any protective clothing or other equipment.

The Michigan State Firefighter Training Council also endorses the previously stated O.S.H.A. and N.F.P.A. Standard #1500.

OBJECTIVE:

The department administration will continue to recognize its present and future duty to do all that is reasonable for the safety and protection of its members and the public.

The members of this department will understand its frequent contact with the public, recognizing the public good, and the need for maintaining a favorable image with the citizenry and will attempt to live up to that image at all times.

The administration does recognize that there are constant changes in hair styles and other grooming fads among the male/female population. But department members should heed that styles will not take first place to safety, hygiene, or an acceptable level of grooming, as laid down by this and other fire department policies.

1. Uniform and Hygiene

a. The department members shall have an overall well kept appearance. Their uniform shall be maintained properly, free from rips, tears, and stains as outlined in the department uniform policy.

b. Each member shall maintain an acceptable level of personal hygiene that is conducive to favorable public image and one's co-workers. Such examples may include, but not limited to, body/feet odor, bad breath, consistently dirty grubby hands, dirty bedding, etc. Fingernails are to be kept at a reasonable length and clean.

2. Head Hair

a. Hair will be kept clean and neatly groomed. Bush, afro, natural, freedom or other similar styles will be worn in moderation. The length and the style of the hair shall not be excessive so that it;

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #415 Page 3 of 4

1) will not interfere with the proper placement and usage of uniform cap, helmet, face mask, or other firefighting equipment.

2) will not present a ragged or unkempt appearance.

3) will not present a hazard to firefighting, training, or inspection duties.

b. Hair, when combed, brushed, picked, blown, teased or otherwise worn, will not exceed two inches (2") in height.

c. Hair, when combed, brushed or otherwise worn, will not fall further than the middle of the ear.

d. Hair, when combed, brushed or otherwise worn, will not extend below the top of the uniform shirt collar of a properly worn uniform shirt.

e. Laser cuts and pony tails are unacceptable. A laser cut (or line cut) is a hair style whereby lines and/or designs are cut into ones hair using a razor or T-edge shaper or trimmer.

f. Exotic dyed hair colors are not acceptable, such as green, blue, orange, etc. If an individual chooses to dye his/her hair it shall be standard hues of black, brown, blond or shades, thereof, that do not delude the department image.

3. Sideburns

a. Sideburns shall not interfere with the proper placement and safe usage of face masks and other firefighting equipment.

b. Sideburns will be neatly trimmed and close to the face so that they; 1) do not protrude or have grown thick so as to create an imperfect seal when the face mask is worn or used, or 2) do not interfere with proper placement and usage of other firefighting equipment.

c. Sideburns shall not be more than one and one-quarter inches (1-1/4") wide.

d. Sideburns shall not extend below the bottom of the ear lobe. (Lamb chops are unacceptable).

e. The base of the sideburn shall be a clean shaven, horizontal line.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #415 Page 4 of 4

4. Facial Hair

a. Members of the department shall be cleanly shaved when reporting for duty.

b. Beards, goatees and chin whiskers of any type will not be permitted in order to: 1) ensure that facial hair will not interfere with the proper placement of face masks and any other firefighting or life saving equipment; 2) ensure that facial hair will not interfere with the administration of first aid or other life saving procedures.

c. Mustaches are permitted but must conform to the following: 1) mustaches must be neatly trimmed; 2) mustaches shall not cover any portion of the upper lip; 3) mustaches shall not extend horizontally over one-half inch (1/2") beyond the corners of the mouth; 4) No portion of the mustache shall extend beyond the corners of the mouth or shall extend upward (handle-bar mustache) or fall below a line parallel with the bottom of the lower lip.

5. Jewelry

Jewelry is to be worn in such a manner so as not to demean the uniform or image of the department. It is recommended that personnel in fire suppression remove all jewelry if assigned to apparatus due to safety.

a. Fire suppression division - when assigned to apparatus - one (1) neck chain, one (1) ring, one (1) watch, one (1) bracelet and earrings are an acceptable option. b. Earrings (stud or post style) are not to be larger than one eighth (1/8") of an inch in diameter on outer surface of the ear. Any style is not to hang more than one quarter (1/4") of an inch below the earlobe. They are to be without precious or semi- precious gems/stones and not "gaudy" in appearance. Only one (1) pair are acceptable. c. Nose rings, nose studs are unacceptable for all members of the department. d. Staff personnel - the same principals and guidelines pertain to staff positions regarding jewelry.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: WELLNESS PROGRAM POLICY #_____416b______EFFECTIVE DATE: JUNE 7, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

We, as firefighters, are involved in a demanding and hazardous profession that places a variety of physical and psychological stresses on each of us. We cannot completely control all chances of injury or death, but we can reduce the odds in our favor by many factors. One, is through a wellness program.

The benefits and goals of the program are (in time):

A. An increase energy level.

B. Reduced fire ground injuries

C. Reduced in-home injuries

D. An improved self-esteem, confidence and attitude

E. An improved strength, endurance and flexibility

F. An improved cardiovascular system (less incident of heart attack)

G. A reduced mental and physical stress level.

H. A decrease in costs for the Township through a reduction of firefighter injuries and sick days

I. Physical fitness can be a “tool” to aid in smoking reduction or complete cessation

Any fitness program takes effort but we can realize these benefits and achieve these goals by:

A. The establishment of a program tailored to each individual

B. Workout equipment and areas to train established in each station

C. An annual evaluation through the St. Joseph’s Health network

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #416b Page 2 of 2

D. Establish reasonable goals for yourself and the program

E. Be patient and don’t give up.

F. Partners can motivate and encourage one another, but you must keep in mind that we have a wide span of age and physical make-up within our department. A 50 year old cannot compete with a 20 year old.

G. Progress will not be the same for all individuals.

This physical fitness program is mandatory for all personnel with the exception of 40 hour personnel.

All equipment and apparatus shall be in service prior to the workout period beginning.

The physical fitness program takes preference over house duties, however it should be understood that the house duties shall be completed at a later time.

The workout period is to be from 10:00 to 11:30 hours every day. The Company Officers at each station will allow ample time for shower and dress following the workout. The workout program or regimen for each employee is confidential.

Should an emergency response interfere with the 10:00 to 11:30 hours time frame, or in the case of a man being assigned to watch duties at HQ, the make-up time will be determined by the Company Officer.

The Company Officers are responsible for enforcing this policy.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PASS DEVICES #_____417______EFFECTIVE DATE: JULY 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

In the interest of personal safety, all self-contained breathing apparatus (S.C.B.A.) shall be outfitted with a personal alert safety system (PASS) device. The PASS device shall be secured on the S.C.B.A. lap belt (left side) next to the regulator. The PASS device shall be used whenever the S.C.B.A. unit is placed in service.

It is the responsibility of the wearer to insure that the PASS device is activated at the time the S.C.B.A. is donned.

Additionally, the company officer shall verify that all company members have activated their PASS device prior to entering an area where the S.C.B.A. will be used.

The PASS device shall be checked for proper functioning at the change of shift or, after each use.

If there is any problem with A PASS device, tag it with a S.C.B.A. repair tag, your name, date, and what is wrong with it and send it to Headquarters.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH & SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: NON-DEPARTMENT # 418 COMMUNICATION DEVICES EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 19, 2001 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

As a health and safety issue and in order to promote attentiveness, efficiency and promptness, while eliminating possible distractions when enroute to an incident, at an incident scene or when returning from an incident, personal or non-department–owned personal communications devices shall not be carried on your person, in or on fire apparatus, or used in any manner. The prohibited devices include, but are not limited to, any non-department-issued pager, cell phone, radio, palm pilot, computer, or similar equipment.

The use of such devices in the stations is permitted to the degree that such use shall in no manner interfere with duties or job performance. However, the department shall not recognize these items as normal and/or necessary articles of personal property while on duty and for purposes of Article III, Section 8 of the Collective Bargaining Agreement, will not be held responsible for losses or damages to them, or accept any liabilities resulting from their use. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: HEALTH/SAFETY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: SCBA FILLING STATION – R1

#420 EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 5, 2005 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

For safety purposes, the following procedure shall be used to operate the SCBA filling station (cascade system) located on R-1:

Cascade System:

The system consists of 5 horizontally mounted tanks capable of holding 6000 psig each. Each tank and rack is dual labeled 1 thru 5. Unless removing the tank(s) from the apparatus is required, all 5 cascade tank valves are to be fully OPENED, and then closed one-quarter of a turn. This is the position that these valves are to be left in for both system tank and SCBA cylinder filling operations. Leaving the tank valves opened will always indicate the available pressures on the Bank gauges without opening any other valves.

Filling Station Panel: (moving from left to right)

The panel consists of 5 cascade “Bank” cylinder gauges which will give you the reading of each individual cascade tank pressure when the 5 tank valves are open. Below each gauge, there is a corresponding “Bank” control valve. Each valve controls the flow of breathing air that is being taken from the cascade tank to fill the SCBA cylinders. These same valves are opened when filling the cascade tanks from the compressor.

Next you will find the “Inlet Pressure” gauge. This gauge has a dual purpose. It reads the inlet pressure coming from the breathing air compressor, and it reads the pressure coming from the cascade tank while SCBA cylinder filling is underway.

Below the Inlet Pressure gauge, is the “System Fill” control valve. This valve too, has a dual purpose. This valve opens the main “fill line” to the cascade tanks. It also acts as a “secondary” system pressure gauge, reading the level of pressure available for SCBA cylinder filling.

Below the System Fill valve is the “Panel Inlet” connector. This is where the high- pressure hose is attached from the breathing air compressor. Remember, both the connectors must be hand-tightened fully to allow the air to flow through the “ball- bearing” in the inlet / outlet connections.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #420 Page 2 of 4

Moving to the right again, is the “Pressure Regulator” control valve. This valve controls the maximum amount of breathing air that is allowed into the SCBA filling chamber valves.

Below the Pressure Regulator valve, is the “Fill Valve”. This valve controls the air flow to BOTH of the SCBA filling chambers simultaneously.

Next is the “Outlet Pressure” gauge. This gauge will read the maximum pressure set by the regulator that will be sent to the SCBA filling chambers.

Below the Outlet Pressure gauge, is the “Bottle Pressure” gauge. This gauge will read the pressure(s) in the opened SCBA cylinders located in the filling chamber(s). Filling Cascade System:

Attach high-pressure hose connectors to the compressor and “Panel Inlet”. Make sure that all cascade tank valves are opened fully / quarter turn back.

With compressor running, open “System Fill” valve fully. Then open the individual “Bank” control valve(s) that need to be filled. If all Bank valves are opened at the same time, the cascade tanks will balance the pressures equally between them.

NOTE: The average filling time with all 5 Bank valves opened (100 psig in 5 tanks = 5 minutes)

Once filled, close the system in reverse order as listed above. Remember to leave the cascade tank valves in OPEN position.

Filling SCBA Cylinders:

Unfortunately, this procedure is much more involved. This procedure must be followed precisely to properly / safely fill SCBA cylinders and to achieve the maximum filling potential from the system.

NOTE: Make sure that all valves on “Filling Station Panel” are CLOSED before starting. To avoid needless damage to ANY valves, only hand-tighten them. Never use a hand tool of any kind to close a valve.

- Set the spring loaded locking pins on the chamber door handle to lock the handle in the outward position.

- Push the handle assembly down to release the door lock. Pull handle outward to gain access to the filling chamber.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #420 Page 3 of 4

Load SCBA bottle(s) into chamber. Attach threaded coupling nut to SCBA cylinder valve. Open cylinder valve fully. Close bleeder valve and Open filling valve on chamber hose fully.

- HAZARD WARNING: If only filling one cylinder – make sure that the filling valve on chamber hose that is not being used is CLOSED to avoid high pressure leak. DO NOT fill cylinders that require different pressure levels at the same time.

- Close and lock filling chamber door and lock handle into place. System will not operate with chamber door opened.

- Open “System Valve” fully.

- Open “Bank” valve on lowest cascade tank.

- NOTE: Always fill from tank with the lowest pressure to the highest pressure. - Turn the “Pressure Regulator” control valve, setting the “Outlet Pressure” gauge to the maximum pressure allowed for the cylinders located in filling chambers. (i.e. 2216 / 3000 / 4500 psig)

- Open the “Fill Valve” slowly (about one-quarter turn maximum).

- Monitor the “Bottle Pressure” gauge until the maximum pressure is achieved in the cylinder(s) being filled. The Outlet and Bottle Pressure gauges will match when the filling sequence is completed.

- If the lowest tank in the cascade system does not have enough pressure to complete the filling process, then close the Bank valve and open the next highest Bank valve. Repeat this and advance through the tanks as the total system pressure is depleted.

- WARNING: NEVER completely drain / empty any cascade system tank.

- Once the required number of cylinders have been filled, leave ALL valves in opened positions. Open filling chamber door, close cylinder valves, close hose fill valves, open bleeders to drain and then re-close them, remove fill hose hand wheel from cylinders, remove cylinders from chambers, close and secure chamber door / handle.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #420 Page 4 of 4

Bleeding System Pressure:

The remaining pressure in the system needs to be removed. The following procedure must be followed in order to perform this bleed down properly / safely to avoid an accident for the next system operator.

- Close opened Bank valve (there should only be 1 of them open)

- Turn Pressure Regulator control to the Left to reduce / zero the pressure in this area of the system. The Outlet Pressure gauge should ALWAYS be to “Zero” at the start of the filling sequence. This will help insure that cylinders will not be over- filled due to improper maximum fill settings.

- There will still be pressure in the Inlet Pressure side of the system. TO remove this pressure, raise and lower the Pressure Regulator control valve several times. This is the only method that will bleed the trapped pressure in the system safely. Continue this process until all 3 gauges (Inlet - Outlet - Bottle Pressure gauges) read “Zero”.

- Close the System Fill valve.

- Close the Bottle Fill valve.

- The system is now safely set up for the next system / cylinder filling operations.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: ASSIGNED VEHICLES # 501b EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

It is the purpose of this policy to establish and maintain an understanding pertinent to the use of the Department of Fire/Rescue vehicles that are assigned to 40-hour-a-week personnel, on duty, as well as off duty. 1. In conjunction with Michigan State Law, the driver and any/all passengers shall have their seat belts on at all times.

2. The person assigned a vehicle will assume the responsibility to see that the vehicle is properly maintained. (a) It shall be washed a minimum of once a week. (b) Oil will be changed approximately every 3,000 miles. (c) All vehicle fluids will be checked as per the manufacturers recommendations.

(d) The vehicle will be waxed a minimum of twice a year at the station assigned for maintenance (wash, wax, tires and fluids checked). (e) It will be the responsibility of the assigned driver to keep the fuel tank at an acceptable level. 3. The vehicle shall not be driven by anyone other than Fire Department personnel. 4. The driver assigned a vehicle may take that vehicle home due to the fact that person is subject to call 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and is expected to immediately respond when called, however, (a) No other person or persons shall ride in or occupy the vehicle other than the assigned driver's immediate family. (b) The vehicle shall not be used for any personal social functions off duty.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #501b Page 2 of 2

(c) If the assigned driver will be on vacation or out of town attending a school, conference or seminar for more than five working days, the vehicle shall be parked at Headquarters or Station Five and the keys given to the Battalion Commander or one of the Chiefs, so the vehicle will be available to other Fire Department personnel if needed.

(d) The assigned driver, in order to be eligible for the privilege of taking said vehicle home, must reside within Wayne, Oakland, Macomb or St. Clair Counties.

5. At no time shall the assigned driver drive the vehicle while under the influence of alcohol or any type of illegal drug.

6. The assigned driver must have a valid Michigan driver's license.

7. If at any time the assigned driver must extend his normal daily Fire Department business or wishes to use the vehicle as transportation to a conference or seminar beyond the tri-county (Wayne, Oakland and Macomb Counties) area, permission will be requested of the Chief or his designate.

Department vehicles are representative of the Township and all members of the department. Discretion and professionalism shall be the foremost of thought and action at all times. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: CIVILIANS ON FIRE VEHICLES # 502 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Be advised, no one except members of this department shall be allowed to ride on any fire suppression vehicles. Any exceptions (certain dignitaries, etc.) will be with the permission of the Chief or a Deputy Chief only. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: APPARATUS REPAIRS #_____503______EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 1, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

This department will continue to utilize our “Form 52” as a method to request repairs to the apparatus and stations.

1. After completing all information, the white or top copy is to be placed in the appropriate apparatus’ map book file, or, if station related, placed in the file in the station’s office.

2. The yellow or second copy is routed through the Battalion Commander to the Operations Chief.

3. If apparatus related, information shall be noted on the daily truck check sheet. Note: the information shall be carried-over to the next month’s sheet, if not handled the previous month.

4. Upon completion of repairs, the white copy is to be completed with regards to date repaired and who repaired, then forward to the Deputy Chief/Operations.

5. All repairs shall be logged in the station log book on the date the repairs are completed or when the apparatus is returned repaired.

If the repair is of a serious nature, the originating officer should contact the Battalion Commander to start the repair process as soon as possible, without waiting for the paperwork to reach the Deputy Chief/Operations.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PROPER USE OF FIRE DRAINS # 504 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

To avoid "blowing seals" on our fire pumps: It has been determined by representatives of Pierce Apparatus Company and the mechanics we have dealt with that the problem may be rectified by relieving the pressure on the valves before opening same. Operation: Whenever the fire pumps are being used and are under pressure and the operation has been completed, relieve the pressure on the pump by opening a nozzle, a pressure relief valve or opening a gate valve, etc. before opening the master drain. DO NOT USE THE MASTER DRAIN VALVES AS PRESSURE RELIEF DRAINS.

It would also help to keep the master drain valves and the change-over valves clean and free from corrosion. They should be opened and shut several times each day when checking out the vehicles. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: FILLING OXYGEN BOTTLES # 505b EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

The following procedures will insure the health and safety of our personnel when filling oxygen cylinders from our oxygen cascade system.

PROCEDURE FOR FILLING OXYGEN CYLINDERS:

The following is the basic procedure for filling, exchanging and testing Clinton Township Fire Department oxygen cylinders for our cascade system. This system is located in the storage building at our Headquarters Station and our Station two (15 Mile Rd. Station).

The system consists of 4 "H" oxygen cylinders at 2300 PSIG. Each cascade cylinder has a chain and numbered tag from 1 through 4. The numbers are located on the cylinders based on individual pressure remaining. The cylinder with the lowest pressure should be tagged with the #1 tag, the next lowest pressure with the #2 tag, and so on, with the highest pressure cylinder tagged with the #4 tag. The order the cylinders are chained to the wall makes no difference, as long as they are tagged and used in the proper order when filling.

FILLING PORTABLE BOTTLES:

1. Fill portable oxygen bottles when they reach a minimum pressure of 500 PSIG.

2. Remove the protection plug on the cascade fill hose, attach the cascade fill hose to the cylinder valve and hand tighten. 3. Open the portable cylinder stem fully, with the valve wrench.

4. Open the mainline shut-off valve, near master pressure gauge.

5. Starting with cascade cylinder #1, open valve slowly. Watch master pressure gauge on cascade system and fill portable “D” cylinders to a 2015 PSI maximum.

6. If cylinder #1 does not completely fill the portable cylinder, close #1 cylinder, go to #2 cylinder and repeat process until proper pressure is reached. Monitor master gauge continuously. 7. After completion of filling bottles, replace the protection plug on the cascade fill hose.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #505b Page 2 of 2

EXCHANGING EMPTY/LOW CASCADE CYLINDERS:

1. Make sure all cylinder shutoff valves are closed. Bleed down manifold and close mainline shutoff valve. Use tank wrench and loosen coupling nuts on flexible hose system of ONLY the cylinder being replaced. Remove the wall mounted chain. Remove empty/low cylinder and replace with full cylinder.

2. Move the tank number tags in this order: a. Lowest pressure = tank #1 and so on......

b. Highest pressure = tank #4

TESTING SYSTEM PRESSURES:

This daily cascade pressure test is to be performed daily. Any problems should be reported immediately to the Battalion Commander through the Station Officer.

DAILY TESTING PROCEDURE:

1. Close main shutoff valve near the master pressure gauge and turn on each cylinder ONE AT A TIME to check individual pressure. 2. Log these pressures on the daily system checklist indicating the pressure reading of each cylinder.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: AERIAL TRUCK OUTRIGGERS # 506b EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Whenever possible, when raising an aerial ladder, put outriggers all the way out on both sides. This is a safety procedure. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PREP BATTERIES # 507c EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 5, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

All five stations have Motorola Chargers and Motorola Battery Maintenance Systems for the portable radio batteries. Effective immediately, all of the apparatus drivers will be responsible for rotating all portable and spare batteries at the start of their shift. They will “RAPID-CHARGE” the ones they exchange.

When the driver checks the appropriate box on their truck checkout sheet for radio equipment, this will indicate not only the proper operation of the equipment, but also that all of the batteries have been exchanged with fresh one. All prep batteries must be cycled (Conditioned) monthly through the Motorola Battery Maintenance System provided at each station. It shall be the Station Captain’s responsibility to see to it that this conditioning is done and recorded on the Battery Cycle Log provided for each station and will assure that information is also logged into the computer system.

Motorola Battery Maintenance System Information:

Each section of the battery adapter unit is labeled with three sets of lightning bolts. From left to right, the first set of lightning bolts with “3X” designates the “CONDITION” function. The middle set of two lightning bolts designates “DISCHARGE“ (ignore), and the three lightning bolt on the right side is for the “Analyze” function. A shaded lightning bolts means “Charging” and an unshaded one indicates “Discharging” during a cycle. For additional information on this system, refer to the Motorola Battery Maintenance System Manual for detailed instruction and additional information.

Daily Charging:

For normal (daily) charging, place the battery(ies) in the Motorola Battery Maintenance System and DO NOT PUSH any button; the battery will automatically begin a quick/rapid charge.

Monthly Maintenance:

Place the battery in the adapter and press the “ANALYZE” button (three lightning bolts). The charger will first top-off the battery, then completely discharge it, then fully charge it. DO NOT remove the battery from the charger before the “READY” light is lit. Once “READY” light appears, record the level of the charge indicated by the LCD display on the charger. This display indicates milli-amp hours (mAh), and must be above 1300.

Batteries Under 1300 mAh – Condition Mode:

If the battery has an unsatisfactory capacity (under 1300 mAh), the battery should be sent through the “CONDITION” mode, the button labeled with the “3X” and bracketed lightning bolts. If the battery fails to register greater than 1300 after conditioning, remove it from service, file a Form 52 and send the battery back to headquarters for disposal. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: APPARATUS/VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: AIR COMPRESSOR CHECK OUT # 508 PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

The following procedure will be performed prior to starting compressor and also during the weekly check of all small engines and equipment. Recording of all items checked will be made on the following check sheet. 3 1. Visually check oil level in sight glass. Oil should cover /4 of the sight glass with a small bubble at the top. 2. If needed, fill with compressor oil only, using small funnel. You must fill slowly as the oil will temporarily fill the sight glass unit it is allowed to settle. Do not overfill.

3. Visually and manually check belts for wear and tightness. 4. Visually check air monitoring equipment. 5. Drain moisture trap under unit. If bowl is more than half full, transfer waste oil/water to available jug for proper disposal. 6. Record compressor hours.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #508 Page 2 of 2

AIR COMPRESSOR CHECK OUT SHEET

CHARTERTOWNSHIPOFCLINTON Section: APPARATUS / VEHICLES / DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS EQUIPMENT STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: AERIAL APPARATUS TRUCK # 509b CHECKS EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

It is under the advisement of Pierce that the trucks (T-4, T-1 and the Quint) are subjected to unnecessary wear and tear by setting-up the aerial apparatus daily during the morning truck checks. Thus, it will be sufficient to conduct a full operational check on the ladder and outrigger devices following these guidelines:

• Saturday mornings, during the daily truck check • The next truck check, following utilization on a fire scene • When driven by personnel not normally assigned to the vehicle • When probationary employees are assigned to the vehicle, for training purposes

This does not exclude the vehicles from the daily vehicle check (SOP #601). CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: STATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DAILY VEHICLE CHECKOUT #_____601b______EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

In the interest of safety, for our personnel as well as the general public, the daily vehicle check out procedures should be adhered to as follows:

1. All vehicles will be pulled out onto the ramp. In the event of inclement weather, the vehicles can be checked indoors; all bay doors shall be opened completely. The vehicle can be connected to the plymovent at idle speed for a maximum of five minutes.

2. If the vehicles are checked indoors, the heat in the apparatus room will be shut off.

3. Sirens are to be tested behind all stations. The test should be as brief as possible. Never knowingly “hit” a siren or public address system when other fire personnel or members of the public are in the immediate perimeter, without warning them (giving them time to exit area, or protect their ears).

4. The apparatus should be run at least long enough for the thermostat to open.

5. No apparatus shall be housed longer than a week without being road run for a minimum of two miles.

6. The daily check out sheet shall be completely filled out and signed/initialed by the employee doing the check out.

7. Any problems encountered during the check out will be brought to the attention of the company officer. A Form 52 shall be filled out, signed by the firefighter and the officer, and forwarded to the Operations Chief for repairs. The information shall also be recorded on the daily check out sheet.

8. At the end of the month, the Station Captain shall assure all outstanding discrepancies are transferred to the next month’s check out sheet.

9. The Station Captain shall then forward the previous month’s daily check out sheet to the Deputy Chief of Operations.

This procedure will be followed on all vehicle checkouts. Refer to SOP #509 for the schedule for conducting aerial apparatus checks.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: STATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: BUILDING REPAIRS #_____602b______EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

To facilitate repairs or maintenance to the stations, Form #52, a two-part carbonless form will be utilized.

1. Fully completed white (top) copy to be taken by the reporting officer and placed in the station’s Form 52 file

2. Yellow (bottom) copy routed through Battalion Commander to the Deputy Chief of Administration.

3. Upon completion of repairs, white copy is to be completed with regards to date repaired and who repaired, then routed through the Battalion Commander to the Deputy Chief of Administration.

4. All repairs shall be logged in the station log book on the date the repairs are completed.

If the repair or maintenance request is of a serious nature, the originating officer should contact the Battalion Commander immediately to start the repair process as soon as possible. The Battalion Commander may contact one of the Deputy Chiefs to facilitate this action.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: STATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PARKING AT STATIONS #______604b______EFFECTIVE DATE: AUGUST 20, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Sufficient parking spaces are provided for personal vehicles at each station. There will be no personal vehicles parked inside any of the fire stations overnight for any reason.

There are to be no personal vehicles parked in front of any of the bay doors at any of the stations.

No personal vehicles are to be parked in the front of any station.

Temporary placement of vehicles in front of the rear bay doors at all stations is permitted only for the purpose of loading/unloading or washing of vehicles.

There are to be no vehicles parked in front of station dumpsters at any time.

The parking spaces on the east side (closest to the building) of the rear parking lot at Station 4 are reserved for official Fire Department staff vehicles only.

Fire Department staff vehicles not being utilized due to vacations, etc., are to be parked in the Fire Department parking lot on the south side of Greenfield at Station 4 or in the parking area at Station 5.

Personal vehicles of staff personnel who also drive official Fire Department staff vehicles are to be parked in the Fire Department parking lot on the south side of Greenfield at Station 4.

Battalion Commanders and Company Officers are responsible for the enforcement of this policy.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: STATIONS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: REQUESTING MATERIALS AND # 605 SUPPLIES EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 1, 2000 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

The Captain in charge of each station (Senior Captain at Station 4) shall submit a supply requisition to the Fire Department Supply Officer on the first day of each month. The purpose of this monthly supply requisition Form #25 is to: 1. Secure needed station supplies.

2. Keep an inventory of supplies being requested and utilized.

3. Provide a record keeping system which allows orderly purchases by the Fire Department Supply Officer. The monthly supply requisition is to be thoroughly completed based upon the anticipated station needs for supplies during the upcoming month. Sufficient supplies should be on hand in each station so that mid-month supply trips are not necessitated.

A Company Officer may submit an emergency supply requisition (Form 25A) to his/her Battalion Commander. If the request is approved and filled by the Battalion Commander, the emergency supply requisition is to be signed by that Battalion Commander and forwarded to the Fire Department Supply Officer. Any supplies taken for use must be accounted for by a signed requisition. All requests for non-stock special or unusual supplies or materials for a station are to be directed to the Captain in Charge of the station, who shall forward such requests, at his/her discretion to the Platoons Battalion Chief. The Battalion Chief may present the request at a Staff Meeting or contact the Deputy Chief/Operations for approval. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TRAINING DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE- EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DEPARTMENT TRAINING #_____701c____ EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

The objective of the training program is to provide a means for each employee to perform at the highest level of efficiency and safety. With the accomplishment of this goal, each employee will be able to ensure their own safety, as well as the safety of their co-workers and our Township residents.

1. The Training Chief shall plan and coordinate the training programs. The Training Chief shall assign training objectives monthly and shall periodically post and/or update the scheduled daily training on the department’s computerized training database system.

2. When available, specialized training programs shall be performed, or arranged for, by the Training Chief, Training Officer or designated instructor. Scheduling will be coordinated with the Battalion Commander.

3. The Company Officer shall conduct or attend training Monday through Friday. If the Company Officer needs special assistance to conduct any training programs, a request should be submitted in writing to the Training Division as far in advance as possible. The Training Division will provide necessary equipment and training aids.

4. Companies shall make a reasonable effort to train for a minimum of two (2) hours each day.

5. The Company Officer will accurately record all training on the fire department training database; this shall include the actual starting time and duration.

6. If there is reason to change the posted starting time of instructor-led training, or, if training needs to be cancelled for any given day, the Battalion Commander shall confer with the Chief of Training. If there is a discrepancy, the Deputy Chief of Operations shall decide the activities of the day.

7. The start time of company-based, Company Officer-led training may be changed if it does not disrupt pre-scheduled organized training. This will give Company Officers the maximum amount of flexibility in planning their work days. Any change of times shall be reported to the Battalion Commander.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #701c Page 2 of 2

8. Participation in the physical fitness program is 10:00 – 11:30 hours. The Company Officers will assure the participants of their company get physical fitness training credit, by documenting such on the training database system (an ISO allowance).

9. Training shall include all members of the company.

10. Probationary firefighter training or special training programs may be conducted on Saturdays, Sundays or evenings.

11. Battalion Commanders or Company Officers may assign subordinates, who have expertise in the chosen training objective, to serve as instructors. The Battalion Commander or Company Officer must supervise the training program.

12. The Training Division, Battalion Commander and/or Company Officers must consider weather conditions when scheduling out-of-door training. If weather conditions are not suitable, those officers will substitute a program of choice that can be conducted indoors.

a. Unsuitable weather conditions in the summer months shall be a heat index of 90 or more, and in the winter months, a wind chill of 10 or less. This shall be determined by the cable Weather Channel.

b. An exception to the wind-chill condition will be made for specialized cold weather training, such as, but not limited to, cold water/ice rescue training.

c. An exception to the heat index will be made for boat and water rescue training and trainings held inside of structures.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TRAINING DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PROBATIONARY TRAINING # 702b RESPONSIBILITIES EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 24, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

Probationary Employee Responsibilities

1. A "Probation Book" will be issued to new firefighters when beginning their probationary period. This book will spell out the training goals and accomplishments, which are to be met on a scheduled basis throughout the probationary period. 2. Probationary employees are to have their Probation Book with them each day while on duty. 3. The Probation Book is to be presented to the Company Officer each morning by the probationary employee when reporting for duty. 4. Each section in the Probation Book relating to individual companies is to be completed during the corresponding company assignment during probation. 5. Specific probationary training will be scheduled each day for the probationary employee by the Company Officer per the following daily schedule:

Probation Book Activities - Monday - Friday duty days: 1500-1700 hours Saturday - Sunday duty days: 1300-1700 hrs.

Street Study - Every duty day: 1900-2100 hours 6. A street test (section map) is to be taken the last (3rd) day of every work swing. SOP 703 details Probationary street testing procedures. 7. The Probation Book is to be presented to the Company Officer each day after the completion of probationary training activities for the purpose of recording completed training.

Company Officer Responsibilities 1. Each Company Officer will become familiar with the Probation Book of each probationary employee as he/she is assigned to the company. The necessary probationary training which is to be accomplished during that time is spelled out in the Probation Book.

2. Each probationary employee will be on a rotating schedule of mmostost companies, which will only allow a designated number of duty days at each specific company. The Company Officer should feel confident in the probationary employee having had sufficient training to be qualified as a "regular" firefighter in that company.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #702b Page 2 of 3

3. The Probation Book is to be presented to the Company Officer at the beginning of each duty day by the probationary employee to enable the Company Officer to review what has been completed and establish the probationary training goals for the day. 4. Probationary training will be given in addition to the regularly scheduled department training. 5. The Company Officer, although the primary instructor, may designate another officer and/or firefighter to train the probationary firefighter. 6. The Company Officer is to see that the probationary employee is given a Street Test on a map section the third duty day of each swing. 7. After the completion of probationary training activities for the day the Company Officer is to record the training which has been accomplished or completed on that day. 8. The Company Officer will, additionally, complete a "Daily Probation Report", review the evaluation report with the probationary employee, both the officer and the probationary employee shall sign it and the officer shall forward it to his/her Battalion Chief.

9. At the conclusion of the probationary employee's tour of duty with a company, the regularly assigned Company Officer will submit a letter of evaluation of the probationary employee's performance and proficiency to the Battalion Chief. Both the officer and the probationary employee shall sign the evaluation form.

Battalion Chief Responsibilities

1. The Battalion Chief will continually assess the probationary training progress of each probationary employee on his/her platoon and provide the necessary cooperation, direction and assistance, as may be needed, to enable the Company Officers to complete the goals established in the Probation Book. 2. The Battalion Chief will review "Daily Probation Reports" and keep the original copy on file. 3. At the conclusion of each probationary employee's tour of duty with a company, the Battalion Chief will review the Company Officer's evaluation of the probationary employee with the Company Officer, then follow up with an evaluation review with the probationary employee. 4. Deficiencies in a probationary employee's evaluation, daily probation reports or performance are to be immediately reported to the Fire Department Administration in an attempt to resolve deficiencies in a timely fashion. 5. Prior to the conclusion of a probationary firefighter's probationary period, the Battalion Chief will submit a letter of overall evaluation of the employee and make recommendations to the Deputy Chief/Operations with regard to continued employment as "Regular Firefighter". With this letter the Battalion Chief will forward the "Probationary Employees Book" and all of the original evaluation reports from both Company Officers and the Battalion Chief to the Deputy Chief/Operation.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #702b Page 3 of 3

6. During the first two weeks of employment, the probationary employee shall be assigned to the Training Division. The first week will be used to review the required books, paperwork, and policies. The second week will be used to help orientate the new employee with the various stations, equipment and crews as a "ride-a-long". The probationary employee will be scheduled at HQ for their ride-along with designated platoon assignment. Their assigned Battalion Chief shall meet with the probationary employee during orientation or shortly there after to explain the Battalion Chief’s expectations. At the conclusion of the two (2) week period the probationary employee shall begin their twenty-four (24) hour shifts.

7. For the next 45 scheduled work days the Battalion Chief will schedule the probationary employee at each station for nine consecutive work days. It is preferred their five station rotation begins at a single company station. When the probationary employee is scheduled at Station 1 and Station 4, the probationary employee will be assigned to the Truck/Rescue companies. The purpose of this rotation is to expose the probationary employee to each station without the redundancy of similar companies.

8. The remaining probationary time will be used as an evaluation period of basic skills. The Battalion Chief shall schedule the probationary employee at an engine company using a Sutphen, Pierce, American LaFrance and Truck 1/Rescue 1 for 12 consecutive work days at each company. The probationary employee shall also be scheduled for 18 consecutive days on Truck 4/Rescue 4. The T4/R4 rotation shall include an evaluation in dispatch. For this reason, It is preferred the T4/R4 assignment is last in the probationary employees rotation. These Assignments shall include: A. One day of each swing in Driver position at assigned company B. When scheduled at Headquarters, two days at Nightwatch (2200-0800) with supervision of regular Nightwatch person C. Day watches each day with direct company officer supervision (not to interfere with scheduled training times) 9. In addition, this evaluation period will be used for performance/skills testing. Performance testing will be proctored by the Battalion Chief and a Company Officer. A member of the Training Division should be present, if possible, to ensure consistency in the testing process. These tests will include pump operations, watch room, EMS, engine, and truck/rescue modules as developed by the Training Division. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TRAINING DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PROBATIONARY STREET TEST

#703 EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 24, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 OF 2

Introduction

The street tests administered during the probationary period are designed to have the new employee become familiar with the Charter Township of Clinton. When responding out of the station or from the road it is imperative our employees have a very good idea where the call for help originated. This is an important component in delivering high quality services to our residents.

Section Tests

Section Tests will be taken every third day of a swing while on probation. The probationary employee shall fill in a blank section map and is graded to the current section map in the Map Book by their Company Officer. Any misspelled street will be marked wrong. A grade of 90% or higher will be considered passing. A score of 89% or lower will require a retest on the next work day. There will not be a delay taking the next street section test due to a retest. If the employee fails the second test the section shall be considered failed. If an employee fails three retests they are subject to reprimand or suspension from duty without pay, dismissal from the department or such other penalties as may be determined according to civil service PA 78.

Final Test

The final street test shall be a minimum 500 street oral exam. A correct answer shall consist of a minimum: A: Closest major intersection with geographical orientation For example: Abela – North / West of Garfield and 15 Mile Rd.

Or B: Complex name with complex location For example-Apple Creek is in Rivergate Subdivision which is between Romeo Plank and Heydenreich Road, south of Hall Road.

Or C: A general description accepted by the evaluator.

The streets shall be picked randomly from throughout the township. A final answer must be given within 20 seconds of the question being asked. A final grade of 90% or higher must be achieved to pass. If the probationary employee fails the final street test, a retest shall be given in a timely manner. If the retest is failed, the department has the discretion to retest again or the probationary employee is subject to reprimand or suspension from duty without pay, dismissal from the department or such other penalties as may be determined according to civil service PA 78. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #703 Page 2 of 2

MAJOR INTERSECTION STREETS

East-West North-South

14 Mile Road Aynesley

15 Mile Road Cimmarron

16 Mile Road Clinton River Road

17 Mile Road Garfield

18 Mile Road Gratiot

19 Mile Road Groesbeck

Beaconsfield Harper

Canal Hayes

Cass Heydenreich

Cottrell Kelly

Dunham Lipke

Finley Little Mack

Glenwood Little Road

Greenfield Millar

Hall Road Moravian

Harrington Romeo Plank

Joy Union Lake Road

Quinn Utica Road

Wellington Crescent

Unforgettable Address:

19708 Tanglewood Circle CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: SPECIAL OPS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: MACOMB COUNTY TECH # 750 RESCUE DISPATCH EFFECTIVE DATE: April 11, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

PURPOSE:

This policy is to provide the structure for which we shall participate in the Macomb County Technical Rescue Team (MCTRT). Collapse rescue alarms may include rope rescue, confined space, trench, and structural collapse incidents. They may be the result of fire, construction accidents, natural disasters, or other causes. This plan provides a general framework for handling such an incident.

OBJECTIVE:

Along with providing a minimum five member response to the MCTRT, we will also be the central dispatch center to receive and transmit alarms.

DISPATCH:

MCTRT will receive a request for aid through the CTFD dispatch by either phone or 800 MHz radio.

The dispatcher will complete the MCTRT request form.

The dispatcher will contact Sterling Heights Fire Dispatch (586-264-8835) with information from the MCTRT Request Form.

The dispatcher will contact Shelby Township Fire Dispatch (586-731-2121 Ext.3) with information from the MCTRT Request Form.

The dispatcher will notify the B.C. of the MCTRT request.

The B.C. will assemble a 5-man response using on-duty team members first, and on duty non-team members. The list of CTFD Members is provided in the County Tech Dispatch binder located in the Watchroom and on the daily schedule.

Off-duty CTFD Macomb County TRT members will respond to all Clinton Township incidents when the MCTRT is notified.

The dispatcher will send a NOTIFICATION text page to all team via Collapse Rescue Notification icon with all pertinent information.

The dispatcher will monitor 50SPEV3. Temporarily Out of Service

Upon request, the dispatcher will send a RESPONSE text page via the Collapse Rescue Response icon with all pertinent information. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #750 Page 2 of 2 Upon request, the dispatcher will send a TERMINATION text page via the Collapse Rescue Termination icon with all pertinent information.

EQUIPMENT:

The tow vehicles and trailers to be used are as follows:

Rope Rescue – use any department vehicle approved by the B.C.

Confined Space Rescue – use U-2 as tow vehicle for the white confined space trailer.

Trench and Structural Collapse – use U-3 as tow vehicle for the red collapse trailer.

TEAM MEMBERS:

Team members will be selected by the Chief of the CTFD. All members will be required to attend 50% of all training sessions and expected to get all of the following certifications within 24 months of joining the team.

Rope Technician, Confined Space Technician, Trench Rescue Technician, and Structural Collapse Operations.

Current team members are:

T.C. Dave McIntyre

Capt. Ron Glashauser

Capt. Ron Waegenaere

F.F. Steve Domanski

F.F. Tim Duncan

F.F. Al Stockwell

F.F. Jason Kropf

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: DRUG KIT & LIFEPAK #______801______SECURITY EFFECTIVE DATE: MARCH 14, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

The drug kits in service on any apparatus are to remain locked until ready to be removed for use on an incident.

Additionally, any time that an ALS apparatus leaves the station for repairs, the following items shall be removed from the vehicle and placed in a secure area in the station:

Drug Kits (Grey Drug Box and Black IV/Trauma Box) Mark I Kit LIFEPAK 12 Monitor

Likewise, any time that a BLS apparatus leaves the station for repairs, the following items shall be removed from the vehicle and placed in a secure area in the station:

Epi-Pen Kit Mark I Kit AED

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: EMSystems Website # 802 a EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Effective July 1, 2006 the EMSystem-Hospital Status Program was implemented by the Macomb County Medical Control Authority. The EMSystem is a web- based program providing real-time information on hospital emergency facility status, and is used to coordinate emergency medical operations throughout the region. Dispatch personnel may confirm hospital status and advise on-scene personnel by logging in to the website. Decisions pertaining to patient transport will be made in accordance with the Macomb County Patient Transport/Rerouting Protocol (Annex 2).

The EMSystems Website (www1.emsystem.com) shall remain bookmarked on the CTFD Dispatch Computer.

Instructions for log in:

Username: clint Password: local1381

CTFD personnel are not to make any changes to the EMSystems website, including but not limited to log in password and username, without permission from the Fire Chief or EMS Officer.

In the event of a website failure, hospitals may be contacted by telephone if necessary:

Mt. Clemens Regional Medical Center: 586-468-5020 Henry Ford- Macomb: 586-286-5250 St. John’s North Shores: 586-465-0060 William Beaumont Troy: 248-964-8787

For additional information reference Macomb County Emergency Medical Services Communications Protocol.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: ALS PROCEDURES

#803b EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2009 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

PURPOSE:

To provide direction to Fire Department personnel who respond to emergency medical incidents.

POLICY:

It shall be the policy of the Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue-EMS (CTFD), when notified of an emergency medical incident, to immediately respond with the proper department aid and follow the guidelines below:

PATIENT CARE & TRANSPORT:

For the purpose of determining on-scene authority between ALS providers, the primary consideration will be the order of initial patient contact. Any transfer of patient care will be done in accordance with Macomb County EMS protocol.

If a CTFD Paramedic is the first ALS provider to make patient contact, that Medic shall be the “Medic of Record” for that patient. Based on the priority of the patient, a decision will be made whether the CTFD Medic will continue primary care to the hospital with the private ambulance.

Priority 1 Patient: CTFD Medic to the hospital with the ambulance. Exception: Patient care may be turned-over to the ambulance company if necessary, to respond to another life-threatening emergency. This must be by mutual agreement of the agencies.

Priority 2 Patient: CTFD Medic may accompany the patient to the hospital, or may transfer care to a Medic on the ambulance.

Priority 3 Patient: CTFD Medic will transfer care to the ambulance company for transport, however, the CTFD Medic/EMT may accompany the ambulance to the hospital if requested.

If the ambulance company’s Paramedic is the first ALS provider to make patient contact, that Medic shall be the “Medic of Record” for the patient. CTFD personnel may accompany the patient to the hospital at any time at the request of the ambulance personnel. The CTFD Medic is to assist in the back of the ambulance (not driving the ambulance).

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE # 803b Page 2 of 2

Inter-agency cooperation is imperative for professional patient care. At all times, decisions are to be made following Regional Protocols and the best interest of the patient. If a dispute arises regarding patient care that cannot be resolved between the agencies (on-scene), Medical Control should be contacted for guidance.

ALS units cannot be in service without at least one AEMT and a sealed drug box.

REPORTING:

A Macomb County EMS Form shall be completed for all patients when a CTFD Paramedic is the “Medic of Record”. The “Medic of Record” is responsible for completion of this form. To comply with a mandate of the Macomb County Medical Control/Authority Board’s Professional Standards Review Organization (PSRO) Committee, CTFD Paramedics shall document the time of all CTFD defibrillation attempts, intubation attempts and IV attempts. Failure to document this information constitutes a violation of a PSRO Committee mandate.

NFIRS:

The Company Officer in charge of the scene shall be responsible for completion of the NFIRS report. All Advanced Life Support procedures performed are to be recorded in the Advanced EMS Module Flow Chart. The Medic of Record shall complete the Advanced EMS Module.

AUTHORITY:

When there is more than one CTFD Paramedic, assigned to a fire company at roll call, the designation of “Medic of Record” shall be assigned by the Company Officer. A Company Officer faced with time trades, sick times usages, or any other change in personnel that may occur throughout the day, will exercise their authority and manage the circumstances to meet the needs of the department. When assigning “Medic of Record” duty, the Company Officer shall consider the needs of each employee.

The Company Officer will retain over-all scene authority, however, the “Medic of Record”, regardless of agency, has the authority over patient care.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: EQUIPMENT RESTOCKING

#804a EFFECTIVE DATE: JUNE 17, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

PURPOSE:

To ensure that all fire department stations and apparatus maintain an adequate supply of EMS equipment to comply with all laws and protocols.

PROCEDURE:

Master EMS Supply Inventory:

It is the responsibility of the EMS Officer to maintain a master supply inventory and order replacement supplies as needed.

Vehicle EMS Supply Inventory:

The Station Captain shall ensure a monthly inventory of each licensed EMS vehicle in their station is conducted prior to the 15th of each month. This includes all EMS bags, cabinets and equipment on the vehicle. Any missing items will be replaced from the station EMS supply inventory. Vehicle EMS Supply Inventory forms will remain at that station. Note: This does not relieve personnel from checking inventory daily.

Station EMS Supply Inventory:

The Station Captain shall ensure a monthly EMS Supply Inventory Request is completed and that form is routed to the EMS Officer prior to the 15th day of each month. If the EMS Officer does not receive a monthly request the Operations Chief will be notified. The EMS Officer will fill each station’s monthly supply request from the master inventory.

Drug Boxes, Fluid Boxes and Ancillary Packs:

Following Macomb County EMS Protocols, this equipment will be restocked at the hospital by the Paramedic of Record. Note: Drug boxes may not be exchanged in the field with the ambulance company. If a paramedic discovers a problem with a drug box issued to our department, the EMS Officer will be contacted and a County Incident Form will be completed, per county protocol. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #804a Page 2 of 2

Ambulance Company Equipment Exchange:

The following equipment is to be restocked from the ambulance on scene or at the hospital:

Airway/O2 supplies Bandaging/Trauma supplies Oral Glucose

Critical Equipment Replacement:

In the event a critical piece of equipment, for example, a cardiac monitor, goes out of service, the Battalion Commander will be notified of the equipment failure and the vehicle status for EMS response. The EMS Officer will be notified, if necessary, to correct the situation.

Emergency Supply Requests:

Emergency requests for supplies will be handled in one of the following ways:

1) During staff business hours, contact the EMS Officer or the Training Division for assistance.

2) When the EMS Officer/Training Division is unavailable (after normal business hours, weekends and holidays), contact the Battalion Commander to retrieve the item(s) from stock at another station.

3) If the stock cannot be supplied by the above method, call the EMS Officer.

Requests for the following items require a written explanation be submitted to the EMS Officer:

• Drug box/epi pens (requires incident report per medical control) • Lifepack 12 or Lifepack 500 (damaged; not working; or missing) • Lifepack 12 cables/leads (including pulse ox) • Glucometer • Thermoscan thermometer • Oxygen cylinders/regulators • KED Board/long back board and spider straps (non-disposable) • Stokes basket (including hardware) • Traction splint • EMS jump bags

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: QUALITY ASSURANCE (QA)

#805a EFFECTIVE DATE: JUNE 17, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 3

PURPOSE:

To ensure the highest quality of patient care is being delivered and that treatment protocols and department policies are being adhered to.

POLICY:

It shall be the policy of the Clinton Township Department of Fire-Rescue- EMS, will maintain quality assurance (QA) records for all EMS responses. QA data will be submitted as required by law.

CTFD “MEDIC OF RECORD”:

When a CTFD paramedic is the medic of record for a patient, a Macomb County EMS Form will be completed by the medic of record. Copies of this form will be disseminated at the hospital as indicated on the form. The remaining copies will be submitted to the EMS Officer.

CTFD - NOT “MEDIC OF RECORD”:

If the CTFD paramedic is not the medic of record all EMS procedures performed by CTFD personnel will be recorded in the Advanced EMS Module of the NFIRS report.

QA REVIEW:

The EMS Officer will review all patient care reports, maintain a QA file, and submit data as required by law. The EMS Officer will initiate a Quality Assurance Form if additional information and/or clarification is required for a report. This form will be submitted to the appropriate Battalion Chief (see attached form)

Request for Incident Review:

CTFD personnel may request review of an incident by submitting the Request for Incident Review Form to the EMS Officer (see attached form).

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #805a Page 2 of 2

CTFD QUALITY ASSURANCE

CTFD INCIDENT # INCIDENT DATE:

COMPANY OFFICER: MEDIC:

REFERRED TO:

______Battalion Chief Date

______C. O. Date

______Medic Date

EXPLANATION REQUESTED:

Pt. care inconsistent with protocols ET/Defib time missing

Physician/pharmacy signature missing Incomplete/inappropriate narrative

Controlled substance not accounted for Incomplete form (data missing)

Details:

Explanation: ______

______

______

______

______

Explanation submitted by: ______Date: ______

Approved by Battalion Chief: ______Date: ______

Note: Please return completed Quality Assurance Forms to the EMS Officer within two weeks. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #805a Page 3 of 3

Request for Incident Review

Please complete and forward to the EMS Officer to request review of an EMS response.

CTFD Incident #: ______Date: ______

I am requesting review of (include details below):

______Ambulance response time

______Ambulance crew’s patient care

______Ambulance crew/CTFD interaction

______Other EMS Agency

______911 Dispatch

______CTPD Response Time

______CTPD/CTFD agency interaction

______Hospital Emergency Dept. Staff

______Hospital Pharmacy

______Other

Details: ______

Request Submitted by:______CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: REQUEST FOR INCIDENT

#806 REVIEW EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 2004 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

PURPOSE:

To ensure that the highest quality of care is delivered to all persons requesting EMS assistance in Clinton Township.

POLICY:

In the event an issue arises that affects the quality of care delivered in Clinton Township (including, but not limited to, the private ambulance company, the police department, any other agency on scene, Medcom or the receiving hospital), a Request For Incident Review form (see attached form) will be completed and forwarded to the EMS Officer.

The EMS Officer will investigate the issue and address the situation as appropriate. If the situation requires the completion and submission of any County paperwork, for example, a Macomb County Incident Report, the EMS Officer will assist the personnel involved in completing the appropriate documentation.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: CANINE OXYGEN # 807 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

Supplemental Oxygen Mask

The supplemental O2 masks can be used to provide oxygen to animals that are in respiratory distress. The mask has a 22mm x hose barb adapter on the inlet side, allowing you to connect either oxygen tubing (included) or the adapter can be removed to allow the attachment of a standard 22mm resuscitation bag or to an anesthesia machine breathing circuit. The mask also has dual vents on the sides to allow unrestricted inhalation and exhalation. If oxygen flow is set too low for patient requirement, the vents will allow the patient to inhale ambient air. If oxygen flow is set too high for patient requirement, the vents will allow excess air to escape. (See photos on page two.)

Operation: 1. Connect O2 tube to O2 supply or remove 22mm/ O2 fitting and connect to an anesthesia machine or resuscitation bag. 2. Seal mask over patient’s mouth and nose. 3. Set appropriate O2 flow rate for the patient. Feline mask: 1-3 liters Small Canine mask: 3-5 liters Large Canine mask: 5-7 liters Note: For long term insufflation of O2, it should be flowed through a bubble type humidifier to prevent mucosal drying.

Cleaning: The masks and tubing should be cleaned after each use with a dilute chlorhexidine solution or mild soap and water. For the best method for cleaning, remove the diaphragm and 22mm adapter from the mask. Dry parts and reinstall diaphragm and adapter for the next use.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: PHARMACEUTICAL # 808 DISTRIBUTION EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Emergency Distribution of Pharmaceuticals (Community Readiness Initiative)

The Clinton Township Fire Department stockpiles equipment and supplies at Fire Station 5 for the emergency distribution of pharmaceuticals to the public. In the event of a need for mass pharmaceutical distribution, this equipment will be transported to the assigned distribution sites (one bin to each site). Fire Department personnel will not staff or supply a distribution site without the presence of armed police protection at all times.

Two Storage bins located in the Station 5 Mezzanine containing the following supplies:

• 250 N95 HEPA Masks • 1/2 Case of hand sanitizer • 1 Gallon of disinfectant cleaner • 10 Clipboards • 50 Pens and 50 Pencils • 10 Orange reflective vests • 10 Full Personal Protection Kits • 125 Large Bio-hazard bags • 1 roll of yellow “Caution” Tape

Latex and Latex-free Gloves located in the Station 5 mezzanine are to be transported to the distribution sites as requested. The minimum stockpile at Station 5 includes:

• Latex Gloves: 10 Cases XL; 10 Cases L • Latex-free Gloves: 5 Cases XL; 5 Cases L; 5 Cases M; 5 Cases S

Additional Equipment to be taken to the distribution sites:

• Communications equipment including radios and/or cell phones (as needed). • 10 Barricades to each site (DPW) • Portable tables and chairs (DPW) • Triage Tags (From MCI bin located in Battalion 1) • APR Masks and cartridges (located on RRTN Vehicle) - as needed. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: EMS VEHICLES TAKEN OUT

# 809 OF SERVICE EFFECTIVE DATE: JANUARY 1, 2007 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

PURPOSE:

To ensure the fire department follows the Michigan Department of Public Health’s requirements when a licensed vehicle approved for EMS care is taken out of service.

POLICY:

If a licensed Advanced Life Support (ALS) vehicle is taken out of service, a licensed Basic Life Support (BLS) company may be temporarily upgraded to ALS. All ALS equipment must be transferred to the BLS apparatus and it must be staffed by at least one paramedic.

If a fire department EMS vehicle is taken out of service and a replacement is not available, the Battalion Commander must be notified.

If the number of licensed EMS vehicles is reduced for more than 24 hours, the Deputy Chief of Operations or Fire Chief must be notified.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: PATIENT CONFIDENTIALITY

#810 EFFECTIVE DATE: August 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

Purpose: To ensure patient confidentiality and comply with HIPAA requirements

Given the sensitive nature of the information, personnel are instructed to err on the side of confidentiality toward the patient. If unsure of what information to release, personnel should issue a “no comment” and refer the interested parties to the Fire Chief.

EMS Response: Fire Department Personnel are not to release any information to the media pertaining to EMS calls. This includes incident location, patient name, age, sex, race, type of injury, circumstances pertaining to the call, care given or hospital transported to.

Mass Casualty Incidents: A fire department spokesperson may provide general information including gross number of patients. No information may be released that could identify a specific patient.

Special Rescue Calls: Information may be released by a fire department spokesperson pertaining to the special rescue. Information pertaining to the patient(s) and/or their condition may not be released.

Fires with Victims: Information pertaining to the fire may be released by a fire department spokesperson; however, specifics about the condition and treatment of the patient(s) may not be released.

HANDLING OF EMS PAPERWORK:

All patient care reports and forms with identifying information will be disposed of via a shredder or destroyed so that patient information is not readable.

All EMS paperwork containing patient information transported via department mail will be placed in an interdepartmental type envelope.

Care should be taken that completed EMS paperwork containing patient information is not left out in plain view, lost or misplaced.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: EMS DEPARTMENT OF FIRE - RESCUE - EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: COUNTY MEDICAL

#811 CONTROL REPORTING EFFECTIVE DATE: August 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 of 1

The Macomb County Medical Control/Authority Board collects EMS data from all licensed life support agencies. Fire Department personnel will comply with the current Macomb County EMS Rules and Regulations and record all necessary data for submission.

The following data is currently submitted monthly to the Medical Control Board:

- Response Times - On-Scene Times (Pre-Hospital) - Number of IV Attempts - Number of Successful IVs - Number of ET/Tube Attempts - Number of Successful ET/Tube Attempts - Priority of Patient

The following procedure will take effect with the adoption of this SOP:

Both the Patient Care Report and the NFIRS Report will be used as a tracking tool to produce accurate statistics.

Data collection begins in the field with accurate reporting. Each medical procedure must be noted, with special attention to documenting times (or approximate times when personnel are busy) of procedures. Data is then transferred from the Patient Care Report (or street sheet) to the NFIRS report using the Advanced EMS Module Flow Chart.

The following information fields are to be completed for each event:

- Left Click on “Add” (for each separate event) - Change “Event Time” to the correct time of the procedure - Enter “Event Provider”(‘s) seniority number - Enter the type of “Aid Given” - If documenting vitals, complete appropriate field - For each successful intubation or IV attempt, check “Successful”. Do not check this box if the procedure was not successful.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: HARASSMENT # 901 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

On September 20, 1999 (revision), the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Policy Against Harassment, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

POLICY AGAINST HARASSMENT

In its efforts to maintain a positive work environment for all employees, the Charter Township of Clinton will not tolerate behavior that is determined to be harassing to other persons. Harassing behavior is an expression of perceived power and superiority by the harasser(s) over another person, usually for reasons over which the victim has little or no control: race, color, sex, age, disability, religion, ancestry, marital status, national origin, or place of birth. General Description of Harassing Behavior Harassing behavior is any unwelcome action by any person; management, customer or client and or co-worker, whether verbal or physical, on a single or repeated basis, which humiliates, insults or degrades. "Unwelcome" or "unwanted" in this context means any actions which the harasser knows or ought reasonably to know are not desired by the victim of the harassment. Sexual Harassment Sexual harassment means: 1. Making unwelcome sexual advances or request for sexual favors or other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature a condition of an employee's continued employment. 2. Making submission to or rejection of such conduct the basis for employment decisions affecting the employee. 3. Creating an intimidating, hostile or offensive working environment by such conduct. There are two types of sexual harassment claims: "Quid pro quo" (this for that) harassment: when a supervisor explicitly or implicitly threatens to fire, demote, transfer or fails to promote or adversely affects an employee if he or she does not agree to the supervisor's sexual demands. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #901 Page 2 of 2

"Hostile environment" harassment: when a supervisor, co-worker, or in some instances, even strangers to the workplace, create an intimidating or offensive employment environment. Complaint Procedures Any employee who thinks he or she has been the subject of harassment as described above shall take reasonable steps to report the harassing conduct immediately so that preventative or corrective action may be taken by the Township. An employee with a complaint should report it to the: 1. Department head or supervisor, if this individual is not the perpetrator of the harassing behavior; or 2. Human Resources Director. Department heads or supervisors who observe or have reported to them instance of harassment, should; 1. Notify the Human Resources Director immediately, and 2. Take reasonable steps to prevent and correct promptly harassing behavior. An investigation of the complaint will be undertaken immediately with the resolution reported to the employee. Employees should be aware that they may speak in confidence to their supervisor and/or the Human Resources Director in connection with such complaints. Retaliation or discrimination against employees for complaints is prohibited by law and will not be tolerated. Any employee found to have harassed another employee will be subject to appropriate disciplinary action up to and including termination. A supervisor who condones such actions, even if he or she does not participate, shall be subject to disciplinary action up to and including termination. All employees are expected to act in a responsible and professional manner to establish a working environment free of harassment. Adopted originally as "Sexual Harassment Policy" by Township Board on August 23, 1993; Amended by action of the Township Board September 20, 1999.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE – RESCUE – EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE Subject: COMPUTER USAGE

#902 POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 4

In May 2005, the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Computer Usage Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

Computer Network and Internet Access Policy

Disclaimer

The Internet is a worldwide net of computers that contains millions of pages of information. Users are cautioned that many of these pages include offensive, sexually explicit, and inappropriate material. In general, it is difficult to avoid at least some contact with this material while using the Internet. Even innocuous search requests may lead to sites with highly offensive content. Additionally, having an email address on the Internet may lead to receipt of unsolicited e-mail containing offensive content. Users accessing the Internet do so at their own risk and the Charter Township of Clinton is not responsible for material viewed or downloaded by users from the Internet. To minimize these risks, your use of the Internet at the Charter Township of Clinton is governed by the following policy:

Permitted Use of Internet and Township Computer Network

The computer network is the property of the Charter Township of Clinton ("Township") and is to be used for legitimate business purposes. Employees are provided access to the computer network to assist them in the performance of their jobs. Additionally, employees ("Users") may also be provided with access to the Internet through the computer network. All Users have a responsibility to use the Township's computer resources and the Internet in a professional, lawful and ethical manner. Abuse of the computer network or the Internet, may result in disciplinary action, including possible termination, and civil and/or criminal liability. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #902 PAGE 2 OF 4

Computer Network Use Limitations

Prohibited Activities: Without prior written permission from the Township, the Township's computer network may not be used to disseminate, view or store commercial or personal advertisements, solicitations, promotions, destructive code (e.g., viruses, trojan horse programs, etc.) or any other unauthorized materials. Occasional limited appropriate personal use of the computer is permitted if such use does not --a) interfere with the user's or any other employee's job performance; b) have an undue effect on the computer or Township network's performance; or c) violate any other policies, provisions, guidelines or standards of this agreement or any other of the Township. Further, at all times users are responsible for the professional, ethical and lawful use of the computer system. Personal use of the computer must adhere to this policy and is a privilege that may be revoked at any time.

Illegal Copying: Users may not illegally copy material protected under copyright law or make that material available to others for copying. You are responsible for complying with copyright law and applicable licenses that may apply to software, files, graphics, documents, messages, and other material you wish to download or copy. You may not agree to a license or download any material for which a registration fee is charged without first obtaining the express written permission of the Township.

Communication of Sensitive Information: Unless expressly authorized to do so, User is prohibited from sending, transmitting, or otherwise distributing proprietary information, data, trade secrets or other confidential information belonging to the Township. Unauthorized dissemination of such material may result in severe disciplinary action as well as substantial civil and criminal penalties under state and federal Economic Espionage laws.

Duty Not to Waste or Damage Computer Resources Accessing the Internet: To ensure security and avoid the spread of viruses, Users accessing the Internet through a computer attached to the Township's network must do so through an approved Internet firewall or other security device. Bypassing Township's computer network security by accessing the Internet directly by modem or other means is strictly prohibited. Exceptions to this policy (i.e.: offsite laptop usage) must be evaluated and approved by the Township Information Technology department. Computer Hardware and Software: All PC, terminal, server, network, and computer systems are managed by the Township Information Technology department ("IT") including appropriate software licensing and compatibility management. No software should be loaded onto any Township equipment without IT department approval. PCs will be audited on a periodic basis and non-compliant software will be removed. Purchase of information system devices including the aforementioned devices, software, and any associated

Computer Network and Internet Access Policy, v.2 May 2005 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #902 PAGE 3 OF 4

peripherals should have IT department approval regardless of the source of funding to ensure compatibility and compliance. Hardware and software purchases should comply with IT department standards. Exceptions to these standards should have business-case justification and must be approved by the IT department for support. Existing hardware/software is considered "grandfathered" for support purposes; however, no expansions or upgrades shall be permitted. Frivolous Use: Computer resources are not unlimited. Network bandwidth and storage capacity have finite limits, and all Users connected to the network have a responsibility to conserve these resources. As such, the User must not deliberately perform acts that waste computer resources or unfairly monopolize resources to the exclusion of others. These acts include, but are not limited to, sending mass mailings or chain letters, spending excessive amounts of time on the Internet, playing games, engaging in online chat groups, uploading or downloading large files, accessing streaming audio and/or video files, or otherwise creating unnecessary loads on network traffic associated with non- business-related uses of the Internet. '

Virus detection: Files obtained from sources outside the Township, including disks brought from home, files downloaded from the Internet, newsgroups, bulletin boards, or other online services; files attached to e-mail, and files provided by customers or vendors, may contain dangerous computer viruses that may damage the Township's computer network. Users should never download files from the Internet, accept e-mail attachments from outsiders, or use disks from non-Township sources, without first scanning the material with Township-approved virus checking software. E-mail attachments should never be opened without verification of their validity. If you suspect that a virus has been introduced into the Township's network, notify the Township Information Technology Department immediately.

No Expectation of Privacy Employees are given computers and Internet access to assist them in the performance of their jobs. Employees should have no expectation of privacy in anything they create, store, send or receive using the Township's computer equipment. The computer network is the property of the Township and may be used only for Township purposes.

Waiver of privacy rights: User expressly waives any right of privacy in anything they create, store, send or receive using the Township's computer equipment or Internet access. User consents to allow Township personnel access to and review of all materials created, stored, sent or received by User through any Township network or Internet connection. All data stored on Township equipment remains the property of the Township.

Computer Network and Internet Access Policy, v.2 May 2005 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE #902 PAGE 4 OF 4

Monitoring of computer and Internet usage: The Township has the right to monitor and log any and all aspects of its Computer system including, but not limited to, monitoring Internet sites visited by Users, monitoring chat and newsgroups, monitoring file downloads, and all communications sent and received by users, including but not limited to electronic mail and live chat sessions. Blocking sites with inappropriate content: The Township has the right to utilize software that makes it possible to identify and block access to Internet sites containing material deemed inappropriate in the workplace. This includes content of a sexually explicit, graphically violent, or otherwise offensive nature, or any other content deemed inappropriate by

Computer Network and Internet Access Policy, v.2 May 2005 CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE # 903 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

The Charter Township of Clinton issued a Drug-Free Workplace Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy: CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

DRUG-FREE WORK PLACE POLICY

This policy is provided pursuant to the Drug-Free Work Place Act of 1988 (Pub. L. 100- 690, title V, subtitle D). The Township has realized' and recognized that substance abuse is a problem. The abuse of alcohol and use of illegal drugs endangers the health and safety of the abuser and all of the others around them. We commit the Township to a drug-free work place and our policy shall now formally state that substance abuse will not be tolerated during working hours or on the premises of the Township, including the parking lots, except for those persons who are authorized to use the same during working hours such as certain police personnel. This prohibition includes the possession, use or sale of illegal drugs or alcohol. Drugs shall mean any controlled substance as defined by the Controlled Substance Act, 21 U.S.C. Section 812, and as further defined by regulations. The use of a drug or prescription medicine without such prescription may constitute drug abuse. Information will be available on a confidential basis with respect to employee assistance programs, upon the request of any employee, in accordance with the contracts executed by the Township. As a condition of continued work in the Township, all employees shall: (1) Abide by the terms of this policy; and (2) Notify the Township of any alcohol or drug statue conviction no later than five (5) days after such conviction occurring in the work place.

Sanctions If the criminal drug statue violation occurred in the employee's work place, a sanction will be imposed on the employee so convicted within thirty (30) days after receiving notice of the conviction: (a) The Township will take appropriate disciplinary action against such employee, up to and including termination; or (b) The Township will require such employee to satisfactorily participate in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program, approved for such purpose by a federal, state or local health, law enforcement or other appropriate agency. This policy supplements any department rules and regulations presently in effect and does not replace the same. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: WORKPLACE VIOLENCE # 904 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

On September 20, 1999, the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Workplace Violence Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

WORKPLACE VIOLENCE POLICY

The Charter Township of Clinton has adopted this Zero Tolerance Policy for workplace violence because it recognizes that workplace violence is a growing problem nationally that needs to be addressed by all employers. Consistent with this policy, acts or threats of physical violence, including intimidation, and/or coercion which involve or affect the Charter Township of Clinton, it's employees, or which occur on Township property will not be tolerated. The purpose of this policy is to provide a safe workplace free from aggressive, threatening or violent acts through the development and implementation of an effective program that provides a safe workplace. Definition of Violence and Prohibition of Violence For the purposes of this policy, violence is defined as the deliberate and wrongful violation, damage, or abuse of other persons, self or property and includes threats of violence. acts of violence including but not limited to: verbal (such as threats, harassment, abuse, and intimidation), non-verbal (such as gestures and intimidation), physical (such as hitting, pushing, shoving, kicking, touching, and battery), and other (such as arson, sabotage, vandalism, electronic or written threats, and stalking). It is important that all threats be taken seriously. All violence as described above is prohibited by this policy Firearms While certain employees of the Township may be required as a condition of their work assignment to possess firearms, weapons or other dangerous devices, or permitted to carry them as authorized by law, it is the Township's policy that employees are to use them only in accordance with departmental operating procedures and all applicable State, Local, and Federal laws. Violations Violations of this policy by any individual on Township property, by any individual acting as a representative of the Township while not on Township property, or by any individual acting off of Township property when his/her actions affect the legitimate STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #904 Page 2 of 2 interests of the Township will be followed by legal action as deemed appropriate. Violation by an employee of any provision of this policy shall lead to disciplinary action up to and including termination. Complaint Procedure Each employee shall immediately report incident of threats or acts of physical violence of which he/she is aware so that preventative or corrective action may be taken by the Township. The report should be made to the employee's immediate supervisor, a management level supervisory employee if the immediate supervisor is not available, or the Human Resources Department. The immediate supervisor shall report all incidents to the Human Resources Director. The supervisory employee and/or the Human Resources Department shall conduct an investigation of the incident and take appropriate action with the resolution reported to the employee. All employees of the Township will be given copies of this policy. Adopted by Township Board of Trustees - September 20, 1999

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: WORKPLACE SMOKING # 905 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

On July 31, 2006 (revision), the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Workplace Smoking Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

WORKPLACE SMOKING POLICY

Statement of Policy In the interest of providing a safe and healthy environment for employees, customers, and visitors, and in accordance with the Michigan Clean Indoor Air Act, the following policy has been adopted. Effective February 13, 2006, smoking is prohibited in all buildings and vehicles owned and operated by the Charter Township of Clinton.

Notice of Policy Copies of this policy are to be distributed to all employees. Prominent signs displaying the following statement are to be posted at all building entrances: Smoking is prohibited in this building pursuant to the Michigan Clean Indoor Air Act.

Enforcement of Policy

Complaints Persons observing a violation of this policy should bring it to the attention of their Department Head. If unresolved, further complaints shall be directed to the Human Resources Director.

Investigations The Department Head or Human Resources Director shall investigate and take action to resolve the issue as soon as possible.

Violators Persons found to have violated this policy will be subject to disciplinary action.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: FAMILY & MEDICAL LEAVE # 906 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 OF 3

In January, 1994 (reissued), the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Family and Medical Leave Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

FAMILY AND MEDICAL LEAVE POLICY

Introduction: In February, 1993 the Federal Government adopted the Family and Medical. Leave Act of 1993. The Township has adopted this policy to ensure compliance with the Act and to ensure that its employee's understand their rights and responsibilities there under. Policy Effective Date This policy is effective on August 5, 1993 for employees who are not covered by a collective bargaining agreement. For employees who are covered by a collective bargaining agreement, the effective date of this policy will be February 5, 1994. Eligible Employees Employees of the Township are eligible for the benefits described in this policy, provided that they have been employed by the Township for a minimum of twelve (12) months and .they have performed at least 1,250 hours of service for the Township during the twelve (12) month period immediately .preceding the effective date of the leave. Leave Entitlement A. Eligible employees are entitled to a total of twelve (12) weeks of unpaid leave, continuous or intermittent, during any. twelve (12).month period when leave is taken for one or more of the following circumstances:

• The birth of a son or daughter and to care for the child.

• The placement of a child with an employee for adoption or foster care.

• To care for the spouse, son, daughter, or parents of an employee, if the family member has a serious health condition.

• An employee is unable to perform the function of the position because of his or her own serious health condition.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #906 Page 2 of 3

B. Serious health conditions means an illness, injury, impairment or physical or mental condition that involves either:

1) Inpatient care in a hospital, hospice, or residential medical care facility, or

2) Continuing treatment by a health care provider. C. Leave to care for a family member includes both physical and psychological care. An eligible employee's right to take leave is not limited by the availability 'of another family member. A father may take leave during his wife's childbirth and recovery, even if his wife is herself an eligible employee who is also on leave. However, if both spouses are working for the Township, their total leave in any twelve (12) month period will be limited to twelve (12) weeks if .the leave is taken:

1) For the birth or adoption of a child, or

2) To care for sick parents. D. Intermittent or reduced schedule leave can be taken in cases of a serious health condition, either an employee's own or that of a family member, when medically necessary. Leave taken for the birth or placement of a son or daughter cannot be taken intermittently or on a reduced leave schedule. Notice of Intent to Take Leave Employees must give at least thirty (30) days notice of their intent to take leave for foreseeable events, such as the expected birth or placement of a son or daughter or planned medical treatments. Employees who request leave for planned medical treatments must make a reasonable effort to schedule treatment so as not to unduly disrupt the Township's operations. Paid Leave Time Benefits A. The Township may require an employee who takes leave to adopt or place a child in foster care or to care for family member with a serious health condition to substitute their accrued paid vacation or personal leave for any part of the twelve (12) weeks of leave. B. An employee, upon his or her request, who takes leave for any reason described in this policy, will be allowed to substitute their accrued vacation or personal leave for any part of the twelve (12) weeks of leave. C. The payment of sick leave and/or short term leave will not be affected by this policy. If an employee takes leave because of his or her own serious health problem, as provided for in this policy, he or she will be eligible for sick leave or other income replacement benefits as long as he or she qualifies for such benefits under the provisions of the benefit plan rules and/or the applicable labor agreements. Maintenance of Health Benefits Eligible employees will continue to receive hospital/medical, dental, optical and prescription drug insurance benefits for themselves and their eligible dependents during STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #906 Page 3 of 3 the period of the leave provided in this policy. The benefit level shall be identical to that which the employees would have received had they remained active employees. Employment Protection Eligible employees returning from family and medical leave as provided in this policy will have the right to be returned to the job position that they held when they went on leave, or they may be placed in an equivalent position with equivalent benefits, pay, and other terms and conditions of employment. The Township may choose not to apply this guarantee to salaried employees whose compensation is in the highest paid ten percent of Township employees, provided that: • Denial of re-employment rights as necessary to prevent substantial and grievous economic injury to the "Township; • They have been notified, at the time the Township determines injury would occur, that the Township intends to deny restoration; and • In the case of an employee already on leave, the employee elects not to return to work after being notified of the Township's decision. • Reissued January 1994 CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: TRAVEL & EXPENSES # 907 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 6

On August 28 2006 (revision), the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Travel and Expenses Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

TRAVEL AND EXPENSE REIMBURSEMENT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

Scope This Travel and Expense Reimbursement Policies and Procedures document applies to all full and part-time employees, appointed members of Township boards and Commissions and elected officials of the Charter Township of Clinton.

Purpose This document states policy and establishes procedures for employees incurring business expenses on the Township’s behalf. This document seeks to ensure employees have a clear and consistent understanding of procedures for business travel and business expense reimbursement.

Responsibilities • The Township Board is responsible for establishing this Policy. • Department Heads and approvers are responsible for enforcing this Policy. • Employees are responsible for reading and understanding this Policy, and using the approved Township Expense Reimbursement Form. • The Township is responsible for reimbursing employees for all reasonable and necessary expenses while conducting authorized Township business. • The Township assumes no obligation to reimburse employees for expenses that are not in compliance with this Policy. Employees incurring business expenses on the Township’s behalf must meet the terms specified in this Policy and provide accurate and complete records of all expenses for which they seek personal reimbursement. Ethical business conduct dictates that employees never misrepresent facts or falsify records and avoid even the appearance of a conflict of interest. Employees who are not in compliance with the Policy are responsible for the cost incurred and subject to disciplinary action up to termination. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #907 Page 2 of 6

Thus it is imperative that all Township employees fully understand the Travel & Expense Policies and Procedures before incurring expenses that may require payment. To that end, all employees will be given a copy of the Travel & Expense Policy and required to review and sign an acknowledgement that they have read and understand the policy. The signed acknowledgement will be kept as part of the employees personnel file with Human Resources.

TRAVEL & LODGING

Overnight Attendance at Conferences/Seminars Employees must complete the Authorization to Attend Conference request form and attach a copy of the detailed conference schedule. These documents are to be submitted to the Finance Director or their designee for verification of a budgeted department item. The form will then be forwarded to the Township Supervisor for approval, followed by the remaining full-time elected officials. Employees must obtain approval from the majority of the full-time elected officials prior to any overnight travel. Use of Township funds for out-of-state, overnight travel to conferences and seminars is prohibited unless pre-authorized by the Township Board of Trustees. Participation in conferences that require travel or attendance outside of the normal work hours is a personal choice. Employees will not receive overtime or be given compensatory time for such participation.

Lodging Employees traveling on behalf of the Township are entitled to a standard-sized, single room. Employees are neither expected nor required to share rooms. Room charges are to be billed to the Township Purchasing Card. Housekeeping tips, in-room movies, snacks and room service are not approved expenses. Employees are not encouraged to stay as guests at the home of relatives, friends or acquaintances. In the event an employee decides to accept an invitation, they will not be reimbursed for any type of compensation (payment, gifts, meals and/or other forms of entertainment) provided to the host. Employees traveling on behalf of the Township should be aware of the hotel cancellation policy to avoid “No Show” charges. Employees must cancel their own hotel reservations when travel plans are changed. No-show charges will be the responsibility of the employee unless authorized by a majority of the full-time elected officials. Employees should request and record the cancellation number in case of billing disputes.

PERSONAL CAR USAGE Employees will be reimbursed for Township usage of personal cars at a fixed rate set by the Internal Revenue Service (Finance Director issues an annual memo informing departments of current rate). This rate is designed to approximate expenses for gasoline, oil, personal insurance and normal wear and tear. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #907 Page 3 of 6

To be reimbursed for use of a personal car for business, employees must follow IRS standards by providing the date, specific purpose, starting address and destination address, and number of miles for each leg of their travel during the business day.

• Reimbursement does not include mileage to/from the customary work site.

• If an employee is required to travel to a location other than their customary work site, mileage is reimbursable when the distance from home to the alternate work site is greater than the distance from home to the customary work site. Reimbursement is made for the excess between alternate travel miles over customary travel miles. Expenses for items such as parking fees must be reported separately on the expense form. By law, tickets and fines are the employee’s responsibility.

BUSINESS PHONE USAGE • The Township has provided cell phones to those employees whose work routinely requires them to make business calls while away from their customary work site. • Employees will be responsible for all personal calls made when staying at a hotel and added on to the room charges.

MEALS Meal expenses are reimbursable when an employee is required to stay overnight due to Township business. Employees are expected to use discretion in dining and will be reimbursed for reasonable meal expenses according to the actual cost up to $20 for a meal with a daily maximum limit (including taxes and gratuities) of $40. This limit is not a per diem rate (meaning a flat fixed daily rate for meals). Tips included on meal receipts may be reimbursed. As a general rule, employees should tip based on the level of service provided and should not exceed 20%. The Township will not reimburse for meal expenses in the following instances: • Meals charged in lieu of those provided by the conference fee. • The cost of alcoholic beverages or entertainment charges. • Meal expenses lacking an itemized receipt from the dining establishment. • Meals incurred by a spouse or other individual accompanying an employee on business. All overnight travel expenses, with the exception of mileage, are to be billed to the employee’s township purchasing card. The following documentation for travel expenses should be submitted with the employee’s purchasing card bill: 1) the Travel & Expense Pre-Authorization Form, 2) conference documentation, 3) hotel bill, and 4) itemized receipts for all other expenses.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #907 Page 4 of 6

DAY MEETINGS

Professional Association Luncheon Meetings Networking with others in one’s field is recognized as a potentially valuable tool. Employees may be granted permission to attend such meetings during the work day by their Department Head. Fees associated with meetings that provide educational updates for employees in their line of work qualify for reimbursement. Requests for reimbursement for educational meetings must provide supporting documentation (e.g., flyer sent by association) identifying the speaker, topic and cost of meeting. Lunch fees associated with attendance at meetings that are predominantly social in nature and/or include only a short association business meeting are not reimbursable. Lunch is considered a normal daily expense for all employees. Township employees are given paid time away from the office for such meetings, and reimbursed for personal mileage, when applicable, to attend their association meetings if they choose.

One Day Seminar/Training Prior-approval must be given by Department Heads for attendance at seminars that are work related and held during the normal work day. Seminar registration fees are reimbursable and should be charged to the Township Purchasing Card whenever possible. Requests for reimbursement must provide documentation regarding the educational session(s) and proof of payment. Unless included in the seminar fee, employees are responsible for their own lunch expenses, as they would be on a normal work day.

EDUCATIONAL EXPENSES The Township shall reimburse employees for tuition and required books for coursework related to his/her work in the Township in accordance with Township policy and union contracts. Requests for reimbursement must include: 1. Proof of registration and payment made to the educational institution by the employee. 2. Documentation that verifies the course(s) taken, credit hours and a breakdown of fees for which the employee is seeking reimbursement. 3. Itemized book costs and documentation of the courses to which they relate. The Township has arranged for all tuition at Macomb Community College subject to the Township’s tuition reimbursement plan to be billed at the resident rate. Non-resident employees must present a letter from the Finance Director stating that they are an employee of the Township and register in-person in order to avoid paying the non- resident rate. All books paid for by the Township are the property of the Township and shall be made available to fellow employees for reference for a period of time to be determined by the department head.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #907 Page 5 of 6

Receipt Requirements for all types of reimbursement Employees must submit the original itemized receipt for all expenses for which they seek reimbursement. Unacceptable Receipts:

• Restaurant tear tabs

• Receipts which have been modified

• Handwritten receipts

• Receipts indicating only the total amount and lacking detail

TRAVEL & EXPENSE REIMBURSEMENT REPORTING An employee who incurs expenses (including travel) on the Township’s behalf, and the employee who approves those expenses, must be certain that the expenses meet the terms specified in this policy and ethical business conduct.

Time Lines Employees must submit personal expense reports within 30 days of the date on which the expense was incurred. Exception: Employees must submit an expense report for any overnight conference attended, and all required documentation, within five (5) business days of their return to work. Employees who fail to submit an expense report within the time frames stated in this policy will be denied reimbursement. Expenses for a previous fiscal year must be filed no later than April 30 of the following fiscal year.

Avoidance of All Potential Conflicts of Interest Employees may not approve an expense report that they have prepared and submitted (either for themselves or another). In this case, the employee should route the expense report to the next level within the supervisory chain. An expense report may not be approved by anyone who participated in the same event.

Approval/Authorization Process A department head or their assigned designee must approve all personal expense reports within a department. Approvers are responsible for verifying that an expense report is in compliance with this policy and that required documentation has been provided prior to approving the report and forwarding the request to the Finance Department. Expense reports may be selected for audit. Audits will confirm township purpose of expense, supporting documentation (receipts) and policy compliance (and union contract compliance when applicable). It is the responsibility of the approving department head to deny any incorrect or incomplete expense report and return it to the employee for corrective action and re- STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #907 Page 6 of 6

submission. Proper receipts must be provided for all expenditures and are to be reviewed prior to an expense report being approved. Errors found as a result of audit will necessitate the reimbursement request to be returned to the approving department head for corrective measures to be taken. Reimbursable amounts will be paid in the next regular warrant cycle following the approval and submission of such by a department head. Early releases will not be granted due to delays caused by errors in submission. Ongoing errors or incomplete expense reports being submitted or approved, disregard for Township Policy, or altering of receipts will result in disciplinary action up to and including termination.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: PETTY CASH REIMBURSEMENT # 908 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 OF 1

On August 3, 2004, the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Petty Cash Reimbursement Procedure, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce it:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

PETTY CASH POLICY

Per auditor's request, the following are new petty cash reimbursement guidelines: 1. A petty cash voucher must be used. (Sample enclosed.) Each one must include account numbers and department head approval. 2. No sales tax is to be reimbursed for any reason. We are a tax-exempt entity—no exceptions!!!!!! 3. Money will only be disbursed on a reimbursement basis when approved bill is turned in. No advance monies will be given out. 4. Large amounts that would deplete the account should be submitted on the normal check run for processing.

PETTY CASH No.

Date: Amount: $

For:

Charge to Account:

Approved by Received by

Printed in U.S.A.

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: TOWNSHIP CELL PHONES # 909 EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2006 Number of Pages: 1 of 2

On May 9, 2005, the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Cell Phone Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to recognize and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON, MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

CELL PHONE POLICY

Purpose: The purpose of this policy is to provide a set of guidelines governing the use of Township owned cellular telephones by Township employees.

Oversight Responsibility: Departments shall be responsible for oversight of employee cell phone usage and shall monitor and review such usage on a monthly basis to ensure that use is appropriate and that prudent fiscal management guidelines are followed. Department heads shall be responsible for enforcing this policy and taking corrective action where there is a violation of the policy.

Type of Phone: The make and model of phones furnished for employee use shall be as determined by the Board of Trustees. An employee who wishes to upgrade the phone shall do so only with the approval of the IT Director and at their own expense. In no event shall a camera phone be purchased as part of the Township plan.

Ownership of Phone: The phones shall be the property of the Township. The theft or loss of a phone must be reported to the IT Department within twenty-four hours of the event. Upon cessation of employment with the Township, the employee must return the phone to the Township.

Phone Usage: The phone is provided to the employee because of business need and as such it is reserved primarily for official Township business. Personal use of the phone is allowed. However, employees should show discretion in their personal use and this privilege should not be abused.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #909 Page 2 of 2

Damaged or Lost Phone In the first instance of phone loss or damage, the Township will pay for the cost of replacement/repair. Should there be any subsequent loss or damage to the phone DUE TO NEGLIGENCE OF THE EMPLOYEE, THEN the employee shall be responsible for the cost.

Information Calls If an employee makes more than three calls to information in a calendar month, they shall reimburse the Township for the excess calls.

Prohibited Usage of Phone An employee may not use a cell phone to make fraudulent, unlawful, or abusive calls.

Modifications to the Policy The Township's Internet Technology Steering Committee will review the experience with cell phones in March, 2005. If necessary, modifications will be made to the policy and submitted to the Board of Trustees for adoption. The Township reserves the right to modify or discontinue this policy at any time. Amendment Submitted to the Board of Trustees May 9, 2005

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: PREGANCY & SHORT TERM #910 DISABILITY LEAVE EFFECTIVE DATE: April 1, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 OF 2

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

PREGNANCY AND SHORT-TERM DISABILITY LEAVE POLICY

PURPOSE:

This policy has been developed in the interest of providing consistency when a police officer or firefighter becomes pregnant and requires leave. If there is a conflict between this policy and provisions of a collective bargaining agreement, the collective bargaining agreement shall take precedence.

POLICY:

1. An officer or firefighter restricted to “no work” status by a treating physician as the result of a pregnancy shall qualify for short-term disability benefits after a thirty (30) day waiting period.

2. For the purpose of the thirty (30) day waiting period for short-term benefits, light duty work days shall be considered the equivalent to sick, vacation and personal days.

3. Short-term disability is automatically authorized for six (6) weeks after natural child birth and for eight (8) weeks after a caesarian section delivery.

4. Family Medical Leave Act (FMLA) leave shall be granted in accordance with Township policy. A pregnant officer or firefighter is entitled to a total of twelve (12) weeks of FMLA leave. FMLA leave begins when the employee qualifies for short-term disability benefits.

5. If additional FMLA time is available at the conclusion of post-delivery short-term disability, the employee may use additional paid time off (i.e. accrued sick, vacation or compensatory days) or may choose to take the remaining time unpaid.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #910 Page 2 of 2

6. If an employee completes twelve (12) weeks of FMLA leave and wishes to have more time off, she may request an additional leave of absence under the terms and conditions of the applicable collective bargaining agreement.

7. Seniority, sick leave and vacation time will continue to accrue for employees during light duty and short-term disability. Seniority, sick leave and vacation time will not accrue for an employee using unpaid FMLA leave. CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: PURCHASING # 912 EFFECTIVE DATE: June 10, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 OF 9

On December, 2004 / September, 2007 (revision), the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Purchasing Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to adopt and enforce this policy:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

PURCHASING AND BID POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

Scope These Purchasing Policies and Procedures apply to all employees, appointed members of Township Boards and Commissions and elected officials of the Charter Township of Clinton.

Purpose Cost containment and effective use of all Township resources is a top priority for the Township. This document states Township policy regarding procurement of supplies or services and establishes procedures to support an audit trail that is imperative for good internal controls. In addition, it outlines ethical standards for the conduct of both employees and vendors who seek to do business with the Township.

Responsibilities • The Township Board is responsible for establishing this Policy • Department Heads and authorized approvers are responsible for understanding and applying this Policy • The Township is responsible for reimbursing vendors for necessary expenses in a reasonable amount of time. • The Township assumes no obligation to reimburse vendors for expenses that are not in compliance with this Policy. Employees who do not comply with this Policy are subject to disciplinary action, thus it is imperative that all Township employees authorized to make purchases on behalf of the Township fully understand the Purchasing Policies and Procedures before incurring expenses that may require payment.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 2 of 2

Definitions Contract is deemed any type of agreement, regardless of title for the procurement of supplies, services or construction (e.g. purchase orders and contract forms). Department Head as referred to in this document are those individuals who have budget responsibility and generally include the following: Supervisor, Treasurer, Clerk, Administrative Aide, Finance Director, Human Resources Director, Information Technology Director, Cable Director, Senior Citizens Director, Assessor, Building Director, Civil Service Director, DPW Director, Engineer, Fire Chief, Police Chief, Planning Director, Recreation Director, Water & Sewer Director, and Elections Coordinator. Originator refers to an employee who initiates a requisition for payment. Lawful Expenditures To safeguard against improprieties and to ensure that the township is operating lawfully and properly, all expenditures must serve a valid public purpose and be authorized – either expressly or fairly implied – by law.

Litmus Test for determining the legality of a government expenditure:

1. The expenditure is authorized by statute.

2. The expenditure is provided for in the General Appropriation Act (approved budget) of the Township.

3. The Township receives something of specific value in return for an expenditure that achieves a public policy or benefits the entire township. (Article IX, S18 of MI Constitution)

Common expenditures with special statutory provisions

• Newsletter to disseminate factual, unbiased information regarding township improvements, activities and functions. (MCL 41.110c)

• Observances, under the control of the Township, to celebrate armistice, independence, memorial days, diamond jubilee or centennials.

• Membership dues to governmental associations that advise, inform and educate officials and employees.

• Meals and refreshments deemed a public purpose. . .

1. When working extended hours for emergency services by firefighters, police officers, and other emergency related employees;

2. When dedicating public buildings;

3. As part of the cost of training volunteers to perform emergency services within the township; or

4. When part of authorized seminar of an educational nature to officials and employees. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 3 of 3

• Registration fees, lodging, travel for attendance at useful public informational or educational workshops and seminars.

Unlawful expenditures by a governmental unit

• Office Refreshments (coffee, donuts, sandwiches) during normal working hours is considered personal and improper.

• Retirement functions and recognition dinners for employees or officials

• Office picnics

• Flowers to the sick or departed

• Mileage to/from residence to the township customary work site or meeting rooms

Selection of Vendors In doing business with private vendors employees should follow two basic principles underlying the Township’s policy: 1. Contracts are to be awarded by a competitive process whenever possible. Open competition ensures that all qualified vendors have the opportunity to sell to the public sector. 2. Contracts are to be awarded only to vendors proven to be responsible, as measured by such things as: a. Adequate financial resources to carry out the contract commitments b. Ability to comply with delivery requirements c. Satisfactory record of performance d. Satisfactory record of integrity e. Ability to secure adequate bonding and insurance if appropriate to the contract f. Being otherwise qualified and eligible.

Township Contracts with Private Business

Manufactured Goods This includes any item used in the normal operations of the Township by one or more departments. The purchase of these items is handled in accordance with the vendor of choice negotiations for that fiscal year, if applicable, and by individual departments unless otherwise noted.

• Office & operating supplies

• Furniture

• Printed Materials

• Paper Products STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 4 of 4

• Copiers, Facsimile Machines, Telephone Systems, Computers (IT Dept.)

• Vehicles

• Capital Equipment

• Medical Supplies & Equipment

• Law Enforcement Products

• Recreational equipment

• Refreshments for programs of a public nature/benefit

Contracts for Services

• Recreational Facilities/Equipment

• Design and Construction of Capital Projects (Architectural, Engineering, Construction Management or General Contractor Services)

• Personal Service (maintenance, automobile service, etc.)

Fluctuating Commodities

• Gasoline or diesel fuel (Sterling Heights consortium)

• Utilities, internet, phone and cable services

Procurement Expectations Departments initiating purchases are responsible for providing full and open competition. In addition, these departments are responsible for maintaining the significant history of the procurement process, including the rational for the method of procurement, selection of contract type, contractor selection or rejection, and the basis of the contractor price.

Research of Competitive Prices for purchases of $0 - $499.99 All departments are expected to make use of the internet, catalogs, sale papers and/or telephone query to ensure good value in their procurement of services or supplies. Employee work time is valuable and should not be used “to drive around” in search of the best deal. Shipping & delivery are to be a part of all quotes. Department Head approval, or their designee, is required for all purchases.

Competitive Quotes for purchases of $500 to $7499.99 Three quotations are to be secured by the department seeking service or supplies. The award can be made after the evaluation of the quotes without approval of the Township Board only if there are available dollars in the approved budget. Quotes must be documented and maintained for 3 years in the department initiating the purchase.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 5 of 5

Sealed Bids for all contracts for which the Township Board anticipates a total obligation of $7,500 or more. A minimum of three sealed bids are secured through formal quotations subject to the requirements in the Township Resolution Establishing Competitive Bidding Policy (January 24, 1994). Bids shall be opened in public at the time and place stated in the public notice. Where less than three bids are received, a written explanation by the Department Head shall be furnished to the Township Board. The Township Board has sole authority to accept or reject any and all bids. Bid documents should be forwarded to the Clerk’s Office and a duplicate copy should be maintained for 3 years in the department initiating the purchase.

Exceptions to the Competitive Bidding Requirement 1. Intergovernmental contracts. 2. Contracts for professional services. 3. Emergency purchases of supplies or services when a threat to public health, welfare or safety exists. In each instance as much competition as is practical under the circumstances shall be factored into the decision. Written documentation specifying the nature of the emergency must be included in the contract file and approved on a retrospective basis. 4. Change orders, additions or extensions to existing contracts where the Township Board determines that such action is reasonably necessary to meet the principal objectives of the original contract to be performed. 5. Renewals of insurance contracts or other contracts where the Board makes one or more of the following determinations: a. Renewal will assure that goods or services will be made available which otherwise may be unavailable at a reasonable cost as the result of absence of a long-standing contractual relationship. b. Renewal will provide a long-term cost savings or long-term cost savings and additional services which otherwise are unavailable through competitive bidding. c. Renewal will provide goods or services at a reasonable cost and avoid inconvenience and cost associated with changes in equipment, fixtures, or procedures resulting in costs associated with replacement, installation, training and other related changeover costs. (E.g., computer software) 6. Contracts with utilities including but not limited to telephone service. 7. Contracts involving unique items, such as a particularized item of used equipment or demonstration item where no reasonable market exists for procuring additional quotes for substantially similar items.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 6 of 6

Cooperative Purchasing & Bulk Mail When possible, purchasing items included within cooperatively bid State, County and local contracts are encouraged. These bid procedures should reflect the Township’s procurement policies and procedures, including acquiring and maintaining evidence that an appropriate bid process was used and that the prices obtained do in fact tie back to the competitively bid contract. This evidence must be maintained for 3 years in the department initiating the purchase. The practice of merely having vendors indicate that the price is “contract pricing” is insufficient. The United States Postal Service Bulk Mail options should be utilized whenever possible. The Township has permits for First-Class Presorted Mail, Standard Mail, and Business Reply Mail (postage-paid return).

Payment Policy The Township will seek to make payment within thirty (30) days under normal circumstances and barring any provisions to the contrary in the contract. Vendor invoices should indicate purchase orders when applicable and must be authorized by the appropriate department head, with final approval being given by the Board of Trustees for all bills. Early check releases are allowed on recurring bills payments (e.g. utilities, insurance & communications plans) to avoid late payment charges and in other limited circumstances when a written request by the originating department is made, stating the reason for early release. A request for early release must be approved by both the Finance Director and Treasurer, or their designees.

Ethical Conduct Any attempt to realize personal gain through public procurement by conduct inconsistent with the proper discharge of the employee’s duty is a breach of public trust. Any effort by a vendor to influence any public employee or unethical conduct is also a breach of ethical standards. It shall also be a breach of ethical standards for any individual, including an elected or appointed official, drawing a salary or wage from the Township, to become or be an employee or to have a financial interest in any entity contracting with the governmental body. Financial interest is defined as ownership of any interest or involvement in any relationship from which, or as a result of which, a person within the past year has received or is presently or in the future entitled to receive, more than $100.00 per year, or its equivalent; ownership of 5% or more of any property or business; or holding a position in a business such as officer, director, trustee, partner, employee, or the like, or holding any position of management. Any potential conflict must be disclosed to the Township Board of Trustees. The Board of Trustees may allow for an exception to this rule by a majority vote.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 7 of 7

Accounting Procedures

Requisitions Under almost all circumstances, a requisition must be created within the MUNIS financial system to initiate a purchase. It is the responsibility of the originator of the requisition to ensure that all appropriate information is forwarded and accurate. Once the requisition has been entered it will be forwarded electronically to an authorized approver within the department. Each required approver, beginning with the lowest level of approval to the highest, will be alerted by the MUNIS program that a requisition is awaiting approval. Approval of a requisition is completed on-line in the MUNIS program by an authorized individual within the department. The following items do not require purchase requisition and order, but must include appropriate back-up documentation showing proof of service or payment/overpayment:

a. Refunds (require copy of department’s original receipt of payment)

b. Personal expense reimbursements (according to Travel & Expense Reimbursement Policy)

c. Utility & Phone bills

d. Mandated payments (bonds, leases)

e. Membership dues, Subscriptions

f. Contractual payments

g. Purchasing Card expenditures

Purchase Orders Once a requisition is generated, completed and approved, it will be converted by the originator to a purchase order (PO), then posted and printed out. The purchase order will be used to support payment for goods and services once they are received and/or completed. When the purchase order is posted, an encumbrance is posted to the general ledger account and the remaining budget is reduced by the amount of the purchase order. It is the responsibility of each approver to maintain the status of all purchase orders within the department. A purchase order remains open in MUNIS until such time as an invoice is received and entered for payment. When the original invoice is received, it should be initialed by the department head or their designated approver and forwarded to the Accounting Department with the purchase order attached. If an invoice is received without a purchase order attached (see above exceptions), the invoice will be returned to the department for proper documentation. Once the PO and invoice is received in Accounting, it will be entered for payment and made ready for approval at the next Board meeting. The check will be released or mailed on the next business day following the Board meeting. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 8 of 8

If there are changes to the amount of the purchase order, the correct amount should be written on the purchase order. If the purchase order is being partially paid, this should be noted on the purchase order so that the remaining balance is left open.

Authorized Purchasing Agents of the Township Department Heads are responsible for identifying those individuals who are authorized to make purchases on behalf of the Township, initiate and approve requisitions, generate purchase orders and authorize payment. Department Heads must advise the Accounting Office, in writing (electronic notification is acceptable), of the individuals who have been authorized to act at each step in their process. The Accounting Office shall document and code the department’s process into the MUNIS program, and provide the Treasurer’s Office with a current list of payment approvers for internal auditing purposes. As employees transition into or out of the Township, or take various forms of vacation or leave, changes to the department’s process will need to be implemented. Changes may be temporary in nature, long-term, or permanent. In all instances, departments must notify the Accounting Office in writing (electronic notification is acceptable) of changes in their process at least one week prior to the needed change. Documentation should include the period of time that the change will be in effect. The Accounting Office will make the necessary changes in the MUNIS program and notify the Treasurer’s Office of the change in payment approvers. Failure to request appropriate changes in advance could result in a delay in purchasing goods and paying outstanding invoices.

Storage of purchasing/payment documentation Original invoices, receipts and payment documentation will be filed in the Accounting Office and made available for viewing or copying whenever needed by departments.

Purchases Under $10 Purchases under $10.00 should be made with petty cash or the Township Purchasing Card. Petty cash reimbursements will not require a purchase order but expenditures are to be individually listed on the Township Petty Cash Reporting Form with original itemized receipts attached.

Blanket Orders Blanket purchase orders are used for repetitive items consumed over an annual period and are allowed within the program. No commitment is made other than for goods and/or services ordered. When the blanket purchase order has been completely spent, a new blanket requisition will be required at that time to accommodate additional purchases from that account.

Invoice Submission/Late Fees Department Heads are responsible for the approval and submission of all invoices within 5 days of receipt to ensure adequate turn-around time for payment within thirty STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES # 912 Page 9 of 9

(30) days. Frequent late fees incurred as a result of a Department’s tardy submission of invoices can result in disciplinary action.

Tax Exemption Department Heads are responsible for checking all invoices to ensure that we are not charged sales tax. Copies of the Township tax exempt form are available from the Accounting Department.

Auditing of Invoices All invoices are subject to audit. Audits will confirm lawful Township purpose of expense, supporting documentation (original itemized invoices/receipts), Department Head approval and bidding policy compliance when applicable. It is the responsibility of the approving Department Head to ensure the completeness of all documentation submitted for payment. Receipts must be provided for all expenditures and are to be reviewed prior to an expense report being approved. Errors found as a result of audit will require corrective measures to be taken by the approving Department Head. Ongoing errors/incomplete documentation being submitted by a Department Head, disregard for Township Policy, or altering of receipts will result in disciplinary action up to and including termination.

ANNUAL LIST OF VENDORS OF CHOICE The Township will identify items that are repetitively consumed Township-wide over an annual period and negotiate annually for the best possible pricing available for the collective purchases. All departments, including Police and Fire, will be required to utilize the vendors of choice where identified. Items to be negotiated for a preferred vendor:

a. Office supplies

b. Copy paper, regular envelopes

c. Toilet paper, C-fold paper towels

d. First Aid supplies Note: Only those supplies required for emergency first aid are to be purchased, not convenience items for employees that may in fact carry liability issues when dispensed.

e. Fire Extinguisher annual checks

f. Printing of non-specialized items Examples: business cards, flyers, township stationery & envelopes

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON Section: TOWNSHIP POLICY DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE-EMS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES Subject: PURCHASING CARD # 913 PROGRAM POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE: June 10, 2008 Number of Pages: 1 OF 5

In June 2002, (revision August 2006) the Charter Township of Clinton issued a Purchasing Card Program Policy, for its workforce. It will be the position of this department to adopt and enforce it:

CHARTER TOWNSHIP OF CLINTON MACOMB COUNTY, MICHIGAN

PURCHASING CARD PROGRAM POLICY

Intent The Clinton Township Purchasing Card Program is designed to strengthen controls over purchasing and improve documentation of purchases while streamlining the process. Use of the Purchasing Card is not, however, intended to replace the bid process where that process is appropriate. Cardholders should be aware of and abide by the Township Bid Policy.

Goals The goals in establishing this program include: allowing departments to acquire goods and supplies in a timely manner, increasing vendor satisfaction (less bookkeeping, faster payment, no late fees), reducing departmental time with vendor’s inquiries, reducing the number of vendor checks issued, providing information that might facilitate negotiating discounted prices, and allowing all areas to focus their efforts on higher dollar/exposure items.

Controls Clinton Township’s Purchasing Card program utilizes both internal management controls and a number of management reports designed to ensure the Purchasing Cards are being used in accordance with Clinton Township’s policies and procedures. Management reports made available by MasterCard and the bank are used by the Budget and Finance Department and the Treasurers’ Office to monitor card use for compliance with these policies.

The responsibility for card control ultimately rests with each Purchasing Card user. The policies contained herein are designed to protect both cardholders and the Township. It is considered a privilege to participate in this program and it is expected that these policies will be followed. Violation of any of the terms and conditions of this policy may serve as a basis for disciplinary action. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #913 Page 2 of 5

Personal use of the Clinton Township Master Card Purchasing Card is prohibited. All purchases made using the card must be for official Township business. Misuse of the card may result in immediate revocation of card privileges, disciplinary action up to and including termination, and the possible filing of criminal charges.

The Purchasing Card program is available to all Township departments. Although each Purchasing Card will be an obligation of the Township, each card will be issued with both the Charter Township of Clinton and the employee’s name on the front. Although the card is issued in the name of the employee, the employee’s personal credit history will not be affected by the Purchasing Card.

Department Heads must submit a Purchasing Card Request Form to the Treasurer, indicating the employee(s) they are giving authorization to make purchases on behalf of the Township. The Treasurer’s Office will process the request and contact Department Heads when employee cards are available. Cardholders must have read all applicable Township policies prior to being given their Purchasing Card. They will be required to present a photo ID, and to sign the Township’s Cardholder Agreement, before the Purchasing Card will be issued. Signed agreements will be held by the Township.

Guidelines for Use of the Card

Cardholders are encouraged to use the Purchasing Card for all expenditures that they are authorized to initiate at local merchants, or via the phone or internet. The Township’s Purchasing and Travel policies, as well as Department guidelines and budget limitations must be followed when making charges to the Purchasing Card. Each cardholder is responsible for all charges made to the card and for ensuring that their card is secure and protected at all times.

Each Purchasing Card can be assigned merchant restrictions and limits on the number of transactions allowed in a given period of time and dollar amounts per transaction. Transactions outside the limits of the card will be denied at the point of sale. Charges are not to be split amongst several invoices in an attempt to circumvent the per- transaction limit. Limits on each card will be based on the Department’s spending needs and will be established by the Purchasing Card Administrator in cooperation with the Finance Director and Department Heads. If there is a need to re-evaluate the limits of a current card holder, a Purchasing Card Change Form must be completed by the Department Head and submitted to the Program Administrator. A temporary increase in credit limit for a specific purchase can be established per request by Department Head.

Use of each Purchasing Card is restricted to the cardholder...delegation of the card is not allowed. Because of either the need for additional approvals or mandated reporting requirements, the Township Purchasing Card is not to be used for: • Tuition and books • Clinic or other medical charges • Repair or replacement of an employee’s personal items STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #913 Page 3 of 5

Responsibilities for Reporting Use / Oversight of the Card

Each Cardholder is responsible for:

1. Notifying vendors or merchants that the credit card transaction is exempt from Michigan Sales & Use Tax (IRS Tax ID is imprinted on the Purchasing Card). 2. Obtaining itemized receipts of all expenditures and initialing for documentation.

Cardholders or Designated Department Staff Persons are responsible for:

1. Reviewing all expenditures for accuracy using the Smart Data online feature of MasterCard. 2. Entering detailed expense description and general ledger account numbers in the SDOL Financial Account Summary. 3. Printing out and signing the monthly Expense Report from SDOL for all current charges, two business days following the closing day of each statement period. 4. Submitting the Expense Report and proper receipts to their Department Head for approval.

Department Heads are responsible for:

1. Routinely reviewing all Department expenditures using the Smart Data online feature of MasterCard. 2. Reviewing and approving all credit card statements and documentation. 3. Submitting approved statements to the Finance Department within 7 business days of the closing day of each statement period.

The Finance Department shall be responsible for:

1. Reflecting transactions on the General Ledger. 2. Verifying that all documentation accompanies the statements. 3. Ensuring that activity and account information are noted on the credit card statement for each line of entry. 4. The balance is paid via an electronic payment made to MasterCard on the due date to avoid all finance charges.

The Treasurer is the Administrator of the policy and shall be generally responsible for overseeing compliance with this policy.

Reconciliation The cardholder or designated Department Staff Person should review the charges reflected on each monthly statement for accuracy. Discrepancies may include failure to receive goods, fraud or misuse, altered charges, defective merchandise, incorrect amounts, duplicate charges, credits not processed, etc. Any discrepancies should be pursued immediately with the issuing bank, using the dispute claim form they require. Copies of completed form should be forwarded to the Department Head and to the Finance Department. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #913 Page 4 of 5

Reconcilers will have 24/7 access to charges via the internet.

Cardholders, Reconcilers and Department Heads will be responsible for ensuring that:

• Itemized supporting documentation is provided for each purchase • Each charge has been made within Township policies • Documentation is present for all charges being disputed • Account numbers being charged are accurate.

Persons who fail to comply with reconciliation requirements will find their charge privileges suspended and may be subjected to discipline.

Lost/Stolen cards If a cardholder’s Purchasing Card is lost or stolen, the bank must be immediately contacted by the cardholder at 1-800-xxx-xxxx. The Program Administrator must also be notified by the cardholder by noon on the next business day. Lost cards will be immediately canceled.

Employment Termination Should the cardholder leave the employment of the Township, the cardholder’s Department Head is to submit a Purchasing Card Change Form requesting the account be closed. The Purchasing Card should be retrieved from the employee and cut in half and taped to the Purchasing Card Change Form. These items should be then forwarded by the Department Head to the Program Administrator who will cancel the account. The Township reserves the right to withhold final payroll checks and payout of accrued leave until the card is surrendered.

Who To Call: Bank Customer Service 1-800-375-1747 All communications by Township employees to the bank in connection with lost or stolen cards, fraudulent use of cards or requests for card cancellations must be made by telephone to the bank’s customer service center at 1-800-375-1747. Township employees should use a phone which will create a phone record of contact when at all possible. In all circumstances, employees should document the phone contact specifics relating to lost cards, stolen cards or fraudulent use.

• Account inquiries • Lost or stolen cards • Account assistance • Disputed transactions

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES #913 Page 5 of 5

Purchasing Card Program Administrator Clinton Township Treasurer/ Deputy Treasurer (586) 286-9313 • Establish new Purchasing Card • Purchasing Card changes • Lost or stolen card notification • Cancellation of Purchasing Card

Finance Department (586) 286-9353 • Account allocation questions • Purchasing Card reconciliation • Disputed transactions